JP6658455B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a supply passage serving as a passage for supplying game balls, a firing device for firing game balls supplied from the supply passage, and a passage for collecting game balls fired from the firing device. There is known a gaming machine provided with a collecting passage and a transfer device for transferring game balls from the collecting passage to a supply passage (Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-118869 A

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there was a problem that a game ball could not be extracted.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and has as its object to provide a gaming machine capable of extracting a game ball.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 has a supply passage serving as a passage for supplying game balls, a launching device that launches the game balls supplied from the supply passage, and a launching device that is launched from the launching device. A game machine having a collection passage serving as a passage for collecting game balls, and a transfer device for transferring the game balls from the collection passage to the supply passage, wherein the transfer device receives a plurality of the game balls. A recess is formed on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and a game ball taken in from the recovery passage is supplied to the recess, and a plurality of driving bodies having a rotation axis parallel to the driving body and receiving the game balls. One or a plurality of driven members having a concave portion formed in the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, driving means for applying a driving force to the driving member to rotate the driving member, and receiving the driving member and the driven member in the concave portions. The transport path of the game balls And a guide wall formed between the recesses of the driving body and the recesses of the driven body or a game ball received between the recesses of the driven bodies as a medium. The driven body is transmitted to the driven body, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body, and includes opening / closing means disposed on the guide wall to open and close a transfer passage of the transfer device.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, in the gaming machine according to the first aspect, the driving wall is sandwiched between a side of the guide wall where the game ball taken in from the collection passage is conveyed toward the driving body. The opening / closing means is formed at a position on the opposite side.

  In the gaming machine according to a third aspect, in the gaming machine according to the second aspect, the opening / closing means is formed at a position intersecting a rotation locus of a concave portion of the driving body when viewed in a rotation axis direction of the driving body.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the gaming ball can be extracted.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the gaming ball can be extracted.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, a gaming ball can be extracted.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine along the line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6 (a). 7A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow VIII in FIG. 6. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of arrow IX in FIG. 7. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device. 14A is a front view of the tilting device, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating XIVc− in FIG. 14A. It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in XIVc line. It is a front exploded perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. FIG. 17A is a front view of the driving device, and FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of a drive device. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXa in FIG. 18, and (b) is a side view of the left disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow XXb in FIG. 18. (A) And (b) is a front view of a release member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. 38. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operating device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. (A) is a side view of a slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of a rotating plate member, and (c) is a side view of a release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a release member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. It is a side view of the tilting device in 3rd Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is a side view of the tilting device in 4th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device in a 5th embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibration device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member along the line LIXb-FIXb in FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a). 10 is a partial top view of the lower frame member as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibrating apparatus in the LXa-LXa line of FIG.59 (a). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59 (a). It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam. It is a front exploded perspective view of a transmission shaft bar. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVIb-LXVIb in (a) of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the operating device in the line corresponding to XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a), (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the arrow LXVIIb direction of FIG. 67 (a). It is. (A) is a sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in (a) of FIG. 6, and (b) is a partial rear view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of an arrow LXVIIIb in (a) of FIG. It is. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive in a 6th embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a disk member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disk cam. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the seventh embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam. 74A is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a partial side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVb in FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of the ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, and (c) is a side view of the ring member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engaging member, (b) is a side view of the engaging member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), and (c) is a right disk cam. (D) is a side view of the right disc cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, and (f) is a front view of the right disc cam. FIG. 78 is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e). FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along a line corresponding to a line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIGS. 7A and 7B are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. FIG. 7 is a sectional view of the operating device taken along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine showing a state in which an inner frame is opened (deployed) with respect to an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) in which the back pack was opened to the inner frame with the inner frame opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame with respect to the outer frame, and opened (deployed) the front frame. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the state where the front frame was removed. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame in which constituent members disposed below a window of the front frame are exploded and shown. (A) is an exploded rear perspective view of a front frame, and (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which a released state and a fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame taken along line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame showing the lower left corner of the front frame, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front frame along the line XCVb-XCVb in FIG. 95 (a). (A) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member and the harness, (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a), and (c) is a schematic drawing of the binding movable member and the harness. FIG. 96D is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the image, and FIG. 96D is a schematic top view of FIG. 96C. (A) And (b) is a top view schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which schematically illustrate a binding movable member and a harness. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of a 1st bending area. It is a front exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a back exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame. It is an exploded front perspective view of a right panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a heavy board unit. (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side view schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line of FIG. 115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper panel unit. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded back perspective view of an upper frame member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a speaker assembly. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, and (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of the speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124D is a top view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVc, and FIG. 124D is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXIVd in FIG. FIG. 124A is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly, the rear assembly, the upper frame member, the main frame, and the upper side plate member along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. 124A, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial cross-sectional view of a front assembly, a rear assembly, an upper frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side plate member taken along line CXXVb-CXXVb. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of the game board, and (b) is a front view of the inner frame. (A) and (b) are sectional views of the inner frame taken along line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b). (A) and (b) are side views of the board support device and the game board, schematically showing the board support device and the game board. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support device, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a board support device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board surface support apparatus. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 87 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. It is an exploded front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is an exploded back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball launching unit. (A) And (b) is an exploded front perspective view of a ball launching unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launching unit showing a state of sending out a ball by a ball feeder in a time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball launching unit, and (b) is a partial top view of the ball launching unit as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of the ball launching unit, and (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member, showing the relationship between the thread and the cutting metal member in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 4 is a partial front view of a ball launch unit, an inner rail, and an outer rail after a ball is launched. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a production operation unit. It is an exploded back perspective view of a production operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 153 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. It is an exploded front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is an exploded front perspective view of a center axis rotation device and a loose fitting device. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the center shaft rotating device and the loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a back plate. It is an exploded front perspective view of a back board, a side substrate, and a 2nd effect member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd effect member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advance / retreat operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an advance / retreat operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device without the central shaft rotating device. It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotating plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat member, and (d) is a petal operating device. It is a rear perspective view of. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 9th embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front view of a ball launching unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit in a 10th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a dish passage formation member in an 11th embodiment. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial expansion front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fit device in a twelfth embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operating device. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member in another example of a twelfth embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in a 13th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operation device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operation device, (b) is a side view of the operation device as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operation device, (D) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203 (a), and (e) is a cross-sectional view of the operation device along the line CCIIIe-CCIIIe in FIG. 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of an inner frame in a 14th embodiment in a line corresponding to a CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of Drawing 86. (A) is a partial back view of the front frame in a 15th embodiment, (b) and (c) are back views of a fraud detecting device. (A) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically shows an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 207 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 207 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIc of FIG. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion provided in the light guide member in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. FIG. 6 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing an upward concave portion provided in the light guide member in a region CCVIe of FIG. It is a front view of a pachinko machine and a ball rental unit in a 17th embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the pachinko machine which shows the state which removed the front frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a front frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the transfer device. (A) is a perspective view of a driving body, (b) is a front view of the driving body as viewed in the rotation axis direction. (A) is a perspective view of the first follower, and (b) is a front view of the first follower as viewed in the rotation axis direction. (A) is a perspective view of a 2nd driven body, (b) is a front view of the 2nd driven body in the rotation axis direction view. (A) is a perspective view of a regulation member, (b) is a front view of the regulation member in the rotation axis direction view. (A) is a front view in the rotation axis direction showing a state in which the first driven body is in contact with the inclined portion of the rotation restricting portion, and (b) is a state in which the restricting member rotates in the direction of the arrow, It is a front view in the rotation axis direction showing a state where one follower continues to rotate in the direction of the arrow. (A) is a front view in the rotation axis direction showing a state in which the first driven body is in contact with the locking portion of the rotation restricting portion, and (b) is a rotation axis direction of the restriction member and the first driven body. FIG. (A) is a front view in a rotation axis direction showing a state where the regulating member is arranged at a first position, and (b) is a front view in a rotation axis direction showing a state where the regulating member is arranged at a second position. FIG. (A) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member, (b) is a front view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the rotation axis direction, and (c) is a bottom view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the rotation axis direction. (A) is a perspective view of the transmission means, (b) is a front view of the transmission means as viewed in the rotation axis direction, and (c) is a side view of the transmission means as viewed in the rotation axis direction. (A) and (b) are front views of the switching passage, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the housing member taken along line CCXXI-CCXXI in FIG. 221 (a). It is a front view of each member of a rotating body, a regulation member, an opening / closing member, a transmission means, and a switching passage in the rotation axis direction view. FIG. 4 is a plan view of a driving body, an opening / closing member, and a transmission unit when viewed in a rotation axis direction. (A) is a front view of the regulating member, the opening / closing member, and the transmission means when viewed from the rotation axis direction when the switching operation unit is moving upward from the lower end of the vertical passage, and (b) is a switching operation. FIG. 8 is a front view of the restricting member, the opening / closing member, and the transmission means when viewed from the direction of the rotation axis in a state where the portion is moving from the vertical passage side of the front-rear passage to the left end side. It is a front view of each member of a rotating body, a regulation member, an opening / closing member, a transmission means, and a switching passage in the rotation axis direction view. FIG. 4 is a plan view of a driving body, an opening / closing member, and a transmission unit when viewed in a rotation axis direction. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. It is an exploded perspective view of a transportation device in an 18th embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member, (b) is a front view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the rotation axis direction, and (c) is a bottom view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the rotation axis direction. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view of a transport device according to a nineteenth embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member, (b) is a front view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the rotation axis direction, and (c) is a bottom view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the rotation axis direction. (A) is a front view of the opening / closing member as viewed in the rotation axis direction in a game ball transport state, and (b) is a front view of the opening / closing member in a rotation axis direction in a game ball discharge state. (A) is a front view of the regulation member operation unit in the rotation axis direction in the game ball transfer state, and (b) is a front view of the regulation member operation unit in the rotation axis direction in the game ball discharge state. is there. It is an exploded perspective view of the conveying device in a 20th embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of the regulation member, (b) is a front view of the regulation member as viewed in the rotation axis direction, and (c) is a side view of the regulation member as viewed in the rotation axis direction. (A) is a front view of the regulation member in the rotation axis direction in the game ball transfer state, and (b) and (c) are front views of the regulation member in the rotation axis direction in the game ball discharge state. is there. It is an exploded perspective view of the conveying device in a 21st embodiment. (A) is a perspective view of a regulation member, (b) is a front view of the regulation member in the rotation axis direction view. (A) is a front view in a rotation axis direction showing a state where the regulating member is disposed at a position for regulating the rotation of the first driven body in the direction of the arrow, and (b) is a diagram in which the regulating member is the first driven member. FIG. 4 is a front view in a rotation axis direction showing a state where the body is arranged at a position that allows rotation in the arrow direction.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. When a ball (game ball) flows down in front of the game board 13, a ball game is performed. The inner frame 12 has a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower plate unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a decorative resin component, an electric component, and the like, and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 is visible on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing a ball is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes toward the front side and has an open upper surface, and prize balls, loaned balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect of the super reach. You.

  Light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front frame 14 (for example, at a corner). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or at a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the periphery of the window 14c, there are provided illuminations 29 to 33 in which light-emitting means such as LEDs are incorporated. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a jackpot lamp, and at the time of a big hit or a reach effect, etc., each of the illumination parts 29 to 33 is lit by turning on or blinking a built-in LED. Or, it flashes to notify that a jackpot is in progress or that the player is reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and which can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error has occurred.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized below the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball lending operation unit 40 is provided below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state in which bills, cards, and the like are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is slid according to the operation. Lending is done. More specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which balance information of a card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED is turned on, and the balance is displayed as a number as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a remaining amount. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, a so-called cash machine, the ball-lending operation unit 40 becomes unnecessary. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part to make the parts configuration common. The pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof. I have. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 and an operation device 300 which are operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are arranged. The operation device 300 will be described later.

  Inside the operating handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51 A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electric resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired at an intensity (firing intensity) corresponding to, and the ball is hit into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. When the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower front part of the lower plate 50, a ball release lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is constantly urged rightward, and is slid leftward against the urging, so that a bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a “thousand boxes”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is mounted on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of ball guide nails (not shown), a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a variable winning device 330, a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. 1)). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that a player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. And so on.

  The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected on the front of the game board 13, and a band-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is provided inside the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front of the game board 13 and the front and rear of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails, which is the front of the game board 13 (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the falling ball flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to a tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent a situation in which a ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired at a predetermined momentum strikes the return rubber 69 and momentum. Is rebounded toward the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a 7-segment display are provided at a lower left portion of the game area as viewed from the front (a lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for performing display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be selectively used according to whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of probable change, during working hours, or during normal operation, or to indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is fluctuating. Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot or a symbol corresponding to an ordinary jackpot is indicated by an illuminated state, the number of retained balls is indicated by an illuminated state, and a round during a jackpot is displayed by a 7-segment display device. Display number and error. In addition, the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors may indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the lottery is performed when the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 have a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and when it is determined to be a big hit, also determines the big hit type. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R certain-variable jackpot, a 4R certain-variable jackpot, and a 15R regular large jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if the jackpot is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variable jackpot” means a probability variable jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and “4R probability variable jackpot” means a maximum round number of four rounds. Is a probable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after. The “15R normal jackpot” refers to a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the low probability state after 15 rounds of jackpots and the time saving state is reached during a predetermined number of changes (for example, 100 changes). is there.

  The “high-probability state” refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, a state in which the probability is changing (probable change), in other words, a game that is easily shifted to the special game state. State. The high probability state (probable change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640. The “low-probability state” refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the case of a probability change. The time saving state (medium time saving) in the “low probability state” is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged. This refers to a game state in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, the state where the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state is a state of the game in which the probability is not changed or the time is not reduced (a state in which neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased).

  During probable change or during working hours, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 as compared to when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be in an easy state. Therefore, during a probability change or during a shortened working hours, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probable change or during working hours, instead of changing the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the power A change may be made to increase the number of times that the accessory 640a is released from the normal number. In addition, during the probability change or during working hours, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the electric accessory 640a is opened once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during probable change or during working hours, the time during which the motorized accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit is not determined. Only the probability may be changed so as to increase as compared with the normal state.

  In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is provided in a central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 (start winning) as a trigger, while synchronizing with the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the third symbol. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that varies and displays the second symbol when the ball of the through gate 67 passes through as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display. The display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The decorative display corresponding to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel or the like instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device alternately lights a symbol “O” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. The variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If the result of the winning lottery is a winning, the symbol "O" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. If the result of the winning lottery is off, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the case of the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol of “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is moved for a predetermined time. Only the operating state (opened).

  The time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probable change or during the time reduction than during the normal game state. Thus, during the probable change and during the time reduction, the fluctuation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 during probable change and during working hours.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the working hours, the probability of winning is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are increased. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, in the case where the time required for the fluctuation display of the second symbol is set shorter during the probability change or during the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant irrespective of the game state, or one hit may be performed. The opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a part of the ball fired on the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, a symbol of “○” is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, a symbol "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is retained up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol retaining lamp (not shown). Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, and is also performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device. This may be performed using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol holding lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball through the through gate 67 is not limited to four, but may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of through gates 67 is not limited to two, but may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retaining lamp may not be lit.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 in which a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the first winning opening 64, a first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the first winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in front view, a second winning opening 640 where a ball can win is provided. When a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on by turning on the second winning opening switch. A jackpot lottery is performed in (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports where five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are the same. The number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first winning opening 64. May be configured such that the number of award balls to be paid out when the player wins is three, and the number of award balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second winning opening 640.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball does not easily enter the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “O” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the second symbol change display performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher during the probable change and during the working hours, and the time required to display the change of the second symbol is shorter than that during the normal period. Are easily displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened (increased) increases. Further, during probable change and during working hours, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than during normal working hours. Therefore, during probable change and during working hours, it is possible to create a state in which a ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

  Here, the probability of the big hit in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of a 15R probability variable jackpot being selected as a jackpot type selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when a ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when a ball wins the first winning opening 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have the motorized accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a winning state.

  Therefore, during normal times, the motorized accessory associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and by winning the first winning opening 64, a lot of chances of a jackpot lottery are obtained, and the jackpot is won. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for that.

  On the other hand, during probable changes or during working hours, passing the ball through the through gate 67 causes the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be easily opened, and the second winning opening 640 to be easily won. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 such that the ball passes rightward of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. At the same time, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability change jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is symmetrical, the pachinko machine 10 may aim at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handing” or the second winning opening 640 by “left-handing”. You can also aim. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with a method of shooting a ball in accordance with the playing state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is being changed, is being reduced in time, or is usually being played). Need to be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the trouble of changing the way of hitting the ball can be eliminated.

  A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol and Thus, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which the opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is performed.

  Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described embodiment. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. During the opening of the special winning opening 65a, the game state in which the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins inside the specific winning opening 65a is a special game. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position may be the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first winning opening 64a. The present invention is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80.

  At the lower right corner of the game board 13 is provided a sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp, an identification label and the like, and the stamp attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, and 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-opening 71 is provided as a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a.

  In the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided. The control board unit 90 includes a main board (main control device 110), a sound lamp control board (sound lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is mounted as a unit on which a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 and a payout unit 93 forming a protective cover unit are unitized. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer for controlling each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are mounted as needed.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 includes a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are stored.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) are connected to the box base and the box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (the caulking structure). Consolidation). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to a connection portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material. If the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are closed. Cut to the side and to. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electric configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and the payout device 133 pays out a required number of balls as needed. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a clogged ball in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built therein. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control device only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 includes, in addition to various areas, counters, and flags, a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I / Os, and the like. A work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is cut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including turning on the power by turning off the power, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before the power was shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is turned off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. , An NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 including an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a sound lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via an input / output port 205. Send

  The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasure signal SG2 output from the RAM erasure switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loaned balls. The MPU 211 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 212 storing a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I / O and the like are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply 115 to retain data (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similarly to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a process at the time of a power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize ball. The winning ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launching strength of the ball according to the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 51 when the ball is directed by the main control device 110. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are satisfied. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound from a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing lights from a lamp display device (such as the illuminated units 29 to 33, and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a fluctuation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81, which is performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect. The MPU 221 as an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  The input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and issues the determined display mode as a command. (Display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the player operates the frame button 22, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or performs super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content at the time. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the third image display device 81 displays a rear image corresponding to the changed stage. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 and, based on a command received from the audio lamp control device 113, performs a variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It controls display. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The sound lamp control device 113 outputs the sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like via a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and outputs a voltage of 12 volts for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as the solenoid 209, a motor, and the like. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts, and backup voltage are supplied to necessary voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each of the NMI terminals of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) has occurred if this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt processing. In addition, even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt processing. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erasure switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erasure signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erasure switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and also controls the payout control device 111 to execute a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to the device 111.

  FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 300 is disposed at the center in the left-right direction of the inner frame 12 when viewed from the front (that is, at the center in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 10).

  The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be tiltable by being pushed into the player, and is provided in a region defined by a housing recess 17 a that is recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. Will be arranged. A signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) by the player performing the tilting (rotating) operation of the tilting device 310.

  A gap is provided between the tilting device 310 and the accommodating recess 17a so that at least the finger of the hand can enter without difficulty. Thereby, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a manner in which the fingertip is arranged on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

  Since the player grips the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the tilting device 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

  FIG. 6A is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 6B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along a line VIb-VIb in FIG. 6A. 7 is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7B is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 along the line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7A.

  6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. FIG. 6 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is arranged in a first state (an initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 faces in the up-down direction. In FIG. 7, the tilting device 310 is shifted from the first state. A state in which the operation surface 312a1 is arranged in the second state in which the operation surface 312a1 faces upward and rearward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. In FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The tilting device 310 is configured to be able to automatically operate between the first state and the second state by the driving force of the driving device 340. The details of the driving device 340 will be described later.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a player when a specific display (for example, a display of “press a button”) appears on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2).

  Here, for example, when the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is performed by a method of vigorously dropping the hand downward, such as when pushing a button that moves up and down, the position of the operation surface 312a1 moves toward the near side depending on the degree of tilting. This is an aspect in which the hand is shifted and the palm and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing a pushing operation by a method of dropping his hand vigorously downward.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, by placing the fingertip near the shaft 314 of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum, the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, The tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably.

  Therefore, it is possible to guide the player to perform the operation by lowering the palm with the fingertip as a fulcrum so as not to make the method of dropping the hand vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

  The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the viewpoint of the player will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow VIII in FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow IX in FIG. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by imaginary lines. In FIG. 9, an example of the hand of the player who pushes the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is reduced in area from the viewpoint of the player to such a degree that the operation surface 312a1 is visually recognizable in the first state while being invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed outside the player's viewpoint). Thereby, the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be significantly changed between the first state and the second state.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protection lens member 311i is configured such that the area of the protection lens member 311i gradually increases, and accordingly, the LED device 341f (FIG. 12), the difference between the first state and the second state is greater. Can greatly change the appearance of the tilting device 310.

  An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the outer side surface of the little finger is placed near the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum. (By rotating the wrist about the axis), the tilting device 310 can be pushed in comfortably while the palm is integrated with the operation surface 312a1.

  Accordingly, the player can be guided to perform the operation by lowering the palm of the hand with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to let the hand drop vigorously downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of the tilting device 310 being damaged can be reduced.

  Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported on a shaft 314 in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at a rear end.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11, the voice coil motor 352 that applies a direct impact to the tilting device 310, and the detection sensors 324L and 324R that detect the pushing operation from the first state, move the tilting device 310 downward. It is arranged outside the lower frame member 320 surrounding from the side.

  As described above, by arranging the sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310 and the voice coil motor for providing the driving force outside the lower frame member 320, the area inside the lower frame member 320 is largely used, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. Thus, a large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

  FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR <b> 1 disposed at left and right ends at a rear end (a rear end in FIG. 12), and the tilting device 310. A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from below and defining a pushing end of the tilting device 310, and a lower frame member 320 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 from above. And a large opening in the center with a concave portion arranged facing the lower frame member 320 and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner that the tilting member 310 is arranged between the lower frame member 320 and the lower frame member 320. And an upper frame member 330 that determines the arrangement of the tilting device 310 in the second state, and an arm that is fastened and fixed below the lower frame member 320 and forms a link mechanism with the tilting device 310. A driving device 340 for transmitting a driving force to the tilting device 310 via the system member 345, and a protective cover device fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and protecting the driving device 340 by covering the driving device 340 from the left, right, and rear. 350.

  The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the near side, and the bottom plate portion 321. A horizontal portion 322 composed of a plate-like member horizontally disposed at the upper end portion on the far side of the tilting device 310 and a semicircular receiving portion opened upward near the rear end of the horizontal portion 322. A lower bearing portion 323 that receives the shaft portion 314 from below, a left detection sensor 324L and a right detection sensor 324R that are arranged in a pair on the right and left below the bottom plate portion 321, and a horizontal position at the horizontal center position of the bottom plate portion 321. An opening 325 that is an opening that is opened by shaving a portion disposed below the portion 322.

  The bottom plate portion 321 is configured to define the end of movement of the tilting device 310 by abutting on the tilting device 310, and has a plurality of openings through which the portion of the tilting device 310 can pass through the bottom plate portion 321. You.

  The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a formed in the center on the near side, a detection hole 321b formed along the detection groove of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and a left and right side of the opening 325. And an insertion hole 321c symmetrically formed.

  The transmission hole 321a is arranged at a position in front of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size that allows the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 to pass therethrough. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 extends below the bottom plate portion 321, a driving force in the linear motion direction can be given to the tilting device 310.

  The detection hole 321b is a through hole configured to allow detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the lower surface of the tilting device 310 to be inserted therethrough. The detection pieces 311gL and 311gR projecting from the detection holes 321b are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

  The insertion hole 321c has a size that allows the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 to be inserted, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through hole is formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

  The horizontal portion 322 forms a plane for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the driving device 340, and extends upward from the upper surface thereof and has a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the near side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

  The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the urging force of the torsion spring 322a acts in a direction to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

  The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. Note that the detection sensors 324L and 324R are arranged at positions where the distance (position of the detection groove) from the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 is equal on the left and right.

  Further, the photocoupler-type sensor includes a light projecting unit for projecting light and a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light projecting unit, and gaps (slits, detecting grooves) into which a detecting part can be inserted. Means a sensor arranged in a substantially U-shape.

  The opening 325 is a through hole for allowing the LED device 341 f of the driving device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to enter the inside of the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the left-right width is made larger than the left-right width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

  On the other hand, with respect to the vertical width, the driving device 340 is configured to protrude the LED device 341f toward the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), so that after the LED device 341f passes through the opening 325, the driving device By pushing up 340, the LED device 341f can be arranged above the opening 325, and compared with the vertical width including from the LED device 341f to the rotating claw member 347, the opening 325 The vertical width can be shortened.

  The upper frame member 330 is opposed to the opening 331 that is an opening having a size to be hooked by the extension portion 311h extending from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320. And an upper bearing portion 332 which is formed in a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and which supports the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

  The protective cover device 350 is configured so as to be vertically dividable and covered in three directions except the near side, and is fixed to a lower end portion of the driving device 340 and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340. A voice coil motor 352 supported on the bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward and upward; a left detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of the main body cover 351; And a detection sensor 353R.

  Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken so that the right detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center can be visually recognized.

  The voice coil motor 352 is disposed in a posture in which the vibration surface is substantially parallel to the bottom plate 321 of the lower frame member 320 in an assembled state (see FIG. 10). Thus, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes the projecting protrusion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

  The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler-type sensors that detect the phases of the disc cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340. The disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 are arranged in such a manner as to be arranged inside the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L and 353R. Detecting whether the detection holes 344eL, 344eR of the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 353L, 353R, and detecting that the disc cams 344L, 344R are arranged at a specific phase. Can be.

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the driving device 340 have the detection holes 344eL and 344eR with different phases, the specific phase that can be detected by the detection sensors 353L and 353R is 2 Kind.

  Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14A is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14B is a side view of the tilting device 310 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14A, and FIG. FIG. 15 is a sectional view of the tilting device 310 taken along line XIVc-XIVc in FIG. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 is configured such that a case main body 311 composed of a box-shaped body having a side fan shape and having upper and lower openings, and an upper opening of the case main body 311 is covered. A lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case main body 311, a spherical lens member 313 fastened to the front end of the lid 312 and hung downward, and a state sandwiched at the rear ends of the case main body 311 and the lid 312. , A torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and a ring-shaped member for fixing the case main body 311 and the lid 312 inseparably at the rear ends of the case main body 311 and the lid 312. And a ring member BR1.

  The case main body 311 has a bottom plate 311a that is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate 311a, and left and right sides of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft portion 311c extending to the center in the left-right direction from a flange protruding downward along the edge of the shaft, and a recessed portion 311d having a semicircular cross section supporting the shaft portion 314 at a rear end portion. And an insertion groove 311e, which is a groove arranged at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook-like portion 311f formed in a hook shape and locking a central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315. A left detection piece 311gL and a right detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15) extending in a pair on the left and right below the bottom plate 311a, and a predetermined amount from the front end of the bottom plate 311a toward the front. An extended portion 311h to be provided and a protective lens member 311i which is disposed above the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is formed of a light transmitting material. And a protruding projecting portion 311j projecting downward from the center in the left-right direction at the front end of the bottom plate portion 311a.

  The bottom plate portion 311a is a portion that comes into contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of the lower frame member 320 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.

  The opening 311b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341f of the driving device 340 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340 can be inserted.

  The shaft portion 311c is a cylindrical member that is inserted into the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17B) of the driving device 340, and serves as a portion that transmits driving force to the driving device 340. Is provided.

  The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

  In the present embodiment, the angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about the shaft 314 is about 3 ° (from the first state (see FIG. 22), the pushing end (see FIG. 22). 23), the left detection piece 311gL is extended as compared with the right detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle becomes the rotation angle of the tilting device 310).

  The extended portion 311h is a portion that projects from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 10), extends to a position where it is locked by the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330. It is configured in an embodiment.

  The protective lens member 311i has a curved shape when viewed from the top (see FIG. 14A), and also has a curved shape when viewed from the left and right directions (see FIG. 14C). The configuration is such that the load when pushing the tilting device 310 is easily released (easy to flow). Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The overhanging protruding portion 311j is formed so as to protrude at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320, and the player pushes down the tilting device 310. In the state (see FIG. 29), the tip is inserted into the transmission hole 321 a and the tip protrudes below the lower frame member 320.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and the intermediate plate member 312b connected to the top plate member 312a. And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape large enough to surround the LED device 341f in the first state (see FIG. 6).

  In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312 c emits light emitted from the LED device 341 f toward the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6) while improving the strength of the lid 312 by rigidity in the axial direction. While being held inside the member 312c, in the second state (see FIG. 7), such a limitation is released and the light is emitted from the LED device 341f in a wide range.

  The lens member 313 is formed of a light transmissive material, has upper and lower ends extending forward in a flange shape, and has an extended end formed of a shape matching the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. And a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape at the center.

  The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 with a pair of left and right torsion portions, and has two arm portions 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsion portion, and a central portion 315b connecting the pair of torsion portions. , Is provided.

  Next, the driving device 340 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17A is a front view of the driving device 340, FIG. 17B is a side view of the driving device 340 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17A, and FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, a driving device 340 includes a main body member 341 that forms a frame by bending a plate-shaped sheet metal member, and a driving motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disk cams 344 (left disk cam 344L, right disk cam) that are non-rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343. 344R), an arm member 345 pivotally supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a second projection 342c of the disk cam 344 that are pivotally supported by the shaft 341c of the main body member 341. A release member 346 that comes into contact with the overhang portion 344c3 in the rotation direction, a rotating claw member 347 that is axially supported coaxially with the release member 346 and that relatively operates with the rotation of the release member 346; The first spring SP1, which is a coil spring-shaped spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the rotating claw member 347 to fall down, and a direction in which the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are separated from each other. A second spring SP2, which is a torsion spring-shaped spring member that generates a force.

  The main body member 341 is bent at the left and right in the rearward direction and formed in a U-shape in a top view, and is formed at the same position of a plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a opposed to the motor housing portion 341a. A shaft support hole 341b that supports the cam 344; and a shaft portion 341c that protrudes in the left-right direction at a position displaced to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b so as to have an axis parallel to the axis of the shaft support hole 341b. An extension 341d extending from the motor housing 341a below the shaft 341c, an illumination support 341e extending frontward and upward from the motor accommodation 341a, and an illumination support 341e. And an LED device 341f disposed at the upper end and having an LED light source disposed therein.

  The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface, and includes a portion that refracts light (a portion that refracts light). Thereby, the light of the LED device 341f can be evenly irradiated upward and forward.

  The drive motor 342 includes a fixing member 342a that is fastened and fixed to the motor housing 341a inside the U-shape of the motor housing 341a.

  The fixing member 342a supports the rotation gear of the drive motor 342 and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotation gear.

  The arm member 345 is bored in one end at a perfect circular shape, and is bored in a shaft support hole 345a supported by the connecting pin 344d of the disk cam 344, and at the other end in a rectangular shape. And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

  The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the end on the opposite side of the shaft support hole 345a is in contact with the shaft 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310. It is formed at a position sufficient to be rotatable.

  The transmission shaft 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft bar 343. The transmission shaft bar 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which disk cams 344 (see FIG. 18) are fixed at both ends, and a transmission gear 343b which is rotatably supported by the cylindrical member 343a and meshes with the rotation gear of the drive motor 342. A movable clutch 343c capable of switching whether or not to transmit a driving force between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement; a coil spring 343d for pressing the movable clutch 343c against the transmission gear 343b; Mainly equipped.

  The cylindrical member 343a includes fixing portions 343a1 and 343a2 each having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 344 at both ends thereof, and the right fixing portion 343a2 is formed to be longer toward the center than the left fixing portion 343a1. You. Here, in detail, the fixed portion 343a2 is formed to have a length that can move to a position that does not interfere with the transmission gear 343b when the movable clutch 343c moves against the urging force of the coil spring 343d.

  The transmission gear 343b has a perfectly circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and a clutch in which unevenness is formed along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the axis from a surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c. 343b2.

  Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

  The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 343c1 having a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted, and unevenness along the axial direction at a circumferential position around the shaft center from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b. And a clutch portion 343c2 configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2.

  In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 are formed of a mountain-shaped convex portion and a concave portion having an apex angle of about 100 °.

  Since the angle fixing hole 343c1 has a D-shaped cross section, the relative rotation of the movable clutch 343c with respect to the cylindrical member 343a becomes impossible, so the engagement between the clutch 343b2 of the transmission gear 343b and the clutch 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c. Accordingly, the driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is transmitted to the cylindrical member 343a via the movable clutch 343c. Thus, by rotating the drive motor 342, the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) can be rotated.

  Note that the movable clutch 343c is normally arranged at a position close to the transmission gear 343b by the urging force of the coil spring 343d, and the engagement relationship between the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, when a load in the axial direction is applied to the movable clutch 343c, the movable clutch 343c is configured to be movable along the fixed portion 343a2 so as to be separated from the transmission gear 343b.

  The disc cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the disc cam 344 has a left disc cam 344L and a right disc cam 344R roughly mirrored in shape, and differs only in the positions of the detection holes 344eL and 344eR. The description will be omitted, and the description of the right disk cam 344R will be omitted.

  FIG. 20A is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXa of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20B is a side view of the left disk cam 344L as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXb of FIG. is there. Note that FIGS. 20A and 20B show a state where the driving device 340 is in the first initial state as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having portions projecting from both sides of a perfect circular disk, and is located at the center of the disk. A central shaft portion 344a protruding in a cylindrical shape inward, a circular rib 344b protruding inward as a ring-shaped rib centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and a circular rib 344b outside the circular rib 344b. An engagement rib 344c having a height lower than that of the circular rib 344b and having a portion projecting radially outward at two locations; and an outer portion between the circular rib 344b and the engagement rib 344c. It mainly includes a connection pin 344d projecting in a cylindrical shape in the direction and connected to the arm member 345 (see FIG. 18), and a detection hole 344eL formed near the outer periphery.

  The right disk cam 344R is different only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at a position forming an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the others are configured by mirroring the shape of the left disk cam 344L. .

  The center shaft portion 344a has a D-shaped cross section in which the inner periphery is engaged with both ends of the columnar member 343a (see FIG. 19), and the outer periphery is fitted in the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 18). Be composed. That is, the disc cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

  The circular-diameter rib 344b is protruded to a position where it can abut on the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disk cam 344 is supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thus, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

  In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c projects radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 20A) from the position where the detection hole 344eL is provided. From the overhang portion 344c1, the first retraction portion 344c2, and the first overhang portion 344c1 that withdraw from the first overhang portion 344c1 radially inward at a position shifted by an angle θ1 (the angle θ1 = 50 ° in the present embodiment). At a position shifted by an angle θ2 (the angle θ2 = 150 ° in the present embodiment), a second overhang portion 344c3 that projects again radially outward and an angle θ3 (an angle in the present embodiment) from the second overhang portion 344c3. (θ3 = 20 °), and a second retraction part 344c4 that retreats radially inward at a shifted position.

  In the first initial state of the driving device 340, the connection pin 344d is disposed at a position where the distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state is the longest (see FIG. 22). That is, the connection pin 344d is provided on the opposite side of the shaft 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the center shaft 344a.

  The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, and their configurations are the same on the left and right, so only one of them will be described.

  FIGS. 21A and 21B are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. Note that FIG. 21A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating claw member 347 has rotated to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21B illustrates the release member 346. In contrast, a small angle state in which the rotary claw member 347 has rotated to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is shown.

  The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide slots 347b). (See FIG. 35).

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 346a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A projection pin 346b projecting in the thickness direction in an arc shape about the center axis of the shaft support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c through which the end of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and a shaft support hole 346a. And an engaging portion 346d configured as a portion projecting at the maximum diameter.

  The engagement portion 346d is a portion configured to be able to abut on the engagement rib 344c (see FIG. 20) of the disc cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). In the present embodiment, since the outer periphery of the engaging portion 346d is formed to be curved, the contact with the engaging rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

  The rotary claw member 347 is formed from a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a shaft support hole 347a that is supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18) and an arc shape centered on the central axis of the shaft support hole 347a. The guide slot 347b of the release member 346 is guided along the guide slot 347b (the guide pin 346b is drilled so as to include the movement trajectory of the protrusion pin 346b inside), and the end of the second spring SP2. The insertion hole 347c through which the portion is inserted, the hook portion 347d projecting downward in a hook shape at the end opposite to the shaft support hole 347a, and the end of the first spring (see FIG. 18) can be inserted. And a pull-down hole 347e formed in the main body.

  In the present embodiment, in the large angle state shown in FIG. 21A, the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rotation direction (the clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotating claw member 347. Therefore, when a load in the downward direction is applied to the engagement portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate integrally in the backward rotation direction, while in the large angle state, the engagement portion 346d rotates in the backward rotation direction. When a load in the pushing direction is applied to 346d, only the release member 346 is rotated until the small angle state shown in FIG. 21B is reached, and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 can be maintained.

  Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, an operation example in a case where a player performs a pushing operation in a state where the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified for easy understanding.

  FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 22 illustrates a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state, and FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state illustrated in FIG. 23 shows a state after the tilting device 310 has returned from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state. FIGS. 22 to 24 show an example of a player's hand that performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives a biasing force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311 a is hooked on the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotating claw member 347. Thereby, the posture of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, the urging force in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly acting on the tilting device 310.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is disposed in front of the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R. (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

  As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 rotates about 3 ° in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right detection sensor 324R (ON state).

  Therefore, by determining the change in the detection state of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R, it can be determined that the tilting device 310 has been pushed by the player from the first state.

  Here, when the tilting device 310 is continuously hit, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated. However, depending on the time interval at which the player repeatedly hits, the tilting device 310 by the torsion spring 315 is used. Cannot be returned in time, and the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel uncomfortable.

  Conventionally, this could be dealt with by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is moved against the urging force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) that pushes down, and it is necessary to increase the size of the drive motor 342. Therefore, there have been problems that the product cost increases and space cannot be saved.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a voice coil motor 352 capable of producing an effect by vibrating operation is provided at a position facing the protruding projection 311j of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is pushed. You.

  As shown in FIG. 24, by driving the voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the return operation of the tilting device 310 can be quickly performed without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. it can.

  Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed, for example, when the player long-presses the tilting device 310, the voice coil motor 352 is driven. Since an unnecessary load is applied, the player may feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times that the right detection sensor 324R switches between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, the load of returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs a continuous hit operation can be improved. Thereby, the player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

  Next, a case (first operation mode) in which the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down (a tilting operation) from the first state will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 25 to 30 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG.

  25 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state. In FIG. 26, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. FIG. 27 shows a state in which the posture has changed, and FIG. 27 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 26 and the posture of the rotary claw member 347 has returned, and FIG. 29 shows a state in which the tilting device 310 performs a reciprocating rotation operation. In FIG. 29, a state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state in FIG. 28 is shown, and in FIG. 30, a circle from the state shown in FIG. A state in which the plate cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction by a predetermined amount to reach a second initial state in which the second overhang portion 344c3 of the engagement rib 344c abuts on the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346. Is illustratedIn addition, in FIG. 28, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 27 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside the cylindrical member 312c of the lid 312. Therefore, while the amount of light emitted in the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the amount of light emitted in the axial direction can be ensured to be large. Accordingly, the cylindrical member 312c has an effect of improving the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and an effect of adjusting the light irradiation intensity of the LED device 341f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the disc cam 344 is moved forward (in the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 26) from the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state. Direction, the first protrusion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 pushes down the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, and the release member 346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Accordingly, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated in the backward rotation direction to a position where it is disengaged from the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310.

  The change in the posture of the release member 346 is continued until the disc cam 344 is rotated until the first retraction portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 346d face each other, so that the tilting device 310 twists during that time. It rises by the urging force of the spring 315 (rotates clockwise in FIG. 26).

  At this time, in the state of FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position farther from the rotation axis of the disc cam 344). Since the operation of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction is regulated by the arm member 345, the upward operation of the tilting device 310 has an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disk cam 344.

  As shown in FIG. 27, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27) and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes through the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346, By the urging force of the first spring SP1, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotate in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 27), and the rotating claw member 347 can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (FIG. 25). At this time, the urging force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle (upper angle in FIG. 27) between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347, and thus the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 347 rotates while maintaining the state shown in FIG. 26 (large angle state).

  In this state, the cover 312 retracts above the LED device 341f, and the area in which the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint increases as compared with the tilting device 310 in the first state. , The light of the LED device 341f can also be irradiated in the front direction (the direction toward the player). Therefore, by changing the posture of the tilting device 310, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED device 341f can be changed, and the effect of producing light can be improved.

  In this state, the right detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the starting point of the vertical reciprocating operation can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 27, and subsequently, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction by the same amount. By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 28), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Further, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes corresponding to the operation of the tilting device 310 repeatedly operating up and down within the range of the angle D1. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 28, since the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 28) of the LED device 341f, the irradiation range of the light emitted from the LED device 341f is changed in the front-rear direction. And in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 28) as well as in the vertical direction.

  According to this embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is arranged in the first state, the light of the LED device 341f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312c. (See FIG. 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in a direction toward the player (front direction), and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 28, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves in the upward direction, the shaft portion 311c Moves only in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the pushing end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate 311 a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347 d of the rotary claw member 347, thereby When the member 347 rotates in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) and the tilting device 310 is subsequently pushed in and the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d, the rotating claw member 347 is rotated with the tilting device 310. It returns to a position where it can be engaged (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player has depressed the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 is vertically moved as shown in FIG. 28, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state when the player releases his / her hand. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 to the final end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting the hand on the tilting device 310.

  That is, the purpose is to generate a driving force that assists the raising of the tilting device 310 with the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 24), and to perform a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pushing end position. Can be used for

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases his / her hand from the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 310 is It is buried in the lower surface, and the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only in a state where the player pushes the tilting device 310 to the end.

  Therefore, in comparison with a gaming machine in which the operation button simply vibrates, when the tilting device 310 is pushed and operated, it is determined whether or not the vibration by the voice coil motor 352 occurs at the end of the pushing. Only let me know.

  Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pushing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, some players may not operate the tilting device 310 at all, and in such a case, the value of the tilting device 310 as operating means is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in.

  Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 to produce a vibration effect when the jackpot is determined, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation when the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the tilting device 310 Can be improved as a prefetch means. Thereby, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operating means can be increased.

  As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction until the second projecting portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 (from the state shown in FIG. 29). By rotating the driving device 340 a predetermined amount in the clockwise direction, the driving device 340 can be set to the second initial state.

  The second initial state is a state in which the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in the rotation direction, as in the first initial state. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 comes into contact with the engagement rib 344c.

  In addition, from the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and after the first protrusion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c passes through the engagement portion 346d, the reverse rotation is performed. In this way, the driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, a load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 can be rotated in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) while the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained. it can.

  Next, referring to FIG. 31 to FIG. 34, the case where the tilting device 310 is moved up and down (moving up) from the state where the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the second initial state ( (Second operation mode) will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation of reciprocating up and down through the second state (a tilting operation).

  FIGS. 31 to 34 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 31, from the state shown in FIG. 30, the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31), and the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 31). FIG. 32 shows a state in which the disc cam 344 has rotated by a predetermined amount and the tilting device 310 has reached the second state from the state shown in FIG. 31, and FIG. 33 shows a state shown in FIG. 34 shows a state where the disc cam 344 reciprocates and rotates. FIG. 34 shows a state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 32 is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 34, an example of a player's hand that pushes and operates the tilting device 310 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 31, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotating claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, and the tilting is performed. The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

  At this time, since the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 moves the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345. Therefore, the tilting device 310 can be raised with low resistance, and the state of the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 32, by rotating the disc cam 344 by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state in which the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released), the posture of the disc cam 344 is changed. 310 can be set to a position that can be arranged in the second state (a position in which the disk cam 344 is rotated by 180 ° from the first initial state). Therefore, when the tilting device 310 moves upward at a high speed and the tilting device 310 attempts to reach the second state from the state shown in FIG. 30 in a short period of time, the state change is obstructed by the disk cam 344 (disk). It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating by a predetermined angle at a slow speed, and it takes a long time until the tilting device 310 enters the second state.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently, the disc cam 344 is moved backward by the same amount (counterclockwise). By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating clockwise (FIG. 32), the tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. Thus, the appearance of the tilting device 310 to the player can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In addition, in response to the operation in which the tilting device 310 repeatedly moves up and down within the range of the angle D2, the area of the portion of the protective lens member 313 projecting above the upper frame member 331 changes. Therefore, of the light emitted from the LED device 341f, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the protective lens member 313 can be changed in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

  In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell 313a of the lens member 313 is disposed on the front side (the left side in FIG. 33) of the LED device 341f. And in the horizontal direction (the direction perpendicular to the plane of FIG. 33) as well as in the vertical direction.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change not only the light irradiation direction but also the light irradiation range at the same time as the posture of the tilting device 310 changes. Thereby, the degree of attention of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, as the mode of the up-down operation of the tilting device 310, two types of up-down operation (tilting operation) of the up-down operation shown in FIG. 28 and the up-down operation shown in FIG. Immediately after the restriction on the movement of the device 310 in the upward direction is released, the operation can be performed immediately. Therefore, two types of modes in which the tilting device 310 in the first state is operated by the driving force of the driving motor 342 can be created.

  Thereby, as compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, a difference in expectation of a jackpot), and the player pays attention to the tilting device 310. The degree can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push and operate the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only a load in the direction of pulling the tilting device 310 downward (even if the arm member 345 moves in the ascending direction, the shaft portion 311c only moves in the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and a load for lifting the shaft portion 311c from the arm member 345 is not generated).

  Therefore, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load due to the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is applied to the player. Accordingly, when the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the process of reaching the state where the tilting device 310 is pushed in, the bottom plate 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the hook-shaped portion 347d of the rotary claw member 347, so that the rotary claw member 347 rotates backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes through the hook-shaped portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and then pushing the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates forward). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted from moving in the ascending direction by the rotating claw member 347.

  Therefore, after the player pushes down the tilting device 310 from the state in which the tilting device 310 shown in FIG. 33 is moved up and down (see FIG. 34), when the player releases his / her hand, the tilting device 310 is set to the first state. Can be maintained.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the regulation of the tilting device 310 by the rotating claw member 347 after the player performs the pushing operation will be described. I do. With this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up-and-down operations (tilting operations) of the tilting device 310 or to continuously perform one of the operations.

  35 to 37 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 along line XXII-XXII in FIG. FIG. 35 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) and the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) from the state illustrated in FIG. In FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 rotates backward (more clockwise in FIG. 35) than in the state shown in FIG. 35, and then the disc cam 344 rotates forward until it comes into contact with the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. In FIG. 37, the disk cam 344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (FIG. 36 counterclockwise) from the state shown in FIG. 36 to detect the left side of the protection cover device 350. The state where the sensor 353L is in the ON state is illustrated. 35 to 37, an example of a player's hand swinging on the tilting device 310 from above is shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 35, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second retraction portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c is engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. 346d. In this case, the posture of the release member 346 changes when the engagement rib 344 c pushes up the release member 346, but the projection pin 346 b of the release member 346 moves in the space of the guide elongated hole 347 b of the rotary claw member 347. The rotation pawl member 347 stays in the posture shown in FIG.

  That is, in the process of further rotating the disk cam 344 in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 to release the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346, the rotating claw member 347 is used. The regulation of the tilting device 310 being lifted can be maintained.

  From the state shown in FIG. 35, the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and the rotating cam 344 is subsequently rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). As shown in FIG. 7, the driving device 340 can be in the second initial state.

  In this embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disk cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36, but it is necessary to go through the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the up-and-down operation (tilting operation) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2 as described above.

  Here, the player who pushes the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of keeping his / her hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as “long press” is not displayed. is there.

  This is, for example, an operation that occurs due to forgetting to release the hand that pressed and operated the tilting device 310 to concentrate on the production. In this case, the tilting device 310 is lifted even if the restriction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, even if the disc cam 344 performs the reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for vertically moving (tilting operation) the tilting device 310 within the range of the angle D2, the posture of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Can not. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is useless, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the disk cam 344 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320 is turned on. While the state is maintained (while the tilting device 310 tilts below the first state), the disk cam 344 is not rotated in the reverse direction, and as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the driving device 340 in which the driving device 340 is turned on (see FIG. 14), the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the driving of the driving motor 342 is stopped).

  In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, since the tilting device 310 does not perform the ascending operation due to the player's hand being placed above the tilting device 310, in this case, the state shown in FIG. 36 to the state shown in FIG. The change is caused by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310, and the drive motor 342 is reciprocated (forward / reverse switching) until the tilting device 310 cannot be moved up and down. Operation) can be avoided, the load on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

  When the disc cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, when the left detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state, the circle is left as it is. Rather than rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be immediately rotated in the reverse direction to return to the state shown in FIG. As a result, the driving device 340 can be returned to the second initial state at an early stage, and unnecessary load is not applied to the driving device 340, so that the life of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

  With reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, a device for preventing the destruction of the driving device 340 will be described. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXXIX-XXXIX in FIG. In FIG. 38, the hand of the player holding and tilting the tilting device 310 with the tilting device 310 in the second state is illustrated by imaginary lines, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is illustrated. Omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grips and fixes the tilting device 310, the movement of the arm member 345 is restricted, so that the disc cam 344 cannot be rotated from the state shown in FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts rotating, a high load is generated between the drive motor 342 and the transmission gear 343b, and if left alone, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail. is there.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the transmission gear 343b is configured to be able to rotate freely with respect to the transmission shaft bar 343a for fixing the disc cam 344, so that the drive motor 342 can be prevented from breaking down.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving in a state where the disc cam 344 is fixed, and the transmission gear 343b is urged in the rotation direction, so that the clutch 343b2 and 343c2 are connected. The power is transmitted, and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thus, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can idle. Thus, it is possible to prevent the drive motor 342 from breaking down.

  When the player does not hold the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the left detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 is not turned ON while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360 °) (when the tilting device 310 is not set to the first state). In addition, it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of gripping and fixing the tilting device 310, and a notification is displayed by, for example, displaying it on the third symbol display device 81 so as to stop the gripping operation. Then, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped.

  This makes it possible to select a case where the player has intentionally performed an erroneous operation, to notify only at that time that the erroneous operation is to be stopped, and to stop the drive motor 342 early to prevent a failure. be able to.

  When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated from each other to cause a phase shift, the initial phase of the drive motor is shifted from the initial phase of the disk cam 344 having the same phase as the movable clutch 343c. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is continuously controlled (by the number of steps or the like) from the state before the occurrence of the phase shift, the disk cam 344 cannot be operated accurately (the phase shift cannot be corrected).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the drive device 340 can be specified to be in the first initial state by detecting that the left detection sensor 353L of the protective cover member 350 is in the ON state. By restarting the control of the drive motor 352 with the state as an initial position (resetting the initial phase of the drive motor 342), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c. The control can be performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disc cam 344 are adjusted again.

  Accordingly, when an effect is performed by operating the tilting device 310, there is a difference between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the drive motor 342 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310. Is prevented from occurring. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, it is possible to perform an effect by appropriately operating the tilting device 310.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle around the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotation direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity will be described below.

  FIGS. 40, 41, 42, and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG. 40 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state shown in FIG. 38. In FIG. 41, the disk cam 344 is further changed from the state shown in FIG. 344 is rotated in the direction of the arrow CCW. Also, FIG. 42 shows a state in which the disk cam 344 has been rotated 180 degrees in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state shown in FIG. 38, and FIG. 344 is rotated in the direction of arrow CW.

  As shown in FIG. 41, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CCW, the tilting device 310 moves up to the second state via the first state shown in FIG. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured to maintain the state in the first state shown in FIG.

  This is due not only to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it goes from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG. 43, but the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CW direction. In this case, even if the engagement rib 344c contacts the release member 346, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engaging rib 344c comes into contact with the releasing member 346 from below. In this case, the releasing member 346 is lifted by the engaging rib 344c, and the rotating claw is rotated. There is no load in the direction of pushing up the member 347. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

  Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, the operations from FIG. 38 to the first state shown in FIG. 40 and FIG. Is an operation different from either FIG. 41 or FIG. 43.

  For example, a difference in operation after the tilting device 310 reaches the first state may be generated by controlling the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39). Due to the difference, the player notices the control mode being performed, and the effect to be executed is grasped by the player, which may reduce the interest of the player. Further, when the operation of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310 is performed by suddenly stopping the drive motor 342, a load applied to the drive motor 342 increases, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 moves from the state shown in FIG. 38 toward the first state and the operation of the tilting device 310 thereafter is made different, the rotation of the drive motor 342 becomes Since only the directions are different, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the rotation direction in the driving mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the tilting device 310 moves to the first state when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 is raised from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

  On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the drive motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state. Since the change in the degree of expectation can be grasped, the player is given the movement of the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) and is moved toward the first state by the drive motor 342. Can be watched over.

  That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to suppress the player from gripping the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the driving motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. The device 340 can be prevented from being overloaded.

  In addition, since it is not necessary to stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) suddenly in order to perform an effect of suddenly stopping the tilting device 310, the load given to the drive motor 342 when the drive motor 342 is suddenly stopped is eliminated. Thus, the durability of the drive motor 342 can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, a case where the tilting device 310 performs an up / down operation without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player performs an operation of pushing down the tilting device 310 (third operation mode). explain.

  FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 along the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 44 illustrates a state in which the disc cam 344 has been rotated in the forward rotation direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 44) by a predetermined amount from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the driving device 340. The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) at an angle at which the overhang portion 344c1 does not pass through the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated by imaginary lines. .

  As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhang portion 344c1 of the disc cam 344, the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2 are engaged with the engagement portion of the release member 346. By rotating the disc cam 344 reciprocally while maintaining the positional relationship that does not pass through the 346d, the tilting device 310 can reciprocate up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

  In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is maintained in a state of being rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) with the change in the posture of the release member 346. When the player moves up and down, even if the player pushes down the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 do not engage with each other, and the tilting device 310 is moved to the first state (rotation) by releasing the hand of the player. When the pawl member 347 is engaged with the tilting device 310, an operation mode in which the tilting device 310 moves upward (up to the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising) and continues to move up and down can be implemented.

  Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, a difference in the effect is provided between the above-described first operation mode and the second operation mode and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a different meaning from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 and then releases the tilting device 310. The user can know whether the user has been moving up or down in the third operation mode.

  The difference in the effect is that the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and then released, the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state). Is performed) when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even after releasing the hand after pushing the tilting device 310). If the expectation of the jackpot is high, the player recognizes the expectation of the jackpot not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when the player releases the tilting device 310. Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings at which the player pays attention to the operation device 300. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device 300 can be improved.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Although the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up in the first embodiment has been described, the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment has the The slide claw member 2348 slides when the release member 2346 is pushed up. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 45A is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 according to the second embodiment, FIG. 45B is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. It is a side view.

  FIGS. 46A and 46B are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking operation of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348. .

  FIG. 46A illustrates a large angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position in the urging direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 2346, and FIG. The small angle state in which the rotating plate member 2347 rotates to the end position against the urging force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by being in contact with the disc cam 344 is in a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the protruding pin 346b is disposed at an intermediate position between the guide elongated holes 347b). (See FIG. 48).

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the driving device 2340 (see FIG. 47) includes a release member 2346, a rotating plate member 2347, and a rotation member as functional members supported by the shaft portion 341 c (see FIG. 47). A slide claw member 2348 disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 across the plate member 2347 and configured to be slidable along an arc trajectory about the rotation axis of the tilting device 2310 (see FIG. 47); , Mainly comprising. In the release member 2346, the rotating plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a shape curved so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and a forward end at an upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. A hook-shaped portion 2348b projecting in the shape of a hook (to the left in FIG. 45) and the curved portion 2348a and the hook-shaped portion 2348b are arranged so as to overlap in the thickness direction (the direction perpendicular to the paper of FIG. 47A). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed from a curved plate shape wider than the bending portion 2348a, and a protruding pin 2348d protruding in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly provided. Prepare.

  The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to a length slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348a of the slide claw member 2348 is configured to be slidable with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 in a state of being fitted into the rail portion 2347f.

  The hook-shaped portion 2348b has the same shape as the hook-shaped portion 347d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is provided on the lower surface thereof. This magnetic material is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be attracted to a bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 described later.

  The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the surface of the rotating plate member 2347 opposite to the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , A portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

  The protruding pin 2348d is a cylindrical member inserted into the functional long hole 2346e of the release member 2346, and is formed of a metal rod inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348e. When the release member 2346 rotates relative to the rotary plate member 2347, the protruding pin 2348d is pushed against the side surface of the functional long hole 2346e, and the slide claw member 2348 slides.

  The rotating plate member 2347 includes, in addition to the shaft support hole 347a, the guide long hole 347b, the insertion hole 347c, and the pull-down hole 347e, a rail portion 2347f that guides the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a slide. A long supporting hole 2347g into which the protruding pin 2348d of the claw member 2348 is inserted.

  The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-like portions extending from the upper end of the rotary plate member 2347. The side surfaces of the pair of plate-like portions facing each other are such that the rotary plate member 2347 is rotated forward (see FIG. 46 (counterclockwise), it is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft 314 (see FIG. 47).

  Like the rail portion 2347f, the support elongated hole 2347g is formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47). When the slide claw member 2348 is slid in a state where the protruding pin 2348d is inserted into the support elongated hole 2347g, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support elongated hole 2347g. The wobble can be suppressed.

  The release member 2346 includes a functional support hole 2346e that is a long hole formed in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the projection pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engagement portion 346d. .

  The functional long hole 2346e is formed as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed by a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. It mainly includes a hole 2346e1 and a second long hole 2346e2 extending from one end of the first long hole 2346e in a direction inclined toward the direction opposite to the shaft support hole 346a.

  As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotating plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 follows the curved shape of the rail portion 2347f. To slide.

  Since the functional long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 keeps the moving speed of the protruding pin 2348d without time delay for the movement of the releasing member 2346. Reflected on speed.

  That is, when the release member 2346 is quickly rotated, the slide claw member 2348 is quickly slid, while when the rotation speed of the release member 2346 is reduced, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 is also reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along the arc centered on the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348d to the functional long hole 2346e is directed in a straight line direction passing through the shaft support hole 346a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

  That is, in the present embodiment, although the slide claw member 2347 is slid by the rotation of the release member 2346, the slide claw member 2347 is slid by being pulled in the large angle state. It does not move. Therefore, similarly to the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is arranged in the first state, the slide claw member 2348 is engaged with the tilting device 2310, so that the tilting device 2310 can be restricted from rising.

  FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating changes in the posture of the tilting device 2310 in a time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 47 shows a state in which the second retracting portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is disposed below the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346. In FIG. 48, the disk cam 344 is changed from the state shown in FIG. Is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47), and the engaging portion 346d of the release member 2346 is pushed up. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is moved in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 48 (clockwise) and the release member 2346 is returned by the urging force of the second spring SP2.

  In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 fixed to the upper side surface near the lower edge of the opening 311b and made of a magnetic material.

  In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet 2311a1 and the hook 2348b are attracted by magnetic force. When the player pushes down the tilting device 2310 from this state, the attraction between the magnet portion 2311a1 and the hook-shaped portion 2348b is released due to a change in the posture of the tilting device 2310, so that a large load is applied from the tilting device 2310 to the slide claw member 2348. It will not be done.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet part 2311a1 and the hook-shaped part 2348b are attracted by magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

  Accordingly, the slide claw member 2348 is caused to slide at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the ascending direction by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, thereby causing the slide claw member 2348 to rotate backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved upward at a different speed from the upward movement when the restriction of the upward movement of the tilting device 2310 is released by rotating the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the ascending direction can be changed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the releasing member 2346 is released, the releasing member 2346 rotates backward (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the urging force of the second spring SP2. As a result, the slide claw member 2348 returns to the first state.

  By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in addition to the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation mode increases, the association between the operation mode and the jackpot expectation degree makes it easier for the player to use the operation device 2300 as a means of prefetching. Attention can be improved.

  According to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when the tilting device 2310 is raised by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hook-shaped portion 2348b of the slide claw member 2348 and the magnet portion 2311a1 of the tilting device 2310 are used. The tilting device 2310 rises due to the magnetic attraction between the tilting device 2310 and the tilting device 2310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315 by securing a large magnetic force. The load can be increased.

  That is, normally, when the player places his / her hand on the upper part of the tilting device 2310 and the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released, the tilting device 2310 is prevented from rising due to the weight of the hand. If the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand (even if the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), the player lifts the hand in the state shown in FIG. The tilting device 2310 can be raised in a manner.

  Thereby, when the tilting device 2310 is raised, a difference can be provided in the load in the rising direction (the force for maintaining the posture of the tilting device 2310 against the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by placing a hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pushing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

  For example, by associating the difference in the load with the degree of expectation of the jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading. Can be improved.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player. However, the operating device 3300 in the third embodiment is described. Is configured so that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state of being pushed by the player or in the state of being pushed by the player. You. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position as the right detecting piece 311gR extending downward from the bottom plate 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left detecting piece 311gL in the first embodiment (rotation of the tilting device 3310). A left detection piece 3311gL extending at a position perpendicular to the axis and at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane disposed at the center position in the rotation axis direction). The extension length of the left detection piece 3311gL is longer than that of the right detection piece 311gR, and the extension length is shorter than that of the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment.

  FIGS. 51A and 51B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. 51A shows the tilting device 3310 in the first state, and FIG. 51B shows a state in which the tilting device 3310 is being pushed. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3311gL is not inserted into the left detection sensor 324L, and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. No (left detection sensor 324L is off and right detection sensor 324R is off).

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L while the right detecting piece 3311gL is inserted into the right side. The detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

  By detecting a change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of the pushing, it is in the state of being pushed. , Or in the state of returning.

  That is, when the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in a state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the left detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right detection sensor 324R has changed from the OFF state, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

  FIGS. 52A and 52B are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. FIG. 52 (a) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the pushing end, and FIG. 52 (b) illustrates a state in which the tilting device 3310 is moving from the pushing end to the first state. . 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines. The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the portions where the detection sensors 324L and 324R overlap the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are schematically illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 311gR is inserted into the right detection sensor 324R. (The left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is ON).

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state arranged at the pushing end, the left detecting piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detecting sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted through the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is ON and the right detection sensor 324R is OFF).

  When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed to the end of pushing. By detecting that the sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R has changed from the ON state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

  Here, when the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 and an auxiliary load for raising the tilting device 3310 is applied, the voice coil motor 352 is applied to the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves downward. Rather than causing the tilting device 3310 to move upward, the load that causes the tilting device 3310 to rise more effectively can be applied by causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 moves upward.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is in the process of ascending and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in operation, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the ascending speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 after pushing the tilting device 3310 from the first state is slow. Become. In this case, even if the player performs a continuous tapping operation on the tilting device 3310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 effectively, the tilting device 3310 can be compared with a case where the tilting device 3310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 3310 can be performed comfortably.

  Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the tilting device 310 is pressed by the player. However, the operating device 4300 in the fourth embodiment is described. Is a mode in which the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 during the change from the second state to the first state is detected, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed based on the detection result. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k that is protruded in a plate shape from the front side of the protruding protrusion 311j of the case main body 4311.

  The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate portion 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. This is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321d and 4321e.

  FIGS. 54A and 54B are side views of the operation device 4300 illustrating a pressing operation of the operation device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54A, the tilting device 4310 is in the second state, and in FIG. 54B, the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the state shown in FIG. A state where the sensor 4321e has passed downward is illustrated. In FIGS. 54A and 54B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the lower frame member 4320 includes an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e at the front side of the bottom plate 4321. The upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are sensors of a photocoupler type, and are disposed in such a manner that the detection grooves are oriented so that the front detection piece 4311k can pass therethrough. In the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e are arranged at intervals of 20 ° on a circular orbit around the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

  When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing down on the tilting device 4310, the front detection piece 4311k has the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321d. 4321e. By detecting the interval of the passage timing, the magnitude of the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 is selected based on the determination.

  Here, in the case where the tilting device 4310 is pushed from the second position, the pushing length is long (because the period during which the acceleration can be applied is long). The upper limit of the operation speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, if there is no deceleration means, it is necessary to make the tilting device 4310 robust as a safety measure when the player pushes with full power, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. Challenges arise.

  Further, an elastic spring that applies a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end may be built in, and the tilting device 4310 may be decelerated by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with a weak force or a player who decides to perform the pushing operation gently, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the pushing position becomes a burden on the pushing operation, and it is easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 may not be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, whether or not to drive the voice coil motor 352 is determined by the timing interval at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state, respectively. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a strong reaction force from being applied to the tilting device 4310 until it is not necessary.

  That is, for example, when the interval between the timings at which the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between the ON state and the OFF state is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is turned off. If the driving is not performed and the above-described timing interval is shorter than a predetermined period, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

  Accordingly, when the operating speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is low, the reaction force felt by the player from the tilting device 4310 is only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the tilting device 4310 can be easily operated with a small force. Pushing operation can be performed.

  Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, not only the urging force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 at the end of the pushing as the reaction force to the tilting device 4310. Can be added. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54B, the voice coil motor 352 is driven before the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 projects below the lower frame member 4320. The control is performed in such a manner that the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is pushed in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the impact applied to the tilting device 4310 as compared with the case where the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 collide while the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is being pushed out.

  FIGS. 55A and 55B are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. FIG. 55A illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 is being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55B illustrates a state in which the tilting device 4310 reaches the pushing end. .

  In FIGS. 55A and 55B, the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are shown by solid lines.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the second state at a high speed, the projecting protrusion of the tilting device 4310 is in a state in which the tilting device 4310 is reaching the pushing end from the first state. The set portion 311j and the voice coil motor 352 are in contact with each other.

  When the tilting device 4310 is pushed in, the direction in which the projecting protrusion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is in the direction along the extension direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352. The force of the pushing operation can be consumed by moving the button. Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be applied, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

  At this time, the voice coil motor 352 does not have a structure in which a load is applied by friction like a disk brake, but has a structure in which a load is applied by an electromagnetic force. Therefore, damage to members is suppressed, and durability can be ensured.

  In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 have already contacted each other, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L is By gradually increasing the current flowing through the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

  Accordingly, the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the projecting protrusion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 contact each other is suppressed, and the deceleration of the tilting device 4310 from the first state to the pushing end is suppressed. The effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the pushing end position, the right detection sensor 324R is turned on. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and stops descending. Therefore, it is unnecessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

  In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55B, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (an operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). Thus, after performing the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 to the end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting vibration to a player who keeps putting his / her hand on the tilting device 4310.

  That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 and for the purpose of performing a vibration effect by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pushing end position.

  Next, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is vibrated to transmit the vibration to the player who pushes the tilting device 310 has been described. However, the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment includes the lower frame member 5320 And a drive motor 5411 for rotating a weight member 5412 disposed at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric, and the vibration is transmitted to a player touching the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 57 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation device 5300 is different from the operation device 300 in the first embodiment in that the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 and the driving device 340 is a driving device 5340. At the same time, the voice coil motor 352 is omitted from the protective cover member 350. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 have the same configuration as in the first embodiment.

  A vibration device 5400 including a drive motor 5411 is provided on the lower frame member 5320, and a disk cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch is provided on the drive device 5340. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disc cam 5344 will be described.

  FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibration device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 houses a transmission device 5410 that rotationally drives a fan-shaped weight member 5412, a transmission device 5410, and a drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410, and is made of a flexible material. A flexible member 5420 and a receiving member formed in a bottomed dish shape having an open upper surface, which separately accommodates the weight member 5412 and the flexible member 5420 and which is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320. 5430 mainly.

  The transmission device 5410 includes a driving motor 5411 formed of a rotating electric motor, and a weight member 5412 having a fan-shaped outer shape and having a rotation shaft of the driving motor 5411 pivotally supporting a portion corresponding to a pivot. And mainly comprising.

  The drive motor 5411 is provided with a pair of right and left fixed portions 5411a formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft projects.

  The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra, and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 is configured to vibrate together.

  The flexible member 5420 includes a main body 5421 having a cylindrical container shape having a bottom on the side opposite to the side where the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction of the drive motor 5411, and a main body 5421 in an assembled state. The left and right sides of the main body 5421 are connected to a pair of rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding in the form of a rib, and the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 protruding left and right on the open side of the main body 5421. It mainly includes a posture maintaining portion 5423 in which the fixing portion 5411a is embedded, and a pair of columnar projecting legs 5424 projecting upward from the upper surface of the main body 5421.

  The main body 5421 has the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411 and has a container-shaped depth. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body 5421, the axial end face of the drive motor 5411 and the open end face of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. In this state, the fixing portion 5411a is embedded in the posture maintaining portion 5423.

  The rib-shaped legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body portion 5421, but the left and right rib-shaped legs 5422 are provided by the posture maintaining portions 5423 on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is greater than that of the lower rib-shaped leg 5422.

  Since the protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a columnar shape, the load can be easily concentrated on one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Therefore, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by tilting the tilting device 310, the resolution of the degree of deformation of the flexible member 5420 with respect to the tilt angle of the tilting device 310 can be made fine.

  In the assembled state, the housing member 5430 includes a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and a second housing portion adjacent to the first housing portion 5431 and in which the weight member 5412 is housed. 5432 and a concave groove 5433 that is recessed downward from the upper surface on the connection surface of the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5432.

  When the flexible member 5420 is inserted until the lower rib-shaped leg portion 5422 reaches the bottom and the load applied when the flexible member 5420 is inserted is released (assembly load released state), the depth of the first accommodation portion 5431 is The protruding leg 5424 has a protruding depth.

  The depth of the second storage portion 5432 is a depth that is recessed to the outside of the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembly load release state, while the player applies a load to the protruding leg portion 5424 to apply the flexible member. When the 5420 is deformed (assembly load state), the depth is set so as to interfere with the rotation locus of the weight member 5412.

  The concave groove 5433 has a width slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 and a depth dimension slightly extended below the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in an assembly load state. You.

  FIG. 59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59) is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LIXc in FIG. In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 59 (a), when the tilting device 310 is set to the first state, the first region S51, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310, is pushed into the player three times from the first state, An end area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when it is arranged at the end position of the pushing, is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a), a protruding leg portion 5424 is protruded in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as a rotation axis. Therefore, the maximum amount of deformation of the protruding leg 5424 with respect to a change in the angle of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) can be ensured.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodation portion 5432 in the assembly load release state in which no load is applied to the protruding leg portion 5424.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the protruding legs 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center lines of the lower frame member 5320 in the extending direction. Therefore, the protruding legs 5424 can be evenly pushed right and left on the bottom surface of the tilting device 310, so that it is possible to prevent the flexible member 5420 from tilting left and right (when tilting left and right on the sheet of FIG. 59B) at the time of pressing. Thus, the protruding leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate portion 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 includes a pair of through holes 5321d that are bored so that the protruding leg portions 5424 can be inserted. Since the width of the through hole 5321d in the left-right direction is slightly larger than the diameter of the protruding leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is protruded. When pressed against the leg 5424, deformation of the projecting leg 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the shape of the protruding leg 5424 and facilitate the parallel movement of the main body 5421 together with the protruding leg 5424 downward (downward in FIG. 59B).

  FIGS. 60A and 60B are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59A. Note that FIG. 60 (a) shows the assembly load released state, and FIG. 60 (b) shows the state where the tilting device 310 occupies the terminal area S52 (see FIG. 59 (a)). The assembly load state after being pushed inward of the first storage portion 5431 is illustrated. The outer shapes of the second housing portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), when a load is applied to the vibration device 5400 from the assembly load release state and the assembly load state is reached, the protruding legs 5424 and the lower rib-like legs are provided. As the 5422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

  In the assembly load state, as shown in FIG. 60B, the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, when the tilting device 310 is pushed into the end position, the tilting device 310 is pushed. It is possible to reduce the impact when the 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57). Further, since the load is based on the elastic recovery force, the load can be generated without time delay even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed.

  Here, when the urging force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 57), the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) is used. The lifting speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is reduced. In this case, even if the player performs the continuous tapping operation of the tilting device 310, the ascending operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the hand of the player, and the continuous tapping operation cannot be performed comfortably.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 effectively, the tilting device 310 can be used as compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves upward only by the urging force of the torsion spring 315. Since the ascending speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the assembly load released state, the weight member 5412 does not abut on the inner wall of the second storage portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even when the drive motor 5411 starts to be driven in the assembly load released state, no vibration occurs due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432.

  In addition, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the fine vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420, and transmission to the housing member 5430 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the assembly load state, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is displaced up and down due to deformation of the upper protruding leg 5424 and the lower rib-shaped leg 5422. Configured in an acceptable manner.

  When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-shaped leg 5422 is slightly hardened. Therefore, the vibration damping effect of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 can be reduced, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

  In addition, the main body 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-shaped leg 5422 extends along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421, and is uniformly spaced left and right from the center axis. Since the flexible member 5420 is moved downward, the radially outer end of the rib-shaped leg 5422 is moved right and left outward (in the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-shaped leg 5422). It deforms in such a manner as to move in the direction of smaller resistance (see FIG. 60 (b)). In this case, since the projecting direction of the rib-shaped leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 has a left-right component, the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg 5422 can act in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembly load state, a horizontal load that may occur when the weight member 5421 collides with the second storage portion 5432 is partially reduced by the elastic force of the rib-shaped leg portion 5422 below the main body portion 5421. Can be absorbed. Thus, the displacement of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 61A and 61B are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 along the line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 59A.

  61 (a) and 61 (b) illustrate an assembly load state, and FIG. 61 (a) illustrates a state in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis. In (b), a state where the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation axis is illustrated. 61 (a) and 61 (b) show a state of the vibration device 5400 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player and occupies the terminal area S52.

  The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is placed on the upper side in the assembly load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is moved to a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second storage portion 5432 becomes the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. Note that, in the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is a distance equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

  That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembly load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof comes into contact with (rubs against) the second housing portion 5432. Therefore, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes as compared to the assembly load released state, so that different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

  The contact between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 generates a force for moving the weight member 5412 upward (FIG. 61B, upward) as a repulsive force. Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodating portion 5432 move close to and away from each other in the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is changed in the direction (upward) along the moving direction of the tilting device 310. ). By this repulsive force, the flexible member 5420 moves upward together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412, and the flexible member 5420 moves the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (along the moving direction of the tilting device 310). Direction) can be reinforced.

  As described above, the force that pushes back the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward is separately divided into the force generated as the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 and the force generated by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432. By using a combination of the generated forces, it is possible to adjust the force for pushing back the tilting device 310.

  That is, during a period from the start of the contact of the tilting device 310 to the protruding leg portion 5424 to the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 pushes the tilting device 310 back. After the tilting device 310 reaches the termination region S52, the repulsive force between the weight member 5412 and the second storage portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes the tilting device 310 back. Accordingly, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased in the vicinity of the termination region S52, so that the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made lighter and the impact during the pushing operation can be reduced satisfactorily. This adjustment can be performed while the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated control.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) is used due to the difference in detection timing. ) Is determined to be higher than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / h), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operating speed.

  For example, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 gives the tilting device 310 to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320. It is desirable to increase the load. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operation speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is previously operated so as to be in the downward (see FIG. 61B) posture.

  Accordingly, the end of the lowering operation of the drive motor 5411 can be raised to a position where the rotation axis thereof has risen upward from the lower end of the inner wall of the second housing portion 5432 by the radius Ra. Thereby, compared to the case where the weight member 5432 is arranged upward (see FIG. 61 (a)) (when the weight member 5432 can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61 (a)), the upper side of the drive motor 5411 is The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

  That is, when the protruding leg portion 5424 is pressed down by the same amount by the tilting device 310, the compression size of the flexible member 5420 and the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A). By doing so, it is also possible to prevent the force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 from being generated.

  Here, the contact of the member occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the transmission device 5410 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be widened. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, a portion touching the frame of the pachinko machine 10.

  That is, when the player pushes down the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320, so that the palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a fulcrum of the pushing or a part of the side of the hand can be used. Vibration can be transmitted to the player via the. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation where the vibration is not transmitted to the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the weight member 5412 is used only when the player pushes down the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 56) and the vibration device 5400 forms an assembly load state. And the housing member 5430 come into contact with each other to generate vibration.

  Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is in a rotating state in advance, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed, and the pushing operation of the player is detected. The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated from the player.

  That is, in the case where the player performs the pushing operation in a mode in which the player releases his / her hand immediately after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 (the mode of pushing in a pulse), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed in. In such a case, there is a possibility that the vibration cannot be generated until the player releases his / her hand (the start of the vibration cannot be made in time), and the player may not be able to experience the effect of the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the tilting device 310 is pressed, the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration is ready to be generated, so that the vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pressing of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the player can experience the effect by the vibration.

  In addition, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first housing portion 5431. Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is driven in advance, it is possible to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the player even before the tilting device 310 is pushed.

  Accordingly, the state where vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 can be realized by driving the drive motor 5411 in advance before pushing the tilting device 310.

  Next, the driving device 5340 will be described. The drive device 5340 is different from the drive device 340 in the first embodiment in a disk cam 5344 and a transmission shaft 5343. Other components are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment.

  FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 5340. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole recess C1 is formed at the center of a pair of disk cams 5344 composed of a left disk cam 5344L and a right disk cam 5344R.

  FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a rear perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Since the right disk cam 5344R and the left disk cam 5344L have symmetric shapes, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

  The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arms A1 that sandwich the transmission shaft 5343 are arranged at the connection portion with the transmission shaft 5343. It is.

  That is, the right disk cam 5344R has, at its center position, a support tubular portion P1 that extends cylindrically from the disk portion to the side where the circular rib 344b is provided, and an axial direction of the support tubular portion P1. Along the length of the extension distance, about a half of the extension distance, an axially symmetrical long hole shape, a long hole recess C1 recessed from the disk portion, and a shaft of the support cylinder portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1. And a pair of clamping arms A1 extending from the end in the direction toward the disk portion along the axial direction.

  The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion that supports the columnar member 5343a by making its inner diameter equal to the diameter of the columnar member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5343. The support cylinder portion P1 is a portion having the same axial arrangement as a region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a remaining without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

  The deforming portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions arranged with the elongated hole concave portion C1 interposed therebetween, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially tilted and deformed with respect to the transmission shaft 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part that performs

  The long hole concave portion C1 is formed so that the shape of the concave cross section is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm portion A1. Therefore, the holding arm portion A1 is configured to be displaceable in a direction (longitudinal direction) perpendicular to the width direction of the concave cross section of the long hole concave portion C1.

  Further, the opposing surfaces of the long hole concave portion C1 are configured to have a shape that engages with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a flat surface, and the other side surface is formed in an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. This can prevent the cylindrical member 5343a from rotating relative to the disk cam 5344.

  The holding arm portion A1 includes an engagement convex portion A1a protruding from a surface of the pair of arm portions facing the arm of the other side toward a direction approaching the arm portion of the other side. . The engagement convex portion A1a engages with the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a when connected to the transmission shaft 5343, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disk cam 5344.

  The tip shape of the engaging projection A1a is configured to match the arc shape of the engaging groove 5343a4 of the columnar member 5343a (see FIG. 64). As a result, as compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface, the radial overlapping length in the state where the engaging projection A1a is engaged with the engaging groove 5343a4 (FIG. 65) (B) the length in the left-right direction).

  The engaging convex portion A1a has a concave surface portion C2 (a long hole concave portion) in which the side surface on the side close to the connection pin 344d in the axial direction is the side surface of the right disk cam 5344R and is concave along the axis near the axis. (A side surface on the opening side of C1) and a surface position.

  Thereby, the engagement between the columnar member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the support cylinder portion P1 side (the lower side in FIG. 63B) with respect to the concave surface portion C2 (FIG. 65B). reference). Therefore, as compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted into the cylindrical member 5343a outside the concave surface portion C2 (upper side in FIG. 63B), the length of the column member 5343a protruding from the concave surface portion C2 is longer than the e-ring. (See FIG. 65 (b)).

  Further, it is not necessary to secure a space for fitting the e-ring (space required for sliding the e-ring against the surface) in the extending direction of the right disk cam 5344R (direction parallel to the surface). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the recessed area (radial area) of the recessed surface portion C2. Thus, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

  The transmission shaft 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is an exploded front perspective view of the transmission shaft 5343. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343a.

  The columnar member 5343a is the same as the fixing portion 5343a1 with the insertion groove 5343a3 interposed between the fixing portion 5343a1 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and the fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in front view. A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the cross-sectional shape, a groove into which an e-ring is fitted, and a fitting groove 5343a3 for positioning the disc cam 5344 in the axial direction by the e-ring; When the disk cam 5344 is fitted until reaching the e-ring fitted in the 5343a3, the engaging groove 5343a4, which is a groove in which the engaging convex portion A1a of the holding arm portion A1 engages, is mainly used. Prepare. In addition, the fitting groove 5343a3 is disposed outside the pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are formed in the left-right direction in the assembled state.

  The clutch operating portion 5343a2 is a portion that is inserted into the angle fixing hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and is a portion where the movable clutch 343c slides by the urging force of the coil spring 343d in the assembled state.

  Before the e-ring is fitted, the column is formed before the e-ring is fitted because a mechanism in which the e-ring is later fitted into the fitting groove 5343a3 to form a portion where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a is formed by the e-ring. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

  In a state where the diameter is uniform, a predetermined amount of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the shaft support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the shaft support hole 341b by the e-ring. And the axial displacement of the disc cam 5344 can be prevented by the e-ring.

  With the above-described configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disc cam 5344 can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, when assembling the disc cam 5344 to the transmission shaft 5343, the column member 5343a is connected to the end of the support cylinder portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on which the engaging projection A1a is provided. From the opposite end, insert into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted. At this time, before the engagement protrusion A1a is inserted into the engagement groove 5343a4 until the engagement protrusion A1a is fitted, the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a enters between the engagement protrusions A1a, so that the pair of engagement protrusions A1a is formed. The holding arm portion A1 is elastically deformed in such a manner that the distance between each other can be expanded. Thereafter, when the distal end of the cylindrical member 5343a passes through the engaging protrusion A1a, the engaging protrusion A1a and the engaging groove 5343a4 are arranged to face each other, and the engaging protrusion A1a fits into the engaging groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm portion A1 is elastically recovered, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

  On the other hand, the configuration of the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 functions not only in one-touch assembly but also in this embodiment as a structure for preventing destruction. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disc cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a view of the right disc cam 5344R along the line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65A. FIG. 66A is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66B is a right disk cam along the line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. It is sectional drawing of 5344R.

  FIG. 66 shows the deformed right disk cam 5344R when the player applies an overload to the unloaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, the engaging projection A1a only engages with the engaging groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of tilting around the extending distal end portion of the support tubular portion P1.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the elongated hole concave portion C1 is arranged in the direction in which the pair of sandwiching arm portions A1 face each other, the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial falling displacement is reduced. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the column member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R extend in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R in the direction in which the support cylinder portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected. Are in contact with each other, so that the resistance of the columnar member 5343a to the axial tilt displacement increases.

  Therefore, when an overload is applied to the right disk cam 5344R by the player forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 (the displacement of the connecting pin 344d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). Is applied, the direction in which the right disk cam 5344R is deformed with respect to the columnar member 5343a can be restricted.

  That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded as shown in FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), On the plane parallel to the plane of the disk portion, the disk portion is axially deformed with the support shaft r1 connecting the connection pin 344d and the center of the support cylinder portion P1 as the center. As a result, the distal end position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced along the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG.

  FIG. 67A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 67B is a diagram illustrating the operation when viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVIIb in FIG. FIG. 18 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. 67 (b), the illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345, and the release member 346 are illustrated. In FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343R is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is illustrated, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is illustrated, and the state near the connection pin 344d is illustrated in an enlarged manner. .

  In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts operating, the left disc cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the displacement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the player. Therefore, a load is generated between the arm member 345 trying to stay on the spot and the connecting pin 344d of the left disk cam 5344L trying to rotate. When this load occurs, the right disk cam 5344R can perform the above-described shaft tilt deformation, so that the load can be reduced.

  In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after the shaft tilt deformation is illustrated by imaginary lines. A change in the manner of connection with the arm member 345 due to the shaft falling deformation will be described with reference to an enlarged view.

  In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R rotates clockwise by a dimension Rd by the start of operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), the pivotal support of the arm member 345 by this dimension Rd. The hole 345a and the connecting pin 344d are displaced from each other, and in order to absorb the displacement, the right disk cam 5344R is deformed to fall over the shaft.

  Since the connecting pin 344d is tilted in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67 (a) due to the shaft falling deformation, the center Pb on the root side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the protruding tip side are right circular. The position is shifted along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. Since this displacement can partially absorb the displacement between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to the rotation of the right disc cam 5344R by the dimension Rd, the drive motor can be moved while the tilting device 310 is being gripped. When the motor 342 (see FIG. 62) is driven, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disk cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other by the axial deformation of the disk cam 5344. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344, so that the player drives the drive motor 342 in a state where the tilting device 310 is gripped and fixed. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates backward (in the direction of the arrow CW), the release member 346 is pushed upward by frictional force, but is repelled by the second spring. The elastic force of SP2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, since the rotation claw member 347 is stopped by the bottom plate 5321 and stopped, the state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  On the other hand, when the disc cam 5344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed down by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 is repelled in the direction. Acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotating claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

  Therefore, when the release member 346 contacts the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 operates along the operation direction of the disc cam 5344, the first spring SP1 or the first spring SP1 is independent of the rotation direction of the disc cam 5344. Among the elastic forces of the second spring SP2, the elastic force acting on the disk cam 5344 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the disk cam 5344 can be increased. Accordingly, the load applied by the release member 346 to the disk cam 5344 can be increased, and the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 can be reduced. Can be reduced irrespective of the rotation direction.

  In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed to have a line-symmetrical shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point (the direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the center point). The right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed irrespective of the rotation direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345). Shaft can be deformed by resistance.

  FIG. 68A is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 5300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6A, and FIG. 68B is an operation in the direction of the arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. 18 is a partial rear view of the device 5300. In FIG. 68B, illustration of the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Further, in FIG. 68 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the external shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 is shown by a solid line, and the shaft is overloaded due to overload. The outline in the state shown is shown by an imaginary line.

  FIG. 68A shows a state in which the tilting device 310 is driven by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) from the second state and falls down by the angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. Is shown of the player's hand gripping.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a), when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not, the right disk cam 5344R. The tip of the connecting pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R due to the shaft tilting, so that the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disc cam 5344R can be reduced. Therefore, the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

  Note that the items described as the right disk cam 5344R also apply to the left disk cam 5344L.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates while the tilting device 310 is held by the player, and an overload occurs. Then, the right disk cam 5344R tilts with respect to the axial direction.

  Therefore, by detecting the degree of the tilting operation in the axial direction, the occurrence of overload can be noticed at an early stage. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, if the drive motor 342 is driven during a period in which the right disk cam 344R makes one rotation, the detection hole 344eR of the right disk cam 344R passes through the right detection sensor 353R. However, when the player holds the tilting device 310, the right disc cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated, so that the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right detection sensor 353R, and the right detection sensor 353R. Since the input to 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload has occurred.

  In this case, a period of time required to rotate the right disk cam 344R by a predetermined angle in a state where no overload occurs is required before the occurrence of the overload is detected, so that the detection of the overload is delayed. there were.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disc cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disc cam 5344R is tilted in the axial direction (see FIG. 66 (b)), the overload occurs. Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a detection method, for example, a method using the notification device E1 fixed to the engagement rib 344c between the support cylinder portion P1 and the engagement rib 344c is illustrated (illustrated by an imaginary line in FIG. 66A). ).

  The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object comes into contact with the input unit, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arms A1 intersects with the engagement rib 344c. In addition, the input section is disposed in a manner to protrude toward the support cylinder P1. In a no-load state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are separated from each other (see FIG. 65 (b)), and in an overload state, the notification device E1 and the support cylinder P1 are formed in contact with each other (see FIG. 65). 66 (b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to determine at an early stage whether or not the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

  Next, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344, the engagement rib 344c are formed of separate members, and are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70, differences between the first embodiment and the second embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an exploded front perspective view of the driving device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the disk member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disk cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, since the right disk cam 6344R is formed by mirroring the left disk cam 6344L, the description of the left disk cam 6344L will be described. Only the right disk cam 6344R will not be described.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

  The left disk cam 6344L is provided with a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d and a detection hole 344eL in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and has a disk member 6344L1 pivotally supported by a cylindrical member 343a, and the disk member 6344L1. A ring member 6344L2 that is coaxially supported and is rotatable relative to the disk member 6344L1 is provided.

  The disk member 6344L1 has the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment disposed at the center position of the disk portion, and is annularly and axially spaced apart from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b in a radially outward direction. An annular rib 6344f protruding along is provided.

  The ring member 6344L2 has a ring main body 6344g having a ring shape having the same outer diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment and an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the circular rib 344b. A cover plate portion 6344h that is disposed at the axial end of the ring body 6344g and covers the ring-shaped opening of the ring body 6344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g. And receiving gear teeth 6344i disposed radially outward in the thickened portion.

  The annular main body 6344g is formed such that its inner peripheral diameter is larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the circular rib 344b. In the assembled state, the annular main body 6344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b, so that the central shaft portion 344a is formed. The ring member 6344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about.

  The axial end face of the annular body 6344g on the disk member 6344L1 abuts on the annular rib 6344f. Accordingly, the contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced as compared with the case where the annular rib 6344f is not formed and the disk member 6344L1 is in contact with the surface. Therefore, the relative rotation between the disk member 6344L1 and the ring member 6344L2 can be smoothly performed.

  The receiving gear teeth 6344i are meshed with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Accordingly, the ring member 6344L2 rotates based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348. In this embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 6344L2 is set to be three times the number of rotations of the disk member 6344L1 (while the disk member 6344L1 makes one rotation while the ring member 6344L2 makes three rotations). , The second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the number of receiving gear teeth 6344i are set).

  The second transmission device 6348 is a device rotatably supported by the fixed member 6342a along with the transmission shaft bar 343, and includes an auxiliary column member 6348a arranged in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a, and an auxiliary column thereof. A second transmission gear 6348b fixed to the member 6348a and meshed with the transmission gear 343b, and a reduction transmission gear fixed to both ends of the auxiliary column member 6348 and meshed with the receiving gear teeth 6344i of the ring member 6344L2. 6348c.

  With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, a description will be given of how the tilting device 310 is lifted up from the first state of the tilting device 310 by a plurality of types after the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released.

  FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 6300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. Note that FIG. 71 illustrates a state similar to the state illustrated in FIG. 36, and FIG. 72 illustrates a state in which the ring member 6344R2 has rotated one rotation in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) from the state illustrated in FIG. (A state in which the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by 1/3 in the backward direction (the direction of the arrow CW) while the disc member 6344R1 is rotated by more than one rotation and then reversed by that amount). Is illustrated. FIG. 73 illustrates a state where the ring member 6344L2 has rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) from the state illustrated in FIG. 72, and the tilting device 310 has been moved up.

  Here, from the state shown in FIG. 71, when the ring member 6344R2 is rotated in the forward rotation direction (the direction of the arrow CCW) to release the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 uses the urging force of the torsion spring 315 to release the rotation. It rises instantaneously and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

  In the operating device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position when the tilting device 310 is lifted instantaneously (without waiting for the rotation of the disc cam 344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is the second state. It was limited to the position where it was arranged (see FIG. 34).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disk member 6344R1 and the ring member 6344R2 rotate relatively, the connecting pin 344d, which is a support portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engaging rib 344c are provided. Can be changed, and the types of arrival positions of the tilting device 310 can be increased.

  That is, when the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is released from the state shown in FIG. 72, the tilting device 310 is instantaneously raised by the urging force of the torsion spring 315, and tilted downward by the angle D6 from the second state. (See FIG. 73). As described above, the tilting device 310 instantaneously (disc cam) releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and the releasing from the state shown in FIG. 72 by the rotating claw member 347. (Without waiting for the rotation of 344), and the position at which it reaches can be changed.

  Accordingly, for example, when the gaming machine is configured in such a manner that the degree of expectation of the effect is changed by a difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantly rises and reaches from the first state, the attention of the tilting device 310 is increased. Can be improved. In this case, there is no limitation on whether to increase the degree of expectation of the tilting device 310 ascending or to increase the degree of expectation of the type where the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is lower.

  However, by keeping the rising position of the normal tilting device 310 low (see FIG. 73) and reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximized, the expectation is improved. Can be associated with the magnitude of the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

  In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is raised, so that the player can watch the movement of the tilting device 310 until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. You can be encouraged to do so. Therefore, regardless of the effect mode of the tilting device 310, a game method of operating the tilting device 310 randomly can be suppressed.

  Next, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connecting pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, in the operation device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 includes a disc member. The 7344R1 and the connecting pin 344d are provided on separate members, and the separate members are configured to be able to form a fixed state in which they are fixed to each other and a sliding state in which they can be relatively rotated. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. First, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of a right disc cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the right disc cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is FIG. FIG. 75A is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam 7344R taken along the line LXXVa-LXXVa, and FIG. 75B is a partial side view of the right disc cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R has a disk member 7344R1 having a central shaft portion 344a through which a cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in an assembled state, and the disk member 7344R1. A ring member 7344R2 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the ring member 7340 and an engaging portion 7630 which is immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fits into the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2. And an engagement member 7344R3 having the following.

  The disk member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a center shaft portion 344a at the center, and has a detection hole 344eR at a portion extending in a flange shape from the edge of the cup toward the outside in the radial direction. This is a member having a shape in which the portion 344c is partially omitted (the portion between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 is omitted).

  The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 in a surface state in an assembled state, and has a first circular concave portion 7410 which is a circular concave portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a, and Radially between a second circular concave portion 7420 which is a circular concave portion having a diameter smaller than the first circular concave portion 7410 and deeper in the axial direction, and a first overhang portion 344c1 and a first retracting portion 344c2. An L-shaped insertion hole 7430 to be bored, and a fixing protruding radially outward from the side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 (outer peripheral side of the disk member 7344R1) near the insertion hole 7430. And a projection 7440.

  The insertion hole 7430 is a first rectangular long hole portion along the axial direction of the disk member 7344R1 at a position shifted from an intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retraction portion 344c2. A long hole 7431 and a second long hole 7432 which is a rectangular long hole extending from the bottom end of the first long hole 7431 on the bottom side of the disk member 7344R1 along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1. And a return portion 7433 that projects from the lower end of the second elongated hole 7432 toward the second elongated hole 7432 with the first elongated hole 7431 side as a fulcrum.

  The size of the second long hole 7432 in the width direction (short direction) is smaller than the size of the first long hole 7431 in the width direction (short direction), and the width of the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3. Direction (shorter direction).

  The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75 (b)) of the second elongated hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is formed so as to be movable outside the second elongated hole 7432.

  The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engaging member 7344R3, and has a sufficient height to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

  Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 (a) is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, FIG. 76 (b) is a rear view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow LXXVIc of FIG. 76 (a). It is a side view of the ring member 7344R2.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a) to FIG. 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 has a ring-shaped plate portion 7510 on which the connecting pin 344d is protruded, and an inner peripheral surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510. And a thick portion 7520 extending in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 along the center and having a star-shaped through hole formed in the center.

  The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a plate thickness dimension equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than an inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. You. Thus, in the assembled state, it is possible to prevent the resistance of the relative rotation from becoming excessive while aligning the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1.

  The thick portion 7520 has a length extending from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 so as to reach (not interfere with) the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75 (a)). Is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the second circular recess 7420. This prevents the resistance of the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 from being excessive while enabling the engaging member 7344R3 to be able to operate in the radial direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 75A) in the assembled state. can do.

  The thick portion 7520 has a deformed through hole 7521 formed in the axial direction, and a concave portion formed in the deformed through hole 7521 radially outward at regular intervals in the circumferential direction (in the present embodiment, equally divided into 5). And an equidistant concave portion 7522 to be provided.

  The deformed through hole 7521 has an inner peripheral shape that is different from a shape that is disposed radially outside the engaging portion 7630 when an engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Be composed.

  FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the engaging member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a side view of the engaging member 7344R3 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIb in FIG. 77 (a).

  As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)), the engaging member 7344R3 is located outside the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 in the radial direction. The arcuate plate portion 7610 disposed on the side, an extension portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the back side end portion (right end portion in FIG. 77 (b)) of the arcuate plate portion 7610, and the extension portion The engaging portion 7630 extending in the front-rear direction (the left-right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending tip of the portion 7620 and the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 are provided on the side facing the engaging portion 7630. And a coil spring CS1 formed from a coil spring.

  The arc-shaped plate portion 7610 includes a spring fixing protrusion 7611 that is a protrusion for fitting the coil spring CS1 at a position facing the distal end of the engaging portion 7630 on the inner peripheral side surface.

  The extended portion 7620 is a portion that is inserted into the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state, and when the extension portion 7620 is pushed inward in the radial direction in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extension tip thereof has The ring member 7344R2 has an extended length that protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface.

  The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly smaller than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in the assembled state with a length that passes through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

  As will be described later, the engagement member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that is displaced by receiving a load from the release member 346 and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disk member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

  Referring to FIG. 78, a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described. FIG. 78 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (d) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId in FIG. 78 (c). 78F is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78F is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78E.

  FIGS. 78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c) and 78 (d) show a state where only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the disk member 7344R1, and FIG. 78 (e). ) And FIG. 78 (f), a state where the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344R3 are inserted into the disk member 7344R1 is illustrated. For easy understanding, illustration of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 is omitted in FIGS. 78 (b), 78 (d) and 78 (f).

  As a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engaging portion 7630 of the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the first long hole 7431 (see FIGS. 78A and 78B). As described above, the width dimension of the second elongated hole 7432 is made shorter than the width dimension of the engaging portion 7630, so that the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. Can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

  Next, the engaging member 7344R3 is slid along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7432 in the depth direction of FIG. 78D until the position of the engaging portion 7630 and the position of the fixing protrusion 7440 coincide. Moving.

  At the position after this movement, the fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the displacement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 78 (d)) of the disk member 7344R1 is suppressed. The member 7344R3 can be held immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

  In addition, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state where the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven out of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Next, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the direction in which the second elongated hole 7432 extends, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved by the elastic recovery force to the second position. It enters inside the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

  In a state in which the second elongated hole 7432 is inserted inward, the tip of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extending portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, and the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (deformation resistance is large). (See FIG. 78 (d)), so that the movement of the extension 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Accordingly, the movement of the engaging member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction can be restricted, so that the position of the engaging member 7344R3 can be prevented from shifting during operation.

  After the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of the disk member 7344R1 while the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. I do. When the load is released from the engagement member 7344R3, the engagement portion 7630 moves in the radially outward direction D7 by the elastic force of the coil spring CS1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally-divided concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1.

  Through the above-described steps, the right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled. Note that the right disk cam 7344L has a mirror-symmetrical shape of the right disk cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disk cam 7344R.

  Next, the operation of the engagement member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b), and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347 and the disk cam 7344 are shown as the center. Illustration of unnecessary portions is omitted.

  The rotating claw member 7347 of this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the length of the guide slot 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), at the raised position when the engaging rib 344c abuts from below and passes, the projecting pin 346b is configured to be the end of movement.

  The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (the upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is cut obliquely in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

  In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG. 81, the disk cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 79 (a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

  FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which the engaging member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts on the releasing member 7346, and the releasing member 7346 starts to rotate. In FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80) shows a state where the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80). FIG. 80 (a) shows a state where the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed into the disk member 7344R1 and pushed to the end. FIG. 80 (b) shows a state where the disk member 7344R1 is further rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a), and FIG. 81 shows a state where the right disk cam is shifted from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b). The state after the engagement member 7344R3 has been separated from the release member 7346 by the rotation of the engagement member 7344R in the backward rotation direction is illustrated. Note that in FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a) and 80 (b), the release member 7346 has reached the end of the range in which it can rotate relative to the rotating claw member 7347 ( Angle small state) is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in a state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contacting, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set to be larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. Therefore, the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward, and the state in which it protrudes outward is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 7346 is in contact with the outermost diameter side surface of the engaging member 7344R3, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 are in the small angle state. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, when the release member 7346 rotates in the forward rotation direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the small angle state of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 is formed. When the inner peripheral surface and the first protrusion 344c1 and the first retracting portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c are in contact with each other, the outer peripheral surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346, and the disc cam 7344 is moved. (See FIG. 80 (a)).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the rotation of the disc cam 7344 causes the release member 7346 to rotate toward the small angle state, and when it becomes impossible to rotate any more (small angle state), the release member 7346 is released. From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction of the disk cam 7344.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), when the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation in the backward rotation direction cannot be continued. The engaging member 7344R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 80A). In this pushed-in state, the engagement portion 7630 is disposed radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the modified through hole 7521.

  Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disk member 7344R1 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a). Also, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

  Due to this shift in the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 moves from one originally provided equally recessed portion 7522 to another different equally recessed portion 7522, so that the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 are provided. Are relatively rotated by one concave portion (72 degrees).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R further rotates, the contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the releasing member 7346 is released, so that the engaging member 7344R3 projects radially outward. Then, the engaging portion 7630 is housed in the equally recessed portion 7522 again. In this process, one equally recessed portion 7522 in which the engagement portion 7630 is accommodated is shifted.

  That is, by passing the process shown in FIG. 79 from FIG. 79 (a), the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connection pin 344d provided on the ring member 7344R2 can be equally divided into concave portions 7522. Can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval of the concave portions (72 degrees).

  With reference to FIG. 82, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction will be described. FIGS. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 83 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotating claw member 7347, and the disk cam 7344 are illustrated as centers, and other unnecessary parts are not illustrated.

  FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b) show how the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rotation direction (the counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) in chronological order. FIG. 82 (a) shows a state immediately before the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R come into contact with each other. In FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 is pushed upward by the release member 7346. FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the disk cam 7344 has further rotated in the forward rotation direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). (B) shows a state after the release member 7346 and the engagement member 7344R are separated from each other.

  As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disk cam 7344 rotates forward, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 rotate backward (FIG. 82 (a)). When rotating in the (rotational direction), there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 apply a load in the forward rotation direction by the elastic force of the first spring SP1. Can only be done.

  Therefore, a load is not generated enough to push the engaging member 7344R3 inward in the radial direction, and the engaging member 7344R3 is moved radially outward until the engaging member 7344R3 comes into contact with the release member 7346 and separates therefrom. Maintain the overhang state. Therefore, when rotating the disc cam 7344 in the forward rotation direction, the relative rotation of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

  By switching the rotation direction of the disk cam 7344 from these configurations, it is possible to switch whether the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other. Therefore, in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation does not occur (see FIGS. 82 and 83), it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilt width as in the first embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment, the tilting width of the tilting device 310 can be changed in the rotation direction in which the relative rotation occurs (see FIGS. 79, 80, and 81).

  In the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 for relatively rotating the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction in which the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 is released (the direction in which the fixing is not released). Since they match, the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be relatively rotated while the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state (see FIG. 84) (the posture is maintained constant).

  Accordingly, a state in which the player is not noticed (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is used as a state for changing the relative posture of the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 in a position invisible to the player. be able to.

  With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, a description will be given of the fact that according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types of modes for raising the tilting device 310 from the first state can be formed. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of operation device 7300 taken along a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 is immediately moved from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7B (without rotating the disc cam 7344) by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 85 shows a state in which the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship capable of being displaced. In FIG. 85, the ring member 7344R2 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 84 and 85, the state where the second protruding part 344c3 is brought into contact with the engaging part 346d is shown in FIGS. 84 and 85. The contact state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to this embodiment, the tilting device 310 immediately releases the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the first state (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2). The range of movement can be changed.

  That is, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 84, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (a state in which the tilting device 310 has moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

  On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is shifted rearward and downward from the position shown in FIG. It moves to a state where it sinks below the two states.

  Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the position where the tilting device 310 reaches from the first state by the ascending operation immediately (without rotation of the disc cam 7344) can be changed. Thus, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the power of the operation device 7300 as the effect device can be improved.

  Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed has been described. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover 370 that covers the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the following description, the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86 will be described with the front side of the paper as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper as the rear (back) side. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left). ) Side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 8010, respectively. The definition of this direction is the same in the description with reference to the drawings before FIG.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of the pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 87 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state where the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (unfolded) in which the back pack 92 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12 with the inner frame 12 opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (deployed). FIG. FIG. In FIG. 90, the reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which four sides are fixed with a wooden plate as an upper side and a lower side and aluminum plate as a left and right side. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game arcade by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to island facilities. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component, but has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 supporting structure (the hinge 18 and the like) and the locking structure of the outer frame 11 are provided. The member may be provided in a game arcade.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12. The left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base side) and the right side is a rotation tip side in front view. (Opening / closing front end side) so as to be rotatable forward.

  As shown in FIG. 88, a back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is the rotation base end side (opening and closing base side) and the right side is the rotation when viewed from the front. It is rotatable rearward as a moving tip side (opening / closing tip side).

  As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip, and the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are locked to the outer frame 11 so that they cannot be opened. And a function to lock the front frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 12. In these locked states, as shown in FIG. 86, an unlocking operation is performed by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed at the front of the pachinko machine 8010. As a result, each is released.

  The front frame 14 is rotatably mounted on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and these front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (the metal fitting 57 is a columnar portion, and the metal fitting 58 is a shaft). The front frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 12 by engaging the inner frame 12 with a metal plate having a hole.

  Specifically, the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front side end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at a position below the hinge 19 above the inner frame 12, and the front door mounting bracket 57 extends from the front end to the rear side. It is pivotally supported by a pivot support plate portion 12e having a fitting concave portion 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is recessed to have a fitable size. The front door mounting bracket 58 has a stepped cylindrical shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in a configuration in which cylinders having different diameters are vertically connected, the diameter of the upper cylinder is smaller than that of the upper cylinder). (A small shape) is axially supported by being externally fitted to the support pin 19a.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 includes a main body frame 14a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing various members (such as the decorative portions 8029 to 8033) and units (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like) on the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  The front frame 14 is provided with a window 14c having an opening smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in a front view (see FIG. 86). The window unit 14 c is covered from the back side by the glass unit 16, so that the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area on the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 has a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having an outer shape larger than the window 14c and having transparency, and a fixing frame (not shown) for integrating the transparent glasses 16a and 16b. And The fixed frame is formed of a synthetic resin into an annular shape slightly larger than the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, and the outer peripheral edges of the transparent glasses 16a and 16b are adhered to the fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 is integrated with the laminated glass. Have been.

  In addition, the glass unit 16 is formed to be colorless and transparent by the transparent glasses 16a and 16b, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed to be colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. As long as the game area can be visually recognized through 16, the game area may be formed not colored and transparent but colored and transparent.

  As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of illuminated parts 8029 to 8033 incorporating light-emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window part 14 c in the front frame 14. In these illuminated units 8029 to 8033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, the illumination unit 8030 on the upper side of the window 14c incorporates a light emitting unit that lights up when a predetermined error occurs, such as a shortage of payout balls, and a light emitting unit that lights up during payout of a prize ball.

  In addition, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member made of punching metal) that covers a speaker assembly 450 that outputs a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window 14c. . As shown in FIG. 86, the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 are swelled toward the near side below the window 14c, and are vertically arranged side by side.

  The upper plate 17 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them toward the ball firing unit 112a while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 50 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 that opens in the front-rear direction and guides the ball to the lower plate 50 is formed on the rear side surface of the lower plate 50.

  In addition, it is not necessary to provide a portion for storing game balls at a plurality of locations separately in the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50, and the lower plate 50 is abolished and only the upper plate 17 is used as a single storage portion. Is also good.

  An operation device 300 that is manually operated by the players is provided on the near side of the upper plate 17 (the storage area for the game balls). The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to a player's operation is performed on a display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided in another portion such as the periphery of the lower plate 50 other than the upper plate 17 or may be provided at a plurality of positions. In addition, the operation device 300 is a push-button switch as an operation method. Alternatively, the information may be input by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicating with the upper plate 17, a front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicating with the lower plate 50, and a foul ball passage portion 145 ( FIG. 92).

  A payout ball receiving portion 143 that projects rearward and is opened upward is formed at an upper corner portion (a corner portion on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) of the passage forming unit 140, and the payout ball receiving portion 143 is formed. 143 is divided into right and left by a partition wall 144, thereby forming a passage entrance of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and a passage entrance of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, respectively.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging game balls that have not reached the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the lower plate 50 as foul balls.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The foul ball received in foul ball receiving portion 146 flows down the internal passage of foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92), and is then discharged to lower plate 50. The foul ball passage 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the foul ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

  In addition, the foul ball passage 145 joins with a ball removal passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which unfired balls flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 are guided by a ball removal operation by the player. It is formed as follows.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, which are resin cover members fastened and fixed to upper right and left corners, and bulge to the back side, are attached. On the front side of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a connector for wiring that conducts electricity to the electric decoration portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, and the internal substrates and one end of the electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14 are provided. An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is provided, and the electronic board and the connector are covered by multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

  In a portion of the front frame 14 covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172, a wiring passage groove 14h communicated to the left and right electric decoration portions 8031 and 8032, and the electric decoration portions 8031 and An electronic board 14i to which the wiring drawn from the 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are pulled out rearward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic board 14i from the back side. It is.

  Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is applied to the illumination unit 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the near side in FIG. 89). A connector of a conductive wiring or a connector having one end connected to the internal substrates of the illumination portions 8031 and 8032 can be easily inserted and removed from the electronic substrate 14i.

  The multifunctional cover members 171 attached to the turning front end of the front frame 14 are provided as a pair above and below the turning front end of the inner frame 12, and the board support device 600 (which holds the base plate 60 of the game board 13). (See FIG. 126). The upper and lower devices are positioned so as to face each other, and can be in contact with each other depending on the situation. The details will be described later.

  On the rear side of the front frame 14, a container-shaped member formed of a resin material and having an open front side is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and formed between the front frame 14 and the front frame. A long cover member 173 that accommodates wiring in a space is mounted from the back side. The long cover member 173 has a configuration in which the cross-sectional area decreases as the front frame 14 moves from the rotation front end side to the rotation base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a that forms the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring, An upper wall portion 173b, which is disposed in parallel with the lower side of the front frame 14 and is disposed above the lower wall portion 173a and constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring, coincides in plane with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140. It is composed of a shape.

  The long cover member 173 is a wall portion which is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 similarly to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and the lower wall portion 173a and the upper An upwardly extending wall portion 173c extending upward from the wall portion 173b is provided.

  The upwardly extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that an end portion connected to the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b projects in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space that can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion is secured, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

  In other words, the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (a wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave) while the front frame 14 is rotated from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c. It protrudes to the base end side. Therefore, by bending the wiring at the curved portion of the wiring, a change in the wiring position (see FIG. 96) that occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed can be absorbed, so that it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting and generating a load. It is possible to reduce the risk of disconnection of the wiring.

  On the back side of the front frame 14, an upper extending wall portion 173 c of the long cover member 173 (a portion closest to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14) and a part of the main body frame 14 a and the front frame An inverted cup-shaped portion 178 that is a portion formed of a resin material and that opens downward is disposed between the vertically long plate portion and the rotating base end side of 14.

  The reverse cup portion 178 is, for example, a portion for improperly pushing and expanding the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, inserting a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18, and entering the game area to take measures against cheating. It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the inverted cup shape of the inverted cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be hindered, it is possible to prevent the piano wire from reaching the game area.

  In addition, since the inverted cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed from a resin material, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts performed by heating the end of the piano wire. That is, when the piano wire whose tip is heated enters and is pressed against the inverted cup portion 178, the heat dissolves the inverted cup portion 178 and can pass through the inverted cup portion 178. 173 also melts. When the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wire accommodated in the front side of the long cover member 173 is burned out. , Making it easier to detect fraud.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall 178a on the long cover 173 side of the inverted cup portion 178 is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts (closes) to each other in plane. Further, since the normal of the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 in the wall portion 178a is directed downward, when the piano wire enters the inverted cup portion 178 from below, it can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall portion 178a. When the inverted cup portion 178 is melted, the long cover 173 can be melted with a high probability, so that fraudulent acts can be easily found.

  The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left-right direction when the tip of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcedly opened to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the distal end thereof becomes a wall portion. 178a.

  Since the wall portion 178a has a shape that matches the curved portion of the upwardly extending wall portion 173c, when the piano wire is inserted further deeply, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall portion 178a, and the tip of the piano wire becomes It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Further, even if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the tip of the rotation of the front frame 14 (travels in the left-right direction). Can be prevented from reaching the game area.

  Also, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to a person who commits wrongdoing through the piano wire from increasing, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below the 173a, it is possible for the person who commits the wrongdoing to find the wrongdoing before fleeing and to easily secure the person who does the wrongdoing. .

  In other words, even if the piano wire is guided into the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who commits the wrongdoing cannot determine it, so that he or she thinks that the piano wire is on the way to the game area. . Until the front end of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, until the front end of the piano wire is seen from the front side through the window 14c), the operation of inserting the piano wire deeper is naturally performed by a person who commits an illegal act (piano wire). Without questioning that the insertion was not successful). Therefore, it is possible for the person who commits the misconduct to notice that the misconduct has been found, and to prolong the time required to escape.

  Note that the detection device may be a device constituted by a photocoupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are allowed. For example, it may be provided on the locking mechanism 20RK or on the rear side of the operation handle 51. In the case where the detection device is provided on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally provided on the operation handle 51 may also be used for determining the entry of the piano wire.

  As shown in FIG. 89, the ball firing unit 112a is a device that is exposed on the front side when the front frame 14 is opened, and is provided at the lower right portion on the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, the ball launching unit 112a includes an electromagnetic launching solenoid 701 provided as a launching device, and a game ball struck by the launching solenoid 701 formed by an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. A launch rail 730 that guides the game ball so as to be emitted toward an area therebetween, and a ball feeder 720 are provided.

  The ball feeder 720 supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 89) one by one onto the firing rail 730. In this case, the supplied game balls are arranged on a projecting path of a plunger 702 provided as a launching portion in the firing solenoid 701. Then, the plunger 702 moves toward the game ball on the firing rail 730 by the input of the electric signal to the firing solenoid 701, and the game ball is launched toward the game area. Note that the electric actuator of the ball firing unit 112a is not limited to the firing solenoid 701, and a firing motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball firing unit 112a will be described later.

  On the left side of the inner frame 12 and to the left of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 including a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the dish passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected is arranged. Has been established. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole that penetrates in a front-rear direction through a portion where the dish passage forming member 160 is provided, and the dish passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover this through hole from the front side. Fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 90, the dish passage forming member 160 has a body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and a body-side lower dish passage portion 162. The main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162 are opened toward the rear side such that one end thereof can communicate with a through hole penetrating through the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction. A curved passage in which the direction of the passage changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-back direction to the up-down direction) is formed so that the end of the passage is opened downward. In this configuration, the ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12, enters the dish passage forming member 160 from one end of the dish passage forming member 160, and is discharged from the other end. You.

  When the front frame 14 is closed, the dispensed ball receiving portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in the front frame 14 enters the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. A front door-side upper plate passage portion 141 is disposed below the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161, and a front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 is disposed below the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162.

  As shown in FIG. 90, a shutter 163 for restricting the outflow of game balls from the main body-side upper dish passage portion 161 and the main body-side lower dish passage portion 162 is provided in the lower portion of the dish passage forming member 160. . The shutter 163 is provided so as to be switchable between a blocking position where the exit portions of both passages are narrowed to prevent the outflow of the game ball and an allowance position where the outflow of the game ball is allowed.

  An urging member (a coil spring or the like) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12, the urging member is attached. The shutter 163 is kept at the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where the game balls are stored in the main body-side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body-side lower plate passage portion 162, the inconvenience that the stored balls fall down is avoided. I have.

  On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the outer peripheral portion of the payout ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14 resists the shutter 163 against the above-described biasing force. Is pushed back to the allowable position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other. Permissible.

  The board 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the board 167, the places where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are provided and the places where the connector CN3 is provided are configured by separate boards. This is because the connectors CN1 and CN2 are used for transmission with the main control device 110, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113, so that the transmission target is different. This is intended to prevent malfunction in advance.

  With reference to FIGS. 91 and 92, a portion of the front frame 14 below the window 14c will be described. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14c of the front frame 14 are exploded and shown. FIG. FIG. 14 is an exploded front perspective view of a front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below 14c are exploded and shown.

  As shown in FIG. 91 and FIG. 92, below the window 14 c of the front frame 14, on the front side of the main body frame 14 c, the front side of the upper plate 17, the diagonally upper right of the lower plate 50, and The operation device 300 is disposed at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction, and the cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the operation device 300.

  The cover 370 is a member that is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship to cover the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side, and has a width substantially equal to the width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right ends of the cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decorations 8031 and 8032, respectively.

  The cover cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 at least by fastening portions 370a formed at the left and right ends, and has a body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right central portions project toward the front side. The main body curved portion 371 is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body curved portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right central portions and the left and right end portions toward the sides closer to each other in the width direction. And a plate-like member that closes an opening surrounded by the main body curved portion 371 and the hanging portion 372 and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a main body curved portion 371 or a hanging portion 372. A light-transmitting portion 373 fastened to at least one of them, a left-side flat support portion 374 formed as a plane on the upper surface of the left end of the main body curved portion 371, and a flat surface on the right end of the main body curved portion 371. And a support groove 376 recessed from the back side of the right side plane support portion 375 and having a concave width increasing (tapered) toward the back side. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body curved portion 371 has a front side edge portion having a rounded curved shape, and has a rear side edge portion in a shape matching the front side edge of the upper plate 17, and the upper plate in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The front left edge 371a of the front side of the front device 17 in the front-rear direction and the front left edge 371a of the operation device 300 are formed in a shape that matches the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operating device 300, and the upper edge of the upper side in the assembled state. The rear middle edge 371b abutting on the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and the rear middle edge 371b is formed on the opposite side of the rear left edge 371a so as to match the front side edge of the ball lending operation unit 40. It mainly includes a rear right edge portion 371c that comes into contact with the ball letting operation unit 40 in the front-rear direction in the assembled state.

  The hanging portion 372 covers the operation device 300 from the front side together with the main body bending portion 371, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported, and is provided between the hanging portion 372 and the right corner cover 380 arranged at the right corner of the front frame 14. This is a part that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by being formed into a shape that does not create a gap (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is screwed into a bottom plate on which the recessed portion 15a is formed by screwing the recessed portion 15a at a position on the front side with respect to a recessed portion 15a described later. It is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate to be formed.

  The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion that can transmit the light emitted from the operation device 300 to the front side and can produce an effect by the light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300. In addition, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the lower frame member 320 is arranged close to the lower frame member 320.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is arbitrarily determined. In the present embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, six LEDs emit light upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e), and two LEDs emit light downward (disposed on the lower surface of the illumination support portion 341e). , Respectively.

  Light emitted from the LED that emits light downward in the LED device 341f passes through different numbers of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320, and then passes through the light transmitting unit 373. I do. On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310 and then transmits light. Through the section 373.

  Therefore, for example, when the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward is kept constant, the amount of light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting unit 373 is smaller than when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, it is not necessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control load by omitting the control to change the amount of light), and in accordance with the state change of the tilting device 310. An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

  Further, as another effect control method, it is possible to perform control to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward according to the change in the state of the tilting device 310. For example, in accordance with the change of the tilting device 310 from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the light amount is increased (in a stepwise manner) while the tilting device 310 is changed to the first state. By controlling the light amount to change slightly (in a stepwise manner) in accordance with the change from the first state to the second state, light that can be visually recognized through the light transmitting portion 373 due to the change in the state of the tilting device 310 is controlled. Can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

  The left side flat support portion 374 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 vertically in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8031 and the illuminated portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left flat support portion 374 toward the illuminated portion 8031. . This can suppress the downward displacement of the illuminated part 8031.

  In the assembled state (FIG. 86), the right-side flat support portion 375 vertically contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032. That is, when a downward load is applied to the illuminated portion 8032 and the illuminated portion 8032 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side flat support portion 375 toward the illuminated portion 8032. . Accordingly, the downward displacement of the electric decoration 8032 can be suppressed.

  Although details will be described later, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 come into contact with the lower surface of the upper panel unit 400, and when the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward, the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032 are displaced. An upward reaction force is generated toward the upper panel unit 400. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported over a wide range by the illuminated portions 8031, the illuminated portions 8032, and the cover 370 that are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. The force required to support the unit 400 can be widely distributed.

  The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end of the illuminated portion 8032 entering from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration portion 8032 is in a state of entering the innermost part of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 and the front end of the right side flat support portion 375. And the position match.

  The details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembled state can be configured by fastening and fixing the cover 370 and the illuminated portion 8032 to the main body frame 14a, respectively. A separate fixing part for fastening the cover 370 and the illuminated part 8032 to each other can be dispensed with.

  Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a resin plate-like plate member 14d is provided on the main frame 14a at the back of the main frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) disposed on the front side of the main frame 14a). The passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the body frame 14a) on the rear side of the plate member 14d. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to another member (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) with the main body frame 14a interposed therebetween. The main body frame 14a is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member (a member constituting the upper plate 17 or the like) disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a).

  Even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin penetrates the sheet metal member 150 (for example, a wire or a piano wire having a heated end is pressed and melted), the front frame is not affected. It functions as an entry prevention member that makes it impossible to enter the inner frame 12 side from the front side of 14. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even if a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed, and it is possible to prevent the illustrated wire from entering the back side of the front frame 14. .

  The sheet metal member 150 is formed so as to cover the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 145 in the left and right directions when viewed from the front, and the open front side is a passage forming unit. It mainly includes a fitting box part 151 fitted to the fitting part 140, and a flat plate-like plate part 152 that covers the back surface of the lower side of the foul ball passage part 145 and the ball removal passage 147.

  Since the fitting box 151 covers the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145, the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the foul ball passage are formed. Not only when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates at the lower end of the passage 145 in the front-back direction, but also when the passage forming unit 140 penetrates in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire enters beyond the passage forming unit 140. Can be prevented.

  Since the plate-shaped portion 152 covers the back of the foul ball passage 145 and the ball emptying passage 147, a wire exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed to the right of the lower plate 50 to form a through hole. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized member from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, a wire is pressed against a place where the operation device 300 is removed and the thickness before and after the operation device 300 is reduced (a place obliquely above the rear of the recessed portion 15a). By doing so, a case where a through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters is illustrated.

  Further, the front frame 14 includes an operation portion rear member 155 fastened to the left end of the passage forming unit 140 from the rear side, and the operation portion rear member 155 has the cylinder lock 20 disposed in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). The upper and lower positions are fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation unit back member 155 is a member configured to increase the size in the front-rear direction by ribs formed mainly in the front-rear direction from the outer edge of the left and right long plate member. In addition, a through hole 156 formed in the plate member so that the cylinder lock 20 can penetrate therethrough, and a screw which is formed above and below the through hole 156 and which fastens and fixes the operation unit rear member 155 to the main body frame 14a is inserted. A pair of insertion holes 157, a pair of connection insertion holes 158 that are vertically arranged in a portion (left end) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140, and a pivot base end that is larger than the through hole 156. And an opening / closing restricting portion 159 protruding rearward on the side.

  The connecting insertion hole 158 is disposed so as to coincide with the connecting portion 148 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is formed in a columnar shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the connecting insertion hole 158 at a position that coincides with the upper connecting insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction, and protrudes from the rear side. And a screw-in portion 148b formed as a hole through which a screw inserted into the connection insertion hole 158 can be screwed in a position matching the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction. Prepare mainly.

  With this configuration, when the operation unit rear member 155 is overlapped on the rear side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the projecting portion 148a is passed through the upper connection insertion hole 158 so that the passage forming unit 140 and the operation unit rear surface are connected. The operation unit rear member 155 is easily fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140 by aligning the position with the member 155 and then screwing the screw through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b. be able to.

  An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left edge of the left end of the operation portion rear member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed and the lower edge thereof at right angles. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extended wall portion 148c that extends rearward from a plate that forms the skeleton of the passage forming unit 140 so as to divide the region. 148c is formed in an L-shape that can be in contact with the wall 158a in the up, down, left, and right directions in the assembled state (see FIG. 89).

  Therefore, in order to align the operation unit rear member 155 with the passage forming unit 140, in addition to passing the projecting portion 148a through the connection insertion hole 158, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved with respect to the extension wall portion 148c. The right and left surfaces make it possible to quickly and easily adjust the position and posture of the operation unit rear member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140.

  The opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that is disposed in front of and behind the board support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). Under a predetermined condition, there is an effect of restricting the front frame 14 from being closed by contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13.

  In the present embodiment, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is a portion that extends toward the rear side of the operation portion rear member 155 and is formed of a synthetic resin. The shape is U-shaped. Therefore, it is harder to bend than when it is formed into a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material required while securing rigidity as compared with the case where it is extended in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open part. Can be reduced. Therefore, the same thickness as the thickness of the other part of the operation unit back member 155 (for example, since the strength depends on the main body frame 14a, there is no problem even if the strength is low and the strength of the part formed as thin as possible) (Thickness), the strength of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 can be ensured while improving the formability.

  The cross-sectional shape of the opening / closing restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as rigidity can be secured and the shape can be maintained, and is not limited to a U-shape. For example, as compared with a flat cross section, a cross section of a curved (wave) shape, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wavy cross section, or a cylindrical cross section may be used.

  Further, the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is not formed as a part of the operation portion rear member 155, but is bent and extended from the main body frame 14a to the rear side, or from another member fixed to the rear side of the main body frame 14a from the rear side. It may be composed of a metal part that is extended. However, when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is made of a synthetic resin as in the present embodiment, the board surface supporting device 600 is in contact with the board surface supporting device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed of a metal member. Chipping or denting can be prevented. Thereby, the worker who changes the state of the board support device 600 and attaches or detaches the game board 13 can reduce the risk of being injured by touching a chip or a dent formed in the board support device 600.

  Here, since the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is disposed on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 with respect to the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock further disposed on the rotation distal end side. It is possible to ensure a long interval between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the location 20. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged on the rotation tip side are locked by mistake when the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board surface support device 600 or the game board 13. it can.

  As a path through which a foreign substance such as a wire enters, for example, a path passing through a gap in the operation device 300 is assumed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be entirely separable to the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the rear surface of the main body frame 14a even when following the gap of the operation device 300.

  The harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) that supplies power to the operation device 300 is inserted into a wiring through hole 14a1 (see FIG. 103) drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173. However, the harness HN3 is connected to the operating device 300 via a connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right corner of the outer peripheral wall of the protective cover device 350 (see FIG. 57).

  Thus, even if a foreign matter such as a wire enters the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire or the like reaches the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the substantially case-shaped operation device 300. Since it is difficult to do so, it is possible to easily prevent foreign substances such as wires from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, as the foreign matter that enters the operation device 300, a liquid is considered. For example, a player who feels bad about the game result may pour drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. At this time, the operation device 300 at an affordable position tends to be a prey to which drinking water can be poured, and if no countermeasures are taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) and the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 13) may fail. There is a possibility that.

  Furthermore, if a liquid such as drinking water enters behind the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board or the like, but as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is located on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since it is configured to be separable and independent, it is possible to prevent liquid such as drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the rear side of the main body frame 14a.

  In addition, on the bottom plate upper surface of the lower plate unit 15 (the surface facing the operation device 300), a concave portion 15a is formed in a T-shape when viewed from above. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess. It is not a complete case shape, and a clearance gap is formed in some places (for example, see FIG. 13, the transmission hole 321a and the opening 325 correspond to the clearance gap). The concave portion 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the falling liquid.

  In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 functions as an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further, is connected to wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor accommodating portion 341e and the lighting support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17B and 18), liquid such as drinking water is supplied to the drive motor 342. It can be applied directly to prevent failure.

  Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the up-down direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be splashed. The liquid only adheres to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, the failure of the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented.

  With the above-described configuration, even if a player such as drinking water is splashed on the return player, the next player can play the game as usual as long as the player touches the upper surface of the operation device 300 and touches the touched portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the maintenance time of the operation device 300 from squeezing the business hours.

  Below the window 14c of the front frame 14, a binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96 show a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 have been removed from the front frame 14 as in FIG. 91.

  FIG. 93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

  The bundling movable member 180 is a member that is fixed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and that binds the harnesses HN <b> 1 to HN <b> 3 extending leftward from the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173 c.

  In this embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) and the harness HN2 connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) are respectively connected to the binding movable member 180 without a relay board. It is guided and bound by the binding movable member 180.

  On the other hand, a harness connected to each of the illumination portions 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300, or the frame button 22 (see FIG. 86) is once provided in the relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173. Are connected (collected) to each other, a bundle of extension harnesses HN3 is directed from the relay board to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

  The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and is rotated by a main body 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body 181 in the vertical direction. A movable arm 182 pivotally supported, and one side surface of the movable arm 182 in the direction of rotation along the lower edge of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). A pair of highly flexible binding arms 183 extending from the side opposite to the main body 181 in the direction of rotation of the movable arm 182 (the side facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A). At a position (intermediate position) between a pair of locking portions 184 that are disposed in a U-shape as viewed from above and that can lock the binding arm portion 183. It extends downward from the lower edge of the movable arm 182 and has an opening. Mainly includes that the temporary retaining portion 185, a.

  Note that while the binding movable member 180 is formed with high flexibility of the binding arm 183, the other portions are formed with at least lower flexibility (high rigidity) than the binding arm 183.

  The main body portion 181 has a fixed portion 181a having a cross section formed in a substantially horseshoe shape on the upper side and having a through hole in the center and having a through hole in the center, and protrudes from the lower left and right corners of the fixed portion 181a toward the plate member 14d. A pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate stopper extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extended end curved close to the plate member 14d side. 181c, a plate-like support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a (see FIG. 96 (a)), and a portion disposed above the support plate portion 181d. And a cylindrical fastening portion 181e formed of a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of the screw to be fastened.

  The plate member 14d includes, at a position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, a hole group 14d1 including a through-hole arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

  When a screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a is fastened and fixed to a corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, a pair of rotation preventing protrusions 181b are fitted into corresponding fitting holes of the hole group 14d1. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the binding movable member 180 from rotating around the screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and to determine the posture of the binding movable member 180 with respect to the plate member 14d at the time of fixing.

  The intermediate stopper 181c maintains the harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the plate members 14d. In the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward by reducing the distance between the extension end portion (lower end portion) and the plate member 14d, and the center is located on the plate member 14d side. Due to the shape curved along the arranged circle, a large cross-sectional area is secured in a region for accommodating the harnesses HN1 to HN3 (region sandwiched between the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 181c) while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation. can do.

  The support plate portion 181d forms a plane for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the outer circumferential surface of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e is fitted inside the base end portion of the movable arm portion 182, and the movable arm portion 182 is formed. It is pivoted (see FIG. 96).

  The movable arm portion 182 has a base end portion that is smoothly connected to a plane OS1 that is offset from a shaft support position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, with a base end portion supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. 182a, and a thin plate portion 182b having a long and thin shape that is continuously provided on the opposite side of the base end portion 182a from the pivot position.

  The base end portion 182a has left and right ends (a portion where a straight line connected to an axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a rear end portion (the end with the plane OS1) of the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion externally fitted to the cylindrical fastening portion 181e. The approaching portion) extends in the rotational direction from the side wall. Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the center of the radius of curvature is arranged on the same side, and the distance between the side walls becomes gradually shorter as approaching the plane OS1, and when reaching the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It is equivalent to the thickness.

  Therefore, the rigidity of the base end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the base end portion 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) that does not intend elastic deformation, and the thin plate portion 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) that intends elastic deformation depending on circumstances. .

  Since a pair of the binding arm portions 183 have the same shape, only one will be described, and the other description will be omitted. The bundling arm 183 has small width portions 183a formed near the distal end with a width equal to the width of the root and large width portions 183b formed wider than the small width portion 183a alternately at equal intervals. It is formed. In a fixed state, the binding arm 183 is inserted from below into a through-hole formed between the locking arm 184 and the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 93B).

  The large width portion 183b of the binding arm 183 is formed to be slightly larger in thickness than the small width portion 183a. In the present embodiment, since the thickened portion is formed on the outer peripheral side in a fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B), a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm 183.

  The locking portion 184 is formed on the movable arm portion 182 side with a large opening 184a, and is formed on the opposite side of the movable arm portion 182 with the large opening portion 184a interposed therebetween, and has a larger opening width than the large opening portion 184a. And a small opening 184b (see FIG. 96).

  The large opening 184a has a size that allows the binding arm 183 to pass through without being close to the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183 to pass. The large width portion 183b has a size that cannot pass (is locked).

  According to the present embodiment, when the binding arm 183 is to be moved relative to the locking portion 184, the binding arm 183 is disposed on the side of the large opening 184a (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 becomes smaller). When the binding arm portion 183 is to be locked to the locking portion 184, by arranging it on the small opening 184b side, the size of the inner area (tightness) easily surrounded by the binding arm portion 183 can be reduced. Can be adjusted.

  The temporary fixing portion 185 has a through hole at the center thereof, through which the binding band can be inserted. Even if the binding arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 cannot be bound, a commercially available binding band can be inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. , The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be bound.

  The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. FIG. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing a lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 94 (b) is a partial cross section of the front frame 14 along the line XCIVb-XCIVb in FIG. 94 (a). FIG. 95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a front frame taken along line XCVb-XCVb of FIG. 95 (a). 14 is a partial sectional view of FIG.

  94 (a) and 94 (b) show a state where the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range), and FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 ( In b), the movable arm 182 rotates in a direction away from the plate member 14d, and comes into contact with a vertically long metal part constituting the left part of the main body frame 14a (the other limit state of the movable range). Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is configured to be rotatable by about 160 degrees around an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame 14 (an axis pointing in the vertical direction). This angle is usually used in view of the situation of installation of the pachinko machine 8010 in the amusement shop (a situation where the pachinko machine 8010 is juxtaposed on the left and right and if it is rotated by 90 degrees or more, it may collide with the adjacent pachinko machine 8010) In this case, the rotation angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 is sufficiently larger.

  Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and can be rotated with respect to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95). Since there is no movable arm 182, the possibility of the movable arm 182 being degraded due to elastic deformation and broken can be reduced.

  Next, the manner of supporting the harnesses HN1 to HN3 will be described. Since the arrangement of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is regulated by being supported by the binding movable member 180, for example, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from being accidentally sandwiched between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and broken.

  FIG. 96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (b) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (a). FIG. 96 (c) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

  96 (a) and 96 (b) show one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d) show the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved from the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upwardly extending wall 173c to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. You. That is, since the horizontal line of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening that opens to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c is the same, the horizontal line is extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally, and can be supported by the intermediate stopper 181c.

  Since the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c near the cylindrical fastening part 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, the harness HN1 on the opposite side of the upper extending wall 173c across the intermediate stopper 181c. To HN3 can be made to conform to the shape of the movable arm portion 182 of the binding movable member 180. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 96 (b) and 96 (d), the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 have a curved shape, which can prevent extreme bending deformation.

  In addition, by disposing the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the region surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, especially in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96B), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Accordingly, disconnection due to bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

  FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b) are schematic top views of the front frame 14, the inner frame 12, the binding movable member 180, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. is there. Note that FIG. 97 (a) illustrates one limit state of the binding movable member 180, and FIG. 97 (b) illustrates the other limit state of the binding movable member 180.

  97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically illustrated. The members fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and supported by the rotation center point P57 are schematically illustrated by solid lines. The rotation center point P57 is shown as a rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 about the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

  From the one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b), the inner end is formed by rotating the base end 182a of the movable arm 182 about the cylindrical fastening part 181e. Since the opening and closing of the frame 12 and the front frame 14 is supported, a large load is not applied to the thin plate portion 182b, and the deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, so that the durability can be improved (FIG. 96 ( b) and FIG. 96 (d)).

  As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the bundling movable member 180 are the main bodies of the front frame 14 irrespective of the open / close state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12. It is routed along a path passing near a vertically long metal part (a part where the base end part 182a of the movable arm part 182 abuts in FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left part of the frame 14a. That is, it is possible to prevent the curved portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from approaching the rotation front end side of the front frame 14 by forcibly circling the harnesses HN1 to HN3.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from hindering the work of the worker when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and to settle the harnesses HN1 to HN3 when the front frame 14 is closed ( It is possible to improve the fit that is bent only once on the rotation base end side (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed vertically above the inverted cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). With the support mode in which the intermediate stop portion 181c disposed vertically above the inverted cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3, for example, the tip of a wire or a piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt and penetrate the inverted cup portion 178. In addition, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent acts in which a wire enters between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

  That is, when the wire is pressed against the lower surface of the inverted cup portion 178 to melt and penetrate the wire and advance the wire toward the game area side, when the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the inverted cup portion 178, the temperature becomes high. The tip of the heated wire is pressed against the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the intermediate stopper 181c. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned out, and conduction is disabled.

  When the electrical continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 is interrupted, an error signal is output and an alarm is sounded (an error screen is displayed), thereby making it possible to quickly detect a fraud. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a person who performs wrongdoing from gaining wrongful profit.

  More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 burns out, the ball can be fired even when the operation handle 51 is rotated. Disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period from the time the fraud is committed to the time the fraud is discovered (it is possible to detect the fraud early).

  In this case, a wire is entered into the game area, and after the game area is manipulated (for example, after bending a nail to make it easy to win illegally), the ball is placed in the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2) or the like. , It is possible to prevent a person who commits an illegal act of illegally obtaining a prize ball from firing a ball, thereby preventing improper profit from being given. That is, it is impossible to perform a specific wrongdoing.

  Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 is burned out, the operation and return button of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) is used. 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, there is a possibility that the person who commits the wrongdoing may not be able to collect the bills and the remaining ball of the card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) due to his own wrongdoing. Therefore, deterrence against wrongdoing can be exerted.

  Further, in order to eliminate the possibility that it is impossible to collect the bills and the balance of the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) and perform fraud, the card unit (ball lending unit) Even though the balance of the unit is 0 yen, the cheating is performed without leaving the seat, so that the gaming machine shop can easily notice the fraud.

  In the first place, when the connection of the harness HN2 is disconnected, a gaming machine store that outputs a disconnection error (CR error) of a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) checks the disconnection error (CR error). This makes it possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the sheet metal member 150 and the outer shape of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide openings 53 are arranged at the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 142 and the lower end of the foul ball passage 145. In the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 142 occupies a region of about 2/3 of the left-right width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left portion of the ball guide opening 53, and the foul ball passage portion 145. Is partitioned by a partition plate portion 53a so as to occupy the remaining area (area of about 1/3 of the left-right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right part of the ball guide opening 53.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 are passages extending from the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the foul ball receiving portion 146, respectively, so that the ball can flow down toward the lower plate 50. And S-shaped paths SL1 and SL2 whose extending directions are directed (switched) at least once to both left and right sides.

  The S-shaped path SL1 can increase the flow path length of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 while keeping the vertical dimension of the passage forming unit 140 short, so that the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 stays inside the front door side lower plate passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thus, the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while securing the vertical dimension of the window 14c (see FIG. 86) large, so that the vertical dimension of the game area and the effect area is reduced. Because of the large number of balls that can be temporarily secured on the lower plate 50 (and the upstream side thereof), the stress of ball refilling given to the player (when the balls of the lower plate 50 are gone, remove the balls from a thousand boxes A pachinko machine 8010 capable of suppressing stress due to a request for replenishment or the like can be provided.

  The front door side lower plate passage portion 142 and the foul ball passage portion 145 include bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2, respectively, as regions whose extending directions are bent in the up-down direction and the left-right direction. With features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 includes a first bending region NEa1 formed on the downstream side and a second bending region in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEa1. And a region NEa2.

  Further, the foul ball passage portion 145 includes a first bending region NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending region NEb2 disposed on the upstream side of the first bending region NEb1 so that the left and right of the characteristic portion are reversed. , Is provided. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending region NEa1 will be described, and the description of the other bending regions NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 will be omitted.

  FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending area NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, a side wall Na disposed on the opposite side to the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends left and right. A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting with the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extending end. And walls N, Nb, Nc extending from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

  The proximity wall Nc has a surface Nc1 opposite to the ceiling wall Nb and is formed to be curved along the S-shaped path SL1, so that the surface Nc1 functions as a guide surface of a sphere. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 opposite to the surface Nc1 (the surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) regulates the traveling direction of the illegally inserted wire HM (wire or small-diameter metal represented by a piano wire or the like). This function will be described later. The distance between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is set to be larger than the width dimension (diameter) of the wire HM.

  As shown in FIG. 99, the shape of the first bending area NEa1 can prevent the illegally inserted wire HM from penetrating deeper. In other words, as shown in FIG. 99, a path that proceeds to the upstream side of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 with the ball guide opening 53 as an entrance is considered as an approach path of the wire HM that is illegally inserted. In this case, In this case, the wrongdoer advances the wire HM while pressing the wire HM against the side wall of the lower door passage portion 142 on the front door side.

  When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by the wrongdoer, the wire HM enters the gap Nin, but the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1. Even in this case, since the wire HM advances rightward through the S-shaped path SL1 of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142, the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin. Will be. That is, by arranging the pair of bending regions NEa1 and NEa2 inverted left and right, the wire HM can enter the gap Nin without leakage.

  FIG. 99 shows an example of the traveling path of the wire HM when the wire HM enters the gap Nin. In addition, the tip position of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the traveling direction of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM that has entered the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the adjacent wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (sandwiched), further progress of the wire HM can be prevented, and further, the wire HM can be prevented from being held. it can.

  On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not catch and moves further, if the wire HM projects from the gap Nin, the wire HM projects in a posture with the tip facing downward. Even if it does, the tip of the wire HM will proceed downward. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wire HM from reaching the payout device 133 disposed upstream of the payout ball receiving portion 143 and the game area disposed upstream of the foul ball receiving portion 146.

  This allows the wire HM to reach the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causes the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an incorrect payout ball, or allowing the wire HM to reach the game area and causing the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2). By forcibly opening the movable device and making it easy to win a fraud, it is possible to prevent an illegal payout ball from being obtained and a person who commits an illegal act to obtain an illegal profit.

  Returning to FIG. 98, the description will be continued. The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed such that the vertical width of a portion downstream from the merging region CE where the ball ball passage portion 147 joins is approximately twice as large as the diameter of the ball (in this embodiment, twice or more). Thus, when the sphere flowing down the ball passage 147 is disposed in the merging area CE, the sphere flowing down the foul ball passage 145 enters the merging flow path CE (the balls simultaneously enter the merging area CE). Even if two spheres are arranged vertically, the possibility that the spheres are sandwiched between the upper and lower walls and mesh with each other can be extremely reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being hindered in a portion downstream from the merging region CE.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 includes a passage portion 145a formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2 and connecting the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 up and down. The passage portion 145a has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, and is formed so that the rear-side bottom plate portion of the passage-forming unit 140 projects downward as it goes downward.

  In a region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the rear bottom plate portion of the passage formation unit 140 is located at the same position as the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in a region downstream of the passage portion 145a, The rear bottom plate portion is located at the downstream end of the passage portion 145a and the surface position.

  That is, in the foul ball passage portion 145, the front and rear width is set to be larger in a region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145a than in a region on the downstream side of the passage portion 145a. In the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 145 has a front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage 145a.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the foul ball passage portion 145 is set to be slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, when balls stay in the foul ball passage 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged upstream and downstream of the passage 145 so that the number of balls that can be stayed can be increased. Since the centers of the spheres are prevented from being aligned in the front-rear direction (they are slightly shifted left, right, up and down), it is possible to prevent two spheres from simultaneously entering the passage portion 145a.

  In other words, the approach of the ball to the passage portion 145a can be restricted one by one. Thereby, even when two or more foul balls continuously flow into the foul ball passage portion 145, the foul balls can be prevented from reaching the merging region CE at the same time. The possibility of being interposed between the upper and lower walls can be reduced.

  The foul ball receiving portion 146 extends in a plate shape from the back side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side, the left end portion is connected to the left wall portion, and the flow lower surface of the ball is directed rightward. The inclined plate portion 146a that descends downward, the closing portion 146b that closes the foul ball receiving portion 146 vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a, and the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 below the inclined plate portion 146a. A curved guide plate portion 146c that extends in a plate shape to the rear side and that is curved in such a manner that the direction of extension extends upward toward the rear side.

  The ball is guided along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c to the foul ball passage portion 145 side (front side), while the foul ball receiving portion 146 is moved to the front side by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b. The passing position of the ball passing through can be shifted to the right side of the foul ball receiving portion 146. In other words, the ball that rolls on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the closing portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side portion of the foul ball receiving portion 146. Can be.

  Thereby, the period until the ball that has passed through the foul ball receiving portion 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2 can be lengthened. That is, since the vertical bounce of the ball can be finished before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (since the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the foul ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2. While the width of 145 is set small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be made smooth.

  The foul ball passage portion 145 has a small passage width (slightly larger than the diameter of the ball) in a range (for example, the passage portion 145a) in which the S-shaped path SL2 is formed. It is possible to prevent the tool from passing through the foul ball passage 145.

  Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. Note that FIGS. 100 and 101 show a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the illuminated portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a.

  The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long in the left and right directions, and its left and right ends are supported by the right panel unit 500 constituting the illuminated portions 8031 and 8032. In this lower support structure, the lower end of the right end of the upper panel unit 400 has, like the support groove 376 of the cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 that is recessed from the back side to the front side. (See FIG. 118), and fitting grooves 522b, 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed at the upper end of the right panel unit 500 fit into the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 are connected.

  Accordingly, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 need not be directly fastened and fixed, but can be connected and fixed to each other by being fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. Note that, based on the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the order of assembling the upper panel unit 400 to the main body frame 14a is defined as the order of fastening the upper panel unit 400 after fastening the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

  Further, fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) provided in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 which are divided into right and left are respectively replaced with left and right claws forming the supported groove 417. With the configuration in which the parts are sandwiched and fitted, it is possible to prevent the heavy plate units 500R and 500L from being separated from each other left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (the fitted state, see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14. 102 and 103, the upper side plate member 14e sandwiched between the main body frame 14a and the upper panel unit 400 (see FIG. 89) on the front side of the main body frame 14a, and the multifunctional cover members 171, 172 include the main body frame 14a. The state disassembled from 14a is shown.

  The upper side plate member 14 e is a member that sandwiches the speaker assembly 450 between the upper frame member 410 and the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and is provided in the concave portions 462 and 482 (see FIGS. 121 and 122) of the speaker assembly 450. It has a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1 to be fitted.

  The fastening portion 14e1 has a through-hole through which a screw is inserted from the back side thereof, and fastens the screw passing through the through-hole to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410, thereby forming the upper frame. It is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

  FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by screws inserted from the rear side into insertion holes formed in the main body frame 14a is disassembled from the main body frame 14a. The illustration of the upper panel unit 400, the upper side plate member 14e, and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, while the cover 370 is illustrated for reference.

  In the actual assembling procedure, the cover cover 370 is assembled to the main frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main frame 14a. In the right panel unit 500, the right side wall portion forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

  FIG. 105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded rear perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510, and FIGS. 109 is an exploded front perspective view of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. 108 shows a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 109 shows a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes a left heavy plate unit 500L and a right heavy plate unit 500R that are superimposed in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed, and a main body frame is provided. 14a (see FIG. 104), and is mainly provided with a vertically long plate-shaped support plate portion 510 which is fastened and fixed.

  The heavy plate units 500L and 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted from the back side to the front side into the support plate portion 510. In this state, the support plate portion 510 is attached to the main body frame 14a from the back side. It is fastened and fixed to the body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by screws inserted toward the front side.

  The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending the extension portion 511a in a plate shape from the outer edge (right edge) on the side facing the main body frame 14a to the rear side, and is in an assembled state. In FIG. 86, a fixed plate 511 in which the inner wall (left side wall) of the extension 511a contacts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, and a board member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511. A plurality of cover side through holes 513 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, A pin support hole 515 formed in the fixed plate 511 on the right side of the lens side through hole 514.

  The fixing plate 511 includes a base portion 511b in which the substrate member 512 side portion protrudes in a trapezoidal shape toward the front side in a shape overlapping with the substrate member 512 in a front view, and the base member 511b comes into contact with the front surface of the base portion 511b. 512 is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

  The base portion 511b is capable of abutting on the heavy plate units 500L and 500R in the width direction in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) (see FIG. 115 (b)). Can be suppressed. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

  In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extended portion 511a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560 than the base portion 511b, so that the front side of the extended portion 511a is shifted. The outer cover member 560 contacts the support plate 510 in the front-rear direction, while the left side surface of the fixed plate 511 is formed up to the rear side end as a surface substantially at the same position as the side surface of the base 511b. The rear end of the inner cover member 520 can be arranged at the surface position of the rear end of the support plate portion 510, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 86), the inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is connected to the support plate portion 510. Abuts on the left side surface 511c.

  The board member 512 is an electronic board (printed board) on which a plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a row that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (11 [mm] interval in the present embodiment) between adjacent LEDs. . In other words, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged inside the shape in which the light guide member 540 is projected from the front, and emit light in a posture in which the optical axes are parallel to each other toward the light guide member 540 from directly behind the light guide member 540. Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

  Since the width of the end surface of the light guide member 540 on the LED 512a side is formed longer than the width of the LED 512a (left and right width of the light emitting portion) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107), the light emitted from the LED 512a does not leak. The light enters the light guide 540 and exits from any of the surfaces of the light guide member 540, and the ingress and egress of light and the path thereof will be described later.

  The cover-side through-hole 513 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 527 provided on the inner cover member 520 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 527 from the rear side. The inner cover member 520 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the rear fastening portion 527.

  The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the rear fastening portion 556 provided on the outer lens member 550 and for inserting a screw fastened to the rear fastening portion 556 from the rear side. The outer lens member 550 is fixed to the support plate portion 510 by fastening the screw to the rear fastening portion 556.

  The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the protrusion 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted. The pin support hole 515 has a left-right width slightly larger than the diameter of the protrusion 566, and a vertical width set to be approximately twice the diameter of the protrusion 566. Therefore, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 is brought into contact with the support plate portion 510 and fastened and fixed while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined.

  That is, when the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly displaced up and down with respect to the support plate portion 510 in a fastening preparation state where the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut on the support plate portion 510 from the front side (projections 566). (In the case where the position is displaced up and down by about the same diameter as the above), the protrusion 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515. Thus, by inserting the protruding portion 566 into the pin support hole 515 and then moving the heavy plate units 500L and 500R up and down by the positional shift with respect to the support plate portion 510, the positional shift is eliminated, and the fastening is easily performed. Fixation can be performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L includes an inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the window 14c (see FIG. 86) and is formed of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is made of a light-transmissive colorless resin material.

  The right heavy plate unit 500R faces the light guide member 540 facing the left heavy plate unit 500L in the left-right direction, and the front end is opposed to the light guide member 540 in the front-rear direction. An outer lens member 550 formed of a transparent white resin material, and a light guide member 540 and an outer lens member 550 disposed on the right side of the outer lens member 550 and formed of a resin material that does not transmit light. And an outer cover member 560 that is fastened and fixed.

  Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Note that FIG. 110 is a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and FIG. 111 is a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side, and five plate members constituting the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Is exploded and shown.

  The inner cover member 520 includes a main body plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, an upper fastening portion 522 disposed at an upper end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560. A lower fastening portion 523 disposed at a lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560; a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521; A plurality of short fastening portions 525 into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and the inner lens member 530 is formed to be longer than the short fastening portions 525. And a plurality of long fastening portions 526 into which screws for fixing the outer cover member 560 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and protrudingly provided on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 and from the rear side. Support plate 5 0 a plurality of rear fastening portion 527 screws that secure is screwed to, mainly comprises.

  The main body plate portion 521 has a front-side end portion 521a having a corrugated shape, and a connecting plate portion 521c that connects the front-side end portion 521a and the back-side base portion 521b at a short width portion (a portion closer to the back side) of the corrugation. Is provided.

  The rear side base 521b includes an inner side surface 521b1 that is in contact with (shapes in shape with) the left side surface of the base 511b of the support plate 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

  The connection plate portion 521c is a plate-shaped portion that is disposed so as to be inclined leftward toward the back side, and the opening portion 524 is defined by the connection plate portion 521c.

  In this embodiment, the connecting plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, but are arranged so that the intervals increase in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening widths of the plurality of openings 524 can be made different, and the effect produced by light can be made different for each opening 524.

  The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a pair of fastening portions 522a arranged side by side in the front-rear direction, and is recessed in the left outer surface in the left-right direction. And a fitting groove 522b.

  The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a that is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b that is recessed in the left outer side in the left-right direction. That is, screws are inserted into the outer cover member 560 at two locations at the upper end and at one location at the lower end, and are fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520.

  The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  The openings 524 are arranged side by side in four places at the top and bottom, and function as windows for visually recognizing the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state. Each outer shape of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes rightward with the connecting plate 521c as an end (left end). That is, each opening 524 is arranged so as to be recessed to the right from the left end of the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 114).

  The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at a boundary between the rear side base 521b and the connecting plate 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion corresponds to the design shape in this embodiment, where the surface (left side surface) of the inner cover member 520 projects to the left (see FIG. 111). The surface of the rear side base 521b is curved in a design-like manner to the right between the above-described boundary portions. That is, the surface of the rear side base portion 521b is formed in a wavy shape that undulates left and right as it goes up and down.

  In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is arranged on the back surface side of the portion protruding toward the design surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed with a uniform thickness, a concavity, which is liable to be a dead space, is formed on the reverse surface of the design-shaped overhanging portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively utilized by disposing the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (the inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520 is provided. Efficiency can be improved.

  The shape of the front and rear ends of the inner lens member 530 follows the shape of the front and rear ends of the inner cover member 520. In other words, the inner lens member 530 has a wavy shape in which the front end 531a of the main body plate portion 531 formed in a vertically long plate shape substantially matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520. Is done.

  The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531 and is formed in the front-rear direction at a switching position in the front-rear direction of a curve forming a wave shape. And support holes 531b and 531c into which the projecting portions 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 are inserted.

  The support hole 531b is formed in a front portion of the front end 531a in a wave shape, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531b from being deformed or displaced even if a load is applied near the support hole 531b.

  The support hole 531c is formed in a wave-like rear portion of the front end portion 531a, and an inclined rib portion 532 extending to a position where the support hole 531c can contact the light guide member 540 is provided on the rear side. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531c is enhanced by the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 531c is prevented from being deformed or displaced even when a load is applied near the support hole 531c. be able to.

  In addition, the main body plate portion 531 includes a through hole 531d that is formed in the left and right direction and has a size that allows the long fastening portion 526 to be inserted, at a position between the support hole 531b and the support hole 531c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through-hole 531d, the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be aligned.

  The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right position) corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and a pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a extending rightward from upper and lower edges of the connecting plate portion 521c. And a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532b that vertically connect the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.

  The upper and lower plate portions 532a extend so as to fill a gap between the upper and lower plate portions 532a. That is, similarly to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 has a shape that extends leftward toward the back side, and thus has a shape in which the left-right width increases toward the back side (the front side end portion when viewed from above). ).

  The inner lens member 530 includes an overhang portion 533 that extends leftward from the main body plate portion 531 so as to pass through the opening 524. The overhang portion 533 includes, on the side opposite to the overhanging side, a light scattering portion 533a that is provided in a wavy shape and that has a shape that scatters light on a wavy curved surface.

  The light guide member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has a concave portion for changing the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the rear side in the left-right direction as a halftone dot pattern arranged in a lattice pattern on both left and right sides. It is a so-called light guide plate formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is changed to the left and right directions through the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. You. The light guide member 540 is hot-bent to a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and has a width in the thickness direction from an end face on the back side (LED 512a side) to a front side. It is formed from a shape that gradually tapers toward the end face.

  Here, the concave portion is a processed portion for changing light from a so-called edge light type light source (LED 512a in the present embodiment) into uniform surface light emission. The concave portion is a notch-shaped concave portion that is depressed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512a and emits the light from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is formed by forming a template having a pattern in which a conical portion having an inclination angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom surface and a diameter of a bottom circle of about 1 mm is dispersedly arranged in a grid at about 3 mm intervals. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) the resin. Of the light emitted from the LED 512a, the light that has reached the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion, and emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

  The thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but preferably has transparency, and is preferably an acrylic resin (methacrylic resin), a polycarbonate resin, a polyvinyl chloride resin, an amorphous polyester resin, or an amorphous olefin resin. Resin, polystyrene resin, and AS resin (acrylonitrile, styrene copolymer compound) can be exemplified. Among them, in particular, by using an acrylic resin, it is possible to obtain the light guide member 540 having a high average luminance and a small decrease in the luminance distribution.

  In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness from 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, the shape retention after the heat bending process is improved, and practical strength can be obtained.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front side end is slightly displaced to the rear side from the front side end 531a of the inner lens member 530, and the right and left sides are formed. Is also formed from a wavy shape.

  The left and right wave shapes are not strict in the present invention. There is no particular limitation on the degree of the corrugation, but it is preferable that the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm or less in the curved surface portion. By using such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of imparting three-dimensional freedom while maintaining good mechanical properties with little distortion after hot bending. .

  The details of the wavy shape waving right and left will be described later (see FIG. 114), but the position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520 is located to the left, and the position corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portion 521c. A wave shape of a mode of being located to the right (positioning away from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the two.

  As described above, the wavy shape in the left-right direction is formed by hot bending a base material having a concave portion. As a method of the thermal bending process of the present invention, a metal having a concave surface (female type) and a convex surface (male type) which are curved while being heated to a deflection temperature under load of a thermoplastic resin as a base material + a heating temperature of 10 to 40 ° C. This is done by pressing the substrate against the mold. More specifically, when the thermoplastic resin is mainly composed of an acrylic resin, the heating temperature can be 110 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower. Specifically, it is preferable that the heat treatment be performed at 130 ° C. or higher and 150 ° C. or lower.

  At this time, the heating temperature of the base material is equal to or lower than the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the base material at the time of heating to a deflection temperature under load of + 40 ° C. or lower and a melting point or lower, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the base material is maintained, and the light source light before and after the heat bending process is performed. Fluctuating angle can be suppressed. Thus, it is possible to prevent a decrease in luminance and unevenness in luminance distribution in the light guide plate. In addition, by setting such heating temperature conditions, distortion to the light guide plate can be suppressed.

  The light guide member 540 is provided with a curved plate-shaped main body plate portion 541 constituting a light guide plate, and a screw that extends vertically from upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 541 and is fastened to the outer cover member 560. And a fastening portion 542 to be performed.

  The light guide member 540 does not have a portion penetrating in the left-right direction at a position other than the fastening portion 542 and the concave portion 541a for retreating from the long fastening portion 526. That is, since the light guide member 540 is formed of a single plate without a hole at least inside the projection surface that projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect of the light through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

  The outer lens member 550 is disposed at the upper and lower ends of the main body plate portion 551 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. An inner fitting portion 552, a plurality of insertion holes 553 that can be configured as through holes into which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a rightward extension in a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 to form an outer cover. An overhang portion 554 that can be visually recognized through the member, a plurality of through holes 555 into which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a projecting portion provided on the back side of the main body plate portion 551 and from the back side. A plurality of rear fastening portions 556 into which screws for fixing the support plate portion 510 are screwed.

  The outer lens member 550 is formed such that the shape of the front and rear end portions follows the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, the outer lens member 550 extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 551, and the front side end portion 551a that forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front side end portion of the light guide member 540. The light guide member 540 has a corrugated shape and is slightly displaced to the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front end of the light guide member 540 and the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed so as to be arranged at equal intervals in the front-rear direction at any position in the vertical direction. You.

  The front-side end 551a is provided on the front side at a position where the curve forming the corrugated shape is switched in the front-rear direction, and has a plurality of protrusions that are fitted in the support holes 531b and 531c in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). An installation part 551b is provided.

  A bulging portion 551a1 (see FIG. 115 (a)) bulging toward the front side in a semicircular shape in a side view is formed on the surface of the front end 551a opposite to the side facing the light guide member 540. Are formed innumerably. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are arranged at predetermined intervals, The light emission at the front end face can be a strip-shaped light emission mode that extends vertically.

  The insertion hole 553 is provided in a concave deep portion having a shape recessed inward (inside the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the overhang portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be strengthened, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled from the outer cover member 560.

  In the right heavy plate unit 500R, a rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is provided on the outer lens member 550, and is not provided on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right edge of the support plate portion 510 (the outer edge of the pachinko machine 8010) (the outer cover member 560 can be arranged regardless of the screw diameter or the screw arrangement). it can). Thereby, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) facing the player can be enlarged.

  The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is formed to be curved in accordance with the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member is provided. The surface 540 and the main body plate portion 551 abut on each other (see FIG. 114B).

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in a direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the LED 512a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510 from being displaced from the light guide member 540, and to accurately input light from the LED 512a to the light guide member 540. Can be done.

  The outer cover member 560 includes a main body plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface at an upper end portion of the main body plate portion 561 that can receive the fastening portion 522a of the inner cover member 520. In addition, a plurality of screws having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and an elongated hole formed in an oval shape with a horizontal width longer than the vertical width, and through which screws are inserted from the opposite side. Upper receiving portion 562 having screw receiving portion 562a, and a lower end portion of main body plate portion 561, which is a receiving surface capable of receiving fastening portion 523a of inner cover member 520, and has a diameter of a screw hole of fastening portion 523a. A lower fastening portion 563 having a slightly larger vertical width, a long hole shape longer than the vertical width, and having a screw receiving portion 563a through which a screw is inserted from the opposite side; and a main body plate portion 561. At the front end portion, a receiving surface which is capable of receiving the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520, a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and a vertical width smaller than the vertical width. A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 having a long width and having a long hole shape, into which screws are inserted from the opposite side; and an opening formed to have an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550. It mainly includes a portion 565 and a plurality of protruding portions 566 protruding from the main body plate portion 561 to the rear side.

  The upper fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562b recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 522b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws forming the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

  The lower fastened portion 563 includes a fitting groove 563b that is recessed in the left-right width direction at a vertical position corresponding to the fitting groove 523b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563b is formed as a groove into which the right and left claws forming the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

  That is, the right panel unit 500 is connected to the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 by fitting the upper and lower fitting grooves 562b and 563b. Here, since the right panel unit 500 abuts on the upper panel unit 400 and the cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), the right panel unit 500 has a shape protruding to the front side by the cover 370. Thus, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

  The opening 565 is formed in a shape in which the overhang portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (formed from an inner shape equivalent to the outer shape of the overhang portion 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 can be narrowed, so that an unauthorized act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560 can be suppressed.

  A method of assembling the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 along the line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a).

  In addition, FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b) show a state in which the protruding portions 551b are arranged on the back side of the support holes 531b, and FIGS. 113 (a) and 113 (b) show the protruding portions. The state where the portion 551b is inserted into the support hole 531b is illustrated.

  The right panel unit 500 is assembled in a state where the main body plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the left end of the front side end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are abutted in the left-right direction (see FIG. 112 (b)). ), The left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the protrusions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b.

  In this manner, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting the projections 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b at the front end of the right panel unit 500 and fitting them. By doing so, the degree of freedom in designing the front end on the front side of the right panel unit 500 can be improved.

  For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R which are arranged at the front side end of the right panel unit (the front side from the front side surface of the light guide member 540). The number of screws for fastening and fixing the light guide member 540 can be reduced, and the region where light is blocked by the screws can be reduced, so that light emitted from the front end surface of the light guide member 540 extends in the vertical direction. It is possible to make it easy to visually recognize the band.

  Further, for example, in this embodiment, the number of screws (fastening locations) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 on the front side is reduced, so that the screws are erroneously introduced at the time of fastening. The range in which the light guide member 540 may be damaged by applying a load to the light member 540 can be reduced. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be disposed near the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered front end) can be expanded. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being visually interrupted near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

  In addition, when the left heavy plate unit 500L is approached from the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the projecting portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portions 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L are connected. , And the light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R form surfaces that are parallel to each other along the front-rear direction, and are in a positional relationship in which the surfaces can contact each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 functions as a guide surface (guide) for moving the left heavy plate unit 500L in the front-rear direction with respect to the right heavy plate unit 500R. Panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

  Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 for maintenance or the like will be described. As described above, in the right panel unit 500, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled to the support plate portion 510 by fastening and fixing, respectively. At least two types of the assembling procedure can be considered. .

  The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy board unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. The second procedure is a method in which the right heavy board unit 500R is fastened. Is independently fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510. Thereafter, the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, the protruding portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, and the left heavy plate unit 500L is right-weighted. This is a method of fastening and fixing to the plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. These two procedures can be similarly employed when the right panel unit 500 is disassembled.

  As described above, since assembly and disassembly can be performed in two different procedures, a worker performing maintenance or the like disassembles and assembles the right panel unit 500 in either procedure depending on the location of a part that needs to be replaced. Can be selected, and the working time can be reduced.

  In either case, in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are slid in the plane direction. There is a need. This is because it is necessary to release the fitting between the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b. When sliding the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R in the plane direction, at least one of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R needs to be disassembled from the support plate portion 510.

  As described above, the configuration in which the protrusions 551b, 551c and the support holes 531b are fitted is such that the right panel unit 500 is pryed open (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86), and the right panel unit 500 is disassembled. It helps prevent illegal acts that enter the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the machine 500.

  That is, in the case where the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening screws, by removing the screws, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled, and an illegal act can be easily performed. As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R of the right panel unit 500 are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 with screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the screws are attached to the front. The left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are difficult to disassemble unless they are removed from the back side of the frame 14 (see FIG. 104), so that the right panel unit 500 is provided from outside the pachinko machine 8010. Can be difficult to decompose. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act that enters the inside of the pachinko machine 8010 through the inside of the right panel unit 500.

  With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in the effect will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In addition, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted in FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c).

  Light emitted from the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is applied to the light guide member 540 from the back side, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is moved right and left by the action of the light guide member 540. Can be turned in the direction. At this time, the light is emitted in a direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

  Since the light guide member 540 has a curved shape waving in the left-right direction (see FIG. 114B), light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 among the plurality of openings 524, the light guide member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the optical member 540 to the opening 524 side can be condensed and produced. Thus, the intensity of light visually recognized through the opening 524 can be improved.

  In addition, since the opposite side (the right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 is closer to the outer lens member 550 at a position corresponding to the uppermost one of the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to is diffused and can be used for production.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the vertical position is the same, there is a difference in the mode of light production (condensed or diffused) performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as a boundary. The effect can be improved.

  It should be noted that the difference in the mode of producing light is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, but various modes are exemplified. For example, by dividing the shape of the concave portion cut out in the light guide member 540 according to the region, or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the region, it is possible to make the mode of producing light on both the left and right sides different. .

  The light guide member 540 always has a concave shape on the opening 524 side at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes according to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the upper three openings 524, the radius of curvature of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also set to the second opening from the top in correspondence with the vertical width being increased as the opening 524 goes upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1> R2). Similarly, the radius of curvature R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is larger. , Which is shorter than the radius of curvature R2 (R1> R2> R3).

  Accordingly, even when the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 does not change, the number of the LEDs 512a that emit light condensed for each of the openings 524 is different. The amount of light to be emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of visible light can be larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

  Further, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, that is, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed to be equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4１R1) and the center of the concave surface. The normal coming out is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the upper and lower openings 524 can be strengthened, and the effect of light can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lowermost opening 524 can be directed to the player's eyes. The light can be emitted upward.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (c), the vertical widths W1 to W4 of each opening 524 are shown as a length connecting the middle point of the upper side and the middle point of the lower side of the opening 524 in a side view. The width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 opposed to the portion of the radius of curvature R2 is the vertical width W2, and the portion of the radius of curvature R3. The width of the opening 524 facing the upper and lower portions is a vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 facing the portion of the radius of curvature R4 is the upper and lower width W4.

  In the present embodiment, the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 are formed such that the lower opening 524 of each opening 524 is reduced (W1> W2> W3> W4). That is, in the curvature radii R1 to R3, the magnitude relation of the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relation of the upper and lower widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are related. Accordingly, in a portion where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is increased so that light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while the light collection is performed. In a portion where the degree of light is strong (for example, a portion having a radius of curvature R3), the vertical width W3 of the opening 524 is made smaller than the vertical width W1 to prevent light from being excessively incident on the opening 524. Therefore, with the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

  The center point of each of the radii of curvature R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114 (b) is a point corresponding to the focal point of light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and each of the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction. Is arranged at a substantially intermediate position.

  The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in a region KE at the boundary between the openings 524. Here, the region KE is a band-like region extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as a region whose upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the upper end of the region KE coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 provided adjacently above the region KE, and the lower end of the region KE corresponds to the opening 524 provided adjacently below the same. Matches the top of Therefore, the light emitted in the front-rear direction from the LED 512a to the region KE travels in a state where the light is hidden by the connecting plate portion 521c in the left side view of the right panel unit 500 (see FIG. 114C).

  In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, so that even if the action of condensing light is reduced, the player can visually recognize the light. The difference in the amount of light is small.

  On the other hand, by making the region KE a convex shape to the left instead of a flat surface, the shape of the light guide member 540 can be formed from a curved shape without corners, and stress concentration can be prevented. Can be improved in durability.

  In addition, by forming a convex shape to the left in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed to the right, and a portion where light is diffused and a portion where light is condensed inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560. Can be formed. Thereby, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance of the light visually recognized through the opening 565.

  That is, it is possible to cause a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 565 while suppressing a change in the light visually recognized through the opening 524 depending on whether or not the light is incident on the region KE from the LED 512a. .

  For example, by turning off the LED 512a that causes light to enter the region KE and turning on the other LEDs 512a, it is possible to irradiate the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 with no gap. At this time, since the right side shape of the light guide member 540 above and below the region KE has a concave shape, the light emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the region KE crosses the right side of the outer cover member 560. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed dark in the region KE.

  In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in an edge shape, which is visually recognized by the player at the edge. The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the light emission mode of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) can be sharpened.

  Note that the light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary between the openings 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the region KE, a corresponding portion (a portion corresponding to the region KE) of the overhang portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a band shape. Can be done.

  In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shorter than the upper and lower portions thereof (the distance from the LED 512a is shorter). Therefore, the light incident on the region KE easily reaches the front end even if the light amount is weak. The effect may be performed using the light that reaches the front end.

  That is, a light effect is prepared that cannot be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c but can be visually recognized through the front end 531a (see FIG. 105) of the inner lens member 530 (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500). By setting the degree of expectation of the jackpot high in the effect, the position of the player's eyes can be moved to a side farther from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. As a result, the degree of fatigue of the eyes of the player can be reduced, and the player can play a long game without stress.

  Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side, and is visually recognized by the player from the right side through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106). Accordingly, a clerk who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and does not visually recognize the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and visually recognizes the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side is notified by visible light. be able to.

  As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while the cheating player is unaware, so that the cheating player can escape. Can be prevented.

  Note that, by inverting the left and right shapes of the right panel unit 500, the effect of light in the area KE may be visible only to the player, and may not be visible to the clerk.

  FIG. 115A is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115B is a cross-sectional view of the light guide member 540 along the line CXVb-CXVb in FIG. 115A.

  The light guide member 540 has a shape that tapers gradually from the end face (thickness: about 5 mm) on the LED 512a side toward the front side. The maximum end on the front side of the light guide member 540 (the part farthest from the LED 512a) is designed to be 3 mm in order to maintain mechanical strength, and has the same width across the entire region in the vertical direction with the same gradient. to shrink.

  Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed with the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end surface of the portion of the inner lens member 530 facing the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is closer to the LED 512a than the end surface of the portion facing the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111). Since the distance from the end face is long, the width is further tapered and the width dimension (thickness) is reduced. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531b and the light emission mode visually recognized near the support hole 531c.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is vertically sandwiched by the portion near the support hole 531b and is disposed at a position depressed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the portion near the support hole 531b Due to the shadow created by, the portion near the support hole 531c is more easily visually recognized as dark than the vicinity of the support hole 531b.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion opposed to the support hole 531c is more than the end face of the light guide member 540 in the portion opposed to the support hole 531b. Since the width (thickness) is formed to be large, it is possible to secure a large area of a surface that receives light emitted from the LED 512a and emits light.

  Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531c and the amount of light visually recognized near the support hole 531b are increased. It is possible to reduce the difference in distance in the front-back direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows. This makes it easy to make the degree of light emission visible at the front end of the right panel unit 500 vertically uniform with the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 at the forefront (the difference in strength is small). )can do.

  FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. In FIG. 116, the illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted, and the light guide member 540 is visible. In FIG. 116, an example of a path (a traveling direction) of light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the light emitted from the light guide member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. Spreads and proceeds to the outside.

  Conversely, light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect that the light guide member 540 is curved. Therefore, while the arrangement of the LEDs 512a that generate light incident on the light guide member 540 is fixed, the light emission mode (coarse, dense, light and dark) can be made different on both surfaces of the light guide member 540. In other words, the light can be visually recognized by the player in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

  Further, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 (the player side) is not right next to the player side because the inner lens member 530 is curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b). (Refer to the imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b). The imaginary line arrow in FIG. 115 (b) shows an example of the traveling direction of light passing through the light guide member 540). This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the light, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

  Returning to FIG. 100 and FIG. 101, the description will be continued. The upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a via the upper side plate member 14e, and has fitting grooves 522b and 562b (FIGS. 108 and 109) arranged at the lower right end at the upper end of the right panel unit 500. ), And is supported from below, and is arranged at the upper end of the front frame 14.

  FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e with the speaker assembly 450 interposed therebetween (see FIG. 100), and the front surface of the upper frame member 410 An illumination unit 401 arranged on the side and fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410; a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and sandwiched between the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e; , Mainly comprising. Note that illustration of the speaker assembly 450 is omitted in FIGS. 117 and 118 (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

  The electric decoration unit 401 is a unit in which decoration indicating the model name or the like is provided on the front side surface, and includes a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are arranged. The included LED emits light, thereby performing the effect by light.

  The illumination unit 401 includes a main body 402 formed in a box shape from a light-transmitting resin material, a wavy wall portion 403 formed in a wavy shape on a rear outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a wavy wall portion 403. A plate-like portion 404 extending in a horizontally elongated plate shape from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion protruding from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 to form a cylindrical inner side. A tubular portion 405 having a shape formed by penetrating the wavy wall portion 403; and a plurality of fastening portions 406 arranged on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly comprising.

  The main body 402 is formed in a box shape such that the front and rear dish-shaped members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. Note that the LEDs included are disposed on an electronic substrate, and the electronic substrate is fixed to the main body 402.

  The corrugated wall portion 403 meshes with the corrugated wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, so that the position for assembling in the left-right direction is easily determined, and the work of assembling the electric decoration unit 401 to the upper frame member 410 is performed. It is the part that improves the performance.

  The plate-shaped portion 404 is formed so as to be able to contact the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses vertical displacement of the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410. In addition, on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410, a horizontally long groove shape which vertically sandwiches the plate-shaped portion 404 is formed in a concave shape.

  The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for wiring, which passes the wiring of the electronic board on which the LED included in the main body 402 is provided to the upper frame member 410 side.

  The illumination unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by screws being fastened to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space containing the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side frame member 410e and the upper side plate member 14e, so that access to the inside is prevented. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e and the main body frame 14a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

  FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper frame member 410. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is formed of a main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411. A lower edge plate member 420 fastened and fixed from the rear side along the lower edge; and a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the main body member 411. A left corner supporting member 430L fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 from the front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the main body member 411, and fitted to the main body member 411 from the rear side to a position extending from the opening 414 to the front side. And the lens member 440 constituting the illuminated portion 8033 while being prevented from dropping to the rear side by being pressed from the rear side by the right corner support member 430R. Provided.

  The main body member 411 is a left and right long member having openings formed on both left and right sides for passing vibration waves (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and the speaker cover 27 being disposed so as to cover the opening. On the front side, the wavy wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape when viewed from above and a portion of the wavy wall portion 412 which is opposed to the tubular portion 405 of the electric decoration unit 401 is smaller than the outer shape of the tubular portion 405. It mainly includes a support through-hole 413 formed to penetrate in a slightly large inner shape, and an opening 414 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

  The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wavy shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electric decoration unit 401. Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the electric decoration unit 401 is fitted into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

  The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted into the support through hole 413 in an assembled state (see FIG. 86). Thus, the wiring projecting through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through hole 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, the other end of the wiring, one end of which is connected to the electronic board included in the electric decoration unit 401, can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, so that the front frame 14 is closed. Thus, the other end of the wiring can be prevented from being detached.

  The support through-hole 413 defines the position of the tubular portion 405 when the tubular portion 405 is inserted. Thereby, the support through-hole 413 can be used for positioning the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

  The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be viewed in a front view. The upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) is provided with an LED 14e2 at a position corresponding to the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction, so that the light emission of the LED 14e2 can be visually recognized by the player along the opening 414.

  The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in a top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower right end face, and a recessed groove 417 from the back side at the lower left end face. A supported groove 418 to be formed, a fastening portion 419 that is disposed at a position symmetrical to the left and right near the upper end portion, and is formed so that a screw can be screwed therein, and a second portion that is formed so that a screw can be screwed at a position closer to the top and bottom. And a fastening portion 419b.

  The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed at the lower edge front end). Thereby, the positioning in the left-right direction when the lower edge plate member 420 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

  The supported groove 417 has a shape in which the left and right claws can be fitted into the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state (see FIG. 86). 4), the load (weight and the like) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be applied to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

  The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end of the electric decoration 8031, and in the fitted state (see FIG. 86), the upper panel unit 400 is formed via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed. The load (weight and the like) given from the illuminating unit 8031 can be applied to the illumination unit 8031.

  The fastening portion 419 is provided at a position where a screw inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape from a position where the screw does not reach the tip from the base. And an enlarged rib 419a to be provided.

  As described later, the enlarged rib 419a connects the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper side plate member 14e to the main body frame 14a by fastening and fixing the screws inserted into the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419. (See FIG. 125 (a)), which will be described in detail later.

  In the present embodiment, the ribs 419a having the same shape are arranged at three locations around the fastening part 419 at intervals of 120 ° along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening part 419.

  The second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided at a position lower than the main body member 411, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) and the concave portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 122). Are formed at positions corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 at an upper position of the main body member 411, which will be described later in detail.

  The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by bending a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wavy shape in a bottom view at a lower front side edge of the main body member 421, An L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, and then extends upward from the extending end thereof, and has an L-shaped cross section, and a main body plate portion 421. An opening 424 mainly includes a plurality of small-diameter through-holes that are arranged at equal distances to the left and right from the left-right center position (the upper end position of the curved shape) and penetrate vertically.

  In a state where the wavy wall portion 422 and the wavy side portion 416 of the main body member 411 are in front and back contact, the lower surface of the L-shaped extending portion 423 is in contact with the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the wavy side portion 416 on the back surface, A part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 that extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the substantial plate thickness of the upper panel unit 400 at the location where the L-shaped extension portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut vertically can be increased, and the strength can be improved.

  The opening 424 is an opening in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123) through which a vibration wave (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 passes (is emitted to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L include circular openings 430R1 and 430L1 that are circular openings through which vibration generated toward the front side passes in the speaker assembly 450.

  The right corner support member 430R includes a horizontally long rectangular through-hole 430R2 formed in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Light emitted to the lens member 440 through the through hole 430R2 is made visible to the player through the opening 414.

  FIG. 121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In FIGS. 121 and 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding.

  The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are jointly fastened to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) with screws inserted into the connection holes 469. The lower end is fastened and fixed to the upper plate member 14e. Since the speaker assembly 450 includes a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 450L each having a substantially symmetrical shape, the speaker assembly 450R will be described, and the description of the speaker assembly 450L will be omitted.

  The speaker assembly 450R includes a speaker (cone type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave so that the sound can be heard, and a speaker 451 inserted through the through hole 466 and a front flange 452 of the speaker 451. A front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer shape substantially matching the outer shape of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and after forming a space between the front assembly 460 in an assembled state (see FIG. 100). And a side assembly 480.

  The speaker 451 is attached to the front assembly 460 so as to close the through hole 466 of the front assembly 460 and emits a production sound in connection with a game, and one end is connected to the speaker 451 and extended. A speaker connection line 453 (for example, an electric wire composed of a copper wire and a covering portion covering the copper wire) passes through a through hole formed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102), and is connected to a terminal of the speaker connection line 453. When the connector is connected to the electronic board 14i (see FIG. 102), it is configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

  A front cover of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass through. The speaker 451 covered with the protective cover 454 is mounted on the front assembly 460 in a state where the front surface is aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) via the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is scattered. It is possible to reproduce and output high quality sound without any delay. Further, the front cover of the speaker 451 can be suitably protected by the protective cover 454 without deteriorating the sound quality.

  The front assembly 460 includes a main body 461 formed in a cup shape having a left / right long side and an open back side, and a plurality of concave portions provided in a semicircular shape from the upper and lower edges of the main body 461 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. And an extension plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 463b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461 toward the outer side in the vertical direction. A wiring passage recess 464 recessed from the rear end to the front side of the main body 461; a light passing through hole 465 formed in the upper right corner of the main body 461 in the front-rear direction; A circular through hole 466 through which the speaker 451 is inserted at the right side; a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending in a rib shape from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the back side; The screw inserted into the side assembly 480 A plurality of fastening portions 468 to be connected and fixed, a connection hole 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted, and a lower end of the distal end side main body portion 461T. And a front recessed portion 471 that is recessed from the back side to the front side.

  The main body 461 includes, as regions divided in the left-right direction, a base-side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left-right direction of the base-side main body 461B (see FIG. 121). The main body 461M is mainly provided with an intermediate main body 461M connected to the left side (left side) and a distal end side main body 461T connected to the center in the left-right direction (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body 461M. The base body 461B, the intermediate body 461M, and the tip body 461T have a continuous space formed between the base body 461B, the middle body 461M, and the rear body 480.

  The main body 461 includes a rear side wall 461H formed as a wall surrounding substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H includes an edge portion that is not turned inside (an edge portion where a flange or the like is not formed inside).

  The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Is done.

  The extension plate 463 has a through hole 463a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 463a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the common fastening hole 14a2 and the common fastening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and the through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480 and It passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

  In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is configured such that the screws inserted into the through holes 463a through the upper side plate member 14e from the rear side of the main body frame 14a are screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is so tight that the screws are tightened. Pressed against rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411.

  According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the metal main frame 14a with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material with the resin material interposed therebetween). Thereby, the sound effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

  The wiring passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recess width of the wiring passage recess 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage concave portion 464, and it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sound effect from being lowered due to sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes, thereby preventing the occurrence of a problem. In FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is shown so as to be visible.

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed not in the rear assembly 480 but in the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when assembling the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, The speaker connection line 453 connected to the speaker 451 in advance can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464. Thereby, the workability of the assembly work of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

  The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole through which light emitted from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes.

  The passage forming rib 467 abuts the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap between the front and rear, and bends a plurality of times into a space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (see FIG. 123). Are formed. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front plate of the main body 461. This prevents a gap from being formed on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

  The front recessed portion 471 is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (ie, slightly protrudes from the outer shape).

  The rear assembly 480 has a main body 481 formed in a cup shape having a long left and right side and an open front side, and a concave semicircular tip from the upper and lower edges of the main body 481 toward the center of the upper and lower widths. A plurality of recessed portions 482 and an extension plate extending in a plate shape from the back side edge of the recessed portion 483 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 482 to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the outside in the vertical width. 483, a wiring pressing protrusion 484 protruding toward the front side of the main body 481, a light passing through hole 485 formed in the upper right corner of the main body 481 in the front-rear direction, and a cup-shaped main body 481. A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending in a rib shape from the bottom plate (rear side plate) to the front side and a through hole through which a screw is inserted at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 468 of the front assembly 460 in the front-rear direction. Through holes 488 and front assembly In the corresponding position in the longitudinal direction a front recess 471 of the 60 to the side recess 491 after being recessed toward the front side to the rear side, mainly comprising a.

  The main body part 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body part 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body part 461 of the front assembly 460 from the outer shape of the rear side plate. And a front side wall portion 481H formed in a shape to be fitted inside the rear side wall portion 461H.

  The speaker assembly 450R is provided with a double wall fitted on the rear side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H on the entire outer periphery, so that air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position. . Thus, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

  The front side wall portion 481H has a pair of auxiliary protrusions that protrude to the front side beyond the wire pressing protrusion 484 at a position sandwiching the wiring pressing protrusion 484 on the left and right with an interval capable of passing through the speaker connection line 453. 481Ha.

  The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha is a pair of protrusions that prevent the position of the speaker connection line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage recess 464 from being shifted when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary protrusions 481Ha have a tapered shape that spreads left and right toward the front side (front end side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connection line 453 extends from the wire passage recess 464. Even if it comes off and shifts right and left, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary projections 481Ha.

  As a result, the speaker connection line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembling. In the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connection line 453 is formed from the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing protrusion 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

  The recessed portion 482 has the same outer shape as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462 in a front view, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. The recessed portion is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

  The extension plate 483 includes a through hole 483a into which a screw is inserted from the back side. The screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the common tightening hole 14a2 and the common tightening hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of the upper side plate member 14e, and passes through the through hole 483a and the front assembly 460. It passes through the hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

  In other words, the speaker assembly 450R is extended from the rear side of the main body frame 14a by the screw inserted into the through hole 483a through the upper side plate member 14e into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411, so that the screw is tightened. The installation plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

  The wiring pressing convex part 484 is provided along the upper edge of the rear side plate of the main body part 481 and is formed to have a width to be fitted into the wiring passing concave part 464, and has a depth greater than the depth of the wiring passing concave part 464. The speaker connection line 453 is provided with a projecting length slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covering portion of the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453.

  That is, by passing the speaker connection line 453 through the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464, the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453 is compressed, and the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passing concave portion 464 are compressed. A gap can be prevented from being formed between the opening surrounded by 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that a sound effect is reduced due to sound leakage from an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes.

  The light passing through hole 485 is a through hole through which light emitted from the LED 14e2 disposed on the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passage through-hole 485 is formed from a circular opening having a size surrounding one LED. The light-passing through-hole 465 is a through-hole having a larger cross-sectional shape than the light-passing through-hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross-sectional shape increases toward the front side, and is assembled (see FIG. 100). ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

  The passage forming rib 487 is formed at the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 when viewed from the front, abuts each other without any gap in front and rear, and is formed in a plurality of spaces formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. These are ribs forming a curved passage (see FIG. 123) that bends twice. This bent passage is a passage through which a vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the rear side passes.

  The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, and is formed at the front and rear ends and the surface position of the front side wall portion 481H. That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is connected to the rear plate of the main body 481. This prevents a gap from being formed on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

  Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed such that a front end portion abuts on the passage forming rib 467, and at that time, a compression force is generated in the front-rear direction. That is, a compressive force in the rearward direction is applied to the passage forming rib 487 from the passage forming rib 467, and the compression force closes the gap between the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 while elastically deforming in the front-rear direction. (See FIG. 124 (b)).

  At this time, if the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction is low and the passage-forming rib 487 may bend right and left, the compressive force does not work well, and the gap may not be able to be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is reduced by the strength of the front side wall portion 481H (further, in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), (Strength reinforced by the side wall portion 461H). Therefore, the rigidity of the passage forming rib 487 in the left-right direction can be strengthened, and the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from bending left and right, so that the gap between the passage forming rib 487 and the passage forming rib 467 can be satisfactorily closed. Can be.

  The rear recess 491 is formed in a shape that is inverted from the front recess 471 in the front-rear direction, and forms an opening in cooperation with the front recess 471. The opening is formed so as to surround the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (slightly outward from the outer shape). It is arranged at a position surrounding the outer shape.

  FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a front view of the rear assembly 480. In FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b), for easy understanding, the speaker connection line 453 is shown by imaginary lines, and the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 that are arranged to face each other are facing each other. Is shown in a state of being deployed toward the front side of the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are obtained by folding FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn vertically in the center of the paper surface. Can be matched. That is, the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e can be brought into contact with the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e in the front-rear direction.

  In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), an acoustic chamber is provided inside the speaker assembly 450 on the rear side of the base body 461B of the front assembly 460. Is formed. Then, with the acoustic chamber as a base end, an acoustic passage as a passage path of the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 extends toward the distal end side main body portion 461T. This acoustic passage is configured as a bent passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 467 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, and alternately move up and down toward the left side. And rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e arranged at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment).

  By forming the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes, the respective ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are assembled during assembly. The wiring can be prevented from being caught between the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e of the rear assembly 480.

  Since the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e are connected to the main body 461 and the rear side wall 461H, the rigidity of the main body 461 is enhanced by the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e. Can be.

  The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e form a bent passage for passing the vibration wave Ws generated from the rear side of the speaker 451 together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480.

  Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the vibration wave generated from the speaker 451 proceeds linearly. However, in the present embodiment, the vibration wave Ws is avoided while avoiding the passage forming rib 467. Will progress.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 123 (a) as an example of the traveling path, the vibration wave Ws is applied to the left side (arrow) after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467a) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the upper side. When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) that is arranged on the L side and is closest to the left and right direction (for example, the rib portion 467b) is arranged on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (the arrow L and U directions).

  On the other hand, after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) and is closest to the rib portion (for example, in the left-right direction). When the rib portion 467c) is arranged on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (the direction of the arrow L, D).

  Therefore, when the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are alternately arranged up and down as in the present embodiment, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, The traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws can be made longer as compared with the left and right width of the space.

  Thereby, it is possible to easily adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of concave portions 471, 491, and suppress the generation of the standing wave due to the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 467 can be generated by the concave portions 462 and 463b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is transmitted to the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed immediately near the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). (Directions of arrows L and U).

  Therefore, the concave portions 462 and 463b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

  As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming ribs 487 are formed on the inner side in the left-right direction (left side) with respect to the wiring pressing convex portion 484 for holding down the wiring, and are alternately arranged at a plurality of positions (books) toward the left side. Rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e arranged at five locations in the embodiment.

  Since the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e are connected to the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, the rigidity of the main body 481 is enhanced by the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e. Can be.

  Here, each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is formed from a shape that matches in the front-rear direction with each of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460, and is in an assembled state (FIG. 100). (See FIG. 2).

  The operation of each of the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e is similar to the operation of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the same operation as that of the passage forming rib 487 can be generated by the concave portions 482 and 483b. That is, the vibration wave Ws is moved to the upper left between the concave portion 482 disposed immediately adjacent to the rear concave portion 491 and the concave portion 483b disposed above and on the right side (arrow R side). Direction (arrows L and U). Therefore, the recessed portions 482 and 483b have an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect obtained at the time of assembly.

  Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in vertical width as the distance from the speaker 451 is increased, and is once narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically arranged. Further, the vertical width is increased at once at a position further away from the speaker 451, and thereafter communicates with the opening formed by the concave portions 471, 491. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the base body 461B side to which the speaker 451 is attached is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480. The generated vibration wave Ws (sound) advances toward the distal end side main body portion 461T on the opposite side in the longitudinal direction in search of the exit. The vibration wave Ws (sound) that has reached the front-end-side main body portion 461T passes through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) of the lower edge plate member 420 in order. As a result, the sound is emitted outside the speaker assembly 450R (outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

  That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass-reflex type speaker box, and the back surface of the speaker 451 has an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, an opening formed by the recessed portions 471, 491, and an opening 424 ( 120 (see FIG. 120), it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010, so that the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 is reproduced and output with high sound quality without being interrupted. Can be.

  The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 and inverts the phase, and converts the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451 into the same phase as the sound output from the front side of the speaker 451. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by the above. That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 does not cancel out by the opposite phase to the sound output from the front side, and can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase. That is, it is possible to amplify the heavy bass. Thus, the pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment can perform an effect full of a sense of realism, and can enhance the interest and excitement of the player for the game.

  In this embodiment, since the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is transmitted to the speaker assembly. The internal space of 450 is used as an enclosure, and is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). Thereby, the effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side can be appropriately provided to the player playing the game on the front side of the front frame 14.

  Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be performed by setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 and setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the path of the vibration wave Ws is used as a path avoiding the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480. Is defined. Therefore, by individually setting the arrangement of the ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e and the ribs 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e and the length in the vertical direction, the vibration wave Ws (audio ) Sound tuning can be performed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e of the front assembly 460 and each rib part 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e of the rear assembly 480 have the following purposes. The speaker assembly 450 is disposed at a portion where a load is applied when the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed, and reinforces the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are arranged near the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488, so that the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 can be reinforced. The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be prevented from being damaged by the load applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when the screw is screwed.

  Further, the extension plates 463, 483 are sandwiched and pressed between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state (see FIG. 125A), and the respective rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d and 487d are arranged closer to the extension plates 463 and 483 than the nearest fastening portion 468 and through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screws being screwed into the fastening portions 468, the fastening portions 419 inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a of the extension plates 463, 483. When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the ribs 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d are brought into contact with each other so that the front assembly 460 and the rear The deformation of the side assembly 480 can be prevented. That is, the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by the rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, and 487d.

  In addition, for example, the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions where the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is connected to the upper side plate member. Before being fastened and fixed to 14e, the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, an upward load is applied to the upper ends of the concave portions 462 and 482 from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

  For this reason, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are likely to be damaged. In the present embodiment, since the rib portions 467b and 487b are connected to the upper ends of the recessed portions 462 and 482, the recessed portion is formed from the fastening portion 14e1. It is possible to reinforce the load applied to the portions 462 and 482, and to improve the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482.

  An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed from a plurality of small-diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through-hole, a fraudulent act of illegally intruding a wire, a piano wire, or the like into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424 is considered. It can be easily suppressed.

  In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally penetrated into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 includes the front recess 471. In addition to the opening formed by the rear recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 is formed in a closed box shape. The gap between the openings formed by the wiring pressing projections 484 is closed by the speaker connection lines 453. Therefore, when wires, piano wires, and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491, the speaker assembly passes through an opening different from the location where the wire has entered. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of wire, piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through-hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 through the upper side plate member 14e and extending the tip from 450.

  In addition, since the through-hole formed as an opening through which the speaker connection line 453 passes through the upper side plate member 14e is disposed near the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e in accordance with the arrangement of the speaker 451, a wire or a piano wire is provided. For example, the distance between the front recess 471 and the opening formed by the rear recess 491 where the speaker and the like enter the speaker assembly 450 can be increased.

  Therefore, even when such misconduct is performed, the success rate of the misconduct can be reduced, and it is easy to prevent the occurrence of the wrongful profit.

  FIG. 124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along the line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a). FIG. 124 (a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of the arrow CXXIVd in FIG. 124 (a). is there. In FIG. 124 (a) and FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by imaginary lines for easy understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated. Are omitted.

  As shown enlarged in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side. The outer surface 481Ho (the upper surface in FIG. 124 (b)) of the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 has a tapered shape that is inclined inward toward the rear side and is fitted to the inner surface 461Hi in the assembled state. It is said. Thereby, the work efficiency of the operation of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front assembly 460 can be improved.

  In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front end of the rib 487c in the assembled state is shown by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib 487c before the assembly is shown by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib 487c receives a compressive load from the rib 467c and is elastically deformed. Since a compressive force acts from the rib portion 487c to the rib portion 467c due to the restoring force generated by the elastic deformation, the gap between the rib portions 467c and 487c can be filled. The ribs 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the ribs in contact with each other.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body 461M has a shorter front-to-rear dimension than the base main body 461B and the distal main body 461T. For this reason, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (narrowed) in the intermediate main body 461M as compared with the distal-side main body 461T. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the distal end side main body portion 461 </ b> T disposed above the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 is inside the intermediate main body portion 461 </ b> M. It is largely secured in such a manner as to bulge in the front-rear direction compared to the space. Thereby, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal-side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained in the distal-side main body portion 461T and released at a low speed. Thereby, the sound effect can be improved, for example, it is possible to make the bass sound easier to hear by the vibration wave Ws.

  FIG. 125A is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVa-CXXVa in FIG. (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main frame 14a, and the upper side plate member 14e along the line CXXVb-CXXVb in FIG. 124 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is fixed to the fastening portion 419 with the screws inserted through the through holes 463a, 483a, so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and The upper side plate member 14e is a portion for sandwiching the upper side plate member 14e with the main body frame 14a. That is, by disposing the enlarged rib 419a at a surface position on the front side of the extension plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, and the upper plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. , The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419b is fastened to the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e at a position below the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly is placed at a position above the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position corresponding to the concave portions 462 and 482 of 450.

  The second fastening portion 419b and the fastening portion 14e1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (pass through the recessed portions 462, 482 without abutting in the fastening direction), so that the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 460 are located. The upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e are configured to be fastened and fixed without the interposition of the side assembly 480.

  The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together to the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the upper side plate member is attached to the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411. 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

  In the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is provided inside the concave portions 462 and 482 (the portion extending to the rear side is provided inside). At the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is provided inside the recessed portions 462, 482 (the portion extending to the front side is provided inside).

  In the present embodiment, since the left and right separate speakers 451 are provided in independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, the reproduction output from the speakers 451 provided in the other speaker assemblies 450R and 450L is performed. In addition to avoiding conflict with the sound to be played, it is possible to reproduce a high-quality sound as a transparent sound without hindering the reproduced sound.

  In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 of the rear assembly 480 and the upper plate member 14e abut on the upper surface of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper plate member 14e are separated from each other, and the front portion of the upper plate member 14e protrudes toward the front side at a portion arranged to face the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480, The projecting portion and the lower end of the rear assembly 480 abut on each other in the front-rear direction. That is, the speaker assembly 450 does not abut (stick) on the entire surface of the upper side plate member 14e, but has a contact mode in which the speaker assembly 450 is line-contacted particularly at the lower end.

  In this case, the portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and contacting the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the portion projecting from the upper side plate member 14e and abutting on the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 is formed integrally with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin). It is not done.

  For example, a metal member may be provided between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, a member formed of ebony may be provided, or a glass member may be provided. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

  In particular, when a metal member is provided, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to use cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel, and the like. By using these metals, sound can be made thicker.

  Further, it is desirable that the member has high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (porcelain), etc. are applicable. When these members are used, the sound rising performance can be improved.

  Regarding the shape, it may be protruded in a long plate shape, may be protruded in a spike shape, or may be protruded in a rounded dot shape. Further, the present invention is not limited to the case where the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

  Note that the arrangement of the portion functioning as the insulator described above is not limited to the rear surface of the lower end of the speaker assembly 450. For example, it may be the back of the upper end of the speaker assembly 450, the back of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450, or the side or the front of the speaker assembly 450.

  For example, when it is arranged on the back surface of the upper end, the member functioning as an insulator is formed in a tubular shape, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted into the through hole 483a is inserted. The positioning may be performed by the following. In this case, a separate locking member for positioning the member functioning as an insulator can be eliminated, and the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the function as the insulator can be achieved by tightening screws inserted into the through holes 483a. The sound effect can be adjusted by adjusting the degree of contact with the member (load applied to each other).

  At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 is the same as the screw inserted into the connecting hole 469 (see FIG. 123 (a)) or the same as the connecting hole 469. The upper side is formed by a through hole provided on the opposite side of the connecting hole 469 in the left and right direction and a screw inserted into a through hole provided at the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right position where the through hole is provided. Since the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14e, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from coming off the upper plate member 14e.

  Further, regarding the fixing of the upper frame member 410 to the upper side plate member 14e, the upper frame member 410 is inserted from the back side into the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14e in addition to the screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)) is fastened and fixed. As described above, in the fastening and fixing between the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, the load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450. Therefore, by firmly fastening and fastening the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, The upper frame member 410 can be prevented from coming off from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (adjusting the fastening condition).

  The same relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above can be said to be the same as the relationship between the main body frame 14a connected and fixed to the speaker assembly 450 via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the metal body frame 14a can function as an insulator, and the material and the contact relationship can be designed in the same manner as described above.

  126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . In FIG. 127 (b), the inner frame 12 in a state where the game board 13 is removed is shown.

  First, in order to describe the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portions 12a and 12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corners of the inner surface of the left wall of the inner frame 12, a left front support portion 12 a and a left rear support portion 12 b are separated from each other in order to support the left end of the game board 13. Will be arranged.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), the left front front support portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 that is inclined rearward toward the left from the right end of the rear end surface that is arranged to face the game board 13. A flat surface 12a2 extending leftward and rightward from the left end is formed. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on each other.

  The left end rear support portion 12b has an outer shape formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, a front end surface formed on one surface so as to be in contact with the back surface of the game board 13, and a center portion opened in a cup shape. . The left end rear support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside and a portion projecting from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

  The elastic support portion 12b1 is arranged in such a manner that the elastic support portion 12b1 projects toward the front side as it goes to the left in a natural length state. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 forms a tapered shape that expands in the left-right direction (rightward) on the side where the game board 13 is arranged in cooperation with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left front support portion 12a. Thereby, the workability at the time of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 by the worker can be improved. Next, a procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  128 (a) and 128 (b) are cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 taken along the line CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa in FIG. 127 (b), and FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b) show the board support device 600. It is a side view of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the game board 13. In FIGS. 128 and 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in chronological order, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 whose left end has begun to be pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. 128 (b) and FIG. 129 (a) show the game board 13 immediately before the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed, and in FIG. 129 (b), the game board 13 after the assembly to the inner frame 12 is completed. Illustrated. In FIG. 128 and Z39, for easy understanding, a part of the configuration of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted.

  When the operator attaches the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the dish passage forming member 160, and the vertical position of the game board 13 is adjusted to some extent. The part is slid between the left front support part 12a and the left rear support part 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid into the inner frame 12 in a posture rotated about an axis directed in the vertical direction, so that the left end front support on the near side is provided. Although there is a possibility that the portion 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, since the inclined surface 12a1 is formed on the left front support portion 12a, the game board 13 and the left front support portion 12b interfere with each other. The range (position) can be reduced. Thereby, workability can be improved.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the game board 13 is pivoted around the left end of the game board 13 (specifically, the contact position between the back side edge of the inclined surface 12a1 and the front face of the game board 13). Rotate so as to approach the inner frame 12. In the course of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged to face the flat surface 12a2, and an urging force is applied from the elastic support portion 12b1 toward the game board 13. That is, the front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the urging force applied from the elastic support portion 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

  In the process of rotating the game board 13, the vertical position of the game board 13 is regulated by the support bottom 12c of the inner frame. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left and right direction with an arrangement and a length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 90). A plurality of guide ribs 12c1, which are supported from below and whose upper front end is cut as an inclined surface, are provided in the left-right direction.

  With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the lower bottom surface of the game board 13 passes through the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in a top view. Each time, the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, so that the game board 13 can ride on the guide rib 12c1 in order from the left side so that the rotation of the game board 13 can proceed without delay. . Therefore, the workability of the operation of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 °, which is larger than the rear inclination (about 10 °) when the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game store. Thereby, the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 can be prevented from being reversed in the front-rear direction due to the rearward inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation. Workability when assembling the board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed at the same inclination angle as the rear inclination at the time of setting the game store. In this case, the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 on which the game board 13 rides can be made horizontal.

  In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the game board 13 is sandwiched between the board support devices 600 arranged vertically and released in a later-described state, and the rear face of the game board 13 rotates. It comes into contact with the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

  Here, in the board surface support device 600, in the released state, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the pre-regulation claw member 630 (the portion disposed on the front side from the position where the game board 13 is fixed) enter the game board 13. Since it is configured to retreat from the route, the workability of assembling the game board 13 can be improved.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pressing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the rear side, a load is applied to the claw member 640 after the rotation via the game board 13, and the board surface support device 600 will be described later. The game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, when the game board 13 is fixed, the upper and lower board support devices 600 change their states almost simultaneously.

  In addition, the game board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c, and the vertical position is regulated. As shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 129 (b), the board support device 600 does not contact the lower end of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600 (game The board 13 is not pushed up by the board support device 600), and the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Accordingly, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably detached with the state change of the board supporting device 600 between the released state and the fixed state.

  Here, when the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 is pushed to the rear side, the game board 13 is rotating with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum. The force required to apply a load to the game board 13 can be reduced by the long width of the game board 13, and even a weak operator can assemble the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without any problem.

  When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has its left end supported at two upper and lower positions by a left front support portion 12a and a left rear support portion 12b (see FIG. 126). 13 when the right end of 13 is insufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board support devices 600 is not in a fixed state), the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. In addition, the degree to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

  For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed by the reaction to push the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12 to close it. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the board supporting device 600 from being changed by the reaction of pushing the front frame 14 to close the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is fixed by the support portions 12a and 12b, the right end is fixed by the board support device 600, and the lower end is vertically positioned on the support bottom 12c. Is regulated.

  In a state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is disposed at the lower rear end of the game board 13 and is connected to various members and various devices provided on the game board 13. A floating connector 13a that is connected to the wiring and is supported by the game board 13 so as to be capable of changing its position in the plane direction of the game board 13, and a control board disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower board support device 600. The receiving side connector 12d to which wiring connected to the unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like is connected on the back is connected in the rotating direction of the game board 13.

  The floating connector 13a and the receiving-side connector 12d are arranged in a posture inclined in such a manner that the connection direction is directed in a direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce connection resistance in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

  The inner frame 12 is provided with a board supporting device 600 in which a pair of upper and lower members are arranged facing each other near the right corner of the inner frame 12. In addition, since the pair of upper and lower board supporting devices 600 have the same configuration and are arranged facing each other, one board supporting device 600 will be described, and description of the other board supporting device 600 will be omitted.

  130 (a) is a front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective of the board supporting device 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the board support device 600. FIG. 130 (a) and 130 (b) show a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13, and in FIGS. 131 (a) and 131 (b), the board support device 600 A release state in which the fixing of the game board 13 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the board surface support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the board supporting device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board supporting device 600 is rotatable by a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in a top view and a first shaft member P61 inserted and fixed to the frame member 610. A pre-rotation claw member 620 pivotally supported, and a regulated pre-claw member rotatably supported by a second shaft member P62 disposed on the front side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and inserted through and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620. 630 and a post-rotation claw member 640 rotatably supported by a third shaft member P63 which is disposed on the back side of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and is inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  The frame member 610 includes a main body plate portion 611 formed into a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle, and a pair of main body plate portions 611 that are disposed to face left and right. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line in the plate portion 611a, and an arc hole 613 formed in the plate portion 611a along an arc centered on the support hole 612 above the front side of the support hole 612; An arcuate concave portion 614 is provided on the back side of the support hole 612 along the arc centered on the support hole 612 and is recessed in the plate portion 611a from below, and is inserted and fixed to the plate portion 611a at a position vertically above the support hole 612. A bar-shaped regulating rod 615 and a flange extending right and left from the plate portion 611a and fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 by screws inserted into the through holes 616a in an assembled state (see FIG. 127 (b)). A pair of fixing plates 616, mainly comprises.

  The support hole 612 is a through hole through which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. The first shaft member P61 is formed as a cylindrical metal rod-shaped member having an enlarged diameter at the base end side of the insertion, inserted into the support hole 612, and then pressed at the end at the insertion end side. , Are fixed to the support holes 612. Since the fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same for the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P63, the description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

  Similar to the frame member 610, the pre-rotation claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner to form a T-shape in a side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621. A pair of supported holes 622 which are formed in a straight line through the plate portion 621a opposed to the left and right and are pivotally supported by the first shaft member P61, and penetrate in a straight line at the front upper corner of the plate portion 621a. A pair of support holes 623 which are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed, and a pair of support holes which are formed in a straight line on the back side of the plate portion 621a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed. And a hole 624.

  When the second shaft member P62 is inserted through the support hole 623, the second shaft member P62 is also inserted into the supported hole 632 of the pre-regulation claw member 630, and the third shaft member P63 is inserted into the support hole 624. At the same time, the third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.

  The main body plate portion 621 is a portion that is disposed to face left and right, and includes a long portion 621a1 that is long in the front and back, and an extension portion 621a2 that extends vertically from the front end of the long portion 621a1. A pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T shape in side view, a connection plate portion 621b for connecting and fixing the upper edge of the plate portion 621a, and a surface of the connection plate portion 621b from the rear end of the connection plate portion 621b. And a rear extension plate 621c extending downward at an angle of about 45 degrees, and extending perpendicularly to the plate portion 621a from the rear end of the extension portion 621a2 toward the opposite plate portion 621a. A hanging back plate 621d to be provided, and a front extension plate 621e extending from the lower end of the hanging back plate 621d to the front side at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the hanging back plate 621d. And mainly comprising.

  The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The angle between the side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b is a right angle, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the hanging back plate portion 621d are formed so as to be perpendicular to each other.

  The rear-side extension plate 621c is arranged so that the lower surface thereof can contact the torsion spring NBb. In the present embodiment, the torsion spring NBb is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in the released state, and the arm of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate 611 (see FIG. 134A). By retracting above the NBb, the torsion spring NBb starts to contact the main body plate portion 611.

  Thus, when the worker starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb is prevented from being generated on the worker side, while the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Immediately before the operation is completed, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated toward the operator. That is, while the force required at the start of pushing is reduced, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

  The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that comes into contact with the game board 13 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13. The front extension plate 621e functions as a guide when the game board 13 is inserted into the back of the hanging back plate 621d.

  A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates an urging force in a direction to bring the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the hanging back plate 621d close to each other. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates an urging force in a direction to separate the lower end of the claw member 640 from the rear side wall of the main body plate 611 after the rotation.

  The pre-regulation claw member 630 is a part of the main body plate 631 formed by bending the sheet metal member at a corner at a right angle to form a letter shape in a side view, and is disposed to face left and right. A pair of supported holes 632 which are formed in a straight line in the plate portion 631a to be formed, and which are supported by the second shaft member P62, and inclined forward from the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a. It mainly includes an inclined extension plate 633 that is extended by extension, and a curved surface 634 that is curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

  The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion that is disposed to face the front frame 14, and is a portion that comes closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when the board surface support device 600 is released.

  The curved surface 634 is a surface that comes into contact with the regulating rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), and thereby restricts a free posture change of the pre-regulating claw member 630.

  The post-rotation claw member 640 is a body plate portion 641 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in side view by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner, and a part of the body plate portion 641 and is disposed to face left and right. From the lower end of the front connecting plate 641b connecting the pair of supported holes 642 and the pair of plates 641a, which are formed in a straight line through the plate 641a and connected to the third shaft member P63. And an inclined extension plate 643 that is inclined and extended.

  The front connecting plate 641b is a part that contacts the back side of the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front-back position of the game board 13.

  The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and in an unlocked state (see FIG. 129 (a)), the inclined extension plate 643 has a tilt angle that makes contact with the back surface of the game board 13. It is formed.

  FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the board support device 600. FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the process in which the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. In FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), it is fixed to the multifunctional cover member 171 and the board supporting device 600 which are arranged close to the board supporting device 600. The arrangement of the game board 13 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

  That is, FIG. 134 (a) illustrates the released state of the board supporting device 600, and FIG. 135 (b) illustrates the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed immediately behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). Thus, the simple operation of pushing the claw member 640 after rotation to the rear side via the game board 13 causes the claw member 640 after rotation to rotate too much about the first shaft member P61 (third). It is possible to prevent the shaft member P63 from moving above the first shaft member P61). Accordingly, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state after the rotation.

  Here, the biasing force in the direction approaching the hanging back plate portion 621d is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 by the torsion spring NBa as described above. Therefore, when other external force does not act, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is arranged close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. On the other hand, when the curved surface 634 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 abuts on the restriction bar 615, the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the board supporting device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state, the claw member 620 before rotation is rotated. While the front side where the extending portion 621a2 is disposed tilts, the front side rises in a manner in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 separates from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  More specifically, while the regulating rod 615 is in contact with the resistance portion 634a which is a front side portion of the curved surface 634 and intersects a circle centered on the second shaft member P62 (from FIG. 134 (a)). Until 135 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises with the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620. In other words, the pre-regulation claw member 630 moves in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the pre-rotation claw member 620.

  On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed to face the regulating rod 615, When the regulating rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not come into contact with each other in the circular direction around the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 is released, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 side of the inclined extension plate 633. The leading end is disposed close to the hanging back plate 621d (see FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (b)).

  In the angle range in which the pre-regulation claw member 630 rises and moves (range between FIG. 134 (a) to FIG. 135 (a)), the front-side end of the pre-regulation claw member 630 with respect to the pre-regulation claw member 630. Even if a downward load, which is a load in the direction of tilting, is applied, a change in the posture of the pre-regulation claw member 630 during operation due to the downward load is caused by a change in the posture in the direction facing the downward load (in the rising direction). (Posture change), the reaction force to the downward load becomes excessive, and the posture change of the pre-regulation claw member 630 to the downward load is restricted.

  In addition, since the game board 13 is in contact with the rear surface of the rear side extension plate 621c, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is regulated by the game board 13 while the game board 13 is not pushed inward.

  Thus, rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a downward load applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the front frame 14, the tilting operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 provided on the front frame 14 is in a positional relationship in which the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 comes into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the pre-regulation claw member 630 in the released state of the board surface support device 600. , The shape of the front connection plate 631b, the length and the inclination angle of the inclined extension plate 633 are set.

  In the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), the game board 13 abuts on the back surface of the rear-side extension board 621c, so that when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt), the rear-side extension board is used. Rubbing friction occurs between the 621c and the game board 13. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game board 13 from moving (tilting) to the front side in the state of FIG. 134 (b). Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Here, when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in a state where the board surface supporting device 600 is released and the front claw member 620 is rotated by a load from the front frame 14, the front frame 14 is disposed on the front frame 14. Depending on the state of contact between the provided multifunctional cover member 171 and the pre-regulation claw member 630, the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state, the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state, and is stable at a halfway angle May occur.

  Assuming that the board supporting device 600 is stabilized at a halfway angle and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) can be closed in that state, the gap between the back of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front of the game board 13 is obtained. May be shortened, which may hinder the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 due to a load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multi-function disposed on the front frame 14 is adopted. When the cover member 171 contacts the pre-regulation claw member 630, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. Thereby, it is possible to remind the clerk who has performed the operation of closing the front frame 14 that the board support device 600 is not in the fixed state.

  If the clerk notices this, the clerk pushes the game board 13 until the board support device 600 is fixed, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (a), in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the pre-regulation claw Depending on the state of the contact of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the case where the board supporting device 600 reaches the fixed state and the case where the board supporting device 600 does not reach the fixed state and is stabilized at a halfway angle occur (only, The board supporting device 600 reaches a fixed state).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when the front frame 14 is set to the closed position, the multifunctional cover member 171 extends to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 can come into contact with the pre-regulation claw member 630, and in the state shown in FIG. The pre-regulation claw member 630 is configured so that the posture is not restricted by the restriction bar 615.

  In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the rear side extension plate 621 c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13. There is no.

  That is, when a downward load is applied to the pre-regulation claw member 630 in a state immediately before the pre-rotation claw member 620 is fixed, the front end of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. I have.

  Thereby, when the game board 13 is arranged at a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the force of the store clerk pushing the game board 13 is slightly insufficient, 90% of the game board becomes stable). The case where the front frame 14 is not closed until the case where the load is applied to the panel support device 600 from the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14. In this case, the board support device 600 can be changed to a fixed state by the load.

  Accordingly, the workability of the operation of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In this embodiment, the game board 13 is arranged on the board support device 600 in the released state such that the back surface of the game board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board support device 600 are in contact with each other (see FIG. )), The game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the pawl member 640 after the rotation is displaced by the game board 13, and the pawl member 620 before the rotation is accordingly rotated, thereby changing the board surface support device 600 to the fixed state. According to this method, since a downward load is not applied to the front end of the pre-regulation claw member 630, the state of the board supporting device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

  In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front surface of the game board 13 and the surface of the hanging back plate 621d of the board surface support device 600 facing the game board 13 abut in the front-rear direction. In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing the hanging back plate portion 621d, so the claw member 620 before rotation via the claw member 640 after rotation. Of the torsion spring NBb is applied as a resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side. Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  Further, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the pre-regulation claw member 630 is tilted by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is arranged to face the restriction rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves to the front side (tilt) and the game board 13 pushes the hanging back plate portion 621d and the pre-rotation claw member 620 rotates, the first shaft member P61 is centered. The non-resistance portion 634b abuts on the regulating rod 615 in the direction along the circular arc, and the resistance to the movement (tilt) of the game board 13 toward the front side increases accordingly.

  Thereby, the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b) can be reduced. Therefore, when a lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139), which will be described later, applies a load to the game board 13, the vicinity of the upper end of the game board 13 moves forward (tilt) due to the reaction. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 moves from a portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) to a portion in contact with the regulating rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b). A curved surface is formed in which the radius around the biaxial member P62 gradually increases.

  As a result, when the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed to the rear side by the multifunctional cover member 171 from the state shown in FIG. 135A and the second shaft member P62 is displaced by the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620, The non-resistance portion 634b and the regulating rod 615 are separated for a moment. Therefore, the resistance given to the pre-regulation claw member 630 from the regulation bar 615 is reduced for a moment, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is vigorously brought close to the hanging back plate portion 621d by the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. The state changes to the state shown in FIG.

  Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135B, the dimensional relationship is such that the multi-function cover member 171 is separated from the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 to the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 can be moved to the front claw member 630 or the inclined extension plate 633. , And then the board support device 600 can be fixed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be arranged at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600. That is, in a state in which the back side surface of the rear side extension plate 621c does not contact the game board 13 and the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board surface support device 600 (For example, the state can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 even when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the board is to be replaced, the front frame 14 is to be temporarily closed). Thus, the working efficiency of the worker can be improved.

  When the board surface support device 600 is changed from the fixed state to the released state, the inclined extension plate 633 is pulled to the front upper side, and the pre-regulation claw member 630 is rotated against the urging force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, since the load received from the regulating rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the regulating rod 615 are not in contact with each other in the rotation direction), the pre-regulation claw member 630 can be rotated with a light force, and the rotation is continued as it is. By doing so, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

  When the board support device 600 is released in a state where the game board 13 is fixed, the game board 13 is pushed to the front side by the displaced rotating claw member 640 (see FIG. 134 (a)). Therefore, the workability of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and rear positions of the game board 13 do not change when the board support device 600 is released.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the upper end surface of the game board 13 abuts on the lower surface of the rear side extension plate 621c of the board surface support device 600. This can eliminate the possibility that the game board 13 falls to the front side when both the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state.

  Note that the upper and lower board support devices 600 can perform an operation of switching between a released state and a fixed state one by one. Here, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support apparatus 600 as in the present embodiment, when the board support apparatus 600 is operated one by one, the front and rear positions of the game board 13 are shifted up and down. In addition, there is a possibility that the load applied to the game board 13 becomes excessive.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 and the operation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 operated when the board surface support device 600 is released. Does not match. In other words, as shown in FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), the front claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member supporting the game board 13 are compared with the displacement amount of the pre-regulation claw member 630. The amount by which 640 is displaced is smaller.

  Accordingly, when the pre-regulation claw member 630 is displaced to such an extent that the pre-regulation claw member 630 does not return to the fixed state (a degree that the pre-regulation claw member 630 is restricted from being returned by the restriction bar 615), Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and rear positions of the game board 13 at the positions supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  In addition, the same effect is produced because the post-rotation claw member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation claw member 620. That is, during the transition from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the release state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 resists the urging force of the torsion spring NBb and rotates before the rotation. And the claw member 640 after rotation can be displaced in a direction in which the angle between the claw member 640 and the claw member 640 is increased.

  Therefore, the amount of displacement of the game board 13 pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed as compared with the amount of displacement of the claw member 620 before rotation, so that the game board at a position supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600 can be suppressed. 13 can be prevented from shifting in the front-rear position. Thereby, the load applied to the game board 13 can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 139, a relationship between the board supporting device 600 disposed below and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 8010 taken along the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 136 to 139 show the front frame 14 in a simple shape and the closed state of the front frame 14.

  In FIG. 136, the released state of the board supporting device 600 is shown, in FIG. 137, the fixed state of the board supporting apparatus 600 is shown, and in FIG. 138, the board supporting apparatus 600 is shifted from the released state to the fixed state by a predetermined angle (about 25 °). 139) The rotated state is shown in FIG. 139 in a state immediately before the board supporting device 600 is fixed, and the thickness of the game board 13 supported by the board supporting device 600 is shown by imaginary lines. Is done.

  136 to 139, the relationship between the board supporting device 600 and the opening / closing restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. 136 and 137 are shown by imaginary lines in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139.

  As shown in FIG. 136, when the board support device 600 is released, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 136), the interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 interfere with each other. Therefore, in the released state of the board supporting device 600, it is allowed to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is detached, but to close the front frame 14 when the game board 13 is arranged. Is regulated.

  As shown in FIG. 137, when the board supporting device 600 is in a fixed state, if the front frame 14 is arranged in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the opening / closing restricting portion 159 and the board supporting device 600 is avoided. . In addition, since the game board 13 is disposed on the back side as compared with the disposition of the board support device 600 in the released state, interference between the game board 13 and the operation unit rear member 155 above the opening / closing control unit 159 is provided. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board supporting device 600, the front frame 14 is allowed to be closed regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

  As shown in FIG. 138, when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is rotated by a predetermined angle from the released state to the fixed state side, when the front frame 14 is disposed in the closed position (see FIG. 138), The opening / closing restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600.

  Further, in this state, even if an attempt is made to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. (Clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (FIG. 138 counterclockwise direction) are in opposite directions, so that the reaction force becomes excessively large. This is as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 138, the closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in the state where the game board 13 is provided, the front lower end of the game board 13 may abut on the rear side extension plate 621c in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The effect of restricting the closing of the frame 14 is enhanced.

  As shown in FIG. 139, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 139) when the front rotation claw member 620 of the board surface support device 600 is in the state immediately before the fixed state, the opening / closing control unit 159 And the inclined extension plate 633 of the board surface support device 600 interferes.

  Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the pre-rotation claw member 620 by applying a rearward load to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the pre-rotation claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulating rod 615. The direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotation direction of the pre-regulation claw member 630 (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 138) do not become opposite directions, and it is easy to push in with a normal load as described above. (See FIG. 135 (a)).

  Therefore, in the state of the board supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing the front frame 14, the pre-regulation claw member 630 is pushed through the opening / closing regulating portion 159, and the board supporting device 600 can be fixed. Therefore, closing the front frame 14 is allowed.

  FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. 140 and 141 show a state in which the cover member that closes the back of the ball launching unit 112a and the back pack 92 is disassembled from the inner frame 12.

  The detailed structure of the ball firing unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball firing unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. Note that FIG. 143 (a) illustrates a state where the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened, and FIG. 143 (b) illustrates a state where the ball receiving member 731 is reversed after being disassembled. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b), only the ball receiving member 731 is illustrated on the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a includes a base member 710 formed of metal or die-cast, and a base member 711 centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. The front of the base member 710 is pivotally supported between a closed state (see FIG. 142 (a)) partially covering the front thereof and an open state (see FIG. 23 (a)) which opens the front of the base member 710. And a ball feeder 720 having a cover member 721 which is provided.

  The base member 710 is a member that supports the cover member 721, is locked by a hook or the like that elastically deforms to the base member 710, is provided on the front side of the base member 710, and is formed of a synthetic resin or the like. In order to regulate the attitude of the firing solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, the firing rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 hit by the firing solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the ball receiving member 731 A fastening portion 716 in which a screw that is cylindrically protruded toward the front side and that fastens and fixes the ball receiving member 731 is screwed into an intermediate position of the bulging portion 716a that bulges straightly from the base member 710 to the front side; , And a plurality of positioning projections 719.

  The base member 711 includes a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the bar-shaped portion 722 is inserted at the right corner, and a locking portion 713 formed to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction. A protrusion 714 protruding toward the front side near the right side of the locking portion 713 and a suction force generating solenoid 741 are disposed so as to be opposed to each other when the cover member 721 is closed (see FIG. 142A). And a convexity judging portion 715 that is protruded.

  The protrusion 714 is a portion that covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), and is located on the left side of the sphere passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721. An opposing plane 714a formed opposite to the side surface 724c and formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and an inclined surface that is opposite to the opposing plane 714a and that is inclined rightward toward the back side. And a surface 714b.

  When the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the malfunction determination convex portion 715 does not abut on the attraction force generation solenoid 741, but loosens the attraction force generation solenoid 741 ( In a state of being floated from the cover member 721, the cover member 721 is formed at a protruding height which abuts and restricts rotation of the cover member 721.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the cover member 721 from being closed when the fastening force of the suction force generating solenoid 741 is loosened, and to form a case in which the cover member 721 cannot be closed so that the sales force is applied to the clerk. It can be noticed that the fastening of the generating solenoid 741 is loose. Therefore, before the malfunction of the ball firing unit 112a occurs, repair (fixing the suction force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed beforehand.

  The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 that is rotatably supported by the base member 711, a regulation state that regulates the falling of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a regulation state of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144). And a switching device 740 that is controlled to change the state between an allowable state in which the air flows down to the firing rail 730.

  The cover member 721 is formed of a light-transmissive resin material into a cup shape with the back side (the front side in the drawing in the posture of FIG. 143 (a)) opened, and a pair of loosely fitted to the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711. , A hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the right and left opposite sides of the bar portion 722, and a ball P8 (see FIG. 144) passing at a position displaced toward the bar portion 722 side from the hook portion 723 A ball passage opening 724 drilled in the front-rear direction with a possible size, and a cutting metal member 725 disposed in a positional relationship protruding slightly upward from a lower edge of an inner end of the ball passage opening 724; And a shaft rod portion 726 that supports the ball guide arm member 742 of the switching device 740.

  The switching device 740 is an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a member made of a synthetic resin whose one end is loosely fitted to the shaft bar portion 726, and the attraction force generating solenoid 741 generates a magnetic force. A ball guide arm member 742 that rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not the metal plate 743 is a sheet metal member that is locked on the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and that is attracted to the attraction force generating solenoid 741; A guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and is inclined downward as the distance from the ball passage opening 724 increases, and the ball P8 can be accommodated upward from the base of the guide inclined portion 744. And a regulating projection 745 that extends toward the sphere passage opening 724 along a plane perpendicular to the shaft bar 726.

  The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage that can guide the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and has a falling plate portion 724a that is inclined downward in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction. A rib portion 724b, which is disposed above the falling plate portion 724a, extends downward in a rib shape from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724, and has a tip end surface which is inclined downward toward the back side; A left inner side surface 724c, which is provided continuously with the left end portion and whose surface is formed along the vertical direction. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward and to the right.

  When the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), the ball P8 comes into contact with the inclined surface 714b, and the inclined surface 714b is inclined. It flows down to the back side while being displaced to the right along. Therefore, the sphere P8 flows down in a manner of being separated from the cutting metal member 725 in the left-right direction, so that the sphere P8 and the cutting metal 725 are arranged while the cutting metal member 725 is arranged to protrude inside the sphere passage opening 724. The collision with the member 725 can be prevented.

  The firing rail 730 is a rail member extending from the intermediate position of the base member 710 so as to incline upward toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, there is provided a ball receiving member 731 which is disposed at an interval shorter than the diameter of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144).

  The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member that is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the long direction are parallel and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through-hole 731a formed as a long hole along the direction and passing the fastening screw, and a straight line (a straight line passing through the through-hole 731a and facing the long hole direction of the through-hole 731a) like the bulging portion 716a. And a regulating groove 731b having a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a and a depth slightly larger than the bulging height of the bulging portion 716a.

  When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through-hole 731a is to be fastened and fixed together with the fastening portion 716, the bulging portion 716a expands the ball receiving member 731. The ball P8 can be slid along the straight line that is output, whereby the standby position (the distance from the plunger 702) of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) can be adjusted. Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing intensity of the ball P <b> 81 (the firing intensity when the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 86) is rotated by the same amount) can be easily adjusted. In addition, since the regulating groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the attitude of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

  The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and extends diagonally upward and to the left; It has mounting plate parts 730b and 730c hanging down from the front and rear sides of the plate part 730a. The base is formed by screws inserted into a plurality of (two in this embodiment) mounting holes 732 formed in the mounting plate parts 730b and 730c. Attached to member 710.

  Further, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided in the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and a sound or a vibration generated by contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball is provided. Is suppressed.

  The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and contacts the front and rear two places on the peripheral surface of the ball P8 (see FIG. 146 (b)) to move the ball P8 upward. It is configured to guide.

  FIG. 144 (a) to FIG. 144 (c) are front views of the sphere launching unit 112a showing a sphere sending state by the sphere feeding device 720 in a time series. 144 (a) to 144 (c), illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted for easy understanding.

  144 (a), the switching device 740 is in the regulated state (the state in which the supply of power to the suction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guide arm member 742 is lowered by gravity), as shown in FIG. 144 (a). In the case of, the regulating protrusion 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, and abuts on the game ball P <b> 8 that has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to an allowable state (a state in which electric power is supplied to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guide arm member 742 is raised), the regulating protrusion 745. Retreats above the sphere, and the regulation of the downward flow of the sphere P8 is released, whereby the sphere P8 flows above the guide inclined portion 744. In this state, the ball P <b> 8 abuts on the front side wall of the base member 711, whereby further downward flow is regulated, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide inclined portion 744.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the ball guide arm member 742 returns to the regulated state again, the ball P8 riding on the guide inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. Is done. Thus, the ball P8 is guided to the rear side according to the inclination of the guide inclined portion 744, and is guided to the firing rail 730.

  Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball that has entered the ball passage opening 724 also in the state shown in FIG. 144 (c). Is regulated. Therefore, the balls can be supplied to the firing rail 730 one by one. The ball P8 entering the ball passage opening 724 is a ball supplied from an opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a ball stored in the upper plate 17. is there.

  FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and includes a through hole 725 a through which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 is inserted and a falling plate portion 724 a. A lower blade portion 725b having an upper side substantially along the upper surface of the lower blade portion 725b, and a notch with a sharp acute end formed between the lower blade portion 725b and the same plate as the base plate of the lower blade portion 725b. And an upper blade portion 725c extending from the main body.

  The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip is inclined more rearward than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side protrudes above the falling plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the base end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the base end side (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in a front view.

  The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as an octopus thread fixed to the ball. Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147, how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8 and entered is described.

  FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the sphere launching unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is a partial top view of the sphere launching unit 112a as viewed in the direction of arrow CXLVIb in FIG. 146 (a). ) Is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and FIG. 147 (b) is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725, showing the relationship between the thread Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG. 147 (a). FIG. 148 is a partial front view of the ball firing unit 112a, the inner rail 61, and the outer rail 62 after the ball P8 is fired. In FIGS. 146 and 147, some components of the ball firing unit 112a are not shown for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the ball P8 guided to the firing rail 730 stays in contact with the lower left edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)). ), A current flows through the firing solenoid 701 from this state, and the plunger 702 vigorously protrudes, giving a firing force to the ball P8, and the ball P8 is hit along the firing rail 730 (FIG. 147 (a)). )reference).

  Here, the ball P8 is struck while one end of the thread Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the thread Y8 left at hand is moved to pull the thread Y8 while the ball P8 is in the game area. It has been known that the player can loosen the ball P8 to repeatedly detect the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cut using the momentum of the firing of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is located at the firing standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the thread Y8 rides on the upper surface of the falling plate portion 724a in such a manner that the yarn Y8 moves closer to the right side toward the back side. (See FIG. 146 (b)).

  When the ball P8 is struck in this state, the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling on the firing rail 730 under the falling plate portion 724a, and the middle portion of the yarn Y8 of the falling plate portion 724a. Since it moves along the upper surface, the yarn Y8 enters the lower side of the upper blade portion 725c projecting above the falling plate portion 724a, and enters the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c. .

  While the player holds the end (the other end) on the near side of the thread Y8, a load accompanying the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the thread Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thus, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  When the firing strength of the ball P8 is low, there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 is not cut due to insufficient tensile force, but in this case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area, It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the foul ball receiving portion 146, flows down the foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, no matter how much load is applied to the yarn Y8, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, so that it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of an improper act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

  Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the game board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the game board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operation device 800 is visible from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86. Are substantially the same.

  In the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, a rendering operation unit 1000 shown in FIGS. 150 to 152 is provided. The effect operation unit 1000 includes a petal operation device 800, a side base material 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, and an advance / retreat operation unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100.

  The reciprocating operation unit 900 raises and lowers the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the driving motor 921 (the reciprocating operation, that is, the operation of moving inward of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the third operation). The operation includes at least one of an operation of retreating to the outside of the display area of the symbol display device 81), and a petal operation device 800 is connected to one end and the other end is connected to the other end. Is driven by a drive motor 921 via an arm gear 924 while being pivotally supported by the rear plate 1100, and drives the drive-side arm member 910 to rotate. A driving motor 921 for generating a driving force, and a transmission unit 920 including a plurality of gears for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 921 to the driving arm member 910. A thin plate-shaped slide plate 930 that slides in the left-right direction in conjunction with the rotation operation of the drive-side arm member 910, and a thin plate-shaped second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930; And a long plate-like driven arm member 950 for connecting the back plate 1100 and the petal operating device 800 on the left and right opposite sides of the driving arm member 910.

  Next, the structure of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 153 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operating device 800 along the line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. In FIG. 154, the supporting substrate 801 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

  The petal operating device 800 is configured such that a member such as a petal 802 is supported on a support base material 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the support base material 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and the overall shape is hidden by other members and is not shown in the drawing. And a substrate disposed on the back surface of the plate-shaped portion.

  A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position on the right side of the upper end in the central body portion of the supporting base material 801, and a driving shaft of the central motor 804 is moved forward through a small gap formed in the supporting base material 801. A first gear 804 </ b> G (see FIG. 156), which will be described later, is fixed to the tip of the protrusion.

  An opening 801P is formed at a position slightly lower left of the center motor 804 in the center main body portion of the supporting base material 801. The opening 801P is disposed to the right of the opening 801P, extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes, and extends inside. A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole and having a screw insertion hole at a distal end portion is integrally formed. Around the screw insertion portion 801S, a donut-shaped recessed portion 801D (see FIG. 152) that is recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which a detection arc plate 880d of the loose fitting device 880 described below can pass. It is formed.

  An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed, below the central motor 804 (see FIG. 156).

  A decorative member 807 is arranged and fixed on the front side of the support base material 801 so as to open a vertically long, generally elliptical area in the center and cover the peripheral area from the front. The decorative member 807 is divided into a horizontally long upper portion forming an upper end region, and a substantially U-shaped lower portion forming a region below the upper portion.

  In the present embodiment, the support base 801 has a shape that slightly extends up and down as a whole. However, since the petal operating device 800 is disposed so as to be movable up and down as described later, The operating space can be reduced by forming the 801 into a vertically long shape rather than the left and right long shape.

  At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are respectively linked (linked) to the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G which are concentrically arranged so as to overlap with the position of the opening 801P as described later. The outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G can be arranged at any position as long as they do not interfere with each other. In the present embodiment, however, they can be arranged via the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G, respectively. It is arranged on the right (see FIG. 156).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight on the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a slightly inclined position toward the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from hanging downward. it can. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an interval between the supporting base material 801 and the driving arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the supporting base material 801 from being increased, and the driving base arm member 910 is connected to the driving base arm member 910 via the driving arm member 910. Thus, the driving force can be appropriately transmitted to the supporting base material 801.

  FIG. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 156 is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base 801 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petals 802 are made of resin molded to imitate the shape of one of five petals separated from each other, which constitute a flower of a hibiscus in a flowering state as a whole. And a plate-shaped flat plate member 803 on the back side.

  FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820.

  Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape that extends in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and has a shape that curves so as to gently bulge forward from the center to the outer periphery (see FIG. 154). ).

  Irregular irregularities including a large number of wrinkles are formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the periphery thereof has an irregular shape when viewed from the front. The five petals 802 are not strictly identical in shape to each other, but are slightly similar in unevenness and the like, but are formed in approximately the same shape. Most of the petals 802 have a specific color (red) but are almost transparent, and the outer peripheral edge is formed so that the specific color (red) is dark without forming a particular boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

  Each petal 802 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 802S that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape and has a screw hole inside at two locations, that is, the vicinity of the outer periphery on the rear side surface of each petal 802 and the radial center portion. I have.

  The petals 802 are located closer to the rounded tip (counterclockwise in front view, right side of FIG. 157 (a) in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where they are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803 than to the rear side 802a. The front side portion 802b arranged on the sharp edge side (clockwise in front view, left side in FIG. 157 (a) of the drawing) is arranged on the front side. In other words, the front side 802b is closer to the back cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side 802a.

  The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the rear side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one side, and the rear side 802a is superimposed on the rear side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other side. Petals 802 are arranged so as to gather toward the same center with the tip on the inner peripheral side.

  The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced back and forth, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b overlap at the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175). Since the matching positional relationship can be set, the difference (size difference) in the shape of the entire petal 802 between the assembled position and the fully opened position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) can be remarkable.

  The five petals 802 have a disk-shaped (doughnut-shaped) rear surface having a circular opening S1 at the center as a whole in the arrangement state (see FIG. 155).

  As shown in FIGS. 155, 156, and 157, the flat plate member 803 is a long plate-shaped resin member separated from each other and fixed to the five petals 802.

  Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extending in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and further has an outer peripheral edge portion extending forward.

  In the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arrangement state, a pair of screw-in portions 803S which extend rearward in a cylindrical shape and have screw holes therein are provided in the circumferential direction (flat plate). The member 803 is integrally formed at a position separated from the member 803 in the lateral direction.

  The screw-in portions 803S are formed so as to be located substantially on both side walls in the circumferential direction (transverse direction) of each flat plate member 803. Further, a pair of screw-in portions are formed along portions on both side walls of the flat plate member 803. Slide ribs 803a, which are perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extend rearward from the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in a rectangular shape, extend to both sides along a surface direction circumscribing the peripheral surface of the screw portion 803S. Thus, it is formed integrally with the peripheral wall of the threaded portion 803S.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (b), the rear side surface of each flat plate member 803 has two screw insertion holes inside at two positions corresponding to the screw-in portions 802S of the petals 802, respectively. A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

  The screw insertion portion 802S of the corresponding petal 802 is brought into contact with the screw insertion portion 803H of each flat member 803 from the front, and a screw is screwed in from the rear side, whereby each flat member 803 is inserted into the corresponding petal 802. Each is fixed.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 are appropriately referred to. As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed behind the flat plate member 803.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a similar front shape in which five similar shaped portions are annularly continuous, and a circular opening 811 is formed in the center. As shown in FIG. 159, a substantially cylindrical front peripheral wall portion 812 and a rear peripheral wall portion 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the peripheral edge of the circular opening 811 in both front and rear directions.

  156 will be described again. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 has a cylindrical shape at the front and rear at two adjacent locations among five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction and at the middle one of the three locations except the two locations. A threaded portion 813S having a screw hole is formed integrally inside the extension, and a positioning boss 813a extends from a leading edge of a location where the threaded portion 813S is not formed among the above five locations. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screw-in portion 813S and the positioning boss 813a. One of the purposes of the bulging portion is to suppress sliding friction, which will be described later in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 includes a central slit 814 and both-side slits 815. Each of the center slits 814 is formed so as to extend linearly further outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 to the outside, that is, the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the center slit 814 is counterclockwise viewed from the front by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the present pachinko machine 8010). It extends along the inclined direction D12.

  Both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel on both sides of the central slit 814 with a slight space therebetween.

  In this manner, a set of three slits, the central slit 814 and the two side slits 815 on both sides thereof, is formed at five locations in the circumferential direction at equal intervals (72 ° intervals). Each end of the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 may be formed in a circular shape (semicircular shape) in front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

  In the present embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the outermost double-sided slit 815 in the set of these three slits, that is, of the four corners of the three slits, the two corners on the small diameter side are the two-sided slits. It has a substantially rectangular shape in the extension direction of 815 and slightly extends (a rectangular cut is formed). The rectangular extension (cut) is for fitting the slide rib 803 a of the flat plate member 803.

  The slit member 810 is connected to a side end of a flat plate on which the central slit 814 and both-side slits 815 are formed, and has a smaller outer diameter than the outer peripheral ends of the center slit 814 and both-side slits 815, and has an outer diameter. Has an arc plate 816 formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

  Thereby, the rigidity of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed from being deformed in the circumferential direction or the axial direction.

  Further, as described above, as shown in FIG. 158, the pair of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 each extend along the direction D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. The five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are arranged closer together so as to be closer to the inside, whereby the outer shape of the slit member 810 is also made compact.

  In other words, it is assumed that the five sets of central slits 814 and both side slits 815 are formed so as to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811. In the case where the slits 810 are formed so as to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, the five sets of the central slits 814 and the both-side slits 815 can be laid out more densely. The outer peripheral shape can be made smaller.

  As shown in FIG. 155 and FIG. 156, a slide member 820 is arranged in the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. As shown in FIG. 157, the slide member 820 is a resin member having a long plate-like front shape, and has a small thickness at both ends of the slide member 820 and a tip portion having a semicircular shape in a front view. An extending portion to be formed, a central portion that is bulged out of the rendering portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 formed in the extending portion, and a center of the slide member 820. A guide pin 822 projecting from the front to the front side and inserted into the central slit 814 in the assembled state; a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner protruding from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side; Is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is arranged so that the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersects the long direction at right angles. And both side slits 815.

  On the other hand, the threaded portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is fitted into the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When fully fitted, the screw-in portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 projects slightly rearward from the rear surface of the slit member 810. In this state, screws with washers (washer head screws) 824 are inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and are screwed into the screw-in portions 803S of the flat plate member 803 and fixed.

  Thus, the slide member 820 is fixed to the rear side of the flat plate member 803 with the slit member 810 interposed therebetween. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 803 is almost along the corresponding outer edge of the slit 815 on both sides of the slit member 810. It is inserted without a gap.

  As a result, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 of the slit member 810. At this time, the posture in which the flat plate member 803 faces a fixed outward direction without rotating around the guide pin 822. Is regulated by the slide rib 803a so as to slide.

  FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are rear perspective views of the slide member 820 and the center motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the illustration of the fourth gear 880G is omitted. 160 and 161 refer to FIGS. 155 and 156 as appropriate.

  As described above, the rotating plate 830 is disposed from the rear side on the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotating plate 830 is a resin disk having a circular pivot opening 831 in the center.

  As shown in FIG. 160, the rotating plate 830 includes a guide rail 832 formed on the front side, with a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831, and formed around the peripheral wall.

  The guide rail 832 is formed such that the peripheral wall extends forward from the front side surface of the rotating plate 830, and the peripheral wall extends along the surface direction of the rotating plate 830 so as to extend so as to be closed in an elongated loop shape in a front view. It is formed integrally with the rotating plate 830.

  The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The width of the inside of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a small gap of play. The ridge corner at the extended end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed so as to be angled.

  The guide rail 832 extends from a position in contact with the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a clockwise direction in a front view along a direction substantially intermediate between a tangent to the pivot opening 831 and a normal line. Further, it extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotating plate 830 while being curved in an arc shape further toward the clockwise direction in front view than the intermediate direction (see FIG. 175 (a)).

  The end of the guide rail 832 on the side of the pivot opening 831, that is, the peripheral wall of the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 at the center end is formed so as to be integrally continuous with the peripheral wall of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831. The front end protrudes forward from the front end of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831.

  Four more guide rails 832 are formed around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced from the pivot opening 831. It extends so as to spiral from the periphery to the outside.

  As shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830 </ b> G that extends rearward from the periphery of the pivot opening 831 in a peripheral wall shape and has teeth on the outer periphery is integrally formed on the rear side surface of the rotating plate 830. The second gear 830G is disposed so as to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is driven to rotate by the central motor 804.

  As shown in FIG. 154, the rotating plate 830 is attached so that the pivot opening 831 is fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. At this time, the rear ends of the five slide pins 823 projecting rearward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832 (see FIG. 174 (c)).

  Since the outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is locally bulged at five places as described above, the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is not linear but linear. As a result, the pivotal opening 831 of the rotating plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 with little frictional resistance, so that the rotating plate 830 is smoothly pivotably supported.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a third gear 810G slightly smaller in diameter than the second gear 830G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is further fixed to the rear side of the second gear 830G so as to be concentric. Are arranged so as to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

  A circular pivot opening 810a is formed at the center of the third gear 810G, and around the pivot opening 810a, three portions of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156) are provided. A screw insertion hole 810b is formed at a position corresponding to the screw insertion portion 813S, and a positioning hole 810c is formed at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 813a.

  The third gear 810 </ b> G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the second gear 830 </ b> G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810, and is positioned with respect to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810. 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into positioning hole 810c, and is fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into screw-in portion 813S (see FIG. 156) through screw insertion hole 810b.

  As a result, the slit member 810 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G, and is braked by the oil damper 805. Is held on the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be detached.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a central shaft rotating device 850 is disposed from the front side of the slit member 810. The central shaft rotating device 850 mainly includes a central shaft member 851 that is fastened and fixed to the support base material 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 that is rotatably fitted around the central shaft member 851. Prepare for.

  FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880, and FIG. 163 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central shaft rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 includes a shaft portion 852 formed in an incomplete cylindrical shape in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut out along the axial direction, and the shaft portion 852. And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to increase the diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

  A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen portion 856 penetrating the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen portion 856 on the front side surface of the flange 855, a front screw portion 857 having screw holes therein at two places on the left and right sides of the lumen portion 856, and a side from the front screw portion 857 to the lumen portion 856 side. A holding portion 858, which is formed in a shape having a counterbore at a deviated position toward the rear side, and two support protrusions 859 extending slightly short forward in a columnar shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front screw-in portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

  The inner peripheral surface of the lumen 856 extends in a columnar shape along the axial direction of the shaft 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing portions, extends further rearward from the rear end of the shaft 852, and A rear screw-in portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at the rear end of the peripheral wall of the shaft portion 852 at a position equidistant from the rear screw portions 853 so as to protrude rearward.

  As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, an LED board 861 is disposed in front of the center shaft member 851. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate slightly smaller in diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  A screw insertion hole 862 and a positioning hole 863 are formed in the LED substrate 861 at positions corresponding to the front screw-in portion 857 and the front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851, respectively.

  By inserting the front positioning boss 854 of the center shaft member 851 into the positioning hole 863 of the LED board 861 and positioning the screw, the screw is screwed into the front screwing portion 857 of the center shaft member 851 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED board 861. The LED board 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

  An insertion hole 864 is formed in the LED board 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the center shaft member 851 in a size that allows the screw-in portion 869 of the center decoration member 868 to be fitted inside.

  As shown in FIG. 162, the front surface of the LED substrate 861 faces forward at one location at the center and at many locations arranged at equal intervals on concentric circles multiplexed (doubled) around the one location. The LEDs 865 are respectively arranged and fixed, and emit light forward.

  In the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side surface and the rear side surface of the LED board 861, laterally oriented LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at a number of locations arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and emit light outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861. It is supposed to. Note that the horizontal LEDs 866 on the front side surface of the LED board 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the front LEDs 865. On the rear side surface of the LED board 861, a connector connection portion 867 is disposed and fixed rearward.

  On the front side of the LED board 861, a center decoration member 868 is arranged. The center decoration member 868 is formed of a resin material having a specific color (yellow) but almost transparent, is extended in a columnar shape from the base of a long plate to the back side, and a screw can be screwed into the center. It has a pair of screw-in portions 869 in which screw holes are formed.

  The screw portion 869 is arranged at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861. A screw-in portion 869 that has passed through the insertion hole 864 of the LED board 861 abuts on the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the LED board 861 interposed therebetween, and a screw is screwed into the screw-in portion 869 from the back side of the flange 855. As a result, the center decoration member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855. Thus, the center decoration member 868 functions as a stopper for the LED board 861.

  The loose fitting device 880 has a small-diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851, and coaxial with the small-diameter cylindrical member 881. And a large-diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a cylindrical shape with a flange having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member. A main body cylindrical member 883 which is a cylindrical member with a flange sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882 and which is loosely and rotatably fitted to the small-diameter cylindrical member 881 and the large-diameter cylindrical member 882.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is integrally formed with a screw-in portion 883S extending in a front and rear cylindrical shape and internally having a screw hole at two of the four locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion. The positioning boss 883a extends from the leading edge of the formed and the above-mentioned four places where the screw-in portion 883S is not formed.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at four positions corresponding to the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected at the corresponding four intermediate positions in the circumferential direction with the same protrusion length as the screw-in portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a in the outer diameter direction in the shape of a rib and at the same time in the axial direction. A sliding rib 883b is formed to extend therethrough.

  A decorative member 884 formed on the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 with an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861 and covering the LED substrate 861 from the front side in an assembled state (see FIG. 149), and the decorative member 884 is externally mounted. A rear cover 886 which is fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the diameter and has a bottomed cup shape in which the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastened portion and abuts against the flange portion of the main body cylindrical member 883 from the rear side and is fastened and fixed. , Are arranged.

  The back cover 886 is entirely plated on its front and back surfaces (yellow in the present pachinko machine 8010), whereby the side surface is mirror-finished. Therefore, for example, light emission can be performed by reflecting the light of the horizontal LED 866 disposed on the back side of the LED board 861 near the outer periphery.

  The decorative member 884 is a member that performs light emission by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 provided on the LED substrate 861, and has a hibiscus flower shape, and transmits light in a specific color (red). A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having a property, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light transmissive resin material having a disk shape in which a peripheral wall rises to the back side on the back side thereof. In addition, an opening 885 is formed in a central portion with a size that allows the center decoration member 868 to be inserted.

  The main body cylindrical member 883 thus configured is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to a fourth gear 880G disposed behind the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

  As shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivot opening 831 is arranged and fixed to the rear side of the third gear 810G. A pair of intermediate gears 808 rotatably supported by the support base material 801 and meshing with each other are meshed with each other.

  One of the intermediate gears 808 meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with one of the gears meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G via the intermediate gear 808.

  A circular pivot opening 880a is formed in the center of the fourth gear 880G, and around the pivot opening 880a, a screw insertion hole is provided at a position corresponding to the two screw insertion portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883. 880b is provided with a positioning hole 880c at a position corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a.

  The fourth gear 880G is disposed so as to overlap the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central shaft rotating device 850, and has a positioning boss with respect to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880. 883a (see FIG. 163) is positioned by inserting it into positioning hole 880c, and fixed by screwing a screw (not shown) into screw insertion portion 883S (see FIG. 163) through screw insertion hole 880b.

  As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is linked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and is braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off, and the slit is formed. The member 810 is held so as not to be detached from the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.

  The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d that extends to the rear side in an arc shape around the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side of the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. As the detection arc plate 880d, plates of the same shape are arranged at five locations at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 154), the detection arc plate 880d is housed in the donut-shaped recess 801D (see FIG. 152), and is provided so as to detect a member passing through the donut-shaped recess 801D. It is detected by a coupler type detection sensor 801C. That is, in this embodiment, the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval (center angle 72 °) of the detection arc plate 880d can be detected regardless of the posture of the fourth gear 880G from which rotation (the minimum angle). The detection of 72 ° can be performed, and the rotation of 72 ° or more can be ensured by the detection).

  The assembly of the center shaft rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 to which the LED board 861 is arranged and fixed and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are sufficiently inserted, the rear ends of the shaft portions 852 project slightly rearward from the pivotal openings 810a of the third gear 810G.

  A rear positioning boss 854 projecting further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is inserted into a positioning notch (not shown) in the support base material 801 (see FIG. 152) for positioning, and similarly from the rear end of the shaft portion 852. The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base material 801 by inserting the rear screw part 853 projecting rearward into the insertion hole of the screw insertion part 801S in the support base material 801 and fixing the screw.

  At this time, a wire is connected to the connector connecting portion 867 of the LED board 861, and the wire is led backward through the inner cavity 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801 </ b> P of the support base 801 (not shown).

  With the above mounting structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed so as to protrude forward with respect to the support base material 801, and the slit member 810 is formed in the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 as shown in FIG. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is fitted to the outside, and the front peripheral wall portion 812 is fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 so as to be fitted to the outside.

  At this time, since the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 is locally bulged at eight places along the circumferential direction by the threaded portion 883S, the positioning boss 883a, and the sliding rib 883b, the rear peripheral wall of the slit member 810 is formed. The inner peripheral surface of the slit member 810 is linearly contacted with the inner peripheral surface of the slit member 810, whereby the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 with little frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is moved. It is pivoted smoothly and freely.

  FIG. 164 is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800, the driving arm member 910 and the driven arm member 950, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of the rear plate 1100. The petal operating device 800 vertically moves up and down (moves forward and backward) when a vertical load is applied from the driving arm member 910. In the description after FIG. 164, FIG. 150 to FIG. 152 are appropriately referred to.

  The back plate 1100 is a horizontally long rectangular member fastened and fixed to the deepest portion inside the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and at the lower left corner in front view. A support pillar 1110 protruding in a columnar shape on the front side, a gear housing 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed above the support pillar 1110 so as to be able to be housed from the front side, A rail fixing portion 1130 disposed on the left and right sides of the support column 1110 with the rail fixing portion 1130 interposed therebetween. Mainly equipped.

  The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion that rotatably supports the drive-side arm member 910, and is a pair of left and right holes arranged near the outer periphery at the front end thereof so that a screw can be screwed therein. It has a threaded portion 1111 to be formed, and a positioning boss 1112 extending to the front side as a pair of upper and lower portions on the same surface as the leading edge of the threaded portion 1111.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the drive-side arm member 910 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member bent in the shape of a letter when viewed from the rear. A rotation shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by the shaft 1110; a connection protrusion 912 projecting in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long body member; A transmission elongated hole 913 that is formed in a linear elongated shape from the bending point of the long main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side, and the petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long main body member. And a support portion 914.

  The drive-side arm member 910 includes an inner fitting protrusion 925 that is fitted in the transmission elongated hole 913, and a flange 926 that protrudes radially outward to a position where the detection sensor 1162 detects the rotation of the arm gear 924. In conjunction therewith, the support column 1110 rotates about an axis.

  The gear accommodating portion 1120 is a concave portion for accommodating the gear of the transmission means 920, and is composed of three circular concave portions that are connected to each other while slightly crossing each other. The gear accommodating portion 1120 is disposed on the left end side and accommodates the motor gear 922. A first accommodating portion 1121, a second accommodating portion 1122 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121, and a drive-side arm member disposed directly opposite to the first accommodating portion 1121 with the second accommodating portion 1122 interposed therebetween. 910 and a third housing portion 1123 in which an arm gear 924 to be fitted is housed.

  The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports an operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) in which a plurality of metal plates are stacked back and forth and slidably supported up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted, and a positioning boss 1132 that fits with the operation rail 1000R and positions the operation rail 1000R. Placed on a line. The posture of the petal operating device 800 is maintained constant by the rigidity of the operating rail 1000R.

  The support slot 1140 is a slot that slidably supports the driven arm member 950, and is inclined and disposed so as to descend toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° as viewed from the front. An extension wall 1141 is provided to extend to the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the driven arm member 950 is formed of a long rod-shaped main body member formed substantially in a straight line in a rear view, and is provided with a columnar projection at one end to the rear side. It mainly includes a supported convex portion 951 slidably supported by the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100, and a support portion 952 that supports the petal operating device 800 at the other end.

  A cylindrical collar is loosely fitted into the supported projection 951, and a screw is fastened to a threaded portion 951a formed at the tip of the supported projection 951 in a state in which the collar is internally fitted in the support elongated hole 1140. Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported projection 951, and the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the width of the elongated support hole 1140.

  FIG. 166 is an exploded front perspective view of the back plate 1100, the side substrate 1000S, and the second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive-side arm member 910, the slide plate 930, and the second effect member 940. is there.

  The slide plate 930 is supported by the side base material 1000S so as to be slidable left and right by a plurality of (three in this embodiment) supported long holes 931 formed in the front and rear direction in a long hole shape extending left and right. It is connected to the connection protrusion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by a base end side long hole 932 formed in the front-rear direction and formed in a vertically extending elongated hole shape provided on the left end side, and provided on the right end side. And is connected to the second effect member 940 through a front-end side insertion hole 933 that is formed in the front-rear direction.

  The base-side elongated hole 932 extends vertically downward from the lower end of the stop portion 932a formed along a locus at which the connection protrusion 912 rotates at the upper end around the support column 1110, and the lower end of the stop portion 932a. And a displacement portion 932b.

  As shown in FIG. 166, the side base material 1000S is a columnar portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape on the front side on the left side of the back plate 1100 when viewed from the front, and has a threaded portion 1151 into which a screw can be screwed at the tip. A plate-like member fastened and fixed to the supporting column 1150 having a fixing plate 1001S, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the supporting column 1150 and has an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted, and a slide plate 930. And a support protrusion 1002S protruding rearward in a columnar shape in a positional relationship (three places) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported elongated holes 931 and a circular hole in the front-rear direction at the right corner in front view. A shaft support hole 1003S that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, an arc recess 1004S that is concavely formed in the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a center of the shaft support hole 1003S. Concentric with A convex portion 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the circular arc shape, mainly comprises.

  The support protrusion 1002S is formed in a columnar shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported elongated hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a cylindrical collar with a flange is formed at the tip thereof with the support projected portion 1002S and the supported elongated hole 931. In this state, a screw for retaining the screw is inserted from the tip of the support protrusion 1002S in this state, and the slide plate 930 is configured to be slidably supported.

  The shaft support hole 1003S is a circular hole that rotatably supports the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the convex ridge portion 1005S are arranged for the purpose of smoothing the rotation operation of the second effect member 940. Part. Note that the protruding ridge portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at the proper position, but is formed at a protruding height that can be abutted when displaced or bent from the proper position. Is done.

  The second effect member 940 has a main body that is formed in such a manner that a lower end portion is bifurcated and an upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centered on the pivoted support post 941, and is located on the rear side at the right corner in front view. A shaft-supported column portion 941 that is formed in a columnar shape and supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion that is disposed adjacent to the shaft-supported column portion 941 and protrudes rearward in a columnar shape. 942.

  The pivoted support portion 941 is a columnar portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw into which a screw is screwed at the tip. An entrance 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). A threaded portion 941a with a disc-shaped lid member 945 having an outer diameter larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S disposed at the end with the shaft-supported column portion 941 inserted into the shaft support hole 1003S across the collar. When the screw is screwed into the cover member 945, the cover member 945 serves as a stopper. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the front end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and a circular resin-made collar is fastened and fixed at the front end, thereby preventing the slide plate 930 from falling off. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 are linked with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal-side insertion hole 933.

  The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that is displaced near the center of the width of the circular concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the circular concave portion 1004S. Thus, even if the second effect member 940 is likely to bend, the auxiliary convex portion 942 contacts the arcuate concave portion 1004S and resistance is generated, so that bending deformation can be suppressed.

  This will be described with reference to FIG. The rear plate 1100 has three screwing portions 1161 configured to be able to screw screws when fastening a plate-shaped support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921, and a radially outward direction within a predetermined angle range from the arm gear 924. Sensor 1162 for detecting the flange portion 926 projecting from the front, a shaft support 1163 on which a collar for guiding a coil spring SP8 for generating a biasing force in the direction of lifting the petal operating device 800 is rotatably supported, and a support slot. A cover support portion 1164 disposed in a triangular shape in a front view so as to be able to support the board cover 1000C at a lower right side of 1140, a wiring stop portion 1165 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164 and hidden in the board cover 1000C in a front view; And a screw portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000C is screwed.

  Similarly, the side base material 1000S includes screw-in portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screw-in portion 1006S is arranged in the moving direction of the second effect member 940 with a slight gap from the second effect member 940 arranged at the end of movement (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, even when the auxiliary projection 942 is broken due to long-term use, and a portion that regulates the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in a front view is missing, the screw-in portion 1006S causes 2 The displacement of the effect member 940 can be regulated.

  As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixedly fastened to each of the side base material 1000S and the rear plate 1100 which are stacked and arranged back and forth and fastened to each other. 1000C, the side substrate 1000S, and the back plate 1100 can be firmly fixed to each other. Accordingly, even when a heavy device such as the petal operating device 800 is moved up and down by rotating the driving side arm member 910, the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side base material 1000S are easily suppressed. Can be.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the up / down operation of the petal operation device 800 by the advance / retreat operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170, and 172 show the petal operation device 800, the advance / retreat operation unit 900, and the back plate. FIG. 169, FIG. 171, and FIG. 173 are rear views of the petal operation device 800 and the advance / retreat operation unit 900.

  168 and 169 show a state in which the driving arm member 910 is arranged at the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting protrusion 912 (see FIG. 164) of the driving arm member 910. ) Is shown at the connection position between the stop portion 932a and the displacement portion 932b of the base end side elongated hole 932, and in FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive side arm member 910 is arranged at the lower end side of the movement range. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the driving side arm member 910 is arranged at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the driving side arm member 910 is fitted into the inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. 151), and extends in the tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, only the inner fitting convex portion 925 is displaced and the drive side arm member 910 has a range in which the posture is maintained (a range in which the drive arm member 910 rotates idly). can do.

  170 and 171, the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained while the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered as compared to the state shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. That is, when the drive-side arm member 910 rotates in the descending direction, the petal operation device 800 operates prior to the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

  170 and 171, in the range of FIGS. 172 and 173, the drive-side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 are linked to each other, so that the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 are visually recognized as linked. Can be done.

  Here, by moving the second production member 940 in a manner that the second production member 940 projects toward the position where the petal operation device 800 was originally arranged, the second production member 940 operates as if following the petal operation device 800. It can be seen visually.

  Next, the collecting and rotating operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. FIG. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central shaft rotating device 850. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830. FIG.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 175 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 176 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 176 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

  177 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 177 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (c) is a central shaft rotating device 850. FIG. 178 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotating plate 830.

  179 (a) is a front view of the rotating plate 830, FIG. 179 (b) is a rear view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petals 802 and the flat plate member 803. FIG. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

  As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation and is at the lowest position, the petal operating device 800 expands from the initial position (assembly position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175 as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177. Through the middle position, the expanding operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, and the rotating operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position. Operation) and return to the initial position (convergence position).

  In the initial position (assembly position), as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) is positioned inside the center slit 814 of the slit member 810 (end on the side of the circular opening 811). 174 and FIG. 175, the five petals 802 are located at the most gathered position toward the central decoration member 868 at the center, and the hibiscus in the flowering state as a whole is It is in a gathering state that composes flowers.

  When the petal 802 is in the initial position (assembly position) as described above, the central motor 804 rotates the first gear 804G in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by an arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c). When the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked with the second gear 830G, the rotating plate 830 is driven to rotate clockwise in rear view as shown by an arrow A10.

  At this time, as described above, the rotating plate 830 is fitted around the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 with a small frictional resistance at the pivot opening 831 so that the rotation plate 830 can easily move around the front peripheral wall portion 812 with a small torque. Can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably fitted to the large-diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, but on the other hand, via the third gear 810G as described above. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, the rotating plate 830 is held so as not to rotate with a torque small enough to initially move.

  Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held in a stopped state (see FIGS. 176 and 177). ).

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), the guide rail 832 rotates counterclockwise in front view as shown by an arrow A11 on the front side surface thereof. At the same time, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in a direction in which the slide pin 823 is pushed outward in the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

  At this time, since the movement of the slide pin 823 is regulated by the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. 174 (d), the slide pin 823 is linearly moved from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814. It is guided and moves.

  At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832, so that a slight torque is also applied to the slit member 810. However, the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds the torque, and accordingly, With the slit member 810 kept stopped, the slide pin 823 moves linearly outward along the central slit 814 with the rotation of the rotating plate 830.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation in which the petals 802 expand radially outward from the gathering position. In this expanding operation, the central slit 814 of the slit member 810 is inclined at an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as shown in FIG. Since it extends along D12, a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, but the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively high due to the inclination. Be faster.

  That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as described above, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, but the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotating plate 830. 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the operation of expanding the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

  Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 extends radially along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively small as compared with the above-described case, Assuming that the moving speed of the pin 823 becomes relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the center slit 814 is inclined clockwise in the front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Any reduction is even more pronounced.

  At this time, as described above, the guide rail 832 extends clockwise as viewed from the front along the direction D15 between the tangent and the normal to the pivot opening 831 from the center end as shown in FIG. Thereafter, it extends outwardly while being curved in an arc toward the clockwise direction in a front view more than the direction D15, and extends so as to spirally spread outward as a whole with the five guide rails 832. .

  As the guide rail 832 inclines clockwise in the front view, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed decreases. Further, as the guide rail 832 is curved in an arc shape toward the clockwise direction in the front view from the direction D15, the reduction of the load on the slide pin 823 and the reduction of the moving speed are all more remarkable.

  That is, in the case of the center slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by tilting the slide pin 823 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining clockwise in front view and further bending it in an arc shape.

  In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, a groove is formed by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side. Therefore, when a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 when moving. For this reason, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while the movement speed of the slide pin 823 is reduced at the expense of the movement speed.

  On the other hand, in the case of the center slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is little risk of departure. Therefore, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while increasing the load on the slide pin 823. Is configured.

  As described above, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 by the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent a problem such as deviation and secure the reliability of power transmission, while increasing the moving speed of the slide pin 823 by the central slit 814. , And roles are divided.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five sets of petals 802 reach the fully open position. It expands radially to the full open state, and the expanding operation ends.

  In this fully opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move so as to be radially separated, so that the petals 802 can be continuously viewed outside the decorative member 884 in a front view. 802 is arranged. Thereby, as compared with the case where only the decorative member 884 is visually recognized by the decorative member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), the decorative member 884 is visually recognized integrally like a hibiscus flower which is one size larger (FIG. 178 (b)).

  When the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end, which is the outer movement limit of the center slit 814, and cannot move outward any more, the slide pin 823 is thereafter locked to the outer end of the center slit 814. Therefore, the rotating plate 830 cannot rotate further in the same direction as before with a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805. Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, the fully opened state after the end of the expanding operation can be maintained.

  After the end of the expanding operation, the rotational power in the same direction as that from the central motor 804 is transmitted to the rotating plate 830. When the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member 810 starts to rotate counterclockwise in front view as indicated by an arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d) together with the rotating plate 830 by completely removing the braking by the oil damper 805. Thus, after the expanding operation, the petals 802 rotate counterclockwise in a front view in a fully opened state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

  At this time, if the rotation power is continuously applied to the rotating plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expanding operation, the rotating operation is immediately continued so as to continue from the expanding operation to the rotating operation. Can be migrated.

  When the petal 802 rotates counterclockwise in the front view in the fully opened state as shown by the arrow A13, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) as shown by the arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). To rotate. Therefore, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 is larger than that in the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  When the above rotation operation is completed and the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804 in the reverse clockwise direction as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the slit member 810 is rotated. First, only the rotating plate 830 is rotationally driven clockwise in rear view as shown by an arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b) while being stopped by being stopped by the oil damper 805. Performs the reverse convergence operation.

  That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end, which is the outer limit of movement of the central slit 814, to the inner end, which is the inner limit of movement, and at the same time, the five petals 802 move from the fully open position to the center decorative member 868 at the center. Then, they gather to return to the gathering position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, return to the gathering state, and end the gathering operation.

  Thereafter, the central motor 804 may be stopped to terminate the operation of the petal operation device 800. However, the central motor 804 may be continuously operated without being stopped, or after the central motor 804 is stopped. When the first gear 804G is rotated again by the central motor 804 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by the arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), the petals 802 are turned as shown by the arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b). In the clockwise direction when viewed from the front.

  When the petals 802 rotate clockwise in a front view in an assembled state as shown by an arrow A16, the decorative member 884 is turned in the opposite direction (counterclockwise in front view) as shown by an arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). To rotate. Therefore, the movement amount (relative movement amount) of one petal 802 based on the predetermined position of the decoration member 884 is larger than that in the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped. The rotation speed can be made to appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

  By controlling the central motor 804 from the gathering operation to the rotation operation as described above, it is possible to temporarily stop and then shift, or to shift immediately so as to continue without interruption. You can also

  Here, in the present embodiment, since the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected by the detection arc plate 880d passing through the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operating device 800 is rotating.

  Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage portion 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described. The unit 9140 is configured such that a notch 9145b is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 9145, and a sheet metal member 9150 projects along the notch 9145b. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. The difference from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, the passage forming unit 9140 is different from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment in that the inner configuration of the foul ball passage portion 9145, the lower end portion and the front The vertical positional relationship of the lower end of the door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door-side lower plate passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

  That is, first, the foul ball passage portion 9145 includes a notch 9145b that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 9140 in the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. . The sheet metal member 9150 includes a thin plate blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate portion 152 is bent toward the front side so as to cover the notch 9145b from above.

  The notch 9145b is formed in a series of areas including the end of the S-shaped path SL2 in the recessed direction, and the depth of the notch is approximately equal to the radius Ra of the sphere.

  The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 comes into contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) that protrudes rearward from the plate member 14 d (see FIG. 91), and faces upward from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 9145. It is configured to withstand loads.

  The thin plate blade portion 9153 allows the yarn Y8 to pass through the foul ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8, thereby illegally operating the ball inside the game area and obtaining an illegal profit. And is arranged for cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the foul ball passage 9145. Here, possible misconduct will be described.

  148 will be described again. As described above, the ball firing unit 112a of the eighth embodiment is provided with the cutting metal member 725 for cutting the thread Y8 fixed to the ball. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the thread Y8 fixed to the ball by using the force of the ball to be fired. If the force of the fire is weak, the yarn Y8 is cut. The ball could be fired without it.

  On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the foul ball receiving portion 146, and is discharged to the lower plate 50 via the foul ball passage portion 145. Therefore, there is no possibility that the ball directly enters the game area.

  On the other hand, for example, when the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P8 fixed to one end of the yarn Y8 is weakly struck, and in a state where the ball P8 is guided to the foul ball receiving portion 146, the ball P8 is attached to the other end of the yarn Y9. When the fixed ball P9 is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Y8 is not cut by the cutting metal member 725.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is hit vigorously, the ball P9 reaches the game area without cutting the thread Y8. The ball P8 fired in advance passes through the foul ball passage 145, is discharged to the front side of the player, and is stored in the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 86).

  Therefore, the person who commits the wrongdoing can pull or loosen the thread Y8 by grasping the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8. 63 (see FIG. 2) and the like, and an improper profit can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when performing a wrongdoing using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends as described above, the thin plate blade 145 is formed in the foul ball passage 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes. By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

  In other words, when the wrongdoer pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin blade portion 9153, thereby damaging the yarn Y8 and cutting the yarn Y8 at an early stage (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145b that exposes the thin plate blade portion 9153 is formed closer to the front side, that is, formed on the side where the thread Y8 is pulled when the thread Y8 is pulled from the front side. When the thread Y8 is pulled, the thread Y8 can be arranged inside the notch 9145b, and the thread Y8 can be rubbed against the thin blade portion 9153.

  Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the foul ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin blade portion 9153 from warping or bending when a load directed outward of the foul ball passage portion 9145 is applied to the thin blade portion 9153 when the yarn Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, most of the load applied from the yarn Y8 toward the thin blade portion 9153 can be used to damage the yarn Y8.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the recess depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the sphere P8, the sphere P8 is prevented from passing through the front side of the notch 9145b, At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. This can prevent the thin blade portion 9153 from breaking or chipping due to the collision with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin blade portion 9153 can be improved.

  Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end of the foul ball passage 9145 is disposed below the lower end of the front door side lower plate passage 9142. Specifically, they are arranged with a vertical difference of about the radius Ra of the sphere. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged by the dispensed ball. That is, since the person who commits the wrongdoing is afraid of the discovery of the wrongdoing, after holding the ball P8, the player holds the ball P8 close to the body (for example, in a pants pocket, etc.) in order to prevent the clerk from being suspicious. ), It is easy to perform an illegal act such as pulling or loosening the thread 8. In this case, the state where the yarn Y8 extends along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (contacts the upper surface) and extends toward the player is maintained. At this time, the thread Y8 extends through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

  In this state, when the prize ball is paid out, the ball discharged from the lower end of the front plate side lower plate passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 collides with the lower plate 50 and rebounds, and the ball guide opening is formed. The lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1) flows down to the right while stepping on or hitting the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the bottom 53, and a bottom opening disposed behind the ball release lever 52. Flow down through. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the foul ball passage portion 9145 (by increasing the ascending limit position when bouncing around), the front door side lower plate portion is formed. The ball discharged from the passage portion 9142 to the lower plate 50 comes into contact with the yarn Y8, so that the possibility of damaging the yarn Y8 can be increased, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

  Thirdly, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a is formed which is inclined downward toward the right. The right inclined surface 9142a makes it easier to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage 9142.

  Accordingly, the ball can be directed toward the yarn Y8 before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball paid out to the lower plate 50 decreases. That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can forcibly impart a rightward (facing to the ball ball passage portion 9145 side) velocity component to the ball discharged along the front-rear direction to the lower plate 50. It is possible to increase the percentage of balls that step on the yarn Y8 or hit the yarn Y8.

  In addition, fourth, in the present embodiment, the lower end of the front door-side lower dish passage portion 9142 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the lateral width of the ball guide opening 53 at the left of the ball guide opening 53, The lower end of the foul ball passage portion 9145 occupies the remaining area (the area of about 1/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53) at the right portion of the ball guide opening 53. 9053a is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 180, the climbing regulation step portion 9053a includes a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142, and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. It is configured as a flat portion that connects to the left end (left end) of the lower bottom near the exit of the spherical passage 9145 and extends in the vertical direction.

  A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed above the riding regulation step portion 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 and a foul ball passage portion. 9145 is communicated. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball that has passed through the front door-side lower plate passage 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

  Note that the vertical width of the riding restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the sphere. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the ball rolling on the foul ball passage portion 9145 and abutting on the climbing regulation step portion 9053a from climbing to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restriction step portion 9053a allows the ball to pass in the left-right direction in the space V9 in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts the ball in the other direction (direction from right to left). Functions as a directional valve.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-shaped foul ball passage 145 closed on all sides by walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d, but the passage formation in the tenth embodiment is described. The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall portion forming the foul ball passage portion 10145, and a sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted. With reference to FIGS. 184 to 186, differences from the eighth embodiment will be described.

  184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 according to the tenth embodiment. 184 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper right, FIG. 185 illustrates a state in which the passage forming unit 10140 is viewed obliquely from the upper left, and FIG. The state seen from diagonally below is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the foul ball passage 10145.

  That is, the foul ball passage portion 10145 includes a notch 10145c that is recessed from the front end to the back of the passage forming unit 10140 in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2. The sheet metal member 10150 includes thin plate-shaped blade portions 10153 and 10154 extending to the front side so as to cover below the notch 10145c.

  The notch 10145c is formed in a series of areas including the concave end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the depth of the concave is approximately the same as twice (diameter) the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the sphere. You. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole formed in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d for guiding the ball to the passage portion 145a. The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

  In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has the outer shape of the front view of the foul ball passage 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. An auxiliary projection 14d2 is provided to project from the side surface on the back side toward the back side. The auxiliary projection 14d2 is shown by imaginary lines in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not shown in FIG. 186.

  The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is provided so as to fill the notch 10145c halfway (about the radius of the sphere Ra (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 in the front-rear direction is spherical. The radius Ra is about P8. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down the foul ball passage portion 10145 from colliding with the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154, and the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are broken or chipped by colliding with the ball P8. Can be prevented, and the durability of the thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 can be improved.

  The protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape that extends toward the rear side as it goes toward the foul ball receiving portion 146 (toward the right side). Therefore, in the notch 10145c, the width (the front-rear width) of the gap on the back side of the protrusion 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2 increases as the distance from the passage 145a increases. This makes it easier to insert the yarn Y8 arranged in the passage 145a into the gap on the back side of the projecting tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, which is the gap where the thin plate blades 10153 and 10154 are arranged.

  The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion projecting from the rear side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153. 10153 and a portion forming a bifurcated blade portion, and extends to the left in a mode in which the first thin blade portion 10153 is slightly inclined upward from the right end of the front side edge. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, an acute concave portion 10155 whose concave deep portion is an acute angle is formed.

  The thin blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members provided for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

  The acute angle concave portion 10155 is disposed on the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 and on the front side of the back side edge of the notch 10145c. Thus, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding tip 14d3 of the auxiliary projection 14d2, the yarn Y8 can enter the acute-angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8 can be easily damaged.

  Since the second thin blade portion 10154 disposed on the front side is disposed on the upper side as compared with the first thin blade portion 10153, the yarn Y8 which is pulled obliquely downward on the front side by a wrongdoer. Can easily enter the deep part of the acute angle recess 10155.

  The plate-shaped portion continuously provided to the right of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is configured to abut the lower surface of the rolling plate portion 10145d and to withstand an upward load generated from the inside of the foul ball passage portion 10145.

  The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are disposed facing left and right opposite sides at a bending point where the internal passage of the foul ball passage portion 10145 bends in left and right opposite directions. You. That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the left and right opposite directions.

  For example, a person who commits a wrongdoing releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand and tries to avoid the discovery of the wrongdoing by the ball P8 flowing backward through the foul ball passage 10145 and being discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right opposite direction is applied to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the lower end side extended end of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and stays.

  This allows the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 to stay inside the foul ball passage portion 10145, thereby increasing the time during which the yarn Y8 is exposed to the game area, thereby expediting the discovery of fraud.

  Note that an adhesive member (such as glue or trim) may be provided at a deep portion of the acute angle recess 10155 to adhere to the thread Y8 that has entered the acute angle recess 10155. In this case, even if the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 coming to the wrongdoer's hand is cut, the yarn is adhered to the sticky member provided in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is moved to the game area. , And is kept in place, so that it is possible to expedite the detection of fraud using the yarn Y8.

  Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (foul ball) having a low firing intensity and not reaching the game area is discharged to the lower plate 50 has been described. A receiving foul ball receiving port 2164 is provided. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the dish passage forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

  As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and is formed of a resin material so as to have the same arc shape as the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment on the game area side. A guide member formed near the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a tip member 2062a formed and disposed close to the ball firing unit 112a and a gap V11 having a width allowing the ball to flow down between the tip member 2062a and the tip member 2062a. 2062b.

  A foul ball passage 2062c is formed downstream of the gap V11 and communicates with a foul ball receiving port 2164 formed in the right corner inside the main body upper dish passage portion 161. The foul ball passage 2062c is formed to have a width slightly larger than a width that allows one ball to pass through the furnishing, and a spare for the ball preventing member 68 is disposed above the ball.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the main body-side upper dish passage 161 is moved to the left to the position where the main body-side lower dish passage 162 is provided in the above-described embodiment. The formation is omitted. That is, the balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied to the upper plate 17 exclusively via the main unit upper plate passage 161. When the ball on the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, a full tank switch (not shown) arranged to protrude inside the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device is turned on. It is configured such that the payout of the ball from 133 stops.

  That is, in the present embodiment, both the ball that has passed through the foul ball passage 2062c and the ball that is dispensed from the dispensing device 133 (see FIG. 87) are supplied to the upper plate 17. Therefore, when considering the above-mentioned misconduct in which a ball is adhered to both ends of the yarn Y8 and one of the balls is passed through the foul ball passage 2062c, thereby causing the yarn Y8 to enter the inside of the game area along the foul ball passage 2062c. In addition, the action of damaging the yarn Y8 by hitting the payout ball to the yarn Y8 can be caused without depending on the degree of accumulation of the balls on the upper plate 17. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut at an early stage.

  FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c is disassembled and is shown side by side as a rear perspective view. In the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is appropriately referred to.

  The return ball preventing member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 with a metal long screw B11 in such a manner that the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilting gate member 68a is arranged on the near side.

  Specifically, on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. A support cylindrical portion 2062b2 is formed in the cavity so as to protrude cylindrically from the back side surface to the front side of the guide member 2062b, and has a threaded groove formed therein for screwing the long screw B11 into the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4 for closing the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side is brought into contact with the front end of the supporting cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68b1 is brought into contact with the base member 68b1 in a state where the base member 68b1 is in contact with the front surface of the closing plate 2062b4. A long screw B11 is inserted into a through hole formed as an attachment hole and a through hole 2062b5 formed in the closing plate 2062b4 so as to match the position of the through hole, and a screw is screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in this state. By being inserted, the return ball preventing member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

  Note that the closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface, which are the side that contacts the guide member 2062b, match the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right surface (the surface on the front side in FIG. 189) is formed as an inclined surface having the same gradient as the gradient increasing portion 2062d of the guide member 2062b.

  The gradient increasing portion 2062d has a gradient that the surface of the guide member 2062b, which constitutes the outer frame of the game area, descends and falls as it approaches the tip member 2062a. That is, the straight line L11 extending toward the tip member 2062a along the surface of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) of the outer frame of the game area of the tip member 2062a (in the present embodiment, , About one-third of the diameter of the sphere) and intersects the tip member 2062a.

  With this configuration, when the ball is fired toward the game area, the gradient increasing unit 2062d is retracted from the path of the ball, and the lower end of the gradient increasing unit 2062d collides with the ball. That can be avoided. On the other hand, when the ball that has not reached the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a protrudes inside the path of the ball rolling on the gradient increasing portion 2062d. And it is possible to reduce the possibility of passing through the tip member 2062a and returning to the ball firing unit 112a side.

  The side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the slope increasing portion 2062d can form a cut 2062b1 with a width (about 2 [mm] in the present embodiment) smaller than the diameter of the sphere and capable of entering the thread between the closing plate 2062b4. It is recessed to the back side up to a certain position. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is a location where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the foul ball path 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

  A cutout 2062b3 for a semicircle is provided in the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the side facing the slope increasing portion 2062d, on the front side of the side surface 2062d1. The notch 2062b is provided for exposing the long screw B11.

  As described above, since the long screw B11 screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view is exposed at the front and rear positions where the cuts 2062b1 are formed, similarly to the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment, The thread Y8 can be made to rub against the long screw B11 during fraudulent acts performed through the thread Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

  That is, due to the arrangement of the cuts 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 disposed deep in the cuts 2062b1 when receiving a load that pulls both ends (see FIG. 190 (a)). In this state, the thread Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, so that the thread Y8 is rubbed with the long screw B11, and the thread Y8 can be cut at an early stage.

  In the present embodiment, the cut 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position where the center of the sphere passes. This can prevent the cut 2062b1 from being arranged at the position where the shot ball comes into contact with the outer rail 2062 (vertically below the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the shot ball. It is possible to prevent the direction of the sphere from being affected.

  In addition, the person who performs the wrongdoing performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 that protrudes toward the player (the ball P8 is fixed). (See FIG. 182) to adjust the position of the ball P9 in the game area, so that near the gap V11 close to the player, the yarn Y8 is shifted toward the front. Therefore, by arranging the cut 2062c near the front side, the yarn Y8 can be easily inserted into the cut 2062c as compared with the case where the cut 2062c is arranged near the back side.

  A button-type switch SW11 provided with a detection unit projecting downward is provided in a cavity formed in the guide member 2062b. The button-type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load extremely weaker than a load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. For this reason, the possibility that the button-type switch SW11 interferes with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button-type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and is provided so as to be able to switch between ON and OFF when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes.

  FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partial front enlarged views of the foul ball passage 2062c. Note that FIG. 190 (a) illustrates a state where the weight portion 68a2 side is inclined to the foul ball passage 2062c side due to the weight of the weight portion 68a2 of the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68, and FIG. 190 (b) The weight portion 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the opening / closing portion 68a1 side of the gate member 68a is tilted toward the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190 (a), the path of the thread Y8 used in the misconduct is shown for reference, and the button type switch SW11 is turned on. In FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch SW11 is turned on. It is illustrated that the SW 11 is turned off.

  As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 gives only a slight resistance to the passing ball, and provides enough resistance to hold the ball passing through the foul ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows off under its own weight. Even if the width of the foul ball passage 2062c is narrowed by tilting of the opening / closing portion 68a1 as shown in FIG. Since the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), the state is returned to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) by the next time the ball is guided to the foul ball passage 2062c (at least 0.6 seconds later). This is because you can do it.

  On the other hand, for an object that does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object that progresses while filling a passage such as an endoscope, the return ball prevention member 68 has a large resistance. This is a structure as a countermeasure against fraud.

  For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope is caused to travel through the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, to reach the inside of the game area, and to try to interfere with the inside of the game area (for example, The nail (not shown) implanted in the game board 13 is bent, the ball is gripped and put into a winning opening, the tip of the device is used as a guide plate to the winning opening, or a laser is emitted from the tip. Cheating nails).

  FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the foul ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outer shape of a device such as an endoscope that enters illegally is shown by imaginary lines.

  In the present embodiment, when the distal end of the device such as the endoscope is advanced in the foul ball passage 2062c in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the ball, in the present embodiment, the distal end is moved while rejecting the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68. Become. Here, when shifting from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state in which the weight portion 68a2 is displaced by the distal end of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the distal end of the endoscope. The insertion portion (elongated flexible portion) is still arranged below the weight portion 68a2, and maintains the weight portion 68a2 in a state of being pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to repel the opening / closing portion 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the distal end portion of the endoscope from moving further.

  Here, in the case where the endoscope is forcibly advanced and the gate member 68a is destroyed and enters the inside, the fraud cannot be prevented as it is. On the other hand, in this case, since the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, control is performed so as to sound an alarm when the button-type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state for a predetermined time. , Fraudulent activity can be detected early.

  Further, when the button-type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button-type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the foul ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button-type switch SW11 is immediately turned on. (See FIG. 190 (a)), the period during which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped can be minimized, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable. On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, it is possible to maintain a state in which the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 is stopped.

  The member disposed above the foul ball passage 2062c does not need to be the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, by arranging the return ball preventing member 68 as in the present embodiment, if the return ball preventing member 68 on the side provided on the game board 13 is broken or bent due to long-term use, Can be exchanged. As a result, as compared with a case where the replacement member of the return ball preventing member 68 is simply purchased as an option, it is possible to play a role of preventing fraud before replacement, and it is possible to eliminate the trouble of searching for a storage location forgotten. The effect described above can be obtained. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, a configuration in which the gate member 68a is supported on a fixed shaft rod (the support member 68b may not be provided) may be used.

  In addition, whether or not the above-described effect of preventing the illegal action is exhibited when the return ball preventing member 68 is broken or bent and replaced is determined by the degree of breakage of the return ball preventing member 68. However, the perpetrators of the wrongdoing cannot know whether or not the exchange has been performed, and even if they have been replaced, the degree of damage cannot be understood. it can.

  Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the gathering position or the fully opened position has been described. However, the petal operating device 2800 according to the twelfth embodiment can perform the rotating operation even at the expanding position. It is configured in an embodiment. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting device 2880 in the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 192, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2887 extending radially outward from the rear end outer edge in comparison with the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the eighth embodiment, A restricting portion 2888 projecting rearward from the extending end of the flange portion 2887. The loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is different from the loose fitting device 880 in the eighth embodiment only in the difference in the back cover 2886, and has the same components as the loose fitting device 880 in other portions. .

  The restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position (intermediate position) between the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802. That is, the restricting portion 2888 is protruded to a position where it can contact the front side portion 802b but cannot contact the rear side portion 802a.

  In the present embodiment, a case is described in which a single flange portion 2887 and a single regulating portion 2888 are arranged, but these may be scattered at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886. Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the regulating portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

  FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operating device 2800, and FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. . 193 and FIG. 194 illustrate an operation example of the petal operation device 2800 in a time series, and FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 194 (a), FIG. 193 (b), and FIG. Is illustrated.

  Further, in FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and a pair of screw-in portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), a pair of screw insertion portions 2803S arranged inside the both-side slits 815 are provided on opposite sides with the screw insertion portion 803H as a center. An inclined surface 2803T that is inclined in a manner away from 2803S is provided.

  The inclined surface 2803T is formed to be inclined at about 30 ° with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides. The action of the regulating section 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 193 (a) and FIG. 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is arranged radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the restricting portion 2888 abuts on the front side portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

  If the petal 802 is further slid (rotating the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) counterclockwise in front view) while the petal 802 is receiving a load from the regulating portion 2888, the petal 802 receives the load. In order to change the posture.

  At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petals 802 is in a normal posture illustrated in FIG. 194A (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is oriented in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815). Thus, as shown in FIG. 194 (b), the posture can be changed to an inclined posture inclined with respect to the center slit 814 and both side slits 815. The posture of the petals 802 changes as much as possible.

  As described above, the load from the restricting portion 2888 is received by the change in the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petals 802, while the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

  That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the sliding member 2820 has only a small width sliding rib 803a in contact with the slits 815 on both sides, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed, and the sliding member 2820 has the slits 814 and 815. Can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction.

  On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 abuts the slide rib 803a against the outer inner wall and the inclined surface 2803T against the inner inner wall against the slits 815 on both sides. (Pressed), the frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is formed to be larger than the width of the slide rib 803a, the frictional resistance is significantly increased. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-side slit 815 from both directions in the short direction of the both-side slit 815, the frictional resistance increases regardless of the rotation direction of the rotating plate 830. .

  Accordingly, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the sliding member 2820 reaches the end of the slits 814 and 815 by increasing the movement resistance against the movement of the slits 814 and 815 of the sliding member 2820 in the longitudinal direction. Without waiting, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the slide member 2820 in a normal posture). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a value between the movement resistance of the oil damper 805 and the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the inclined posture.

  In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by breaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 193 (b), rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is started. This direction corresponds to the direction in which the petal 802 moves away from the regulating portion 2888, so that the load applied to the petal 802 from the regulating portion 2888 can be released.

  FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. Note that FIG. 195 shows a state after the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) has continued rotating in the same direction from the state of FIG. 193 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated in the expanding position. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in the opposite direction (clockwise in front view) to the direction of rotation of the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is higher than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156), so that the position during the expansion is maintained. In this state, the petals 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions.

  FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operating device 2800. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 show the petals 802 moving from the expanding position to the gathering position in chronological order.

  In FIG. 196 (a), from the state shown in FIG. 195, the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the regulating portion 2888. When the rotating plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b), the restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the posture of the petals 802 and the slide member 2820 becomes the normal posture. Will be returned.

  Further, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) is greater than the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830. The rotation operation of 802 stops, and the petals 802 slide and move toward the gathering position.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform the operation of rotating the petals 802 at the expanding position and then returning the petals 802 to the gathering position.

  Although the case where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 expands at the position where the petal 802 contacts the restricting portion 2888 has been described, if the petal 802 is rotated by a slight angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise in front view). If so, contact between the front side portion 802b and the regulating portion 2888 can be avoided, so that the petals 802 can be moved to the fully open position and rotated at the fully open position in this embodiment.

  In addition, the arrangement of the restricting portion 2888 is such that the petals 802 slightly change their posture even when they come into contact with the petals 802 rotating at the gathering position or the fully opened position, or at the fully opened positions. By setting the position where the regulating portion 2888 can pass through and the load can be passed, it is possible to prevent the regulating portion 2888 from hindering the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position.

  Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the rear cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the restricting portion 2888, when the petals 802 are expanded, the petals 802 are used as a mark as to whether the petal passes through a position near or far from the star-shaped pattern. Depending on the difference in the distance, it is possible to cause a difference between the rotation of the petal 802 expanded to the maximum and the rotation of the petal 802 performed halfway.

  Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the degree of expansion during rotation, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petals 802. The pattern of the pattern can function as a production part. Thereby, the regulation unit 2888 can be used as a part of the effect device.

  Note that the restricting portion 2888 may be provided at a position hidden by the rear cover 886 when viewed from the front. In this case, since it is not necessary to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, the degree of freedom in designing the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

  At the fully open position, the petal 802 abutting on the regulating portion 2888 and slightly changing the posture may be used as an effect (for example, an effect indicating the magnitude of the expected jackpot). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning content to be transmitted to the player, depending on whether the petal 802 is simply rotating or is rotating (while flickering) while causing a slight change in posture by contacting the regulating portion 2888. .

  In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the regulating portion 2888 is the tip position. However, if the abutment position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petal 802 is different), the position of the petal 802 when it changes its posture is changed. The degree of expansion varies. Therefore, even when the restricting portion 2888 is configured to be fixed to the back cover 2886, the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes posture can be changed in a plurality of types.

  Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the slit member 810 rotates and rotates with the rotating plate 830 regardless of the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830 at the expanding position is described. However, the petal operation device according to another example of the twelfth embodiment is described. The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be able to switch between a case where the slit member 3810 rotates together with the rotating plate 830 and a case where the rotating plate 830 independently rotates according to the rotating direction of the rotating plate 830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partial enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. 198 and 199 illustrate, in chronological order, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotating plate 830 rotates clockwise in front view from the state illustrated in FIG. 198 (a). In FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the arrangement and shape of the guide rails 832 of the rotating plate 830 are shown by imaginary lines.

  When the rotating plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. The rotation of the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 together with the rotation exceeds the resistance to be applied is the same as in the twelfth embodiment, and the description is omitted here.

  In addition, in FIGS. 198 and 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are cross-sectionally viewed for convenience, and the pair of threaded portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are cross-sectionally viewed in the same cross-section.

  Here, when rotating the rotating plate 830 in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front, since the slide pin 823 is inserted through the guide rail 832 of the rotating plate 830, the slide member 2820 that receives a load from the guide rail 832 is With the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). In the present embodiment, additional recesses 3814a, 3815a, and 3815b are formed on the side that receives the slide member 2820 that is displaced in this manner.

  That is, the difference between the slit member 3810 and the slit member 810 is that the width of the central slit 814 is increased in the wall portion extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814 on the clockwise side in front view. Among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a provided and the slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view, both side slits 815 are formed on the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view. Of the wall extending along the radial direction of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a that is recessed so as to widen the width in the short direction and the two side slits 815 that are arranged on the counterclockwise side of the central slit 814 in a front view. And a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b that is recessed in the wall portion on the clockwise side in front view so as to widen the width of the slits 815 in the lateral direction.

  The clockwise concave portion 3815a is disposed to face the slide rib 803a of the flat plate member 2803 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is continuous from the position opposed to the guide pin 822 of the slide member 2820 to the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 (the lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed.

  The central recessed portion 3814a has a recess depth greater than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is positioned on the rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of the flat plate member 2803 (the lower side in FIG. 198 (a)). Formed continuously.

  The counterclockwise concave portion 3815b has a concave depth greater than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the central concave portion 3814a.

  The operation when the rotating plate 830 of the petal operating device 3800 configured as described above rotates clockwise in front view will be described. First, when the rotating plate 830 starts rotating clockwise in the front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move downward in FIG. 198 (a) (the right end of the slide rib 803a moves clockwise). (See FIG. 198 (b)).

  Accordingly, the contact between the flat plate member 2803 and the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the slits 815 on both sides is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

  When the rotating plate 830 is further rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are brought into contact with the clockwise concave portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 and the slit member). With reference to FIG. 199 (a) and FIG. 199 (b), it rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front with the portion that first comes into contact with 3810 as a fulcrum.

  Since the center slit 3814a and the counterclockwise recess 3815b are deeper than the clockwise recess 3815a, the guide pin 822 during rotation of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is used. Abutment between the screw-in portion 2803S and the counterclockwise-side recessed portion 3815b is avoided.

  Further, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 have a clockwise depth such that the rotation tip portion (the left portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut the center slit 814 and both side slits 815 during the rotation described above. A surrounding recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

  Therefore, the load applied to the slit member 3810 via the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is lower than the resistance applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. . Accordingly, the slit member 3810 and the rotating plate 830 do not rotate together.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (b), when the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwing portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) reach a posture in which the posture is orthogonal to the front view. When the slide rib 803a on the center in the radial direction accommodated in the slits 815 on the clockwise side abuts against the wall of the slits 815 on both sides, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be viewed from the front with the abutting portion as a fulcrum. Rotate counterclockwise. As a result, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise concave portion 3815a moves counterclockwise in front view from the concave base end of the clockwise concave portion 3815a.

  That is, since the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (see FIG. 194 (a)), the rotation plate 830 is continuously rotated clockwise in front view, so that the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are rotated. The flat plate member 2803 can be moved toward the center in the radial direction.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is reached, the rotation of the rotating plate 830 causes the slit member 3810 to rotate along with the rotating plate 830 due to the difference in the rotating direction. And the case where the rotating plate 830 rotates independently and the posture of the slit member 3810 is maintained.

  This allows the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803, and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 to perform operations that cannot be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

  In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation involved in rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 194 (b)). )), The flat member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat member 2803 until the changed posture is restored (rotates along with the slit member 3810). Rotational operation) is interposed (see FIGS. 195, 196 (a) and 196 (b)).

  On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change during the expanding operation associated with rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. 198 ( a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise as viewed from the front, the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b)). In other words, the rotation operation (rotational operation that rotates along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is restored. Can be omitted.

  Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expanding operation caused by rotating the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 198 (a)), by rotating the rotating plate 830 clockwise from an arbitrary state (phase or posture) in a front view, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 matching the arbitrary state (phase or posture) are formed. The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be started to move toward the gathering position from the position of the petal 802 which is fastened and fixed. As a result, the flat plate member 2803 and the petals 802 (see FIG. 193 (a)) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 rotate (see FIG. 195 (a)) during the expansion (see FIG. 198 (a)), and then move to the gathering position. Since the arrangement of the petals 802 during the gathering operation toward (see FIG. 197) can be diversified, the operation of the petal operation device 3800 can be diversified.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the curved surface forming the front side portion of the lower frame member 320 is formed from a plate having no opening has been described. A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed to penetrate the wall portion 8326. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. 200 and 202 (a) illustrate the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 illustrates the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) illustrates the tilting device 310 in the second state. A state in the middle of changing from the first state to the second state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, in the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment, the difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 has not been described in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments. In addition, other configurations have been almost described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in each of the above-described embodiments. Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other components will be described with some supplementary explanations.

  The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-shaped portion that is disposed to face the protection lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction, and is formed in a substantially oval shape at the left and right center positions. The first through hole 8326a and the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 has an oblong rectangular cross-sectional shape as viewed in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis of the tilting device 310 and along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. A pair of second through holes 8326b formed along the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes formed at the left and right corners in a vertically long rectangular cross-sectional shape in front view. And a through hole 8326c.

  The through holes 8326a to 8326c are provided for the purpose of facilitating the passage of the liquid such as the drinking water described above and the purpose of facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole having: The coin-shaped foreign object may be used, for example, for the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is in the way to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300, or the tilting device 310 and the upper frame may be meaningless by the player of interest. It may be fitted in the gaps V13 and V14 between the member 330.

  Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilting device 310 that is configured to be operable, slight gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilting device 310. By doing so, the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smoother, but the possibility of foreign matter being inserted into the gaps V13 and V14 increases.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the tilting device 310 is configured to rotate around a ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) disposed at the rear end, that is, supported by the upper frame member 330. Since the position of the tilting device 310 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the front-rear direction, the more easily the position is shifted (deformed) right and left near the front end. Note that the positional deviation (deformation) includes, for example, positional deviation utilizing rattling caused by the sum of design errors incorporated from the design stage between members, and positional deviation caused by slightly deforming each member. (Deformation).

  For this reason, in the case where the design is made such that the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is not large enough to insert a coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, a one-yen coin). Also, when the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the left and right (for example, left), the gap V13 formed on the other (for example, right) becomes an upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use. And a gap V13 having a size that is the sum of the gaps V13 formed between the gaps V1 and V2.

  That is, the gap V13 between the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to be equal to or less than half the thickness of the coin-shaped foreign matter (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin). Otherwise, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to one of the right and left, a coin-shaped foreign matter may be inserted.

  Further, the gap V14 between the front end portion of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also adjusted by the play near the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 14B). The gap V14 can be easily enlarged by applying a load facing the rear side and displacing (deforming), so that a coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14.

  In the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 tilts while the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted in the left or right gap V13 or the front-back gap V14 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330, the coin Foreign matter may enter the lower frame member 8320.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 202 (a) and FIG. 202 (b), when the left and right walls of the tilting device 310 are configured so as to be narrowed inward toward the left and right toward the center in the vertical direction, the tilting device 310 easily fits the fingers of the player. While a good operational feeling can be created, the coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202A) projects outward from above the constriction of the case main body 311. , A downward load is applied to the lower frame member 8320, so that the lower frame member 8320 can easily enter the lower frame member 8320.

  If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, and there is a possibility that a problem may occur in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, when the coin-shaped foreign matter rubs against the protective lens member 311i, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may be deteriorated, which may hinder the light emission effect.

  In the first place, if the coin-shaped foreign matter is caught inside and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect cannot be performed with the operation device 8300, so that the coin-shaped foreign matter is inserted into the gaps V13 and V14. It is desirable that the operation device 300 be disassembled as soon as it is detected. However, in a state where the through-hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, it is necessary to disassemble the operation device 300 in order to remove the coin-shaped foreign matter.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-shaped foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

  FIG. 203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, FIG. 203 (b) is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), and FIG. FIG. 203D is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 8300 taken along line CCIIId-CCIIId in FIG. 203A, and FIG. 203E is a bottom view of the operation device 8300. FIG. It is sectional drawing of operation device 8300 in CCIIIe-CCIIIe line.

  The first through hole 8326a has the same center in the left-right direction as the center in the left-right direction of the vibration device 5400, and is formed with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the (vibration device 5400 (first accommodating portion 5431, see FIG. 58)). You. Therefore, even when a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right central positions of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibration device 5400.

  The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is disposed below the upper surface of the extension 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state. Therefore, when a coin-shaped foreign matter fitted in the gap V14 rides on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (to the left and right when viewed in the vertical direction in the second state). A slope D81 that is inclined downward toward the left and right center in the first state of the tilting device 310 by being curved toward the front, and a gradient D82 that is downwardly inclined toward the front side when the tilting device 310 is tilted, Along the first through-hole 8326a, the coin-shaped foreign matter can be easily removed along the first through hole 8326a (see FIG. 201).

  This makes it possible to minimize the required size of the first through hole 8326a while facilitating the removal of the coin-shaped foreign matter, thereby maintaining the design flexibility of the lower frame member 8320. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be more easily ensured as compared with the case where the first through hole 8326a needs to be greatly expanded right and left.

  In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is such that a portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (see FIG. 12) of the tilting device 310 in the first state is assumed to be a coin-shaped foreign matter. The size of the target object is equal to or larger than the size of the target object. That is, in the present embodiment, a portion above the upper surface of the extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state is formed with a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 [mm].

  The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The spherical shell portion 313a is a portion that transmits light emitted from the LED device 341f (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, except for the spherical shell portion 313a, the plate portions of the lens member 313 continuously provided on the left, right, up and down of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in the present embodiment (members that have been mirror-finished). Is fixed), so that the light that has passed through the spherical shell 313 is reflected.

  With this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, since the first through hole 8326a removes the resin member that reduces the amount of light, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized brightly.

  When the coin-shaped foreign matter is arranged at a position where the first through-hole 8326a is partially closed, the amount of light transmitted through the spherical shell portion 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is equal to the coin-shaped amount. Is weaker than when no foreign matter is present (a coin-like foreign matter is shadowed). That is, it is possible to easily recognize that the coin-shaped foreign matter remains in the lower frame member 8320 by using the light amount and the shadow of the coin-shaped foreign matter as clues. The possibility of remaining on the member 8320 can be reduced. Note that this effect is not limited to the case where it is visually recognized through the first through hole 8326a, and the same applies to the case where it is visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

  The second through-hole 8326b is configured as a through-hole capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign object that has fallen on the bottom plate 321 in a direction along the surface of the bottom plate 321. Therefore, in this embodiment, the left and right widths of the second through hole 8326 are set to about 30 [mm], and the bottom plate portion 321 is set to a size capable of discharging the largest coin-like foreign matter (for example, a 500-yen coin). Is formed with a width in the normal direction of about 2 [mm].

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged near the left and right centers of the bottom plate 321, the second through holes 8326 b can be easily formed even after the coin-shaped foreign matter slides down along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate 321. In addition, coin-shaped foreign matter can be removed.

  Since the second through holes 8326b are arranged on the left and right sides of the vibration device 5400, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing along the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibration device 5400. The second through-hole 8326b can be used for discharging outward beforehand.

  The third through hole 8326c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 203 (a)), and allows the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 to move. It is formed as a through hole that can be removed as it stands (posture).

  That is, the length of the third through-hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction needs to be formed in a size capable of discharging a coin-shaped foreign matter when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length of the third through hole 8326c in the longitudinal direction is about 30 [mm] when viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321, and the width in the left-right direction is about 2 [mm].

  When removing the coin-like foreign matter, the operator can access the through holes 8326a to 8326c only by removing the cover 370 and exposing the operation device 8300 in a front view (see FIG. 92). The cover 370 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 with screws through which the fastening portions 370a (see FIG. 91) of the main body curved portion 371 are inserted in the front-rear direction. Since it is only fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the installation part 15a is formed, the cover cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screws with the front frame 14 opened (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be reduced.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operation device 8300.

  Note that the harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to a connector portion 8353 that opens to the right outside at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203B). In each of the above embodiments, only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 for transmitting and receiving signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4).

  Therefore, even in the unlikely event that a coin-shaped foreign matter cannot be taken out, it is easy to operate by removing the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 and then removing the harness HN3 from the connector portion 8353. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if the replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, the operation device 8300 in which the coin-shaped foreign object is caught can be promptly replaced with the normal operation device 8300.

  Thus, even if a normal operation is not performed due to the coin-shaped foreign matter entering the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promptly restarted.

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the board support device 600 is in the fixed state. However, the board support apparatus 600 in the fourteenth embodiment has the front frame 14 in the fixed state. It is arranged in such a manner as to receive a load from the front frame 14 via a longitudinal displacement member 2652 arranged so as to be able to abut against it. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the inner frame 12 in the fourteenth embodiment along a line corresponding to the line CXXXVI-CXXXVI in FIG. 86. FIG. 204 (a) shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened to the inner frame 12 (illustration of the front frame 14 is omitted), and in FIG. 204 (b), the front frame 14 is Is shown in a closed state. In FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and shown by imaginary lines.

  As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transmitting device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transmitting device 2650 includes a vertical displacement member 2651 disposed so as to be vertically displaceable on a front side of a plate portion (plate portion disposed on the back side) of the main body plate portion 611 which is fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12; A longitudinally-displaceable member 2652, which is disposed so as to be in contact with the lower end of the vertically-displaceable member 2651 and is supported to be displaceable in the longitudinal direction, a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the longitudinally-displaceable member 2652, A portion that sandwiches the member 2652 from above and below so that it can be displaced at two positions in the front and back, and is fixed to the plate portion 611a, and is in contact with the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 to be in front of the front and rear displacement member 2652. And an urging member 2655 such as a coil spring for applying an urging force toward the urging member.

  The vertical displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it is in contact with the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the board surface support device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, at the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and at the upper position (position displaced upward from the lower position) shown in FIG. 204 (b), it comes into contact with the torsion spring NBb, The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 at the lower position is located at a position where a slight gap is provided between the vertical displacement member 2651 and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

  The longitudinal displacement member 2652 is arranged by being pushed forward by the urging force of the urging member 2655 (see FIG. 204 (a)), and by being pushed by the front frame 14 and being pushed backward. At the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

  Here, an inclined surface 2652a that is inclined downward toward the distal end is formed at the rear distal end of the longitudinal displacement member 2652. The inclined surface 2652a extends from a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position to a position vertically below the vertical displacement member 2651 when the longitudinal displacement member 2652 is disposed at the rear position. , A continuous slope.

  The inclined surface 2652a has an inclination angle and a forming range such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at a lower position at a position in front of the longitudinal displacement member 2652, and the vertical displacement member 2651 is located at an upper position at a position behind the longitudinal displacement member 2652. Is set.

  With the above-described configuration, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed by the thickness in the front-rear direction to the side where the load becomes large. be able to.

  Thereby, the load which the claw member 640 after rotation applies to the game board 13 from the back side can be increased, and the state in which the game board 13 abuts on the hanging back plate portion 621d of the claw member 620 before rotation can be easily maintained. The distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14) can be easily defined. Therefore, the thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

  Here, the specifications required for the board supporting device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board supporting device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of the fixing, the board supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the urging force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses and fixes the board against the hanging back plate portion 621d.

  According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than the spring used in the eighth embodiment is used as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

  Therefore, the load (reaction force) applied to the operator from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced, which is necessary when the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600. Can be reduced, so that the degree of freedom of selection of the operator and the workability can be improved.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are spread over the inverted cup portion 178, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are heated by the heated piano wire. Although the case where the burnout is detected by the piano wire and the early detection of the fraud has been described, the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment has a configuration in which the reverse cup portion 178 is melted with the heated piano wire. The heat is detected, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are prevented from being burned.

  FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detecting device 2280. FIG. 205 (b) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in a reduced shape, and FIG. 205 (c) shows a state in which the shape memory spring 2288 has returned to a tensile shape (stored shape) by application of heat. Is done. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is viewed in cross section at a front / rear intermediate position of the main body box portion 2281.

  The fraud detection device 2280 has a main body box portion 2281 which is formed in a box shape with the back side and the lower surface side open and is stacked above the inverted cup portion 2178, and a rear side opening portion which covers the back side opening of the main body box portion 2281. And a back cover member 2282 attached from the main body, and a space is formed between the main body box portion 2281 and the back cover member 2282.

  The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner, and extends from the lower corner to abut on the left surface of the wall 2178a of the inverted cup portion 2178, and narrows the opening upward from the lower corner. A constricted portion 2284 extending from the inner wall, a protruding portion 2285 protruding upward from near the edge of the upper end opening of the constricted portion 2284, and a concave portion provided on the left side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281 from the rear side. A first conductive portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and one end projecting to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end extending to the right side wall portion of the main body box portion 2281. It is housed in a recess formed from the back side, one end of which protrudes outside the main body box portion 2281, and the other end extends in the left-right direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and contacts the upper surface of the first conductive portion 2286. Accessible The second conductive portion 2287 formed as described above, a torsion spring SP15 for generating an urging force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286, and the upper surface of the constricted portion 2284 is supported by the protruding portion 2285. And a shape memory spring 2288 disposed below the second conducting portion 2287.

  The fraud detection device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one ends of separate wirings are respectively connected to portions protruding outside the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other ends of the wirings are connected to the main control device. 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, from the state in which the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 come into contact and become conductive (see FIG. 205 (b)), the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released (see FIG. 205 ( c)), the conduction is cut off, and control is performed so as to output an error signal with the cutoff being input.

  When the error signal is output from the main control device, a warning is output at a high volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. The game is controlled so that it is impossible to play the game.

  Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 (a) to 205 (c), the main body box portion 2281 of the fraud detecting device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the inverted cup portion 2178. Here, in the inverted cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left as compared with the eighth embodiment, and the extended portion 2283 is provided between the inverted cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

  The extended portion 2283 fills the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, so that even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire, the piano wire can be used as it is on the long cover 173. Penetration can be prevented.

  According to this configuration, the piano wire that enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from below, melts the upper wall portion, and proceeds further, is guided by the narrowed portion 2284 to the shape memory spring 2288 disposed at the upper opening of the narrowed portion 2284. You will be guided.

  The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel-titanium alloy, and has a characteristic of maintaining a deformed shape in a low temperature state and returning to a previously stored shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or higher. . In this embodiment, the transformation temperature of the shape memory spring 2288 is set to a temperature (about 80 °) about the melting point of the inverted cup portion 2178, and the tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance. .

  Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to a transformation temperature or higher by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to the tensile shape, so that the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2286 are connected. The conduction with 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of wrongdoing can be achieved.

  An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide elongated hole 2282a formed in the back cover member 2282 in a vertically long shape and drilled in the front-rear direction. Overhang. When the temperature returns to the low-temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in the tension state, the operator presses down the extending portion 2288a to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the shape memory spring 2288 (see FIG. 205B). ) Again. That is, even after a fraudulent activity is discovered, the device can be repeatedly used for early detection of the fraudulent activity.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment, even if the shape of the concave portion provided in the light guide member 540 is uniform, the light guide member 540 is formed in a curved shape to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted to both surfaces. However, the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes a concave portion having a different shape for each region. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 206 (a) is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upwardly concave shape formed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206C is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 schematically illustrating the portion 2543b, and FIG. 206C schematically illustrates a downward concave portion 2543c recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIc of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540, and FIG. 206 (d) is a light guide schematically showing the downward concave portion 2543d provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVId of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206 (e) shows an upward concave portion 254 recessed in the light guide member 2540 in a region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206A, the illustration of the support plate 510 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 206A, the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape that extends straight in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) provided on the substrate member 512 are arranged vertically vertically in accordance with the shape of the light guide member 2540.

  Although concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in the arrangement described above in the eighth embodiment, in the present embodiment, the shape of the concave portion 2543 is determined for each region based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530. Can be changed.

  That is, a region CCVIb disposed above and on the inner lens member 530 side, a region CCVIc disposed above and on the outer lens member 550 side, and a lower and inner lens member 530 based on the curved bottom of the inner lens member 530. The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed between the region CCVId arranged on the side and the region CCVIe arranged below and on the outer lens member 550 side.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the area CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543b is arranged such that flat surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and a curved surface is arranged on the upper side and the rear side. Is formed.

  Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a. Difficult to reflect in the left and right direction at the position. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543b refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a direction inclined upward as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (c), in the area CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543c is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and in a posture in which curved surfaces are disposed on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543c refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (d), in the area CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The downward concave portion 2543d is formed by placing a flat surface on the upper side and on the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and having a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the downward concave portion 2543d refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light to the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 206 (e), in the area CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e formed by hot pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into ８ is formed. The upward concave portion 2543e has a hot press in a posture in which flat surfaces are arranged on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) are arranged), and curved surfaces are arranged on the lower side and the back side. Is formed.

  Here, since the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a, light incident on the light guide member 2540 from the LED 512a is at this position. Is hardly reflected in the left-right direction. Therefore, the upward concave portion 2543e refracts light only at the curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is easily refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the area CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upwardly inclined direction as shown in FIG.

  The concave portions formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 in a region facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle with respect to the bottom is 45 ° and the diameter of the bottom circle is approximately (1 mm conical shape). Therefore, light emitted from this portion to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

  According to the present embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206A, the light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the direction of collecting light, and travels toward the outer lens member 550 in the direction of spreading light. Can be done. In other words, while the light guide member 2540 is formed in the shape of a flat plate, it is possible to provide a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces thereof. The effect can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 207, an external configuration of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “pachinko machine”) 17010 and a ball rental unit 70 in the seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 17010 is used by being connected to the ball lending unit 70, and can play a game in accordance with the balance of the bills and cards inserted into the ball lending unit 70. It is configured as follows. In addition, the pachinko machine 17010 does not directly rent or pay out game balls to the player, but quantifies (scores) the lent balls and prize balls and gives them to the player. A so-called enclosed pachinko game machine is used in which a predetermined number (40 in this embodiment) of game balls (pachinko balls) enclosed in 17010 are circulated in the pachinko machine 17010 and used for games. .

  FIG. 207 is a front view of the pachinko machine 17010 and the ball rental unit 70 in the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 207, the pachinko machine 17010 includes an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell, and an inner frame 12 supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. Hinges 17 are disposed on the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side (the left side in FIG. 207) when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable via the hinges 17. An elliptical opening 12a (see FIG. 209) is formed in the inner frame 12, and a game board 13 is detachably attached to the opening 12a from the back side.

  Rails 21 and 22 (see FIG. 209) for guiding game balls fired from the launching device 50 (see FIG. 209) to the upper portion of the game board 13 are provided on the front surface of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 17010, a game is played by a game ball guided to the upper front part of the game board 13 by the rails 21 and 22 falling on the front face (game area) of the game board 13.

  The game board 13 is provided with a general winning port 23, a first ball receiving port 24, and a specific winning port (large open port) 25 into which a game ball can enter. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 23, the first ball opening 24 and the specific winning opening 25, a score as a prize ball is given to the player. In addition, the game board 13 has an out port through which game balls (hereinafter, referred to as “out balls”) that have not entered any of the general winning port 23, the first ball input port 24, and the specific winning port 25. 26 are provided.

  In addition, on the front surface of the game board 13, a large number of nails 27 for dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the game ball, various members 28 such as a windmill, and a pattern changed by a ball entering the first ball entrance 24 as a trigger. A variable display unit 29 and the like for displaying are provided.

  Hinges 18 are disposed on the inner frame 12 at two upper and lower positions on the left side (the left side in FIG. 207) when viewed from the front, and the front frame 14 is openably supported via the hinges 18. An elliptical opening 14 a is formed in the front frame 14. A glass plate (not shown) is attached to the opening 14a from the back surface side, and the front surface of the game board 13 is visible through the glass plate.

  Further, lamps 31 to 36 are arranged around the front frame 14. At the time of a game, a lamp effect is performed by the lamps 31 to 36 each time according to the game situation. That is, by appropriately changing the emission colors and the issuance patterns of the lamps 31 to 36, the formation of a winning combination or an error is notified to the player.

  Below the opening 14a (on the lower side in FIG. 207), a score display section 37 for displaying the ball held by the player as a score is provided. In the score display section 37, the total number of the lent balls and the prize balls is displayed as the ball held by the player.

  In addition, below the opening 14a (the lower side in FIG. 207), an overhang portion 38 for disposing the upper plate 16 and the transfer device 100 (both shown in FIG. 210) therein is provided in the front (the front side in FIG. 207). The overhang is formed. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 17010 is different from a general pachinko game machine in that a lower plate for storing game balls is omitted.

  An operation handle 39 for driving a game ball into the game area is provided on the right side of the overhang portion 38 in a front view (the right side in FIG. 207). When the operation handle 39 is rotated by the player, a game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 39.

  The ball lending unit 70 is disposed on the left side (the left side in FIG. 207) of the pachinko machine 17010 when viewed from the front. The ball lending unit 70 is provided with a bill insertion slot 71 for inserting a bill and a card insertion slot 72 for inserting a card. When a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 71 by the player or a card is inserted into the card insertion slot 72, a lending ball can be lent to the player according to the balance of the bill and the card. .

  Below the bill insertion slot 71 (the lower side in FIG. 207), a balance display section 73 for displaying the balance of the bill inserted into the bill insertion slot 71 and the card inserted into the card insertion slot 72 is provided. At the same time, a lending button 74 for obtaining a lending ball is provided below the balance display 73 (the lower side in FIG. 207). When the lending button 74 is operated by the player, the score displayed on the score display section 37 is added according to the number of times the lending button 74 is operated, as long as there is a remaining amount on the bill or card.

  Below the lending button 74 (the lower side in FIG. 207), a return button 75 for requesting the return of the card inserted into the card slot 72 is provided. In addition, a ball unit price setting button 76 (for example, a button for selecting and setting a ball unit price from 2 yen, 3 yen, or 4 yen) for setting a ball unit price of a lending ball or a prize ball is provided on the lending unit 70. And an input button 77 for inputting a personal identification number of a card inserted into the card insertion slot 72.

  Next, the internal structure of the pachinko machine 17010 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 208 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 17010, and FIG. 209 is a front view of the pachinko machine 17010 with the front frame 14 removed. FIG. 210 is an exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 209, the configuration of the game board 13 is partially omitted for easy understanding of the drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 208, on the back surface of the game board 13, game balls (hereinafter referred to as “winning balls”) that have entered the general winning opening 23, the first opening 24, and the specific winning opening 25 (see FIG. 207). ) Is collected on the back side of the game board 13, a winning ball collection board 41 is attached. The winning ball collecting board 41 is formed with a collecting passage 41a that is passed through the general winning port 23, the first ball input port 24, and the specific winning port 25, respectively, and is opened downward (the lower side in FIG. 208). .

  Below the winning ball collection board 41 (the lower side in FIG. 208), a guide board 42 for guiding the winning balls collected by the winning ball collection board 41 to the front of the inner frame 12 is attached. The guide board 42 is formed with a guide passage 42a that is open at the upper side (upper side in FIG. 208) and communicates with a collecting passage 43a (see FIG. 209) of a foul ball collecting board 43 attached to the front surface of the inner frame 12. Have been.

  Accordingly, as shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 208, the winning ball is first collected through the collecting passage 41a of the winning ball collecting board 41, and then guided to the front of the inner frame 12 through the guide passage 42a of the guide board 42. You. The guide passage of the guide board 42 is also communicated with the out opening 26 (see FIG. 207), and the out ball is similarly guided to the front surface of the inner frame 12 through the guide passage 42a of the guide board 42.

  On the back surface of the game board 13, a winning opening detection switch 44 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 23, and a first entrance for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first entrance 24. A mouth detection switch 45 and a count switch 46 for counting the number of game balls entering the specific winning opening 25 are provided. When the entering of a game ball is detected by each of the switches 44 to 46, the number of winning balls is determined based on the detection result, and displayed on the score display unit 37 in accordance with the determined number of winning balls. Points are added.

  As shown in FIG. 209, on the front surface of the inner frame 12, a firing device 50 for firing a game ball to a game area is provided. The launching device 50 includes a launching solenoid 51 for giving a launching force to the game ball, a launching rail 52 for guiding the playing ball from the launching solenoid 51 to the rails 21 and 22 of the game board 13, and the upper plate 16 (see FIG. 210). ) And a supply device 53 for supplying the game balls guided to the firing rail 52 one by one. Note that the firing force applied to the game ball by the firing solenoid 51 is determined according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 39 (see FIG. 207) by the player. When a game ball is fired by the firing device 50, the fired game ball is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and each time the score displayed on the score display unit 37 is reduced by one point.

  In addition, a gap is formed between the rails 21 and 22 of the game board 13 and the firing rail 52 of the firing device 50, and the firing device 50 fires below the gap (the lower side in FIG. 209). However, in order to collect the game balls (hereinafter, referred to as “foul balls”) that have returned to the firing device 50 side without reaching the game area due to a weak firing force and guide the collected foul balls to the front frame 14. A foul ball collecting board 43 is attached. The foul ball collecting board 43 is formed with a collecting passage 43a having an opening 43b that is open at the top (upper side in FIG. 209) and open at the front (front side in FIG. 209).

  Accordingly, the foul ball is guided from the opening 43b to the front frame 14 through the recovery passage 43a of the foul ball recovery board 43. Further, as described above, since the guide passage 42a of the guide board 42 communicates with the collection passage 43a of the foul ball collection board 43, the winning prize guided to the front surface of the inner frame 12 through the guide passage 42a of the guide board 42. Similarly, the ball and the out ball are guided from the opening 43b to the front frame 14 through the collection passage 43a of the foul ball collection board 43.

  As shown in FIG. 210, the lower unit 15 is attached to the back surface of the front frame 14. On the front surface of the lower unit 15, an upper plate 16 and a transfer device 100 are provided. When the lower unit 15 is attached to the front frame 14, the upper plate 16 and the transport device 100 are arranged inside the overhang 38 formed on the front frame 14, as described above.

  The lower unit 15 is formed with a communication port 15a that communicates with the opening 43b (see FIG. 209) of the foul ball collecting board 43 in a state where the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. Therefore, game balls (winning balls, out balls and foul balls) guided from the opening 43b to the front frame 14 through the collection passage 43a of the foul ball collection board 43 are guided into the front frame 14 from the communication port 15a. .

  In the present embodiment, unlike the upper plate of a general pachinko machine, the upper plate 16 is not for storing game balls, but simply guides the game balls to the launching device 50 (see FIG. 209). It is for. In the upper plate 16, a supply passage 16a serving as a passage of the game ball is formed with a width equal to the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, since the game balls can be aligned in a line in the supply passage 16a, there is no need to provide a rectification unit for rectifying the game balls, and it is possible to suppress ball clogging which is likely to occur in the rectification unit.

  In addition, an insertion opening 16b through which the transport device 100 is inserted is formed in the bottom surface of the upper plate 16. In a state in which the upper plate 16 and the transfer device 100 are disposed in the lower unit 15, the transfer device 100 is inserted through the insertion port 16 b of the upper plate 16, and a discharge port 110 b of the transfer device 100 described below is connected to the upper plate 16. It is arranged so as to protrude above the bottom surface. Further, a cover 19 for preventing a game ball from being touched by a player is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 16.

  The transfer device 100 transfers (lifts) game balls (winning balls, out balls and foul balls) guided from the communication port 15a of the lower unit 15 to the inside of the front frame 14 to the upper plate 16. The game balls transported by the transport device 100 are guided to the firing device 50 via the upper plate 16. As a result, the game balls sealed in the pachinko machine 17010 can be circulated in the pachinko machine 17010 and used for a game.

  At the lower part of the transport device 100, an intake port 110a is formed. The intake port 110a serves as an entrance of a game ball to the transfer device 100, and is a game ball (winning ball, out ball, and foul ball) guided from the communication port 15a of the lower unit 15 to the inside of the front frame 14. Is first guided to the inlet 110a, and then is taken into the transport device 100 from the inlet 110a. The frontage of the inlet 110a is equivalent to two game balls, and is configured so that game balls can be taken in two rows (double row width).

  On the other hand, a discharge port 110b is formed in an upper portion of the transport device 100. The discharge port 110b serves as an exit of a game ball from the transfer device 100, and game balls (winning balls, out balls, and foul balls) taken into the transfer device 100 are discharged from the discharge port 110b to the upper plate 16. Is done.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 211, a detailed configuration of the transport device 100 which is a main part of the present invention will be described. FIG. 211 is an exploded perspective view of the transport device 100. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 211 indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 211, the transport device 100 includes a housing 110, a rotating body 120 housed inside the housing 110, and a mounting plate 115 on a side surface (a surface on the arrow L side) of the housing 110. Drive motor 130, a regulating member 140 that regulates the rotation of the rotating body 120, an opening / closing member 150 that forms a part of a transport path W <b> 1 described later, and a position of the regulating member 140 and the opening / closing member 150. Transmission means 160.

  The housing 110 forms an outer shell of the transfer device 100, and has front and back integrated housing members 111a and 111b made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin molded product, and is provided in front of the housing members 111a and 111b (in the direction of arrow F). A passage forming member 112 to be pinched, a game ball discharge passage 113 through which the game balls pass when discharging the game balls stored in the transfer device 100, and a switch for guiding the movement of the switch operation section 161 of the transmission means 160. A passage 170 is provided, and the housing members 111a and 111b are connected by screws or the like (not shown) to form a box shape. Inside the housing 110, a transfer passage W1 serving as a passage for transferring game balls is formed. Further, the game ball discharge passage 113 includes a side wall 113a for restricting the operation of discharging the game ball, and is formed so that the game ball can be smoothly discharged from the transfer device 100 when the game ball described below is discharged. Is done. Further, the switching passage 170 includes passage portions 170a and 170b formed in the housing members 111a and 111b, respectively. The shape of the switching passage 170 will be described later with reference to FIG. 221, and the shape of the transport passage W1 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The rotator 120 is for transporting the game balls one by one through the transport passage W1. The rotator 120 is disposed to face the above-described intake port 110a, and the rotator 120 is disposed above the driver 121 (arrow U). Direction), a second driven member 123 disposed above the first driven member 122, and a third driven member disposed above the second driven member 123. It is provided with a total of five members including a body 124 and a fourth driven body 125 disposed above the third driven body 124. These members 121 to 125 are rotatably supported by the housing 110 (housing members 111a and 111b), and are arranged so that their rotation axes are parallel to each other. The shape of each member 121 to 125 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214, and the arrangement of each member 121 to 125 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The driving motor 130 is for applying a driving force to the driving body 121 to rotate the driving body 121. The driving force of the driving motor 130 is output to the rotor 130a, and as a result, the driving body 121 attached to the rotor 130a rotates. The drive motor 130 is configured to constantly apply a driving force to the drive unit 121 while the power of the pachinko machine 17010 is turned on, so that the drive unit 121 always rotates.

  The regulating member 140 regulates the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of arrow R6 (see FIG. 213), and is rotatably supported by the housing 110 (housing members 111a and 111b). I have. The regulating member 140 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218.

  The opening / closing member 150 forms a part of the transport path W1 when disposed at a position adjacent to the first guide wall 131 (see FIG. 227) for transporting the game balls, and the rotating shaft C0 for discharging the game balls. (See FIG. 219) is used as a rotation axis to form a part of the game ball discharge passage 113 when it is arranged at a position rotated by a certain angle in the direction of arrow R0 (see FIG. 219). It is rotatably supported by 110 (housing members 111a, 111b). The opening / closing member 150 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The transmission means 160 is for displacing the positions of the regulating member 140 and the opening / closing member 150. One of the transmission means 160 is connected to the opening / closing member 150, and the other is disposed in the switching passage 170. The transmission means 160 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The switching passage 170 is a part of the housing 110 (housing members 111a and 111b), and includes the switching operation unit 161 of the transmission unit 160 and forms a passage for the switching operation unit 161 to move. It is. The switching passage 170 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the shape of the driving body 121 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 212 (a) is a perspective view of the driving body 121, and FIG. 212 (b) is a front view of the driving body 121 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0. The arrow R0 in FIG. 212 (b) indicates the rotation direction of the driving body 121.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (a), the driving body 121 has a cylindrical shaft portion 121a having an axis and a radial direction of the shaft portion 121a (a direction perpendicular to the axis of the shaft portion 121a). It has a pair of blade portions 121b and 121c formed to project. In the driving body 121, the shaft portion 121a is rotatably supported by the housing 110 (housing members 111a and 111b) (see FIG. 211), and rotates with the axis of the shaft portion 121a as the rotation axis C0.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (b), a shaft hole 121a1 having a sectional shape in which a part of a circle is cut out in a plane is formed in the shaft portion 121a along the axis. On the other hand, the rotor 130a (see FIG. 211) of the drive motor 130 is formed in an outer shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape of the shaft hole 121a1 of the shaft portion 121a, and the shaft hole 121a1 of the shaft portion 121a and the rotation of the drive motor 130 are formed. The driving force of the driving motor 130 is applied to the driving body 121 by the engagement with the child 130a.

  The pair of blade portions 121b and 121c are arranged to face each other in the axial direction of the shaft portion 121a. The pair of blade portions 121b and 121c are formed in the same outer peripheral surface shape, and three concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 for receiving game balls one by one are formed in the outer peripheral surface, and the outer peripheral surface is used for playing. Three convex portions 121b2 and 121c2 for supporting the sphere are provided. The concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 and the convex portions 121b2 and 121c2 are provided alternately along the direction of the arrow R0, and are arranged at equal intervals with a central angle of 120 degrees therebetween. The transport of the game balls is performed by rotating the driving body 121 while receiving the game balls in the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1.

  Further, the pair of blades 121b, 121c are arranged such that the concave portion 121b1 of the blade portion 121b corresponds to the convex portion 121c2 of the blade portion 121c when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0, and the concave portion 121c1 of the blade portion 121c corresponds to the blade portion. The projection 121b is arranged at a position corresponding to the projection 121b2. That is, the pair of blade portions 121b and 121c are arranged so as to be shifted from each other by 60 degrees in the direction of arrow R0.

  Further, the pair of blade portions 121b and 121c are disposed at positions where the convex portions 121b2 of the blade portions 121b correspond to the convex portions 121b2 in the rotation axis C0 direction (facing in the rotation axis C0 direction). And the convex portion 121c2 of the blade portion 121c is arranged at a position corresponding to the convex portion 121c2 (facing in the direction of the rotation axis C0) and covers the concave portion 121b1 of the blade portion 121b. The concave portion 121b1 of the 121b and the concave portion 121c1 of the blade portion 121c are continuously arranged along the direction of the arrow R0.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (b), the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 are arranged in the rotation axis C0 direction so as to receive a game ball of a predetermined size (for example, a diameter of 11 mm) (a two-dot chain line in FIG. 212 (b)). The portion 121a is formed in an arcuate shape that is concave toward the axial direction, the depth of which is deeper than the radius of the game ball, and the width of the opening (the outer peripheral side of the blades 121b and 121c) is the bottom. It is formed wider than the width on the side (axial side of the shaft portion 121a).

  Next, the shape of the first driven body 122 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the first follower 122 and the third follower 124 have the same shape, here, the first follower 122 will be described as an example, and the description of the third follower 124 will be omitted. FIG. 213 (a) is a perspective view of the first driven body 122, and FIG. 213 (b) is a front view of the first driven body 122 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C1. Note that arrows R1 and R6 in FIG. 213 (b) indicate the rotation direction of the first driven body 122.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (a), the first follower 122 has a cylindrical shaft portion 122a having an axis and a radial direction of the shaft portion 122a (a direction perpendicular to the axis of the shaft portion 122a). And a blade portion 122b formed to protrude. The first driven body 122 has the shaft portion 122a rotatably supported by the housing 110 (housing members 111a and 111b) (see FIG. 211), and rotates with the axial direction of the shaft portion 122a as the rotation axis C1.

  Six concave portions 122b1 for receiving game balls one by one are formed in the outer peripheral surface of the blade portion 122b. The recesses 122b1 are formed in a line along the direction of the arrow R1, and are arranged at equal intervals with a central angle of 60 degrees therebetween. Here, in the present embodiment, the recesses 122b1 are formed in a line so that the centers of the recesses 122b1 are located linearly. However, the present invention is not limited to the case where the centers of the recesses 122b1 are located linearly. . The transport of the game ball is performed by rotating the first driven body 122 while receiving the game ball in the recess 122b1.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (b), the recess 122b1 has a shaft portion 122a in the rotation axis C1 direction so as to accept a game ball of a predetermined size (for example, a diameter of 11 mm) (a two-dot chain line in FIG. 213 (b)). Is formed in an arc shape that is concave toward the axial direction of the game ball, the depth thereof is deeper than the radius of the game ball, and the width of the opening side (the outer peripheral side of the blade portion 122b) is the bottom side (shaft portion). The width is wider than the width of the shaft 122a.

  Next, the shape of the second driven body 123 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the second follower 123 and the fourth follower 125 have the same shape, here, the second follower 123 will be described as an example, and the description of the fourth follower 125 will be omitted. FIG. 214A is a perspective view of the second driven body 123, and FIG. 214B is a front view of the second driven body 123 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C2. Note that arrows R2 and R7 in FIG. 214B indicate the rotation direction of the second driven body 123.

  As shown in FIG. 214 (a), the second driven body 123 has a cylindrical shaft portion 123a having an axis and a radial direction of the shaft portion 123a (a direction perpendicular to the axis of the shaft portion 123a). And a pair of blade portions 123b and 123c formed so as to protrude. In the second driven body 123, the shaft portion 123a is rotatably supported by the housing 110 (housing members 111a and 111b) (see FIG. 211), and rotates around the axis of the shaft portion 123a as the rotation axis C2.

  The pair of blade portions 123b and 123c are arranged to face each other in the axial direction of the shaft portion 123a. The pair of blade portions 123b and 123c are formed in the same outer peripheral surface shape, and six concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 each receiving one game ball are formed on the outer peripheral surface. These recesses 123b1 and 123c1 are formed in a line along the direction of arrow R2, and are arranged at equal intervals with a central angle of 60 degrees. Here, in the present embodiment, recesses 123b1 and 123c1 are formed in a line so that the centers of recesses 123b1 and 123c1 are located in a straight line, but the central angles of recesses 123b1 and 123c1 are located in a straight line. It is not limited to the case. The transport of the game ball is performed by rotating the second driven body 123 while receiving the game ball in the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1.

  Further, the pair of blade portions 123b1 and 123c1 are arranged such that the positions of the concave portion 123b1 of the blade portion 123b and the concave portion 123c1 of the blade portion 123c coincide with each other when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C2.

  As shown in FIG. 214 (b), the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 are formed with axes in the rotation axis C2 direction so as to receive a game ball of a predetermined size (for example, a diameter of 11 mm) (two-dot chain line in FIG. 214 (b)). The portion 123a is formed in an arcuate shape that is concave toward the axial direction, the depth of which is greater than the radius of the game ball, and the width of the opening side (the outer peripheral side of the wing portions 123b, 123c) is the bottom. It is formed wider than the width on the side (the axis side of the shaft portion 123a).

  Next, the regulating member 140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 (a) is a perspective view of the regulating member 140, and FIG. 215 (b) is a front view of the regulating member 140 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C5. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b) indicate a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, and a front-rear direction of the regulating member 140, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), the regulating member 140 includes a rotation regulating portion 141, a released state holding portion 142, a main body portion 143, and a cylindrical shaft portion 140a having an axis. And The regulating member 140 has a shaft 140a disposed at the center of gravity of the regulating member 140, and is rotatably supported by the housing 110 (housing members 111a, 111b) (see FIG. 211). The heart rotates about the rotation axis C5. The rotation restricting portion 141 protrudes toward the first driven body 122 (arrow F direction side), and becomes rounder vertically downward (arrow D direction) as it moves toward the first driven body 122 side (arrow F direction side). When the inclined portion 141a and the first driven body 122 that are inclined downwardly rotate rotate in the direction of the arrow R6 and come into contact with the lower surface side (the direction of the arrow D) of the rotation regulating portion 141, the contact surface of the first driven body 122 Is provided with a locking portion 141b having a horizontal shape with respect to. The release state holding portion 142 projects toward the opposite side (the direction of arrow B) from the rotation restricting portion 141 with the shaft portion 140a interposed therebetween, and extends vertically upward as it advances toward the side opposite to the rotation restricting portion 141 (the direction of arrow B). An inclined portion 142a that is rounded upward (in the direction of the arrow U) and that is inclined upward, and a shape portion 142b that has the same shape as the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 are provided.

  The inclined portion 141a and the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 are formed to protrude toward the first driven body 122 side (the direction of the arrow F) as described above, and come into contact with the blade section 122b of the first driven body 122. It is arranged at a position where it can be accessed. When the first follower 122 rotates in a direction (the direction of the arrow R1 in FIG. 213) that is driven by the rotation of the driver 121, the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 141 contacts the blade portion 122b of the first follower 122. On the other hand, when rotating in the direction opposite to the direction of the arrow R1 (the direction of the arrow R6 in FIG. 213), the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 contacts the blade portion 122b of the first driven body 122.

  In a state where the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 and the blade portion 122b of the first driven body 122 are in contact with each other (see FIG. 217 (a)), the shaft 140a has a contact portion where the first driven body 122 is in contact. The blade 122b is arranged on a vertical line with respect to the shape of the blade 122b. That is, the rotation axis C5 of the shaft portion 140a is located on an extension of the direction in which the force acting on the locking portion 141b from the blade portion 122b of the first driven body 122 is applied. Therefore, the regulating member 140 is not rotated with respect to the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the R6 direction (see FIG. 217 (a)).

  The inclined portion 142a of the release state holding portion 142 is formed to protrude toward the opposite side (the direction of the arrow B) from the rotation restricting portion 141 with the shaft portion 140a interposed therebetween, as described above. It is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the part 161 (see FIG. 227).

  Here, the inclined part 141a and the locking part 141b of the rotation restricting part 141 and the inclined part 142a and the shaped part 142b of the release state holding part 142 have the same shape, respectively, and the restricting member 140 is moved with respect to the rotation axis C5. Point symmetrical shape. This eliminates the need to distinguish between the upper and lower portions of the regulating member 140, and improves workability during assembly.

  Next, a state in which the regulating member 140 allows the first driven body 122 to rotate in the arrow R1 direction will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 (a) is a front view in the direction of the rotation axis C5 showing a state in which the first driven body 122 is in contact with the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 141, and FIG. It is a front view in the direction of the rotation axis C5 showing a state where the first driven body 122 continues to rotate in the direction of the arrow R1 by rotating in the direction of the arrow R10.

  As shown in FIGS. 216 (a) and 216 (b), when the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R1, the blade 122b of the first follower 122, the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 141, and the like. Abuts. When the first follower 122 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R1 from the state where the blade 122b of the first follower 122 is in contact with the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 141, the blade 122b of the first follower 122 The restricting member 140 rotates in the direction of the arrow R10 around the shaft portion 140a of the restricting member 140 while changing the contact position of the rotation restricting portion 141 with the inclined portion 141a. Therefore, rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R1 is allowed.

  Here, since the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 141 is rounded and inclined downward as described above, when the first follower 122 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R1 from the contacted state, the first The contact position between the blade portion 122b of the follower 122 and the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 141 can be changed smoothly.

  Next, a state in which the regulating member 140 regulates the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R6 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 217 (a) is a front view of the rotation shaft C5 in a state where the first driven body 122 is in contact with the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141, and FIG. 217 (b) is a restricting member 140. 5 is a bottom view of the first driven body 122 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C5. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (a), when the first driven member 122 rotates in the direction of arrow R6, the blade portion 122b of the first driven member 122 and the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 abut. As described above, in a state where the blade portion 122b of the first follower 122 and the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 are in contact with each other, the rotation axis C5 of the rotation restricting portion 141 is in contact with the first driven member 122 at the contact portion. Therefore, the regulating member 140 cannot be rotated by being driven by the rotation of the first driven body 122. In other words, even if the first follower 122 attempts to further rotate in the R6 direction, the blade 122b of the first follower 122 is locked by the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141. The rotation of the follower 122 in the direction of arrow R6 is restricted.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (b), in the present embodiment, the thickness dimension of the blade portion 122b of the first follower 122 (the axis (rotation axis C1) of the shaft 122a of the first follower 122) Is smaller than the thickness of the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 (the dimension in the direction of the axis (rotation axis C5) of the shaft portion 140a of the restricting member 140). Therefore, the restricting member 140 can sufficiently receive the impact at the time of the contact due to the rotation, and can surely restrict the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R6.

  Next, referring to FIG. 218, a position at which the regulating member 140 regulates the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R6 (hereinafter, referred to as a “first position”), and the regulating member 140 The following description will discuss a state in which the lens is disposed at a position (hereinafter, referred to as a “second position”) that allows rotation in the direction of arrow R6. FIG. 218 (a) is a front view in the rotation axis C5 direction showing a state where the regulating member 140 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 218 (b) is a state where the regulating member 140 is arranged at the second position. It is a front view in the rotation axis C5 direction which shows a state.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (a), when the regulating member 140 is located at the first position, the inclined portion 141a or the locking portion 141b of the rotation regulating portion 141 comes into contact with the blade 122b of the first driven body 122. Placed where possible. As described above, when the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of arrow R1, the first follower 122 comes into contact with the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 141, and can rotate in the direction of arrow R1 as it is. On the other hand, when the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of arrow R6, the first follower 122 comes into contact with the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141, and the first follower 122 is locked by the regulating member 140. It cannot rotate in the direction of arrow R6.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (b), when the regulating member 140 is disposed at the second position, the rotation regulating section 141 rotates the rotation locus of the tip of the blade 122b of the first driven body 122 (two points in FIG. 218 (b)). (A chain line). Therefore, neither the inclined part 141a nor the locking part 141b of the rotation restricting part 141 comes into contact with the blade part 122b of the first driven body 122, and the first driven body 122 is moved in both directions of the arrow R1 and the arrow R6. Can rotate.

  Next, the opening / closing member 150 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 219 (a) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 150, FIG. 219 (b) is a front view of the opening / closing member 150 when viewed in the rotation axis C0 direction, and FIG. 219 (c) is a view in the rotation axis C0 direction. It is a bottom view of the opening / closing member 150 in FIG. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 219 (a), FIG. 219 (b), and FIG. 219 (c) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the opening / closing member 150, respectively. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (a), the opening / closing member 150 has a cylindrical shaft portion 150a having a shaft hole and an arc-shaped game ball guide surface 151a identical to a first guide wall 131 (see FIG. 222) described later. A game ball transporting unit 151 having the shaft unit 150a and the game ball transporting unit 151. Further, the shaft 150a includes a protrusion 150a1 and a recess 150a2 which are arranged at positions to be engaged with the protrusion 160a1 and the recess 160a2 (see FIG. 220 (a)) of the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160 described later. .

  The game ball transfer section 151 has a notch at the end on the first guide wall 131 side (in the direction of arrow F), and the notch length 151 b is the same as the thickness of the first guide wall 131. In order to transport game balls, one end (arrow F direction side) of the game ball transport unit 151 is disposed at a position adjacent to the lower end (arrow D direction side) of the first guide wall 131 (see FIG. 228). In the state, the notch surface 151c is disposed at a position where it contacts the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (b), the game ball guide surface 151a is formed in the same arc shape as the first guide wall 131 (see FIG. 222). When the arrow F direction side is located at a position adjacent to the lower end of the first guide wall 131 (arrow D direction side) (see FIG. 228), it becomes a part of the configuration of the transport path W1 and the game ball guide surface 151a. A game ball rolls over.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is disposed at a position rotated by a certain angle in the direction of arrow R0 with the rotation axis C0 as the rotation axis for discharging the game ball (see FIG. 227), one end of the game ball transporting unit 151 (in the direction of arrow F) ) Is disposed at a position adjacent to the upper end (in the direction of the arrow U) of the side wall 113a of the game ball discharge passage 113 (see FIG. 227).

  As shown in FIG. 219 (c), the shaft portion 150a, the game ball transporting portion 151, the connecting portions 152 and 153 are arranged in a line in the directions of arrows F and B, and the opening / closing member 150 is a pair of blades of the driving body 121. It is interposed between the opposing parts 121b and 121c (see FIG. 224). Further, the shaft 121a of the driving body 121 is inserted into the shaft hole 150a3 of the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150, and the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 is rotatably supported by the shaft 121a of the driving body 121 ( See FIG. 222). Accordingly, the axis of the shaft 121a of the driving body 121 matches the axis of the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150, and the opening / closing member 150 rotates with the axis of the shaft 150a as the rotation axis C0.

  Further, as described above, by the engagement between the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160, the rotating force of the transmission means 160 is applied to the opening / closing member 150, and the operator operates the transmission means 160. By doing so, the opening / closing member 150 can rotate in the arrow R0 direction or the arrow R5 direction using the rotation axis C0 as the rotation axis.

  Next, the transmitting means 160 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 220 (a) is a perspective view of the transmission means 160, FIG. 220 (b) is a front view of the transmission means 160 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0, and FIG. 220 (c) is a view in the direction of the rotation axis C0. 5 is a side view of the transmission means 160 in FIG. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 220 (a), 220 (b), and 220 (c) indicate a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, and a front-back direction of the transmission unit 160, respectively. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (a), the transmission means 160 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 160a having a shaft hole, a switching operation portion 161 operated by an operator, and a central portion 162c which is located on the left side of the transfer device 100 when viewed from the front (arrow). (The L direction side). The connecting portion 162 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 162a having an axis, a front end portion 162b, a central portion 162c, an overhang portion 162d, and a rear end portion 162e.

  The front end 162b of the connecting portion 162 is inserted between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121 facing each other (see FIG. 224). The shaft 121a of the driving body 121 is inserted into the shaft hole 160a3 of the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160, and the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160 is rotatably supported by the shaft 121a of the driving body 121 ( See FIG. 222). Therefore, the axis of the shaft 121a of the driving body 121 and the axis of the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160 coincide with each other, and the transmission means 160 rotates with the axis of the shaft 160a as the rotation axis C0.

  Further, the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160 includes the protrusion 160a1 and the recess 160a2, and is disposed at a position where the shaft 160a of the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 engages with the protrusion 150a1 and the recess 150a2 as described above. .

  As shown in FIG. 220 (b), the front end 162b of the connecting part 162 is fixed to the shaft 160a, and the rear end 162e of the connecting part 162 is fixed to the switching operation part 161. Further, the shaft portion 162a of the connecting portion 162 is disposed on the shaft portion 160a side (the arrow F direction side) of the center portion 162c, and the center portion 162c, the overhang portion 162d, and the shaft center of the shaft portion 162a are set as the rotation axis C6. The rear end 162e rotates in the direction of arrow R11 or in the direction of arrow R12.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (c), the switching operation section 161 is a rod-shaped body having a circular cross section, and its center in the longitudinal direction is fixed to the connecting section 162, and both ends thereof are positioned on both sides (arrow R) so that the operator can operate it. , L direction side). When the operator displaces the position of the switching operation section 161, the shaft section 160 a rotates in the direction of the arrow R <b> 0 or the direction of the arrow R <b> 5 via the connecting section 162.

  The central portion 162c of the connecting portion 162 has a shaft portion 160a and a projecting portion 162d extending in the direction of the rotation axis C0 interposed therebetween, so that a front end portion 162b and a rear end portion 162e have a receiving portion described later. 110a1 (see FIG. 223) projects toward the left side (arrow L direction side) of the transport device 100 from the front by a distance slightly larger than a half L1 of the width (arrow R and L directions) of the game ball. .

  Next, the switching passage 170 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 221 (a) and 221 (b) are front views of the switching passage 170, and FIG. 221 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the housing members 111a and 111b taken along line CCXXI-CCXXI of FIG. 221 (a). .

  FIGS. 221 (a) and 221 (b) correspond to front views of the opposing surfaces of the housing members 111a and 111b. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 221 (a), 221 (b), and 221 (c) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the switching passage 170, respectively. .

  As shown in FIGS. 221 (a) to 221 (c), the housing 110 includes a switching passage 170 including passage portions 170a and 170b formed in the housing members 111a and 111b. The switching passage 170 is an opening for guiding the movement of the switching operation unit 161 of the transmission unit 160 (restricting the moving direction), and includes a vertical passage 171a and a front-rear passage 172a formed in the passage unit 170a, and a passage unit. An upper / lower passage 171b and a front / rear passage 172b are formed in the opening 170b.

  The up-down passage 171a and the front-back passage 172a, and the up-down passage 171b and the back-and-forth passage 172b are formed in the same shape and arranged to face each other. The width of each of the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b and the front and rear passages 172a and 172b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the switching operation unit 161 of the transmission unit 160, and the switching operation unit 161 is connected to each of the passages 171a to 172b. It is slidable along the extending direction.

  The upper and lower passages 171a and 171b form a straight passage extending on the side connected to the front and rear passages 172a and 172b in the up and down direction (directions of arrows U and D), and the lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 have the regulating member 140 side ( (In the direction of arrow F). The lower ends 171a and 171b are formed as linear passages extending vertically (directions of arrows U and D).

  The front-rear passages 172a and 172b form a linear passage that is directed downward (in the direction of arrow D) (that is, is inclined downward) as it moves toward the regulating member 140 (in the direction of arrow F), and has a left end 172a1 and a left end 172a1. 172b1 is formed as a linear passage extending downward (in the direction of arrow D).

  In the switching passage 170, the released state holding portion 142 of the regulating member 140 is interposed between the front and rear passages 172a, 172b on the left ends 172a, 172b side (see FIG. 222). In the switching passage 170, the connecting portion 162 (rear end portion 162e) of the transmission means 160 is inserted between the upper and lower passages 171a and 172a and the opposing upper and lower passages 171b and 172b. Both ends of the portion 161 are inserted into passage portions 170a and 170b (upper and lower passages 171a and 171b and front and rear passages 172a and 172b) of the switching passage 170, respectively.

  Next, referring to FIG. 222, a state in which the arrangement of the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 is such that the game balls can be conveyed by driving the driving body 121 (hereinafter referred to as a "game ball conveyance state"). Will be described.

  FIG. 222 is a front view of the members 121 to 125 of the rotating body 120, the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, the transmission means 160, and the switching passage 170 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0.

  In FIG. 222, the driving pair 121 and the first driven body 122 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. In addition, arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 222 indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 222, the driving body 121 and the first driven body 122 are such that the blade 122 b of the first driven body 122 is inserted between the pair of blades 121 b and 121 c of the driving body 121 so as to face each other. The rotation trajectories of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the first 121 and the rotation trajectory of the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 are arranged at relative positions such that they overlap with each other, and the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the driver 121 and the recess of the first follower 122 are arranged. In a state in which the recess 122b1 faces the recess 122b1 of the driving body 121 and the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122, they are arranged at relative positions such that a gap for receiving a game ball is formed.

  In addition, the first driven body 122 and the second driven body 123 are configured such that the blade 122b of the first driven body 122 is interposed between the pair of blades 123b and 123c of the second driven body 123 so that the first driven body 122 and the second driven body 123 are opposed to each other. The rotation trajectory of the recess 122b1 of the body 122 and the rotation trajectory of the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123 are arranged at a relative position such that they overlap with each other, and the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 and the second follower 123 With the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 facing each other, they are arranged at relative positions such that a gap for receiving a game ball is formed between the recesses 122b1 of the first follower 122 and the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123. Have been.

  Similarly, the second driven body 123 and the third driven body 124 are arranged such that the blade 124 b of the third driven body 124 is interposed between the pair of blades 123 b and 123 c of the second driven body 123 so as to face each other. The rotational trajectories of the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the driven member 123 and the rotational trajectory of the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 are arranged at relative positions such that they overlap with each other, and the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven member 123 and the third driven member. When the recess 124b1 of the body 124 is opposed to the recess 123b1, 123c1 of the second driven body 123 and the recess 124b1 of the third driven body 124, the relative position is such that a gap for receiving a game ball is formed. Are located.

  Similarly, the third driven member 124 and the fourth driven member 125 are arranged such that the blade portion 124b of the third driven member 124 is interposed between the pair of blade portions 125b and 125c of the fourth driven member 125, The rotational trajectory of the concave portion 124b1 of the driven member 124 and the rotational trajectories of the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven member 125 are arranged at a relative position so as to overlap with each other, and the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 and the fourth driven member 125 are overlapped. With the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 facing each other, a relative position such that a gap for receiving a game ball is formed between the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 and the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven member 125. Are located.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 222, the first driven body 122 to the fourth driven body 125 are arranged in series vertically on the other hand, while the driving body 121 moves from the first driven body 122 to the fourth driven body 125. To the rear (in the direction of arrow B).

  Further, in the game ball transfer state, the regulating member 140 is disposed at the first position, and as described above, the inclined portion 141a and the locking portion 141b of the rotation regulating portion 141 make contact with the blade portion 122b of the first driven body 122. In a state where it is arranged at a position where it can be brought into contact with and the locking part 141b and the blade part 122b of the first driven body 122 are in contact with each other, the driving part 121 is sent out from a driving body 121 described later and delivered to the first driven body 122. The restricting member 140 is disposed at a position where the restricting member 140 does not come into contact with each of the played game balls and the driving body 121.

  Further, as described above, since the shaft 140a of the regulating member 140 is disposed at the center of gravity of the regulating member 140, the regulating member 140 keeps the posture of the first position. Therefore, a member for keeping the regulating member 140 at the first position is not required, and the structure of the transport device 100 can be achieved with a simple configuration.

  Further, as described above, the release state holding portion 142 of the regulating member 140 is inserted into the switching passage 170 between the front and rear passages 172a and 172b on the left ends 172a and 172b side, and the release state holding portion 142 is inclined. The portion 142a is provided at a position reaching the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the regulating member 140 is disposed on the intake port 110a side (arrow B side) with respect to the first driven body 122, and the portion where the transport passage W1 (see FIG. 227) is not formed. Placed in Therefore, the arrangement space for the regulating member 140 can be easily secured, and the degree of freedom of the shape of the regulating member 140 can be secured.

  In addition, the driving body 121 and the opening / closing member 150 are such that the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is interposed between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121, and the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is provided. (In the direction of arrow B) intersects with the rotation trajectories of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 and extends to reach the rotation trajectory at the lowest part of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1. On the other hand, the other end (in the direction of arrow F) is extended until it contacts the lower end of the first guide wall 131 (in the direction of arrow D).

  Further, the game ball transport section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is disposed on the opposite side (in the direction of arrow F) of the intake port 110a with the driving body 121 interposed therebetween.

  Further, the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft 160a of the transmission unit 160 are connected to the projection 150a1 and the recess 150b1 disposed on the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft 160a of the transmission unit 160 as described above. The provided protrusion 160a1 and recess 160b1 are engaged with each other, and the shaft 121a of the driver 121 is inserted into the shaft hole 150a3 of the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft hole 160a3 of the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160. Is done. Therefore, the driving body 121, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 rotate with the axis of the shaft 121a, the shaft 150a, and the shaft 160a as the same rotation axis C0.

  Further, as described above, the notch length 151b of the game ball transporting unit 151 is the same as the thickness of the first guide wall 131, and when the notch surface 151c contacts the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131, The one guide wall 131 and the game ball guide surface 151a of the game ball transport unit 151 form a surface without a step.

  Here, when the notch surface 151c abuts on the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131, the lower end of the first guide wall 131 (arrow D direction side) and the first guide wall 131 side of the game ball transfer unit 151 (arrow F) The game ball transporting unit 151 is disposed so that there is no gap between the game ball transporting unit 151 and the direction side).

  The switching operation section 161 of the transmission means 160 is disposed at lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 of the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b.

  As described above, the state in which the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 are arranged at the above-described positions (the positions shown in FIG. 222) is referred to as a "game ball transport state".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 223, a state in which the game ball taken in from the inlet 110a is received in the recess 121b (or the recess 121c) of the driving body 121 will be described.

  FIG. 223 is a plan view of the driving body 121, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0.

  Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 223 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 223, the center part 162c of the connecting part 162 of the transmission means 160 is, as described above, half of the width of the receiving part 110a1 (in the directions of the arrows R and L) with respect to the front end part 162b and the rear end part 162e. It is arranged to be shifted to the left (in the direction of the arrow L) of the transport device 100 from the front by a distance slightly larger than L1. Therefore, in the game ball transport state, the game ball (the two-dot chain line in FIG. 223) taken into the intake port 110a is not hindered by the connecting portion 162 of the transmission means 160, and the recess 121b (or the recess 121c) of the driving body 121 is provided. Accepted to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 224, operations of the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 when switching from the game ball transport state to a game ball discharge state (see FIG. 225) described later will be described. FIG. 224 (a) is a view in the rotation axis C0 direction in a state where the switching operation unit 161 is moving upward (direction of arrow U) from lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 (direction of arrow D) of the vertical passages 171a and 171b. FIG. 224 (b) is a front view of the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150 and the transmission means 160. FIG. 172b1 is a front view of the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0 in a state of moving to the side of arrow F (in the direction of arrow F).

  In FIG. 224 (a) and FIG. 224 (b), the drive pair 121 and the first driven body 122 are shown by two-dot chain lines. Arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 224 (a) and 224 (b) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (a), the switching operation unit 161 (see FIG. 222) disposed at the lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 of the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b is upwardly moved from the lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 in the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b. Along with the movement in the direction of the arrow U), the central portion 162c, the overhang portion 162d, and the rear end 162e of the connecting portion 162 rotate in the direction of the arrow R11 around the rotation axis C6 as the rotation center, and the connecting portion 162 moves upward ( (Direction of arrow U). Further, with the upward movement (direction of the arrow U) of the connecting portion 162, the shaft portion 160a fixed to the front end portion 162b of the connecting portion 162 rotates in the direction of the arrow R0 about the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation.

  When the shaft 160a is rotated about the rotation axis C0 in the direction of the arrow R0, the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft 160a of the transmitting means 160 engage with the transmitting means 160 to the opening / closing member 150. And the opening / closing member 150 rotates in the direction of the arrow R0 with the rotation axis C0 as the rotation axis.

  When the opening / closing member 150 is rotated about the rotation axis C0 in the direction of arrow R0, the notch surface 151c is released from contact with the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131, and the lower end of the first guide wall 131 ( A gap is formed between the game ball transporting unit 151 and the arrow D direction side).

  Here, while the switching operation unit 161 is moving in the vertical passages 171a and 171b, the regulating member 140 maintains the state of being arranged at the first position, and regulates the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the R6 direction. .

  In addition, by making the transmission means 160 heavier than the opening / closing member 150, a force is applied to the switching operation unit 161, for example, by releasing the hand while the switching operation unit 161 is moving in the vertical passages 171 a and 171 b. When it is no longer possible, the switching operation unit 161 moves downward (in the direction of arrow D) due to the weight of the transmission means 160, and is disposed at the lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 of the vertical passages 171a and 171b. With the downward movement (direction of arrow D) of the switching operation unit 161, the opening / closing member 150 and the transmission unit 160 rotate in the directions of arrow R5 and arrow R12, respectively, and the notch surface 151 c of the game ball transporting unit 151 becomes The transport device 100 comes into contact with the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131 to enter a game ball transport state.

  As shown in FIG. 224 (b), when the switching operation unit 161 passes through the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b and moves into the front and rear passages 172a and 172b, the switching operation unit 161 is closer to the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b (in the direction of arrow B). Side) to the left ends 172a1, 172b1 (arrow F direction side), the central portion 162c, the overhang portion 162d, and the rear end portion 162e of the connecting portion 162 rotate in the direction of arrow R12 about the rotation axis C6 as the rotation center. At the same time, the connecting portion 162 moves downward (in the direction of arrow D). Further, with the movement of the connecting portion 162 in the downward direction (the direction of arrow D), the shaft portion 160a fixed to the front end portion 162b of the connecting portion 162 rotates in the direction of arrow R5 about the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation.

  When the shaft 160a is rotated in the direction of the arrow R5 about the rotation axis C0 as a center of rotation, the engagement between the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160 causes the opening / closing member 150 to rotate. The rotational force of the transmission means 160 is applied, and the opening / closing member 150 rotates in the direction of arrow R5 with the rotation axis C0 as the rotation axis.

  Here, in any state in which the switching operation unit 161 moves in the front and rear passages 172a and 172b, the distance D1 between the lower end (the arrow D direction side) of the first guide wall 131 and the game ball transporting unit 151 is a predetermined size. The opening / closing member 150 and the transmission means 160 are formed so as to be larger than the diameter of a game ball (for example, a diameter of 11 mm) (two-dot chain line in FIG. 225).

  Here, while the switching operation unit 161 is moving in the front and rear passages 172a and 172b, the regulating member 140 maintains the state of being located at the first position, and regulates the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the R6 direction. .

  Further, by making the transmission means 160 heavier than the opening / closing member 150, a force is applied to the switching operation unit 161 such as the operator releasing his hand during the movement of the switching operation unit 161 in the front and rear passages 172a and 172b. When it is no longer possible, the switching operation unit 161 moves to the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 (in the direction of arrow F) due to the weight of the transmission means 160, and is disposed at the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b. With the movement of the switching operation unit 161 to the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 (the direction of the arrow F), the opening / closing member 150 and the transmission unit 160 rotate in the directions of the arrows R5 and R12, respectively. The ball is discharged (see FIG. 225).

  The operations of the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmitting means 160 when switching from the game ball discharging state to the game ball transport state, which will be described later, are operations that reverse the above-described operations, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the game ball transfer section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is inserted between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121, and the opening / closing member 150 is connected to the driving body. Since the rotation member is rotated in the direction of arrow R0 about the rotation axis C0 concentric with the rotation member 121, the opening / closing member 150 can be disposed so as to overlap the driving body 121. Further, the space required for the displacement of the opening / closing member 150 can be suppressed, and the size of the transport device 100 can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 225, a state in which the arrangement of the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 is set to be an arrangement capable of discharging game balls (hereinafter, referred to as a "game ball discharge state") will be described.

  FIG. 225 is a front view of the members 121 to 125 of the rotating body 120, the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, the transmission means 160, and the switching passage 170 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0.

  In FIG. 225, the driving pair 121 and the first driven body 122 are illustrated by two-dot chain lines. Arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 225 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 225, in the game ball discharging state, the switching operation section 161 of the transmission means 160 is disposed at the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b.

  Further, as described above, the release state holding portion 142 of the regulating member 140 is inserted into the switching passage 170 between the front and rear passages 172a and 172b on the left ends 172a and 172b side, and the release state holding portion 142 is inclined. The portion 142a is provided at a position reaching the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b.

  Here, when the switching operation unit 161 is disposed at the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b, the switching operation unit 161 comes into contact with the inclined portion 142a of the release state holding unit 142, and the rotation axis C5 is used as a rotation center. The regulating member 140 is rotated in the direction of the arrow R10. Therefore, the regulating member 140 is disposed at the second position, and as described above, the inclined portion 141a and the locking portion 141b of the rotation regulating portion 141 are at positions where neither of them contacts the blade 122b of the first driven body 122. Be placed.

  Further, since the inclined portion 142a of the release state holding portion 142 is rounded and inclined upward as described above, the switching operation portion 161 and the inclined portion 142a of the release state holding portion 142 smoothly move the contact position. The switching operation unit 161 is disposed at the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b while changing, so that the regulating member 140 can be reliably and smoothly disposed at the second position.

  In addition, the driving body 121 and the opening / closing member 150 are such that the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is interposed between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121, and the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is provided. (In the direction of arrow B) intersects with the rotation trajectories of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 and extends to reach the rotation trajectory at the lowest part of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1. On the other hand, as described above, the other end (in the direction of arrow F) of the game ball transporting section 151 is disposed at a position adjacent to the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall 113a of the game ball discharge passage 113.

  Further, the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft 160a of the transmission unit 160 are connected to the projection 150a1 and the recess 150b1 disposed on the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft 160a of the transmission unit 160 as described above. The provided protrusion 160a1 and recess 160b1 are engaged with each other, and the shaft 121a of the driver 121 is inserted into the shaft hole 150a3 of the shaft 150a of the opening / closing member 150 and the shaft hole 160a3 of the shaft 160a of the transmission means 160. Is done. Therefore, the driving body 121, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 rotate with the axis of the shaft 121a, the shaft 150a, and the shaft 160a as the same rotation axis C0.

  As described above, the state in which the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission means 160 are arranged at the above-described positions (the positions shown in FIG. 225) is referred to as a "game ball discharging state".

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the other end (in the direction of arrow F) of the game ball transporting section 151 is positioned adjacent to the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall 113a of the game ball discharge passage 113. , At least a part of the game ball discharge passage 113 is formed by the game ball transport unit 151, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed. That is, the number of components or the material for forming the side wall can be reduced by the amount of the side wall for forming the game ball discharge passage 113 used by the game ball transfer section 151, and as a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  For example, at least a part of the game ball discharge passage 113 can be formed by the game ball transport unit 151 even if the game ball transport unit 151 is not moved by the rotation of the opening / closing member 150. It is necessary to adopt a complicated structure in order to arrange the game ball transporting unit 151 at a position to be the game ball discharge passage 113. On the other hand, according to the present invention in which the game ball transfer section 151 is moved by the rotation of the opening / closing member 150 and the rotation axis of the rotation is concentric with the rotation axis of the driving body 121, the structure is complicated. The game ball transporting unit 151 can be disposed at a position suitable for the game ball discharge passage 113 without any problem.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 226, a state in which the game ball taken in from the inlet 110a is received in the concave portion 121b (or the concave portion 121c) of the driving body 121 will be described.

  FIG. 226 is a plan view of the driving body 121, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission unit 160 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0.

  Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 226 indicate a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, and a front-rear direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 226, the central portion 162c of the connecting portion 162 of the transmission means 160 is, as described above, half of the width of the receiving portion 110a1 (in the directions of the arrows R and L) with respect to the front end 162b and the rear end 162e. It is arranged to be shifted to the left (in the direction of the arrow L) of the transport device 100 from the front by a distance slightly larger than L1. Therefore, in the game ball discharge state, the game ball (the two-dot chain line in FIG. 226) taken into the intake port 110a is not hindered by the connecting portion 162 of the transmission means 160, and the recess 121b (or the recess 121c) of the driving body 121 is provided. Accepted to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 227, a state in which a game ball taken in from the intake port 110a is received in the recess 121b (or the recess 121c) of the driving body 121 will be described.

  FIG. 227 is a plan view of the driving body 121, the opening / closing member 150, and the transmission unit 160 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0.

  Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 227 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 227, the central portion 162c of the connecting portion 162 of the transmission means 160 is, as described above, a half of the width of the receiving portion 110a1 (in the directions of the arrows R and L) with respect to the front end 162b and the rear end 162e. It is arranged to be shifted to the left (in the direction of the arrow L) of the transport device 100 from the front by a distance slightly larger than L1. Therefore, the game ball (two-dot chain line in FIG. 223) taken into the intake port 110a is received in the concave portion 121b (or the concave portion 121c) of the driving body 121 without being hindered by the connecting portion 162 of the transmission means 160.

  Next, the shape of the transport passage W1 formed inside the housing 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 227 is a front view of the transport device 100 as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. In FIG. 227, the members 121 to 125 of the rotating body 120 are shown in a see-through manner to facilitate understanding of the drawing. In addition, arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 227 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 227, the transport passage W1 includes a first guide wall 131 and a third guide wall 133 formed in the passage forming member 112, and a second guide wall 132 and a third guide wall formed in the housing members 111a and 111b. It is constituted by a total of four guide walls including four guide walls 134 and a game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150.

  The first guide wall 131 and the game ball transport portion 151 of the opening / closing member 150 are disposed to face the outer peripheral surface of the first driven body 122, and are parallel to the rotation axis C1 of the first driven body 122 and To form an arc-shaped surface. Further, the lower end of the first guide wall 131 (in the direction of the arrow D) extends so as to abut on the game ball transporter 151 of the opening / closing member 150. On the other hand, the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the first guide wall 131 is interposed between the pair of blade portions 123b and 123c of the second driven body 123, and the rotation trajectory of the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123. And extend to reach the rotation locus at the lowest part of the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1.

  The second guide wall 132 is disposed facing the outer peripheral surface of the second driven body 123, and forms an arc-shaped surface parallel to the rotation axis C2 of the second driven body 123 and centered on the rotation axis C2. are doing. The lower end (in the direction of arrow D) intersects with the rotation locus of the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 and extends to reach the rotational locus at the lowest portion of the concave portion 122b1. On the other hand, the upper end (in the direction of the arrow U) intersects the rotation locus of the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven body 124 and extends so as to reach the rotational locus at the lowest portion of the concave portion 124b1. As described above, since the second guide wall 132 is formed on each of the housing members 111a and 111b, a pair of the second guide walls 132 are provided with the first driven body 122 interposed therebetween, and the second guide wall 132 is formed with the third driven body 124 interposed therebetween. A pair is provided.

  Similarly, the third guide wall 133 is disposed to face the outer peripheral surface of the third driven body 124, and has an arc shape parallel to the rotation axis C3 of the third driven body 124 and centered on the rotation axis C3. Forming a surface. The lower end (in the direction of arrow D) is interposed between the pair of blades 123b and 123c of the second driven body 123 so as to intersect with the rotation trajectories of the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123. It extends so as to reach the rotation locus at the lowest part of the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1. On the other hand, the upper end (in the direction of the arrow U) is interposed between the pair of blade portions 125b and 125c of the fourth driven body 125, intersects the rotation trajectory of the recessed parts 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 and the recessed part 125b1 , 125c1 so as to reach the rotation locus at the lowest part.

  Similarly, the fourth guide wall 134 is disposed so as to face the outer peripheral surface of the fourth driven body 125, and is formed in an arc shape parallel to the rotation axis C4 of the fourth driven body 125 and centered on the rotation axis C4. Forming a surface. The lower end (in the direction of arrow D) intersects the rotation locus of the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven body 124 and extends so as to reach the rotational locus at the lowest portion of the concave portion 124b1. On the other hand, the upper end (in the direction of the arrow U) is connected to the outlet 110b. As described above, since the fourth guide wall 134 is formed on each of the housing members 111a and 111b, a pair of the fourth guide walls 134 is provided with the third driven body 124 interposed therebetween.

  As a result, the transport path W1 is curved in a substantially S-shape between each of the guide walls 131 to 134 and the game ball transport portion 151 of the opening / closing member 150, and the outer peripheral surface of the first driven member 122 to the fourth driven member 125. Formed. The transfer of the game ball is performed along the guide balls 131 to 134 and the game ball transfer section 151 of the opening / closing member 150.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 228 to FIG. 237, the operation of transporting the game balls by the transport device 100 will be described. 228 to 237 are front views of the internal structure of the transport device 100 as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. The arrows R0, R1, R2, R3, and R4 in FIGS. 228 to 237 indicate the game of the driver 121, the first follower 122, the second follower 123, the third follower 124, and the fourth follower 125, respectively. The arrow UD, LR, and FB show the rotation direction at the time of ball conveyance, and have shown the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the conveyance apparatus 100, respectively.

  First, as shown in FIG. 228, the regulating member 140, the opening / closing member 150, the transmission means 160, and the switching passage 170 are arranged at the position of the game ball transport state, and as described above, the regulating member 140 Rotation in the direction of arrow R1 is permitted, and rotation in the direction of arrow R6 is restricted.

  When the driving body 121 is rotated by the driving force of the driving motor 130 and the driving body 121 is rotated in the direction of the arrow R0, the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 faces the intake port 110a, and enters the intake port 110a. The captured game ball is received in the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1).

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the central portion 162c of the connecting portion 162 of the transmission means 160 is disposed shifted toward the near side (the direction of the arrow L) as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0, the intake port The game ball taken in from 110a is received in the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 without contacting the central portion 162c.

  Further, as described above, since the concave portion 121b1 is disposed at the position corresponding to the convex portion 121c2 and the concave portion 121c1 is disposed at the position corresponding to the convex portion 121b2, the driving body 121 has the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1). ) Faces the inlet 110a, the protrusion 121c2 (or the protrusion 121b2) disposed at a position corresponding to the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) (facing in the direction of the rotation axis C0) is the inlet. The game ball taken into the inlet 110a while facing the 110a can be alternately received by the recesses 121b1 and the recesses 121c1. Therefore, it is not necessary to reduce the passage width of the collection passage, and the game balls can be smoothly taken into the transfer passage 100.

  Further, as described above, the driving body 121 covers the concave portion 121c1 in which the convex portion 121b2 is disposed at a position corresponding to the convex portion 121b2 (facing in the direction of the rotation axis C0), and the convex portion 121c2 has the convex portion 121c2. Is formed so as to cover the concave portion 121b1 (facing in the direction of the rotation axis C0) corresponding to the game ball, so that the game sphere is transferred to the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) by the convex portion 121c2 (or the convex portion 121b2). The game balls can be guided, and the game balls can be smoothly received in the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1.

  Further, as described above, since the concave portion 121b1 and the concave portion 121c1 are continuously arranged along the rotation direction R0, the driving body 121 has the concave portion 121b1 or the concave portion 121b1 regardless of the rotational position of the driving body 121. A game ball can be received in any of the recesses 121c1. As a result, the game balls can be efficiently received in the recesses 121b1 and 121c1, and the clogging of the balls can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 are formed in an arc shape that is concave toward the axis of the shaft portion 121a, the momentum of the game ball received in the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 is radially applied. It can be dispersed and reduced, and the repelling of the sphere by the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 can be prevented. As a result, the game balls can be smoothly received in the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1, and ball clogging can be suppressed.

  Next, when the driving body 121 further rotates in the direction of arrow R0 from the state of FIG. 228, the game ball is transported by the driving body 121, and as shown in FIG. 229, the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the first The concave portion 122b1 of the driven member 122 faces the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving member 121, and a game ball is received between the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven member 122.

  Then, when the driving body 121 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R0 from the state of FIG. 229, as shown in FIG. 230, the gap between the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122 is formed. The rotational force of the driver 121 is transmitted to the first driven member 122 using the game ball received as a medium, and the first driven member 122 is driven by the rotation of the driver 121 and rotates in the direction of the arrow R1. Thereby, the game ball is sent out from the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and delivered to the first driven body 122. When the first driven member 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R1 in the game ball transport state, as described above, the rotation restricting portion 141 of the restricting member 140 allows the rotation of the first driven member 122 in the direction of the arrow R1. The first driven body 122 is driven by the rotation of the driving body 121 and can continue to rotate in the direction of the arrow R1.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the driving body 121 has the concave portion 121b1 disposed at the position corresponding to the convex portion 121c2 and the concave portion 121c1 disposed at the position corresponding to the convex portion 121b2. When the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) faces the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122, the protrusion is disposed at a position corresponding to the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) (facing in the direction of the rotation axis C0). The portion 121c2 (or the convex portion 121b2) faces the concave portion 122b1 of the first follower 122, and the game ball received in the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 is alternately transferred from the concave portion 121b1 and the concave portion 121c1 to the concave portion 122b1 of the first follower 122. Can be delivered individually. Thereby, the game balls can be received one by one in the 122b1 formed in a row on the outer peripheral surface of the first driven body 122 and aligned in a row.

  Therefore, the driving body 121 is driven to rotate by the drive motor 130, and the game balls taken into the inlet 110a in two rows (a plurality of rows) are forcibly aligned in one row. As compared with the case where the game balls are collected in a width and aligned in a line by using the natural flow of the game balls in the straightening unit, the ball clogging can be suppressed while the game balls are straightened.

  Further, as described above, since the depth of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 is formed to be deeper than the radius of the game ball, the driving body 121 can ensure a large amount of the game ball hanging on the recesses 121b1 and 121c1. it can.

  Further, as described above, the game ball transporting unit 151 is interposed between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121 so as to intersect with the rotation trajectory of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 and to intersect with the recess 121b1. , 121c1 so as to reach the rotation locus at the lowest part, so that when the driving body 121 rotates and sends out the game balls from the recesses 121b1, 121c1, the gap between the recesses 121b1, 121c1 and the game ball transporting unit 151 is formed. The game ball can be sandwiched and sent out, and the game ball can be continuously pushed along the game ball transport unit 151.

  Further, as described above, the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 are formed such that the width of the opening (the outer peripheral side of the blades 121b and 121c) is wider than the width of the bottom (the axial center of the shaft 121a). Even if the configuration is such that game balls are sandwiched between the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 and the game ball transporting unit 151 and sent out, the game balls can be smoothly sent out from the recesses 121b1 and 121c1. Therefore, a large amount of the game balls hanging on the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 can be secured, and when the driving body 121 rotates to send the game balls from the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1, the game balls are transported between the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 and the game ball transporting section 151. Since the game balls can be smoothly sent out while being sandwiched therebetween, and the game balls can be continuously pushed along the game ball transfer section 151, the rotational force of the driving body 121, that is, the transfer force is sufficient for the game balls. Can be provided. Also, the width of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 on the opening side is formed wider than the width of the bottom side, and the game balls can be smoothly sent out from the recesses 121b1 and 121c1. Between the game balls can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the driving body 121 and the first driven body 122 are configured such that the blade 122b of the first driven body 122 is interposed between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121 so as to face each other. Since the rotational trajectories of the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 of the 121 and the rotational trajectory of the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 are arranged at a relative position so as to overlap with each other, the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 of the driver 121 and the first driven body 122 A large amount of game balls hanging on the recesses 122b1 can be ensured. Therefore, when the driving body 121 rotates and delivers the game ball to the first driven body 122, the rotational force of the driving body 121, that is, the conveying force can be sufficiently imparted to the game ball, and the game ball can be applied to the game ball. The applied conveying force can be sufficiently transmitted to the first driven body 122.

  As described above, since the blade 122b of the first driven body 122 is interposed between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121, the game from the driving body 121 to the first driven body 122 is performed. When transferring the ball, the game ball can be stably held between the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 and the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122. As a result, the transfer force can be reliably applied to the game balls, and the transfer force applied to the game balls can be reliably transmitted to the first driven body 122.

  As described above, the conveyance of the game ball by the first driven body 122 is performed by repeating the operation of FIGS. 228 to 230. Therefore, if there is no game ball between the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122, the first driven body 122 does not rotate, and the game ball is transported. Instead, game balls can be stored in the transport device 100.

  The rotational force of the driver 121 is transmitted to the first follower 122 using the game ball received between the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the driver 121 and the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 as a medium, and the first follower 122 is driven. Since the body 122 is configured to rotate following the rotation of the driving body 121, there is no need to synchronize the rotation of the driving body 121 with the rotation of the first driven body 122, and the problem of the deviation between the rotations is eliminated. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to be bitten between the driving body 121 and the first driven body 122. As a result, it is possible to smoothly transfer the game ball from the driving body 121 to the first driven body, thereby suppressing ball clogging.

  Next, when the first follower 122 further rotates in the direction of arrow R1 from the state of FIG. 230, the game ball is transported by the first follower 122, and as shown in FIG. The recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123 are opposed to each other, and a game ball is received between the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 and the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the first guide wall 131 and the game ball guide surface 151a of the game ball transport unit 151 are arranged at a position without a step, the first follower 122 and the first A game ball sandwiched between the first guide wall 131 or the game ball guide surface 151a of the game ball transfer unit 151 smoothly rolls on the first guide wall 131 or the game ball guide surface 151a of the game ball transfer unit 151.

  Further, the switching operation unit 161 of the transmission means 160 is disposed at the lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 of the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b, and the movement other than the upward direction (the direction of the arrow U) is restricted. As a result, the weight of the game ball can prevent the opening / closing member 150 from rotating in the direction of the arrow R0 about the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation, and the first guide wall 131 and the game ball guide surface 151a of the game ball transport unit 151. And can maintain a state without a step.

  In addition, by bringing the notch surface 151c of the game ball transfer section 151 into contact with the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131, accurate positioning can be performed with a simple structure.

  Next, when the first follower 122 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R1 from the state of FIG. 231, the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 and the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123 as shown in FIG. The rotational force of the first follower 122 is transmitted to the second follower 123 using the game ball received therebetween as a medium, and the second follower 123 is rotated by the rotation of the first follower 122 and rotates in the direction of arrow R2. . As a result, the game ball is sent out from the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven member 122 and delivered to the second driven member 123.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the depth of the concave portion 122b1 is formed to be deeper than the radius of the game ball, the first driven body 122 reduces the amount of the game ball hanging on the concave portion 122b1. It can be secured large.

  As described above, the second guide wall 132 is provided in a pair with the first driven body 122 interposed therebetween, intersects with the rotation trajectory of the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122, and rotates at the lowest portion of the recess 122b1. When the first driven body 122 rotates to send out the game ball from the recess 122b1, the game ball is sandwiched between the recess 122b1 and the second guide wall 132 and sent out. The game ball can be continuously pushed along the second guide wall 132.

  Further, as described above, since the width of the opening (the outer peripheral side of the blade portion 122b) is formed to be wider than the width of the bottom side (the axial center side of the shaft portion 122a), the concave portion 122b1 has the same shape as the concave portion 122b1. Even with a configuration in which a game ball is sandwiched between the second guide wall 132 and sent out, the game ball can be smoothly sent out from the recess 122b1. Accordingly, a large amount of the game ball hanging on the concave portion 122b1 can be secured, and when the first driven member 122 rotates to send the game ball from the concave portion 122b1, the game ball is placed between the concave portion 122b1 and the second guide wall 132. Can be smoothly sent out while being sandwiched, and the game ball can be continuously pushed along the second guide wall 132, so that the rotational force of the first driven body 122, that is, the transfer force, is sufficiently imparted to the game ball. can do. Further, the width of the opening side of the concave portion 122b1 is formed wider than the width of the bottom side, and the game balls can be smoothly sent out from the concave portion 122b1, so that the game balls between the concave portion 122b1 and the second guide wall 132 are formed. Biting can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the first driven body 122 and the second driven body 123 are inserted between the pair of blades 123b and 123c of the second driven body 123 such that the blades 122b of the first driven body 122 face each other. Since the rotation trajectory of the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122 and the rotation trajectory of the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123 are arranged so as to overlap with each other, the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122 and A large amount of game balls hanging on the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123 can be both secured. Therefore, when the first driven member 122 rotates and delivers the game ball to the second driven member 123, the rotation force of the first driven member 122, that is, the transport force can be sufficiently imparted to the game ball. Thus, the conveying force applied to the game ball can be sufficiently transmitted to the second driven body 123.

  Further, as described above, since the blade 122b of the first driven body 122 is interposed between the pair of blades 123b and 123c of the second driven body 123, the second driven body 122 When transferring the game ball to the body 123, the game ball can be stably held between the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven member 122 and the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven member 123. As a result, the transfer force can be reliably applied to the game balls, and the transfer force applied to the game balls can be reliably transmitted to the second driven body 123.

  As described above, the conveyance of the game ball by the second driven body 123 is performed by repeating the operation of FIGS. 231 and 232. Therefore, if there is no game ball between the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 and the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123, the second follower 123 does not rotate, and the game ball is not conveyed. In addition, game balls can be stored in the transport device 100.

  Next, when the second driven member 123 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R2 from the state of FIG. 232, the game ball is conveyed by the second driven member 123, and the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven member 123 as shown in FIG. And the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 are opposed to each other, and a game ball is received between the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven member 123 and the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124.

  Then, when the second follower 123 further rotates in the direction of arrow R2 from the state of FIG. 233, as shown in FIG. 234, the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123 and the recess 124b1 of the third follower 124 The rotational force of the second follower 123 is transmitted to the third follower 124 using the game ball received therebetween as a medium, and the third follower 124 is rotated by the rotation of the second follower 123 and rotates in the direction of arrow R3. . As a result, the game ball is sent out from the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123 and is delivered to the third driven body 124.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the depth of the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 is formed to be deeper than the radius of the game ball, the second driven body 123 forms the game ball on the recesses 123b1 and 123c1. Can be secured large.

  Further, as described above, the third guide wall 133 is interposed between the pair of blade portions 123b and 123c of the second driven body 123 and intersects the rotation trajectories of the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123. When the second driven member 123 rotates and sends the game ball out of the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1, the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 and the third concave portion are extended. The game ball can be sandwiched between the guide wall 133 and sent out, and the game ball can be continuously pushed along the third guide wall 133.

  Also, as described above, the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 are formed such that the width of the opening (the outer peripheral side of the blades 123b and 123c) is wider than the width of the bottom (the axial center of the shaft 123a). Even with a configuration in which game balls are sandwiched between the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 and the third guide wall 133 and sent out, the game balls can be smoothly sent out from the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1. Accordingly, a large amount of the game ball hanging on the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 can be secured, and the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 and the third guide wall 133 are used when the second driven body 123 rotates and sends the game balls from the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1. , The game ball can be smoothly sent out while being sandwiched therebetween, and the game ball can be continuously pushed along the third guide wall 133. Therefore, the rotational force of the second driven body 123, that is, the transfer force is reduced. It can be sufficiently given to game balls. Further, the width of the opening side of the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 is formed wider than the width of the bottom side, and the game balls can be smoothly sent out from the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1, so that the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 and the third guide wall 133 Between the game balls can be prevented.

  In addition, as described above, the second driven body 123 and the third driven body 124 are inserted between the pair of blades 123b and 123c of the second driven body 123 such that the blades 124b of the third driven body 124 face each other. Since the rotation trajectories of the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123 and the rotation trajectory of the recess 124b1 of the third follower 124 are arranged in a relative position so as to overlap with each other, the recesses 123b1 and 123b1 of the second follower 123 are provided. A large amount of the game ball hanging on the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven body 124 can be secured. Therefore, when the second driven member 123 rotates and delivers the game ball to the third driven member 124, the rotational force of the second driven member 123, that is, the transfer force can be sufficiently imparted to the game ball. Thus, the conveying force applied to the game ball can be sufficiently transmitted to the third driven body 124.

  Further, as described above, since the blade portion 124b of the third driven member 124 is interposed between the pair of blade portions 123b and 123c of the second driven member 123, the third driven member 123 is When transferring the game ball to the body 124, the game ball can be stably held between the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven member 123 and the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124. As a result, the transfer force can be reliably applied to the game ball, and the transfer force applied to the game ball can be reliably transmitted to the third driven body 124.

  As described above, the conveyance of the game ball by the third driven body 124 is performed by repeating the operation of FIG. 233 and FIG. 234. Therefore, if there is no game ball between the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven member 123 and the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124, the third driven member 124 does not rotate, and the game ball is not transported. In addition, game balls can be stored in the transport device 100.

  Next, when the third follower 124 further rotates in the direction of arrow R3 from the state of FIG. 234, the game ball is transported by the third follower 124, and as shown in FIG. 235, the recess 124b1 of the third follower 124 and the third The recesses 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth follower 125 face each other, and a game ball is received between the recesses 124b1 of the third follower 124 and the recesses 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth follower 125.

  Next, when the third follower 124 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R3 from the state of FIG. 235, the recess 124b1 of the third follower 124 and the recesses 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth follower 125, as shown in FIG. The rotational force of the third follower 124 is transmitted to the fourth follower 125 using the game ball received therebetween as a medium, and the fourth follower 125 is rotated by the rotation of the third follower 124 and rotates in the direction of arrow R4. . Thereby, the game ball is sent out from the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 and delivered to the fourth driven member 125.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the depth of the concave portion 124b1 is formed to be deeper than the radius of the game ball, the third driven body 124 reduces the amount of the game ball that hangs on the concave portion 124b1. It can be secured large.

  Further, as described above, the fourth guide wall 134 is provided in a pair with the third driven member 124 interposed therebetween, intersects with the rotation trajectory of the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124, and rotates at the lowest portion of the concave portion 124b1. When the third driven body 124 rotates to send out the game ball from the recess 124b1, the game ball is sandwiched between the recess 124b1 and the fourth guide wall 134 and sent out. The game ball can be continuously pushed along the four guide walls 134.

  Further, as described above, the recess 124b1 is formed such that the width of the opening (the outer peripheral side of the blade portion 124b) is wider than the width of the bottom (the axial center of the shaft portion 124a). Even with a configuration in which a game ball is sandwiched between the fourth guide wall 134 and sent out, the game ball can be sent out smoothly from the recess 124b1. Accordingly, a large amount of the game ball hanging on the concave portion 124b1 can be secured, and when the third driven member 124 rotates to send the game ball from the concave portion 124b1, the game ball is placed between the concave portion 124b1 and the fourth guide wall 134. Can be smoothly fed out while being sandwiched, and the game ball can be continuously pushed along the fourth guide wall 134, so that the rotational force of the third driven body 124, that is, the transfer force, is sufficiently imparted to the game ball. can do. In addition, the width of the recess 124b1 on the opening side is formed wider than the width of the bottom side, and the game balls can be smoothly sent out from the recess 124b1, so that the game balls between the recess 124b1 and the fourth guide wall 134 are formed. Biting can be prevented.

  Further, as described above, the third driven member 124 and the fourth driven member 125 are inserted between the pair of blade portions 125b and 125c of the fourth driven member 125 such that the blade portions 124b of the third driven member 124 are opposed to each other. Since the rotation trajectory of the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 and the rotation trajectory of the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven member 125 overlap each other, the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 and A large amount of game balls hanging on the recesses 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 can be both secured. Therefore, when the third driven member 124 rotates to transfer the game ball to the fourth driven member 125, the rotating force of the third driven member 124, that is, the conveying force can be sufficiently imparted to the game ball. In addition, the conveying force applied to the game ball can be sufficiently transmitted to the fourth driven body 125.

  Further, as described above, since the blade portion 124b of the third driven member 124 is interposed between the pair of blade portions 125b and 125c of the fourth driven member 125, the fourth driven member 124 moves from the fourth driven member 124 to the fourth driven member 125. When transferring the game ball to the body 125, the game ball can be stably held between the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 and the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven member 125. As a result, the transfer force can be reliably applied to the game ball, and the transfer force applied to the game ball can be reliably transmitted to the fourth driven body 125.

  As described above, the transport of the game ball by the fourth driven body 125 is performed by repeating the operation of FIGS. 235 and 236. Therefore, if there is no game ball between the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven member 124 and the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven member 125, the fourth driven member 125 does not rotate, and the game ball is not conveyed. In addition, game balls can be stored in the transport device 100.

  Next, when the fourth follower 125 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R4 from the state of FIG. 236, the game ball is transported by the fourth follower 125, and the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth follower 125 as shown in FIG. Faces the discharge port 110b, and the game balls received in the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 are discharged to the upper plate 16 from the discharge port 110b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 238, a state where the regulation member 140 regulates the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R6 in a state where the game ball is not taken in from the intake port 110a will be described. FIG. 238 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device 100 as viewed in the direction of the arrow A in FIG. 211. Arrows UD, LR, and FB indicate the vertical direction, the left-right direction, and the Are respectively shown.

  In the state of FIG. 237, as described above, the drive motor 130 always applies a drive force to the drive body 121 while the power of the pachinko machine 17010 is turned on, even if the game ball is no longer taken in from the intake port 110a. Therefore, the transfer device 100 continues to transfer the game balls. When the last game ball S1 taken into the intake port 110a is sent out from the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 and delivered to the first driven body 122, as shown in FIG. There is no game ball between the one driven body 122 and the one driven body 122.

  Therefore, the rotational force of the driving body 121 is not transmitted to the first driven body 122, and the first driven body 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R6 due to the weight of the game balls stored in the transport device 100.

  Here, as described above, in the game ball transport state, since the regulating member 140 is disposed at the first position, the blade portion 122b of the first driven body 122 that rotates in the direction of the arrow R6 and the rotation of the regulating member 140 are regulated. Since the locking portion 141b of the portion 141 abuts and the blade 122b of the first driven member 122 is locked by the rotation restricting portion 141 of the restricting member 140, the rotation of the first driven member 122 in the direction of the arrow R6 is prevented. It is regulated by the regulating member 140.

  When the regulating member 140 regulates the rotation of the first follower 122 in the direction of arrow R6, the arrow R7 of each of the second follower 123, the third follower 124, and the fourth follower 125 is used as a game ball. , The rotation in the directions of the arrows R8 and R9 is also restricted. Therefore, the rotation of each of the driven members 122 to 125 in the directions of the arrows R6, R7, R8, and R9 can be restricted by the one restricting member 140, so that the number of components can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, in a state where the blade portion 122 b of the first driven body 122 is locked by the rotation restricting portion 141 of the restricting member 140, the blade 122 b is sent out from the driving body 121 and delivered to the first driven body 122. Since the game ball S1 does not come into contact with the driving body 121, an intermittent load due to the contact of the game ball does not act on the driving body 121, and the durability can be achieved.

  Further, the switching operation unit 161 of the transmission means 160 is disposed at the lower ends 171a1 and 171b1 of the upper and lower passages 171a and 171b, and the movement other than the upward direction (the direction of the arrow U) is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 150 from rotating in the directions of the arrows R0 and R5 about the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation due to the weight of the game ball or the weight of the game ball.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 239 to FIG. 243, the discharging operation of the game balls by the transport device 100 will be described. 239 to 243 are front views of the internal structure of the transport device 100 as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. Note that arrows R6, R7, R8, and R9 in FIGS. 239 to 243 indicate rotation directions of the first follower 122, the second follower 123, the third follower 124, and the fourth follower 125 when the game ball is discharged, respectively. And arrows UD, LR, and FB indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  When the switching operation unit 161 of the transmission unit 160 is disposed at the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b of the switching passage 170 by the operator's operation from the state of FIG. One end (in the direction of arrow B) of the game ball transporting portion 151 of the opening / closing member 150 intersects with the rotation trajectory of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 and the rotation trajectory at the lowest portion of the recesses 121b1 and 121c1. Is located at On the other hand, the other end (in the direction of arrow F) is disposed at a position adjacent to the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall 113a of the game ball discharge passage 113, and as shown in FIG. State.

  Here, as described above, since the rotation restricting portion 141 of the restricting member 140 is disposed at the second position and does not abut on the first driven member 122, the first driven member 122 is moved in either the arrow R1 direction or the arrow R6 direction. Can also be rotated.

  Further, as described above, the other end (in the direction of arrow F) of the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is disposed at a position adjacent to the upper end (in the direction of arrow U) of the side wall 113a of the game ball discharge passage 113. Therefore, the game ball transport unit 151 forms a part of the game ball discharge passage 113.

  Further, as described above, the distance D2 between the lower end of the first guide wall 131 (in the direction of the arrow D) and the game ball transporting unit 151 is arranged to be larger than the diameter of the game ball of a predetermined size (for example, 11 mm in diameter). Therefore, the game ball can enter the game ball discharge passage 113 after passing between the first guide wall 131 and the game ball transporting unit 151.

  Further, as described above, since the central portion 162c of the connecting portion 162 of the transmission means 160 is disposed shifted toward the near side (the direction of the arrow L) as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0, the game ball taken in from the inlet 110a. Are received in the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 without contacting the central portion 162c.

  When the driving body 121 rotates in the direction of the arrow R0 by the driving force of the driving motor 130, the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 faces the intake port 110a, and the game ball S4 taken into the intake port 110a is depressed. It is received in 121b1 (or recess 121c1).

  Further, the game ball S6 sent out from the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and transferred to the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven member 122 is formed between the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven member 122 and the game ball transfer section 151. It cannot be sandwiched between, and is discharged from the transport device 100 through the game ball discharge passage 113 due to its weight.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the discharged game ball S6 is received in the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) adjacent to the concave portion 121b (or the concave portion 121c) of the driving body 121 in the arrow R5 direction. The driving body 121 and the first driven body 122 are disposed at a position where the game ball S5 is received between the concave section 121b1 (or the concave section 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the concave section 122b1 of the first driven body 122.

  Therefore, the rotational force of the driving body 121 is transmitted to the first driven body 122 using the game ball S5 received between the recessed part 121b1 (or the recessed part 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the recessed part 122b1 of the first driven body 122 as a medium. The first driven member 122 is driven by the rotation of the driving member 121 and rotates in the direction of the arrow R1.

  Further, the second driven body 123, the third driven body 124, and the fourth driven body 125 rotate in the directions of arrows R2, R3, and R4, respectively, and the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 face the discharge port 110b. The game balls S19 received in the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 are discharged from the discharge port 110b to the upper plate 16.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of arrow R1, and the game ball S10 is sent out from the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122, and the recess of the second follower 123. The game ball S9 delivered to 123b1 and 123c1 and received in the recess 122b1 adjacent to the recess 122b1 in the direction of the arrow R6 of the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122 in which the game ball S10 is received is recessed 122b1 of the first driven body 122. And the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123. On the other hand, the game ball S6 received between the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 passes through the game ball discharge passage 113 and is discharged from the transfer device 100. The number of game balls stored between the first follower 122 and the guide wall 131 is reduced.

  Next, from the state of FIG. 239, when the driving body 121 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R0, as shown in FIG. 240, the driving body 121 is sent out from the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) of the driving body 121 to the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122. The transferred game balls S5 and S4 cannot be pinched between the recessed portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 and the game ball transfer section 151, and the weight of the game balls S5 and S4 passes through the game ball discharge passage 113 and the transfer device. Emitted from 100.

  Further, as described above, the game ball received in the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) adjacent to the recess 121b (or the recess 121c) of the driving body 121 in the direction of the arrow R5 in which the discharged game ball S4 is received. S <b> 3 is received between the recess 121 b 1 (or the recess 121 c 1) of the driving body 121 and the recess 122 b 1 of the first driven body 122.

  Accordingly, the rotational force of the driving body 121 is applied to the first driven body 122 by using the game balls S4 and S3 received between the recessed portion 121b1 (or the recessed portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the recessed portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 as a medium. The first driven body 122 is transmitted by the rotation of the driving body 121 and rotates in the direction of the arrow R1.

  Further, the second driven body 123, the third driven body 124, and the fourth driven body 125 rotate in the directions of arrows R2, R3, and R4, respectively, and the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 face the discharge port 110b. The game balls S18 and S17 received in the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 are discharged to the upper plate 16 from the discharge port 110b.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R1, and the game balls S9 and S8 are sent out from the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122, and the second follower 123 The game ball S7 received in the concave portion 122b1 adjacent to the concave portion 122b1 in the direction of the arrow R6 of the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 in which the gaming ball S8 has been received is transferred to the first driven member 122. It is received between the concave portion 122b1 and the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123. On the other hand, the game balls S5 and S4 received between the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 are discharged from the transfer device 100 through the game ball discharge passage 113. Therefore, the number of game balls stored between the first driven body 122 and the guide wall 131 decreases.

  Next, when the driving body 121 further rotates in the direction of the arrow R0 from the state of FIG. 240, as shown in FIG. 241, the driving body 121 is sent out from the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 to the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122. The transferred game ball S3 cannot be pinched between the recessed portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 and the game ball transfer section 151, and the weight of the game ball S3 passes through the game ball discharge passage 113 and from the transfer device 100. Is discharged.

  Further, as described above, the game ball received in the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) adjacent to the concave portion 121b (or the concave portion 121c) of the driving body 121 in the direction of the arrow R5 in which the discharged game ball S3 is received. S <b> 2 is received between the recess 121 b 1 (or the recess 121 c 1) of the driving body 121 and the recess 122 b 1 of the first driven body 122.

  Therefore, the rotational force of the driving body 121 is transmitted to the first driven body 122 using the game ball S2 received between the recessed part 121b1 (or the recessed part 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the recessed part 122b1 of the first driven body 122 as a medium. The first driven member 122 is driven by the rotation of the driving member 121 and rotates in the direction of the arrow R1.

  Further, the second driven body 123, the third driven body 124, and the fourth driven body 125 rotate in the directions of arrows R2, R3, and R4, respectively, and the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 face the discharge port 110b. The game balls S16 received in the concave portions 125b1 and 125c1 of the fourth driven body 125 are discharged from the discharge port 110b to the upper plate 16.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of arrow R1, and the game ball S7 is sent out from the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122, and the recess of the second follower 123. Although there is no game ball in the concave portion 122b1 adjacent to the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven member 122 in the direction of the arrow R6 where the game ball S7 has been received, the concave portion of the first driven member 122 There is no game ball received between 122b1 and recessed portions 123b1 and 123c1 of second driven body 123. Therefore, the second follower 123 is not driven by the rotation of the first follower 122 and cannot rotate in the direction of arrow R2. Therefore, due to the weight of the game balls S8 to S15, the second driven body 123, the third driven body 124, and the fourth driven body 125 rotate in the directions of the arrow R7, the arrow R8, and the arrow R9, respectively, and the game ball S7 becomes the first ball again. It is received between the concave portion 122b1 of the driven member 122 and the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven member 123.

  On the other hand, the rotational force of the driver 121 is transmitted to the first driven member 122 using the game ball S2 received between the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driver 121 and the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven member 122 as a medium. Since the first follower 122 is rotated by the rotation of the driver 121 and rotates in the direction of the arrow R1, the game ball S7 is positioned between the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 and the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second follower 123. Continue to be accepted.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 242, the last game ball S1 captured from the intake port 110a is sent out from the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and delivered to the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122. Cannot be pinched between the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122 and the game ball transport portion 151, and is discharged from the transport device 100 through the game ball discharge passage 113 by its weight.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the last game ball S1 is sent out from the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the driving body 121 and delivered to the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122, the driving is performed. There is no game ball received between the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) of the body 121 and the concave portion 122b1 of the first driven body 122. Therefore, the first driven body 122 is not driven by the rotation of the driving body 121 and cannot rotate in the direction of the arrow R1. Therefore, the first follower 122, the second follower 123, the third follower 124, and the fourth follower 125 rotate in the directions of arrow R6, arrow R7, arrow R8, and arrow R9, respectively, due to the weight of the game balls S7 to S15. Then, the game ball S7 is lowered (in the direction of arrow D) until it is received between the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122. The game balls S8 to S15 also fall downward similarly to the game ball S7, and, in order from the game ball S8, the first follower 122 in the direction of the arrow R1 of the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 in which the game ball S7 is received. The adjacent recesses 122b1 and 122c1 are adjacent to the recesses 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123 in which the game ball S10 is received, and the recesses 122b1 and 122c1 and the third driven body 124 are adjacent to each other. The ball S13 is received in the concave portion 124b1 adjacent to the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven body 124 in the arrow R3 direction.

  Next, when the driving body 121 further rotates in the R0 direction from the state of FIG. 242, as shown in FIG. 243, the gap between the recess 121 b 1 (or the recess 121 c 1) of the driving body 121 and the recess 122 b 1 of the first driven body 122. The received game ball S7 is discharged from the transfer device 100 through the game ball discharge passage 113. Again, there is no game ball received between the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1) of the driving body 121 and the recess 122b1 of the first driven body 122, and the first driven body 122 is driven by the rotation of the driving body 121. And cannot rotate in the direction of arrow R1. Therefore, the first follower 122, the second follower 123, and the third follower 124 rotate in the directions of arrows R6, R7, and R8, respectively, due to the weights of the game balls S8 to S15, and the game ball S8 is driven by the driver 121. Of the first follower 122 and the recess 121b1 (or the recess 121c1). The game balls S9 to S15 also fall downward similarly to the game ball S8, and in the order from the game ball S9, the first follower 122 in the direction of the arrow R1 of the recess 122b1 of the first follower 122 in which the game ball S8 is received. As for the adjacent recesses 122b1 and the second driven body 123, the recesses 122b1 and 122c1 and the third driven body 124 that are adjacent in the arrow R2 direction of the recessed parts 123b1 and 123c1 of the second driven body 123 in which the game ball S11 is received. The ball S14 is received in the concave portion 124b1 adjacent to the concave portion 124b1 of the third driven body 124 in the arrow R3 direction.

  By repeating the above operation, all the game balls stored in the transfer device 100 can be discharged.

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, since the transport device 100 includes the regulating member 140 and the opening / closing member 150, when the regulating member 140 and the opening / closing portion 150 are arranged at the position of the game ball transport state, Game balls can be transported. On the other hand, when the regulating member 140 and the opening / closing unit 150 are disposed at the positions of the game ball discharging state, the driven members 122 to 125 rotate in the directions of arrows R6, R7, R8, and R9, respectively, due to the weight of the game balls. Then, the game balls can be discharged from the transport device 100. Therefore, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 10 can be shipped from a factory or moved to a store while the gaming balls are pulled out from the transport device 100.

  Further, since the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is disposed on the opposite side (in the direction of the arrow F) of the drive body 121 from the intake port 110a, the game ball to be discharged (the first driven body 122) It is not necessary to pass the game ball held by the fourth driven body 125 through the driving body 121 to the intake port 110a side (the direction of the arrow B). That is, in order to discharge the game ball, it is not necessary to rotate the driving body 121 in the direction of the arrow R5 or to stop driving the driving body 121.

  Further, as described above, one end (the direction of the arrow B) of the game ball transport portion 151 of the opening / closing member 150 intersects the rotation locus of the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121 and rotates at the lowest portion of the concave portions 121b1 and 121c1. Since the driving body 121 is extended until reaching the trajectory, the rotation of the driving body 121 in the direction of the arrow R <b> 0 causes both the game balls taken in from the intake port 110 a and the game balls stored in the transport device 100 to be all. It can be discharged from the transfer device 100.

  Further, since the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is interposed between the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121, the game ball transporting section 151 of the opening / closing member 150 is connected to the recesses 121b1 and 121c1 of the driving body 121. Can be achieved with a simple configuration.

  Further, since the opening / closing member 150 rotates in the direction of the arrow R0 with the rotation axis C0 as the rotation axis, the game ball transporting unit 151 is closer to the driving body 121 side (the direction of the arrow B) closer to the rotation axis C0. The displacement on the side of the first guide wall 131 (the side in the direction of arrow F), which is on the far side, increases. Therefore, a space for the game balls to move to the discharge passage 113 can be quickly secured. In addition, by the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R1, the game ball is moved from between the first driven body 122 and the game ball transport unit 151 to between the first driven body 122 and the first guide wall 131. Can be suppressed.

  When the game balls are conveyed to the supply passage 16a, it is necessary to wait for the game balls to be collected in the collection passage 43a and taken into the transfer device 100 again, and it takes time to perform the operation. Further, the game balls conveyed to the supply passage 16a cannot be collected in the collection passage 43a (ie, are not taken into the conveyance device 100) unless fired by the firing device 50, so that the operation of the opening / closing member 150 can be performed. In addition, an operation for operating the firing device 50 is required, and the burden on the operator increases.

  Further, by operating the switching operation section 161 of the transmission means 160, the regulating member 140 and the opening / closing section 150 can be simultaneously placed in the game ball transfer state or the game ball discharge state. It is possible to achieve both improvement in workability at the time of extraction and reliable display of the function of the regulating member 140.

  In addition, since the housing members 111a and 111b of the housing 110 are made of a colorless and transparent rigid resin molded product, when the game balls stored in the transfer device 100 are discharged by the above-described discharging operation, the worker is required to transfer the game balls. The remaining amount of the game balls in the device 100 can be visually checked from the outside.

  Further, the switching operation section 161 of the transmission means 160 is disposed at the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b, and is restricted from moving upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 150 from rotating in the directions of the arrows R0 and R5 about the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation due to the weight of the game ball or the weight of the game ball.

  Next, referring to FIG. 244, in a state in which the game balls in the transporting device 100 are being discharged, in order to stop the discharge of the game balls, the regulating member 140 when switching from the game ball discharge state to the game ball transport state, the opening / closing member The operation of the transmission means 160 and 150 will be described. FIG. 244 is a front view of the internal structure of the transport device 100 as viewed in the direction of arrow A in FIG. 211. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 244 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 100, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 244, for example, in a state where the game ball is lowered (in the direction of arrow D) and no game ball is present in the third driven body 124, an attempt is made to switch from the game ball discharge state to the game ball transport state. When the operator moves the switching operation unit 161 of the transmission unit 160 from the left ends 172a1 and 172b1 of the front and rear passages 172a and 172b of the switching passage 170, the contact between the switching operation unit 161 and the release state holding unit 142 of the regulating member 140 is stopped. The release is released, and the regulating member 140 moves from the second position to the first position.

  With the movement of the regulating member 140 from the second position to the first position, the regulating member 140 regulates the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R6. The subsequent delivery of the game ball to the concave portion 121b1 (or the concave portion 121c1) is suppressed.

  Further, as described above, in any state in which the switching operation unit 161 moves in the front and rear passages 172a and 172b of the switching passage 170, the lower end of the first guide wall 131 (in the direction of the arrow D) and the game ball transporting unit 151 The opening / closing member 150 and the transmission means 160 are disposed so that the distance D3 between the opening and closing members 150 and the transmission means 160 is larger than the diameter of the game ball of a predetermined size (for example, 11 mm in diameter). The game ball S10 received between the recessed part 122b1 of the one driven body 122 and the driving body 121 rotates in the direction of the arrow R0, and is discharged from the transfer device 100 through the game ball discharge passage 113. That is, it is possible to suppress a game ball from being caught between the guide wall 131 and the game ball transport unit 151.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 245 and FIG. 246, a description will be given of the transport device 200 according to the eighteenth embodiment. The same parts as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 245 is an exploded perspective view of the transport device 200 according to the eighteenth embodiment. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 245 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 200, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 245, the shape of the driving body 221 housed inside the transfer device 200 in the eighteenth embodiment is the same as one side (for example, the blade part) of the pair of blades 121b and 121c of the driving body 121 in the first embodiment. 121b), and is located at the center in the width direction (the directions of the arrows L and R).

  The first to fourth followers 222 to 225 have the same shape as the first follower 222 and the third follower 224, and the second follower 223 and the fourth follower 225, respectively. The first follower 222 and the second follower 223 in the eighteenth embodiment have the same shape as the second follower 123 and the first follower 122 in the first embodiment, respectively.

  The guide wall of the transport passage W2 in the eighteenth embodiment is formed in a shape corresponding to the guide wall facing each driven body in the first embodiment.

  In the transport apparatus 100 according to the first embodiment, the driving body 121, the second driven body 123, and the fourth driven body 125 each include a pair of blades 121b, 121c, 123b, 123c and 125b, 125c. The blade 122b of the first driven member 122 is interposed between the pair of blades 121b, 121c of the second driven member 123 and the pair of blades 123b, 123c of the second driven member 123, and the pair of blades 123b of the second driven member 123 is disposed. , 123c and a pair of blade portions 125b, 125c of the fourth driven body 125, the members 121 to 125 of the rotating body 120 are arranged at positions where the blade portions 124b of the third driven body 124 are interposed. However, in the transfer device 200 according to the eighteenth embodiment, the driving body 221 is disposed between the pair of blade portions 222 b and 222 c of the first driven body 222. The blade part 221b is inserted, and the blade part 223b of the second driven body 223 is interposed between the pair of blade parts 222b, 222c of the first driven body 222 and the pair of blade parts 224b, 224c of the third driven body 224. The members 221 to 225 of the rotating body 220 are disposed at positions where the blades 225b of the fourth driven body 225 are inserted between the pair of blades 224b and 224c of the third driven body 224 facing each other.

  Next, an opening / closing member 250 according to the eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 (a) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 250, FIG. 246 (b) is a front view of the opening / closing member 250 as viewed in the rotation axis C0 direction, and FIG. 246 (c) is a view in the rotation axis C0 direction. It is a bottom view of the opening / closing member 250 in FIG. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 246 (a), 246 (b), and 246 (c) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the opening / closing member 250, respectively. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (a), the opening / closing member 250 includes cylindrical shaft portions 250a, 255a having a shaft hole and an arc-shaped game ball guide surface 251a identical to the first guide wall 231 (see FIG. 245). , 256a, and the connecting portions 252, 253, 257, 258 for connecting the shaft portions 250a, 255a and the game ball transferring portions 251, 256, and the game ball transferring portions 251, 256. And a connecting portion 259.

  The shaft portion 250a includes a convex portion 250a1 and a concave portion 250a2 which are arranged at positions where they are engaged with the convex portion 160a1 and the concave portion 160a2 (see FIG. 220 (a)) of the shaft portion 160a of the transmission means 160. Further, the game ball transfer units 251 and 256 are provided with a notch at the end on the first guide wall 231 (see FIG. 245) side (the arrow F direction side), and the notch length of the notch is One guide wall 231 is arranged to have the same thickness. Therefore, when the opening / closing member 250 is adjacent to the lower end of the first guide wall 231 (in the direction of arrow D) to transport the game ball, the opening / closing member 250 is cut to a position where it comes into contact with the back surface (not shown) of the first guide wall 231. The notched surfaces 251c and 256c are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (b), the game ball guide surfaces 251a and 256a are formed in the same arc shape as the first guide wall 231, and the game ball transfer units 251 and 256 transfer the game balls by the first guide wall. In a state where the game ball is arranged at a position adjacent to 231, it becomes a part of the configuration of the transport path W <b> 2, and the game ball rolls on the game ball guide surfaces 251 a and 256 a. On the other hand, when the game ball is disposed at a position rotated by a certain angle in the direction of arrow R0 with the rotation axis C0 as the rotation axis for discharging the game ball, a part of the game ball discharge passage 113 is formed, and the game ball guide surface 251a, 256a is a side wall.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), the game ball transfer section 251 and the connection sections 252 and 253, and the game ball transfer section 256 and the connection sections 257 and 258 are arranged in a row in the directions of arrows F and B, respectively, and are driven. The blade portion 221b of the body 221 is inserted between the open / close member 250 and a pair of the game ball transport portions 251 and 256.

  Further, the shaft portion 221a of the driving body 221 is inserted into the shaft hole 250a3 of the shaft portion 250a of the opening / closing member 250 and the shaft hole 255a3 of the shaft portion 255a, and the shaft portion 250a and the shaft portion 255a of the opening / closing member 250 It is rotatably supported by the shaft 221a. Therefore, the axis of the shaft 221a of the driving body 221 and the axis of the shaft 250a and the shaft 255a of the opening / closing member 250 match, and the opening / closing member 250 uses the axis of the shaft 250a and the shaft 255a as the rotation axis C0. Rotate.

  Further, as described above, by the engagement between the shaft 250a of the opening / closing member 250 and the shaft 160a of the transmitting means 160, the rotational force of the transmitting means 160 is applied to the opening / closing member 250, and the operator operates the transmitting means 160. By doing so, the opening / closing member 250 can rotate in the arrow R0 direction or the arrow R5 direction using the rotation axis C0 as the rotation axis.

  When the transport device 200 configured as described above is provided, a part of the driving body 221 is interposed between the pair of game ball transport units 251 and 256 of the opening and closing member 250 so that the opening and closing member 250 is driven. Of the concave portion 221b1 can be achieved with a simple configuration. Further, since the driving body 221 transfers the game balls to the first driven body 222 in a single row, the width of the opening of the intake port 110a can be made slightly larger than the diameter of the game balls. The width of the intake 110a can be reduced.

  Next, the transport device 300 according to the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 247 is an exploded perspective view of the transport device 300 according to the nineteenth embodiment. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 247 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 300, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 247, the housing members 311a and 311b of the transport device 300 include a holding member 314 for holding the position of the opening / closing member 350, and a regulating member operation unit that switches the regulating member 140 to the first position or the second position. 315. The holding member 314 is disposed on the housing member 311b so as to be movable only in the direction of the rotation axis C0 (the directions of the arrows R and L). The restricting member operation section 315 is disposed on the housing member 311a so as to be movable only in the vertical direction (the directions of arrows U and D).

  The restricting member operation section 315 includes a hemispherical convex section 315a (see FIG. 250) projecting from an outer surface on a side facing the housing member 311a. The housing member 311a is provided with two concave portions having a size corresponding to the protrusion 316a, and the protrusion 316a is engaged (accepted) by being engaged with one of the two concave portions. The vertical position of the regulating member operation unit 315 is positioned.

  Next, an opening / closing member 350 according to the nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 248 (a) is a perspective view of the opening / closing member 350, FIG. 248 (b) is a front view of the opening / closing member 350 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0, and FIG. 248 (c) is a view in the direction of the rotation axis C0. It is a bottom view of the opening / closing member 350 in FIG. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 248 (a), 248 (b), and 248 (c) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the opening / closing member 350, respectively. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 248 (a), the opening / closing member 350 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 350a having a shaft hole, and a game ball transporting portion 151 having the same arc-shaped game ball guiding surface 151a as the first guide wall 131. Connecting portions 152 and 153 connecting the shaft portion 150a and the game ball transporting portion 151; and a quadrangular prism-shaped opening / closing operation portion 354 connected to the shaft portion 350a and extending downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the shaft portion 350a. And

  Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the arrangement of the opening / closing member 350 in the game ball transport state and the game ball discharge state in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 249 (a) is a front view of the opening / closing member 350 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0 in a game ball transport state, and FIG. 249 (b) is an opening / closing member 350 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0 in a game ball discharging state. FIG. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 249 (a) and 249 (b) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the opening / closing member 350, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (a), in the game ball transport state, the rear side of the opening / closing operation section 354 (arrow B direction side) and the front side of the holding member 314 (arrow F direction side) come into contact with each other. Since the notch surface 151c of the ball transfer unit 151 and the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131 are in contact with each other, the open / close operation unit 354 is sandwiched between the holding member 314 and the back surface 131a of the first guide wall 131, and the open / close operation unit 354 The position is fixed.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing member 350 from rotating in the direction of the arrow R0 or R6 around the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation due to the weight of the game ball or the weight of the game ball. It can be kept in a state where it is arranged at a position without a step with the game ball guide surface 151a.

  Here, the switching of the opening / closing member 350 between the game ball transfer state and the game ball discharge state is performed by moving the holding member 314 toward the drive motor 130 (in the direction of the arrow L) and rotating the rotation axis C0 around the rotation axis C0 or the arrow R0. The rotation is performed in the direction of arrow R6, and the holding member 314 is returned to the original position again.

  When the worker moves the holding member 314 toward the drive motor 130 (in the direction of the arrow L) from the state of FIG. 249 (a), the opening / closing operation unit 354 does not contact the holding member 314, and the opening / closing member 350 rotates. It is possible to rotate in the direction of the arrow R0 about the axis C0 as the center of rotation. When the operator operates the opening / closing operation unit 354 and rotates the opening / closing member 350 in the direction of the arrow R0 about the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation, the opening / closing operation unit 354 contacts the lower parts 311a1 and 311b1 of the housing members 311a and 311b. As shown in FIG. 249 (b), the opening / closing member 350 is in a game ball discharging state.

  When the opening / closing operation section 354 and the lower portions 311a1 and 311b1 of the housing members 311a and 311b are in contact with each other, the front side of the opening / closing operation section 354 (arrow F direction side) and the rear side of the holding member 314 (arrow B direction side). When the holding member 314 is disposed so as to abut the opening / closing operation portion 354, the opening / closing operation portion 354 is sandwiched between the holding member 314 and the lower portions 311a1 and 311b1 of the housing members 311a and 311b, and the position of the opening / closing operation portion 354 is fixed.

  Therefore, the rotation of the opening / closing member 350 in the direction of the arrow R0 or R6 about the rotation axis C0 as the center of rotation due to the weight of the opening / closing member 350 can be suppressed. The arrow F direction side) is disposed at a position adjacent to the upper end (the arrow U direction side) of the side wall 113a of the game ball discharge passage 113, and the game ball transport unit 151 may form a part of the game ball discharge passage 113. it can.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 250, the arrangement of the regulating member operation unit 315 and the regulating member 140 in the nineteenth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 250 (a) is a front view of the regulating member operation unit 315 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0 in the game ball transfer state, and FIG. 250 (b) is a regulation as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0 in the game ball discharging state. It is a front view of the member operation part 315. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 250A and 250B indicate the vertical direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the regulating member operation unit 315, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (a), in the game ball transfer state, the convex portion 315a of the regulating member operation portion 315 is one of two concave portions (not shown) formed in the housing member 311a. It is engaged in the recess.

  Here, a predetermined gap is formed between the regulating member 140 and the upper surface 315b of the regulating member operation section 315, and they are arranged at positions where they do not contact each other. Therefore, the regulating member 140 is disposed at the first position.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, switching between the game ball transport state and the game ball discharge state of the regulating member 140 is performed by moving the regulating member operation section 315 in the up-down direction (arrows U and D directions).

  When the worker moves the regulating member operating section 315 upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the state of FIG. 250 (a), the upper surface 315b of the regulating member operating section 315 and the inclined portion of the release state holding section 142 of the regulating member 140 142a contacts. Further, when the operator moves the regulating member operating portion 315 upward (in the direction of the arrow U), the regulating member operating portion is inserted into the other of the two concave portions (not shown) formed in the housing member 311a. The projection 315a of the 315 is engaged, and the regulating member 140 is rotated in the direction of the arrow R10 about the rotation axis C5 as a center of rotation. As shown in FIG. 250 (b), the regulating member 140 is disposed at the second position. , The game ball is discharged.

  According to the transport device 300 configured as described above, the structure for forming the game ball transport state and the game ball discharge state can be achieved with a simple configuration. Further, in order to switch from the game ball discharging state to the game ball transporting state, only the opening / closing member 350 is operated, the operation of the restricting member operation unit 315 is forgotten, and even if the restricting member 140 is disposed at the second position, the first follower is operated. Since rotation of 122 in the R1 direction is allowed, a game ball can be transported.

  Next, a transport device 400 according to a twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 251 is an exploded perspective view of the transport device 400 according to the twentieth embodiment. The arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 251 indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 400, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 251, the housing members 411 a and 411 b of the transport device 400 include a posture holding part 417 for holding the posture of the regulating member 440 and a regulating member moving passage for guiding the movement of the shaft 140 a of the regulating member 440. 418a and 418b.

  The regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b are for guiding the movement of the shaft 140a of the regulating member 440 described later (regulating the moving direction), and the regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b are formed in the same shape. And placed facing each other. The width of these regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft 140a of the regulating member 440, and the shaft 140a of the regulating member 440 extends the regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b. It is slidable along the setting direction. The lower ends 418a1 and 418b1 and the upper ends 418a2 and 418b2 of the regulating member movement passages 418a and 418b have horizontal surfaces projecting toward the first driven body 122 (arrow F direction side).

  The posture holding portion 417 is formed so as to protrude from the housing member 411a toward the housing member 411b (in the direction of the arrow L). In addition, the lower surface 417a of the posture holding portion 417 is located at the center of the upper ends 418a2, 418b2 of the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b by a distance equal to the distance from the shaft portion 140a of the regulating member 440 to the back surface 443a of the main body 443 of the regulating member 440. From above (in the direction of arrow U).

  Next, a regulating member 440 according to the twentieth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 252 (a) is a perspective view of the regulating member 440, FIG. 252 (b) is a front view of the regulating member 440 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C5, and FIG. 252 (c) is a view in the direction of the rotation axis C0. FIG. 10 is a side view of the regulating member 440 in FIG. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 252 (a), 252 (b), and 252 (c) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the regulating member 440, respectively. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (a), the regulating member 440 includes a rotation regulating portion 141, a main body 443, a regulation setting member 444, a hinge 445, and a shaft 140a. The regulating member 440 includes the shaft portion 140a slidably and rotatably contained in the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b of the housing 410 (housing members 411a, 411b) (see FIG. 251), and adjusts the axis of the shaft portion 140a. The regulating member 440 rotates as the rotation axis C5. The upper surface 443b of the main body member 443 is in contact with the lower surface 444b of the restriction setting member 444, and the main body member 443 is hinged to the upper end (the direction of the arrow U) opposite to the rotation restriction portion 141 (the direction of the arrow B) with the shaft portion 140a interposed therebetween. 445. The regulation setting member 444 has one end fixed to the hinge 445, protrudes toward the first driven body 122 (arrow F direction side), is formed with a tip inclined upward (arrow U direction), and has an axial center of the hinge 445. Is rotated as a rotation axis C40.

  Further, in the regulating member 440, the shaft portion 140a is disposed above the center of gravity of the regulating member 440 (direction of arrow U) with respect to the vertical direction (directions of arrows U and D). Therefore, in a state where the regulating member 440 is rotatably supported by the housing 410 (housing members 411a and 411b) (see FIG. 251), if no force is applied to the regulating member 440 from the outside, the regulating member 440 becomes The rotation restricting portion 141 is disposed at a position below (in the direction of arrow D), that is, a first position.

  As shown in FIG. 252 (c), the thickness of the regulating member 440 is formed to be the same as the thickness of the first driven body 122. Further, the regulating member 440 is disposed so as to be inserted between the opposing second guide walls 132 formed on the housing members 111a and 111b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the arrangement of the regulating member 440 in the game ball transport state and the game ball discharge state in the twentieth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the regulating member 440 when viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C0 in the game ball transfer state, and FIGS. 253 (b) and 253 (c) show the rotation axis C0 in the game ball discharge state. FIG. 14 is a front view of the regulating member 440 as viewed in a direction. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 253 (a), 253 (b), and 253 (c) indicate a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, and a front-rear direction of the regulating member 440, respectively. I have.

  As shown in FIG. 253 (a), in the game ball transport state, the shaft 140a of the regulating member 440 is driven first by the horizontal surface of the lower ends 418a1, 418b1 (in the direction of arrow D) of the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b. The regulating member 440 is arranged on the body 122 side (the arrow F direction side), and as described above, is arranged at the first position. Accordingly, the regulating member 440 allows the first driven body 122 to rotate in the direction of the arrow R1, and regulates the rotation in the direction of the arrow R6.

  The shaft 140a of the regulating member 440 is disposed on the first driven body 122 side (arrow F direction side) of the lower ends 418a1 and 418b1 of the regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b, and moves in a direction other than the lateral direction (arrow B direction). Is regulated. As a result, the rotation of the first follower 122 in the direction of arrow R6 causes a vertical direction with respect to the contact surface between the blade portion 122b of the first follower 122 and the locking portion 141b of the rotation restricting portion 141 of the restricting member 440. The movement of the shaft 140a of the regulating member 440 can be suppressed, and the regulating member 440 can continue to regulate the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R6.

  In the twentieth embodiment, switching between the game ball transfer state and the game ball discharge state of the regulating member 440 is performed by rotating and regulating the regulating member 440 along the regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b of the housing members 411a and 411b. This is done by:

  From the state of FIG. 253 (a), the operator rotates the regulating member 440 by 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow R40 about the rotation axis C5 as the center of rotation, and moves upward along the regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b (the direction of the arrow U). Move to As described above, the distance from the shaft portion 140a of the regulating member 440 to the back surface 443a of the main body portion 443 of the regulating member 440 and the center of the upper ends 418a2, 418b2 of the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b from the lower surface 417a of the posture holding portion 417. Therefore, the back surface 443a of the main body portion 443 of the regulating member 440 and the lower surface 417a of the posture holding portion 417 are in contact with each other. By the contact between the back surface 443a of the main body 443 of the regulating member 440 and the lower surface 417a of the attitude holding portion 417, the rotation of the regulating member 440 in the direction of the arrow R41 with the axis of the shaft portion 140a as the rotation axis C5 is regulated. When the operator further moves the regulating member 440 toward the first driven body 122 (in the direction of the arrow F), the shaft 140a of the regulating member 440 is disposed at the upper ends 418a2, 418b2 of the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b. As a result, the regulating member 440 is disposed at the second position, and the game ball is discharged as shown in FIG. 253 (b).

  When the first driven member 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R6 with the discharge of the game ball, the blade portion 122b of the first driven member 122 and the lower surface 444b of the regulation setting member 444 of the regulation member 440 abut. Further, when the first driven body 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R6, the regulation setting member 444 is driven by the rotation of the first driven body 122, and rotates about the axis of the hinge 445 as the rotation axis C40 in the direction of the arrow R41. The follower 122 continues to rotate in the direction of arrow R6. Further, when the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of arrow R6, the blade portion 122b of the first follower 122 does not come into contact with the lower surface 444b of the regulation setting member 444 of the regulation member 440, and the regulating member 440 loses the rotational force. The restriction setting member 444 rotates in the direction of arrow R40 with the axis of the hinge 445 as the rotation axis C40 due to its weight, and the upper surface 443b of the main body 443 of the restriction member 440 and the lower surface 444b of the restriction setting member 444 abut. The restriction setting member 444 is locked to the main body 443. Therefore, the regulating member 440 allows the first driven body 122 to rotate in the direction of the arrow R6.

  Here, when the operator operates the opening / closing member 350 in the game ball transport state, while keeping the regulating member 440 in the state of being disposed at the second position, the first driven body 122 follows the rotation of the driving body 121. Then, as shown in FIG. 253 (c), the blade 122b of the first driven body 122 comes into contact with the upper surface 444a of the regulation setting member 444 of the regulation member 440.

  Further, when the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R1, the regulating member 440 is brought into contact with the blade portion 122b of the first follower 122 and the upper surface 444a of the regulation setting member 444 of the regulating member 440, whereby the first follower 122 is rotated. Driving force is applied from 122. The regulating member 440 to which the driving force has been applied from the first driven body 122 is guided by the shape of the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b, and moves toward the intake port 110a (in the direction of the arrow B). By the movement of the regulating member 440 toward the intake port 110a (in the direction of the arrow B), the shaft portion 140a of the regulating member 440 passes through the horizontal surfaces of the upper ends 418a2, 418b2 of the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b to reach the vertical portion. Then, the weight of the regulating member 440 causes the shaft portion 140a to move down (in the direction of arrow D) the vertical portions of the regulating member moving passages 418a and 418b. When descending (in the direction of arrow D), the shaft 140a is guided by the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b with the momentum, and the lower ends 418a1, 418b1 of the regulating member moving passages 418a, 418b. 252 reaches the first driven body 122 side (the direction of arrow F) of the horizontal surface, and as described above, the regulating member 440 is disposed at the first position, and as shown in FIG. State.

  According to the transport device 400 configured as described above, the structure for forming the game ball transport state and the game ball discharge state can be achieved with a simple configuration. In addition, in order to switch from the game ball discharging state to the game ball transport state, even if only the opening / closing member 350 is operated to the game ball transport state and the operation of the regulating member 440 to the game ball transport state is forgotten, the regulating member 440 remains in the third position. The game balls are transported in the state where they are arranged at the two positions, and as described above, the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the R1 direction is allowed, and the game balls can be transported.

  In addition, when the transport of the game ball is started, a driving force is applied from the first follower 122, and the regulating member 440 is displaced from the second position to the first position. Rotation can be regulated. Therefore, when switching from the game ball discharging state to the game ball transport state, even if the regulation member 440 is forgotten to be operated in the game ball transport state, the regulation member 440 is rotated with the rotation of the first driven member 122 in the direction of the arrow R1. It is arranged at one position, and the function of the regulating member 440 can be reliably exhibited.

  Next, a transport device 500 according to the twenty-first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the same parts as those in the above embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 254 is an exploded perspective view of the transport device 500 according to the twenty-first embodiment. Note that arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIG. 254 indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the transport device 500, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 254, the housing member 511a of the transport device 500 according to the twenty-first embodiment includes a posture holding part 517 for holding the posture of the regulating member 540.

  The posture holding section 517 is disposed below the left end 172a1 of the passage section 170a (in the direction of arrow D) so as to project from the housing member 511a toward the housing member 511b (in the direction of arrow L).

  Next, the regulating member 540 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 255 (a) is a perspective view of the regulating member 540, and FIG. 255 (b) is a front view of the regulating member 540 as viewed in the direction of the rotation axis C5. The arrows UD, LR, and FB in FIGS. 255 (a) and 255 (b) indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the regulating member 540, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 255 (a) and 255 (b), the regulating member 540 includes a rotation regulating section 541, a release state holding section 542, a main body section 143, and a cylindrical shaft section 140a having an axis. And In the regulating member 540, the shaft portion 140a is disposed below the center of gravity of the regulating member 540 (direction of arrow D) with respect to the vertical direction (directions of arrows U and D). Therefore, in a state where the shaft 140a is rotatably supported by the housing 110 (housing members 111a and 111b) (see FIG. 254), when the regulating member 540 is inclined in the direction of the arrow R10 or the direction of the arrow R11, the shaft 140a Is rotated in the direction of the arrow R10 or the direction of the arrow R11 with the axis of the rotation as the rotation axis C5. The rotation restricting portion 541 projects toward the first driven body 122 side (arrow F direction side), and becomes rounded vertically downward (arrow D direction) as it moves toward the first driven body 122 side (arrow F direction side). And a horizontal portion 541b that is horizontal with respect to the front-rear direction (arrows F and B directions). The release state holding portion 542 extends toward the opposite side (the direction of the arrow B) from the rotation restricting portion 141 with the shaft portion 140a interposed therebetween, and extends vertically upward as it advances toward the side opposite to the rotation restricting portion 141 (the direction of the arrow B). An inclined portion 142a that is rounded upward (in the direction of arrow U) and inclined upward, and a horizontal portion 542b that is a surface that is horizontal with respect to the front-rear direction (directions of arrows F and B) are provided.

  The inclined portion 541a and the horizontal portion 541b of the rotation restricting portion 541 are formed so as to protrude toward the first driven body 122 side (arrow F direction side) as described above, and abut on the blade section 122b of the first driven body 122. Arranged where possible. When the first follower 122 rotates in a direction (the direction of the arrow R1 in FIG. 213) that is driven by the rotation of the driver 121, the inclined portion 541a of the rotation restricting portion 541 contacts the blade 122b of the first follower 122. When rotating in the direction opposite to the direction of arrow R1 (the direction of arrow R6 in FIG. 213), the horizontal portion 541b of the rotation restricting portion 541 contacts the blade portion 122b of the first driven body 122.

  As described above, the inclined portion 542a of the release state holding portion 542 is formed so as to protrude toward the opposite side (the direction of the arrow B) from the rotation regulating portion 141 with the shaft portion 140a interposed therebetween, and the switching operation portion 161 of the transmission means 160 is formed. It is arranged at a position where it can abut.

  Next, referring to FIG. 256, a state in which regulating member 540 is arranged at a position regulating the rotation of first driven body 122 in the direction of arrow R6, and a state in which regulating member 540 is in the direction of arrow R6 of first driven body 122. And a state where it is arranged at a position that allows rotation of. FIG. 256 (a) is a front view in the rotation axis C5 direction showing a state where the regulating member 540 is arranged at a position regulating the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R6, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the rotation member C5 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis C5, showing a state in which the regulating member 540 is arranged at a position that allows the first driven body 122 to rotate in the direction of the arrow R6.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (a), when the rotation restricting portion 541 is disposed in a state inclined toward the first driven body 122 (arrow F side), the restricting member 540 rotates in the direction of arrow R11 due to its weight. The rear surface 143a of the main body 143 and the side surface 517a of the posture holding portion 517 are engaged with the posture holding portion 517, and the inclined portion 141a or the horizontal portion 541b of the rotation regulating portion 541 is connected to the first driven body 122. Is arranged at a position where it can abut against the blade portion 122b. As described above, when the first follower 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R1, the first follower 122 comes into contact with the inclined portion 141a of the rotation restricting portion 541, and can rotate in the direction of the arrow R1 as it is. On the other hand, when the first driven body 122 rotates in the direction of the arrow R6, the first driven body 122 comes into contact with the horizontal portion 541b of the rotation restricting portion 541. As described above, since the rotation of the regulating member 540 in the direction of the arrow R11 is restricted by the posture holding portion 517, the first driven body 122 is locked by the regulating member 540 and cannot be rotated in the direction of the arrow R6. . Therefore, even when the horizontal portion 541b of the rotation restricting portion 541 does not vertically contact the blade portion 122b of the first driven member 122, the restricting member 540 restricts the rotation of the first driven member 122 in the direction of the arrow R6. can do.

  As shown in FIG. 256 (b), when the regulating member 540 rotates in the direction of the arrow R10, and is disposed in a state where the contact between the back surface 143a of the main body 143 and the side surface 517a of the posture holding portion 517 is released. The rotation restricting portion 541 is arranged outside the rotation locus (two-dot chain line in FIG. 256 (b)) of the tip of the blade 122b of the first driven body 122. Therefore, neither the inclined portion 141a nor the horizontal portion 541b of the rotation restricting portion 541 comes into contact with the blade portion 122b of the first driven member 122, and the first driven member 122 rotates in both the arrow R1 direction and the arrow R6 direction. can do.

  When the transport device 500 configured as described above is provided, the horizontal portion 541b of the rotation restricting portion 541 does not need to vertically contact the blade portion 122b of the first driven body 122. The portion 541b can be formed in a simple shape, and the regulating member 540 can be disposed at an angle. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the arrangement position and the shape of the regulating member 540 can be ensured. Further, by changing the arrangement of the regulating member 540 and the posture holding portion 517, the first driven body 122 can be regulated at an arbitrary position.

  As described above, the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is easily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred.

  In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pushed down is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be the initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force for returning the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 315 can be eliminated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 has moved to the pushing end has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and the change in the load can be used for the effect (for example, an effect of “button that cannot be pushed” can be performed. it can).

  In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (the end of the overhang operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap occurs between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. And the lower frame member 320 are preferably arranged. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the generation of the impact sound of the collision with the lower frame member 320 during the operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 is overhanging in advance, and to notice that the state of the “button that cannot be pushed” is not obtained until the tilting device 310 is pushed. it can.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connection pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344c may be formed of a separate member and may be configured to rotate relative to the disk cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connecting pin 344d in a state where the first overhanging portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d are in contact with each other can be changed, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated forward in this state. Immediately after changing the attitude of the rotary claw member 347, the degree of ascending of the tilting device 310 can be changed. Therefore, the operating state of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed more than in the first embodiment.

  In addition, the operation state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched by the driving mode in which the disc cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward rotation direction (the ascending end can be sequentially switched). Thus, it is possible to perform an effect in a complicated operation mode in which the ascending position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing the deterioration of the driving motor 342 by operating the driving motor 342 in one direction.

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described where the operation timing of the voice coil motor 352 that applies the driving force to the tilting device 310 is controlled by the operating speed and the direction of the operation of the tilting device 310, but is not necessarily limited to this. Not something. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of the operation. For example, the drive motor 5411 is fixed in a posture in which the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is located above the rotation axis until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (during the downward movement), and the tilting device 310 pushes in. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started immediately before reaching the end and immediately before moving upward. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is continuously pressed, the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be reduced, while the repulsive force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of the upward movement of the tilting device 310 can be increased. .

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the housing member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the housing member 5430 may be fixed to the tilting device 310, and the vibration device 5400 may be operated inside the housing member 5430. When the housing member 5430 is fixed to the tilting device 310, for example, the convex leg 5424 is arranged on the side facing the bottom plate portion 5321, and when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end, the convex leg The configuration in which the portion 5424 is pressed against the bottom plate portion 5321 changes the shape of the flexible member 5420 in the vibration device 5400, and switches whether or not the weight member 5412 can contact the housing member 5430. good.

  In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the housing member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. Since the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed when the tilting device 310 is operated, by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more, the flexible member 5420 is operated. Can be increased, and a state in which the weight member 5412 contacts the housing member 5430 can be formed. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at a high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. Can increase the variation of the production.

  For example, when the player operates the tilting device 310, a message such as "press a button" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "press a button. By performing a display such as "Large chance.", It is possible to give the player an effect of designating how to press the button (tilting device 310). In this case, whether or not the player has pressed the button (tilting device 310) with the specified pressing method is set as a condition for transmitting vibration to the player, so that the button (tilting device 310) is pressed with the specified pressing method. The player's willingness to perform the operation can be increased, and the operation of the button (tilting device 310) can be prevented from being monotonous.

  The degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 may be inverted from the degree of the pushing speed of the tilting device 310 in magnitude. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be increased, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be formed in such a manner that they can contact each other. In this case, the low pushing speed of the tilting device 310 can be a condition that the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 is transmitted to the player, and the player is encouraged to reduce the pushing speed of the tilting device 310. can do. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the player from pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force, and it is possible to prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 with brute force.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibrating device 5400 is arranged to be able to abut on the housing member 5430 when the tilting device 310 is not pushed in, the weight member is provided on condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed in to the end of movement. 5412 may be formed in such a manner that it can be arranged so as not to be in contact with accommodation member 5430. In this case, while the tilting device 310 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be lively, but the player can change the effect mode (expectation) by stopping the vibration at the time of pushing in such a way that the surroundings are less noticeable. Difference), it is possible to produce a premier feeling that only the player playing this machine, except for the surrounding players, can feel the change in the production mode. it can.

  In addition, as a variation of the effect, when the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 are placed in a position where the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 cannot be brought into contact with each other when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 continue. It is desired to cause both of these cases to be able to be brought into contact with each other, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, two different cases can be caused by a difference in the rotation direction of the weight member 5412.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the disc cam 5344 is axially deformed and the disc cam 5344 comes into contact with the release member 346 to generate a frictional force has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is drilled partially projects in the direction approaching the disk cam 5344, and is configured to abut when the disk cam 5344 is axially deformed. May be. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not a movable portion, a large frictional force is generated between the disk cam 5344 and the disk cam 5344 as compared with the case where the disk cam 5344 abuts on the operable release member 346. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which both of the board surface support devices 600 arranged above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the upper or lower panel support device 600 may be configured to be able to contact the front frame 14. For example, at the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the board supporting device 600 may be chamfered so as not to come into contact with the board supporting device 600 arranged at the upper position.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change when the game board 13 is attached to the board support device 600 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support bottom portion 12c that supports the lower end surface of the game board 13 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side, and the front end portion is the rear side extension plate of the board surface support device 600 in the released state. 621c may be arranged below the upper surface. In this case, when the game board 13 is put on the board support device 600 in the released state, the game board 13 is supported by the rear-side extension plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board support device 600 therefrom, 13 can ride on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 is placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be reduced as compared with the height at which the game board 13 is fixed. Efficiency can be improved.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the foul ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends left and right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be bent back and forth, or may be a combination of bent back and forth and left and right. In this case, it is preferable to form a long path before and after the ball guide opening 53 because the ball can be discharged smoothly. In addition, since the range of the foul ball passage 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by making the path bend back and forth, it is possible to prevent the launch path from interfering with the foul ball passage 145. Can be made easier.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so that the position facing the opening 524 becomes a concave surface is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the position facing the opening 524 may be a convex surface. In this case, light reaching the player through the opening 524 is viewed faintly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not need to bend vertically, and for example, a curved portion and a straightly extending portion may be mixed in the vertical position.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the path that bends up and down is formed by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of up, down, left, and right.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary projection 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi are separated from each other by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the speaker connection line 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, and the speaker connection line 453 is pulled out of the speaker assembly 450 by the resistance of the sandwiching. It is possible to prevent the speaker connection line 453 from coming off the speaker 451 even when the load is applied.

  The auxiliary protrusion 481Ha contacts the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the thickness direction within a range of a protrusion length corresponding to the depth of the wiring passage recess 464, and further protrudes therefrom. In the range of the length, a step may be provided in the middle so as to be separated from the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H by the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction. In this case, the range in which the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H form a double wall is sufficiently ensured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

  In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the speaker assembly 450 constitutes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base body 461B and the tip body 461T correspond to the speaker room, and the intermediate body 461M corresponds to the duct. Has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by expanding the width of the intermediate main body 461M in the front-rear direction to be equal to that of the proximal main body 461B and the distal main body 461T, the base main body 461B, the intermediate main body 461M, and the distal main body 461T can be shared. May form a large speaker room.

  In addition, the description has been made assuming that the base-side main body portion 461B has a larger volume than the distal-side main body portion 461T, but the magnitude relationship may be reversed or the same volume may be used. The arrangement of the speaker 451 is not limited to the left and right ends, but may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be the position between the left and right ends and the center in the left and right direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, of the rib portions 467a to 467e and 487a to 487e constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487, the adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the base body portion 461B and the tip body portion 461T are connected to each other). Although the case where they do not overlap in the direction of connection and the direction intersecting with the opening direction of the opening formed by the front recessed portion 471 and the rear recessed portion 491 has been described, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rib portions adjacent to each other (for example, the rib portions 467d and 467c) may be configured to overlap each other when viewed in the left-right direction. In this case, since the path inside the speaker assembly 450 can be bent in a maze, for example, a thin metal wire such as a piano wire is inserted through an opening formed by the front recess 471 and the rear recess 491, and By making it more difficult to perform an illegal act that causes the tip to enter the game area and prolonging the time required for the illegal act, it is possible to suppress the illegal act. Here, examples of suppression of fraudulent acts include suppression of fraudulent acts themselves, suppression of gaining fraudulent profits by fraudulent acts (successful fraudulent acts), and the like.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, the case where the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 may be configured to mesh with the second gear 830G of the rotating plate 830 and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. In this case, since the rotating plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be linked with each other, the loose fitting device 880 is rotated not only during the rotation operation of the petal operation device 800 but also during the expanding operation and the assembling operation. Can be done. Accordingly, the sliding operation of the petal 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be performed simultaneously, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

  Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 expands and contracts with the rotation thereof or a configuration in which the rotation plate 830 rotates about an axis different from the rotation axis may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 operates by transmitting the driving force via the slide plate 930 that slides by the operation of the drive-side arm member 910 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, the upper part of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 is connected to the tip of the second effecting member 940 so that the second effecting member 940 operates based on the displacement of the petal operating device 800. May be. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case where the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing control unit 159 when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state will be described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board surface support device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation unit rear member 155 and the game board 13 are configured to abut against each other in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing control unit 159. Is also good. In this case, even if the lower board supporting device 600 is fixed, but the upper board supporting device 600 is not fixed, the upper end of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side (game As the right side of the board 13 tilts to the front side), the portion of the game board 13 disposed to face the operation unit back member 155 is also displaced to the front side, so that the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 interfere. be able to. Thus, it is possible to prevent the front frame 14 from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

  In this case, when the game board 13 is installed on the inner frame 12 and the board supporting device 600 arranged below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board supporting device arranged above the inner frame 12 is fixed. Whether or not 600 is in a fixed state is determined based on the relationship between the operation unit back member 155 and the game board 13 which are arranged to face the lower board support device 600, and the board arranged above the inner frame 12. When the support device 600 is not in the fixed state, it is possible to restrict the front frame 14 from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. This makes it possible to remove the function of determining the state of the board supporting device 600 installed above the inner frame 12 from the multifunctional cover member 171, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the multifunctional cover member 171. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 may be configured to be recessed (chamfered) to a position where the multifunctional cover member 171 does not come into contact with the board surface support device 600 regardless of the state of the board surface support device 600. In this case, since the multifunctional cover member 171 made of a synthetic resin collides with the metal board support device 600, the risk of the multifunctional cover member 171 being damaged can be reduced. Can be used for a long time in other uses (for example, use as a wiring cover).

  In the above-described eighth embodiment, a case will be described in which the right panel unit 500 in which light applied to the end face of the light guide member 540 is emitted from both sides of the light guide member 540 is disposed on the right end and front side of the front frame 14. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be arranged inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, the right panel unit 500 is configured to be switchable between a state where one surface is arranged on the front side and a case where the other surface is arranged on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate portion 510). The configuration in which the right panel unit 500 rotates about a suitable axis) can switch the mode of light applied to the center frame 86. Further, by switching the correspondence between the mode of the light applied to the center frame 86 and the movable role that protrudes inward of the center frame 86, the effect can be diversified.

  That is, for example, out of the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is placed in a state where one surface is arranged on the front side, and Consider switching between the case where it is arranged on the front side and the case where it is arranged. When the surface on the side of the inner cover member 520 faces the side of the movable accessory, the movable accessory disposed opposite to the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 (the position near the end) emits light, while the outer cover member is lit. When the surface on the 560 side faces the moving accessory side, the moving accessory that is disposed to face the opening 565 over a wide area (wider than the uppermost opening 524) emits light. Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512a to emit light, the light emitting portion of the movable character can be switched.

  In this case, for example, the moving effect can be operated in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion, so that the effect can be improved. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving accessory, the surface of the outer cover member 560 side is reduced and changed so as to fit in the position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524, while the surface on the moving accessory side. At the timing of turning, the moving accessory may be configured to expand and contract so as to expand (extend) in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. Thus, switching to change the position where light is emitted in accordance with the movement of the moving accessory can be realized by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512a for light emission control.

  In the right panel unit 500, the light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is collected (the brightness is increased, the light amount is increased, and clear light emission is performed), and the light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is emitted. Diffuse (lower brightness, lower light intensity, faint light emission). Therefore, by switching the posture of the right panel unit 500, the light emission mode of the light emission target (liquid crystal or moving object) can be changed.

  Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed to a position in which the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or the liquid crystal (for example, when the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving object or the liquid crystal). In this case, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture arranged on the back side of the support plate 510), so that a beam (thin width) light is applied to the moving role object and the liquid crystal. While irradiating, it is possible to emit light over a wide range in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving role and the liquid crystal. Accordingly, it is possible to emit light in a wide range at a position distant from the moving role and the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving role and the liquid crystal.

  In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the case where the thread Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 disposed in the foul ball passage portions 9145 and 10145 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, as a configuration in which the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the yarn Y8, the configuration is vulnerable to the extent that the broken portion falls, and the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the broken portion passes when falling. Is also good. In this case, by detecting that the sheet metal member is detected by the detection sensor, by issuing an alarm and controlling to forcibly stop the launching of the ball, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts early, and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss of the gaming machine hall) obtained by the person who commits the wrongdoing.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as an inclined surface has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, the frictional force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or a spike-shaped hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810) may be used to form a resin. The operating resistance may be improved by cutting into the slit member 810.

  Further, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the inclined surface 2803T can enter the wall of the slits 815 opposed to the inclined surface 2803T. May be formed. In this case, it is possible to improve the operating resistance due to the inclined surface 2803T entering the concave portion.

  In the above-described sixteenth embodiment, the case where the traveling direction of light is changed to the direction of collecting light or the direction of spreading light by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540 is described. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 is a direction inclining upward in all of the areas CCVIb to CCVIe, so that the height of the line of sight of the person walking to select the game machine to play. , The light can be easily made to travel. Thereby, the pachinko machine 8010 can improve the effect of attracting customers.

  Further, for example, a downward concave portion 2543c is formed in regions CCVIc and CCVIe which are regions where light is emitted to the inner lens member 530, and an upward concave portion 2543b is formed in regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions where light is emitted to the outer lens member 550. May be formed. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined in the upward direction. While the light can be made to easily travel toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking, the light traveling toward the player and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the balls stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the balls look brilliant. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player playing the game while improving the effect of attracting pachinko machines 8010.

  In the above-described seventeenth to twenty-first embodiments, the case where the target to which the restricting members 140, 440, and 540 contact to restrict the rotation is the first driven body 122 has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, any one of the second driven body 123 to the fourth driven body 125 may be targeted. In this case, one regulating member 140, 440, 540 may be in contact with a plurality of first to fourth driven bodies 122 to 125.

  In the seventeenth to twenty-first embodiments, the case has been described in which the regulating members 140, 440, and 540 abut on the blade portions 123b and 123c of the first driven body 122 to regulate the rotation of the first driven body 122. The invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotation of the first driven body 122 may be restricted by contacting the game balls held in the concave portions 123b1 and 123c1 of the first driven body 122. Similarly, any one of the second driven member 123 to the fourth driven member 125 comes into contact with a game ball held in one of the concave portions 123b1, 123c1 to 125b1, 125c1 of the fourth driven member 125 to the second driven member 123. The rotation may be restricted.

  In the above-described seventeenth to twenty-first embodiments, the case where the regulating members 140, 440, and 540 are displaced by the operation (manual) of the operator has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the driving force of the driving unit is used. Then, the regulating members 140, 440, 540 may be displaced. Examples of the driving unit include a solenoid and an electric motor.

  In the twentieth embodiment, with the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R1, the blade portion 122b abuts (is pressed by the blade portion 122b), so that the regulating member 440 is moved from the second position to the first position. Although the description has been given of the case of being displaced to, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, with the rotation of the first driven body 122 in the direction of the arrow R1, the game ball held in the recess 122b1 abuts (is pushed by the game ball), and the regulating member 440 is moved from the second position to the first position. May be displaced. Alternatively, after the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened to operate the transport device 400, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is closed, a member that moves relatively to the regulating member 440 with the closing operation. May contact the regulating member 440 so that the regulating member 440 is displaced from the second position to the first position. These also make it possible to suppress forgetting to return the regulating member 440 to the first position.

  In the seventeenth to twenty-first embodiments, the case where the opening / closing members 150 to 350 are displaced by the operation (manual) of the operator has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the driving force of the driving unit is used. The opening and closing members 150 to 350 may be displaced. Examples of the driving unit include a solenoid and an electric motor. In this case, the regulating members 140, 440, and 540 may be formed so as to follow the displacement of the opening / closing members 150 to 350 caused by the driving of the driving means.

  Alternatively, after opening the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 in order to operate the transfer devices 100 to 500, when closing the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, the opening / closing members 150 to 350 When the relatively moving member comes into contact with the opening / closing members 150 to 350, the opening / closing members 150 to 350 are displaced from the open position (the position forming the game ball discharging state) to the closing position (the position forming the game ball transporting state). It may be something. Thereby, forgetting to return the opening / closing members 150 to 350 to the closed position can be suppressed.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a twice-rights item or a three-times rights item) that increases the jackpot expectation value until a jackpot condition occurs a plurality of times (for example, two or three times) including that. ). Further, after the big hit symbol is displayed, the game may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game for giving a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, a prize winning device having a special area such as a V zone may be provided, and the pachinko machine may be put into a special game state on condition that a ball is won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as areaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, so-called game machines in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating an operation lever in a state where a symbol is inserted and a symbol valid line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating a stop button. Things. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is as follows: "a display device for variably displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. A slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on the condition that the combination of the identification information at the time is a specific one ". In this case, coins, medals, etc. are representative game media. As an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device for variably displaying a symbol row including a plurality of symbols and then displaying the symbols in a fixed manner is provided, and a handle for hitting a ball is provided. Not included. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called big hit symbol is generated. Is a method in which a large amount of balls are paid out to a lower saucer. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a game value in a game hall, so it is a game value seen in a current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of gaming machines can be solved.

  Hereinafter, the concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Points where the player pushes in from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means pressed by a player, the operating device is arranged in a first state in a normal state and in a position in which the operating means is protruded from the player with respect to the first state. And an urging means for urging the operating means from the first state to the second state, wherein the pushing direction of the operating means in the second state is from the back side to the front side of the player. A gaming machine A1 characterized by being directed to the side.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the effect is performed in a manner that enhances the expectation of a big hit for the player at the advanced position, the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. However, it was necessary to design the operating means to have a high strength. In this case, there is a problem in that the operation means becomes heavier as a whole, and the driving means for driving the operation means becomes large.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is set to the direction from the back side to the near side for the player, so that the straight up and down linear movement is performed. In this case, the part that cannot be operated is generated as a slip between the player's hand and the operating means, so that the momentum of the pushing can be released.

  In addition, when the operating means is pushed around the shoulder and elbow from the player's playing position, it is difficult to apply a force in the forward direction, so the force exerted by the player on the operating means should be naturally reduced. Can be.

  In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is configured to be rotatable around a shaft disposed on the back side of the player, configured to be capable of tilting up and down around the shaft, and having the operation means. A gaming machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operation means in a direction opposite to a player in the second state.

  According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operation means is configured to rotate, and the operation means is arranged in the second state in the direction opposite to the player, so that the game can be played in the second state. It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation of hitting the operation means.

  In addition, by placing the hand near the shaft rod and tilting the hand with the position as a fulcrum, the operation means can be pushed easily, so that a new pushing operation method with less pushing acceleration can be provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation device from being damaged by the pushing operation of the player.

  With a new pushing operation method, for example, the outer side of the little finger of the left hand is placed near the axle bar, and the thumb side is turned to the operating means from the state where the hand is placed near the operating means with the palm rising up and down Examples include a method of operating in a manner of tilting down, a method of placing the tip of the middle finger near the shaft bar, and a method of operating in a manner of dropping the palm toward the operating means from a state where the palm is arranged in a posture facing the operating means Is done.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, the direction of the pushing operation of the operation means is set to a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1 or A2, since the pushing operation direction of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, the operability in the first state is ensured while the second operation is performed. It is possible to prevent destruction by the pushing operation in the state.

  In the gaming machine A3, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is automatically operable, and includes a driving means for generating a driving force for the automatic operation. The gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the gaming machine A4 acts in a direction in which it does not act in the opposite direction.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so that the driving force in the direction opposite to the operation direction of the player. Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the driving means from being damaged by the operation of the player.

  For example, by adopting a configuration in which only the button can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the driving unit from being subjected to a high load due to being pulled by the player in the opposite direction when performing the operation of retracting the button.

  In the gaming machine A4, it is possible to form a maintenance state in which the operation device is maintained in the first state or the second state, and further comprises a maintenance means operated by the driving means, and the driving means is provided with an eccentric part through an eccentric portion. A rotating means for transmitting a driving force to the operating means, wherein the rotating means is capable of changing a phase between a first phase and a second phase different from the first phase while keeping the maintaining means in a maintained state; In the first phase and the second phase, the range in which the operating means can move when the maintenance state is released is changed. In both the first phase and the second phase, the same rotation is performed. A gaming machine A5 configured to be able to release the maintenance state.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, the phase of the driving means can be changed while the maintenance means is maintained in the maintenance state, and the movement for releasing the maintenance state is rotated in the phase after the change. With this configuration, it is possible to change the movement width of the operation device by the urging unit. Therefore, a plurality of operation modes by the urging means can be configured.

  In the gaming machine A5, in the maintenance state, the maintenance unit is configured to be movable in the biasing direction of the biasing unit, and the moving speed of the maintenance unit is increased or decreased in accordance with the rotation speed of the rotating unit. A gaming machine A6 configured such that the operation means moves following the movement of the maintenance means.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force was only caused by the urging force, so that the mode of movement was limited to one. Since it is possible to add a movement mode in which the operation means moves following the maintenance means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. Thereby, the degree of attention of the operation device can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, a light emitting unit is provided inside the operation device and irradiates light to a player, and the light emitting means is disposed in the second state as compared with the first state. However, from the viewpoint of a player, the area of the operation means is reduced, and the irradiation range of light emitted by the light emitting means is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the second state is illuminated by the light emitting means in the player's viewpoint compared to the first state. The area of the operation means is reduced as the irradiation range of the light is enlarged, so that the player can pay attention to the light and the effect of the effect can be improved, and it is difficult to push the operation means unless aiming. In this manner, the power of the player during the operation can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the display means to change the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means. Gaming machine A8, which is a feature.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A7, the operating means is made of a non-transmissive material, and the operating means moves toward and away from the display means between the display means and the light emitting means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to view the image on the display means.

<The point that the repulsion during normal operation is small while responding to repeated hits>
In an operation device having an operation device capable of allowing a player to perform an operation up to a terminal position, a first state and a second state in which a movable range of operation to the terminal position is wider than the first state. A first driving unit for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing unit for generating an urging force for moving from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine B1 comprising: a second driving means for generating a driving force for moving an operating means from a first state to a second state in response to an operation of a player.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by a spring, and the operating means is automatically operated by a drive motor. However, in this case, the return of the operating means is slow, and when the player's operation is fast, the operating means does not follow the player's operation, which makes it difficult for the player to perform a continuous hit operation. There was a problem.

  According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force to be weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when the operating means is moved by the first driving means. Since the return can be speeded up by pushing back the operating means by the two drive means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

  The gaming machine B1 includes a continuous hit determination unit that determines whether or not a continuous hit operation is performed based on a sensor detection value of a stroke operation unit within a predetermined time, and controls the second drive unit based on a detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. A gaming machine B2, which determines whether to drive.

  According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second drive unit based on the detection value of the continuous hit determination unit. Therefore, the player does not perform the continuous hit operation (for example, a single push operation or a long press operation). The second driving means operates until the operation is performed), thereby preventing the player from feeling the load of pushing his hand back.

  In the gaming machine B2, an end detecting means for detecting the position of the operating means and detecting whether or not the operating means is arranged at the end position, and determining whether or not the operating means is arranged at a position changed by a predetermined amount from the end position. A position difference detecting means for detecting, and a moving direction judging means for judging a moving direction of the operating means based on a time relationship between a detected value of the end detecting means and a detected value of the position difference detecting means; The gaming machine B3, wherein the second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the direction of return is the direction of returning to the first state from the pushing end.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B2, when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determining means is the direction to return to the first state from the pushing end, that is, the player's hand Since the second driving means is driven at the timing of moving in the direction of separating, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operating means in a form synchronized with the movement of the player.

  Therefore, the second driving device operates in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the player's hand, and it is possible to suppress the high load on the player's hand.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the second driving means is constituted by a voice coil motor that vibrates and displaces along a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Gaming machine B4.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a driving force for moving the operation means can be generated by effectively utilizing the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, a support frame for supporting the operation unit is provided, and the second drive unit elastically supports the drive motor for rotating the eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. Supporting means, wherein the supporting means increases the driving force for moving the operating means from the first state position to the second state position as the operating means approaches the end position. The gaming machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight abuts on the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the terminal position, and generates a driving force.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force of the second driving unit is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting unit and the contact between the eccentric weight and the supporting frame. By separately generating the driving force and the driving force, the driving force applied to the operation means can be adjusted while the rotation of the driving motor is maintained. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and the control can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

  In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and contacts the support frame based on the operation means being disposed at the end position. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves close to the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means and comes into contact with the support frame, so that the repulsive force generated by the contact is used. Thus, the drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the moving direction of the operation means. Accordingly, since the support means supporting the drive motor moves in a direction away from the support frame (a direction approaching the operation means), the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Points of using VCM as a braking device and a vibration directing device>
A detecting sensor for detecting a position near the end position of the operating means, the detecting sensor comprising a plurality of sensors, measuring means for measuring a speed of the operating means from a detection interval of the detecting sensor, and measuring means for the measuring means Threshold determining means for determining whether or not the measurement value measured by the control means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold, and repulsion means for generating a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operating means, the threshold determining means When the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, the driving force generated by the repulsion means increases as compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination means is equal to or less than the predetermined threshold value. Gaming machine C1 characterized by the following.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when it is emphasized that the player can operate lightly, the operation resistance is lowered, and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. Although the operation speed can be reduced to reduce the possibility of the operation means being damaged, the force required for the operation of the player increases, and there is a problem that the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for a weak player. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determining unit determines whether the speed of the operating unit is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsive unit is increased. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the operating resistance when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold value, and to reduce the speed of the operating means only when necessary. Therefore, the resilience means can improve operability and prevent destruction.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion unit includes a voice coil motor that generates a driving force directed in a direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation unit, and the threshold value measured by the threshold value determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value. Wherein the control for pushing the voice coil motor to the extended position is performed, and the voice coil motor is driven in advance before the operation means is disposed at a position where the voice coil motor can come into contact with the voice coil motor. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled, and the operating means can be decelerated, and the operating means is arranged at a position where the operating means can contact the voice coil motor. By driving the voice coil motor before the operation, it is possible to suppress an impact generated between the operation unit and the voice coil motor.

  In the gaming machine C3, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other in the gaming machine C1 or C2, control is performed to increase a current flowing through the voice coil motor.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor are in contact with each other, the control to increase the current flowing through the voice coil motor is performed, so that the operation means is improved. It is possible to gradually improve the degree of braking of the operation means while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact between the control unit and the voice coil motor, and it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort felt by the player during operation.

  In the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means is arranged so as to be in contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operation means by spring elasticity. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates a driving force corresponding to the amount of deformation by spring elasticity. Therefore, even when the moving speed of the operating means is high, the driving force is not delayed. Can be generated.

  In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion unit compares the value measured by the threshold determination unit with a value equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold when the value measured by the threshold determination unit is equal to or less than a predetermined threshold. A game machine C5, wherein a movable area of an end of the repulsion means and an end opposite to a side in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the rebounding means, which is the end opposite to the side in contact with the operating means, is reduced, so that the operation of the operating means is reduced. When the speed is high, the elastic force generated by the repulsion means can be increased.

<The transmission of the driving force is blocked by the clutch to prevent breakage of the driving means>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, Releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, wherein the releasing means reduces the driving force when a load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means becomes a predetermined amount or more. A gaming machine D1 for canceling transmission.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player advances and retreats between a first position and a second position (for example, JP-A-2014-144218). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is automatically operated for production, if the operating means is operated during the automatic operation, a large load may be generated on the drive system. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing unit is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving unit and the operating unit via the transmitting unit becomes equal to or more than a predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operating means while the operating means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (disabled), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

  In the gaming machine D1, the driving unit is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and during driving in the first direction, A gaming machine D2 characterized in that release by the release means functions regardless of whether the drive is being performed in the second direction.

  Here, when it is determined whether the transmission of the driving force can be released depending on the operation direction of the driving unit, the operating unit is operated by the player when driving the driving unit in the operation direction in which the transmission of the driving force cannot be released. In such a case, a large load may be generated on the driving unit. For this reason, the degree of freedom of the effect at the time of effecting by operating the operation means is reduced.

  When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the locking member for locking the button is moved in the releasing direction depending on whether the driving means rotates forward or backward, Switch whether to move in the opposite direction. In this case, the button operation can be made in two modes (two patterns, a release pattern and a non-release pattern), but in both cases, the drive force must be interrupted.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, the transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. In addition, the degree of freedom of operation of the effect of automatically operating the operation means can be improved.

  As a method of canceling the transmission, the clutch is moved in a direction intersecting the operation direction of the driving means. The intersecting direction is, for example, a meaning excluding a circumferential direction when the driving unit rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotation axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, there is provided an urging means for urging the driving means and the transmitting means to a state where the driving force can be transmitted, and the releasing means comprises a contact portion between the driving means and the transmitting means. Are provided respectively, and are provided with engaging teeth for transmitting a driving force in a state where they are in mesh with each other, and the engaging teeth are such that both surfaces opposed to the operating direction of the driving means are separated from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3 comprising a shape that is inclined with respect to the contact surface in such a manner that the distance from the contact surface decreases.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, the urging means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means engages the driving force in a state in which the releasing means is engaged with the pressing surface which is pressed. On the other hand, since the transmission means is provided with the engagement teeth which are inclined in such a manner that both surfaces opposed to the operation direction of the drive means are tapered so as to be away from the contact surface, the transmission means is moved from the drive means by the engagement of the engagement teeth. The driving force can be released.

  Further, between the drive means and the transmission means, an urging force by the urging means is constantly applied, and when the transmission means separates from the drive means, the urging force is applied in the operation direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth. Load is applied. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the driving unit between the state where the driving force is transmitted and the state where the transmission is released.

  Note that the size of the engaging portion of the engaging teeth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmitting means as the transmitting means moves away from the driving means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

  In addition, in the release state, the resistance does not disappear completely and the resistance is restored periodically. Thus, when the player releases his / her hand, the button can be started to be operated within a short time.

  That is, when the button is driven “as an effect”, if the player is holding the button, one phase of the button operation elapses. If the player releases his hand on the way and moves from the end of the one phase, the period during which the button is stopped becomes longer, and the feeling that "the player has started moving since the load on the player has been released" is reduced. Can come off.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, the operating means can be started within a short time after the player releases his / her hand and the load is released. This makes it possible to produce a feeling that the player has begun to move because the load on the player has been released.

  The gaming machine D4, wherein in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, an engagement surface between the transmission unit and the release unit is formed in a saw-tooth shape that engages with each other.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means early. That is, when there is a plane parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means approach and separate from each other at the tip of the engagement surface, the transmission means and the release means abut on the plane, and the transmission of the release means is performed. It is possible to suppress the stop of the movement along the direction approaching or moving away from the means. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation of the operation means can be started early.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation unit is different between the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive unit is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, release of the driving force transmission is not limited to any one of the operation modes while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operation means. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine D5, the operation mode of the operation unit is such that when the drive unit operates in the forward direction or the reverse direction, the operation mode of the drive unit for a predetermined period from the start of the operation is Similarly, the gaming machine D6 has a different operation after a lapse of the predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operating direction of the driving means in the operating mode of the operating means, the operating mode in the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the driving means is the same. Since the operation after the elapse of the predetermined period is different, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the operation means.

  Here, by linking the difference in the operation mode of the operation unit with information that is beneficial to the player, such as a jackpot expectation, the player can operate the operation unit for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation unit changes. You can watch over.

  Also, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the driving means, if the operation direction of the driving means can be confirmed in advance, the player can grasp the difference in the jackpot expectation without watching the operation of the operation means. Can be. However, usually, the driving means is hidden from the player, and since the difference in the operating direction cannot be recognized from vibration sound or the like, the operating direction of the driving means cannot be confirmed in advance, and Can watch the operation of the operating means.

<Change the position of the projection of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is a driving means for generating a driving force for operating the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the operating means, A first means for operating the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, wherein the first means suppresses a position of the operation means from changing from the first position; Urging means for urging the operating means in the direction from the first position to the second position, and operating means moving from the first position to the second position by the urging force of the urging means End means for variably forming a movement end of the game machine, wherein the first means suppresses a change in position of the operation means by engaging with the operation means, One of the means Releasing means for applying a load for releasing engagement with the means to the first means, wherein the release of the engagement by the release load means and the change of the moving end of the operating means in the end means are single. A gaming machine E1 characterized by being driven by the driving means of (1).

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a movable operation means operated by a cam and fixed at a first position is fixed, and the fixing is released by a release load means, so that the operation means is extended by the urging force of the urging means. There is a gaming machine in which the displacement amount of the overhanging operation can be changed by the terminating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the displacement amount of the overhang operation of the operating means is changed according to the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking, the phase of the cam at the time of unlocking is variously changed. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing have been operated by different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means are required, and the arrangement space for the driving means is increased.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. Thus, the driving means for changing the end position of the operating means by the terminating means and the driving means for moving the release load means can be used in common, so that the number of driving means can be reduced.

  The gaming machine E2, wherein the position of the release load means is changed based on the operation of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be caused based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the load means can be determined. Thus, the number of detectors such as position sensors for detecting the state of the release load unit can be reduced, and the number of components can be reduced.

  In addition, as a method of switching the state of the release load means, when the transmission means is constituted by a cam and the release load means is constituted by a projection which rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the projection, For example, there is a method in which the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are desynchronized when the cam is arranged in a predetermined phase, and the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are synchronized in other phases.

  In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load applied from the first means, and the release load means and the transmission means are operated by the operation of the release load means. A game machine E3 characterized in that it is switched whether or not to perform a synchronous operation.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operably disposed on the transmission means by a load from the first means, and the release load means operates by the operation of the release load means. It is switched whether or not the transmission means and the transmission means operate synchronously, so that the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means can be changed without adding a member.

  In the gaming machine E2, the transmission unit includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operation unit is supported eccentrically with respect to a rotation axis of the first rotation member, and the release load unit is configured to rotate the second rotation member. A gaming machine E4 comprising a member, wherein the first rotating member and the second rotating member have different rotation periods.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single driving means, but have different rotation periods, so that the second rotating means A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by contacting the first means with the phase.

  According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position, and the operation means moves toward the second position, a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared. , Can expand the range of production. For example, an effect of gradually moving the end position from the first position and an effect of gradually approaching the first position can be realized with a similar configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device includes a first position, the operating means, and a second position to which the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position. And a receiving means arranged so as to be able to contact the vibrating part, wherein the operating means is arranged at the first position. Then, while the vibrating portion is in a separated state in which the vibrating portion cannot be brought into contact with the receiving device, when the operating device is disposed at the second position, the vibrating portion can be brought into contact with the receiving device. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being in a contact state.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with operating means operable by a player and vibration means for transmitting vibrations to the player via the operating means or a frame of the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open 2014-144218). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the frame of the gaming machine. Alternatively, since the vibration is transmitted to the player touching the frame of the gaming machine, when performing an effect of transmitting vibration immediately after operating the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. . For this reason, after the player operates the operating means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operating means, and the operation mode of the player (for example, an operation in which the operating means is released at the moment when the operating means is pushed in). In some embodiments, the start of the vibration may not be ready before the hand is released, and the player may not notice the vibration.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, whether or not the vibrating section contacts the receiving means depends on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position. Since it changes, even when the vibrating section is continuously vibrated, the vibration can be made to be felt by the player only when the player operates the operation means. Further, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pushing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand, regardless of the operation mode of the player, Vibration can be transmitted to a person.

  In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is disposed so as to protrude into an occupied area occupied when the operation means is disposed at the second position, and the operation means moves to the second position. The gaming machine F2 changes to the contact state when the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, the vibration means moves based on the movement of the operating means, so that the state changes from the separated state to the contact state. The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating section can be changed, and the strength of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, an effect of changing the intensity of the transmitted vibration with respect to the operation intensity of the player can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibration means without any particular change in the driving mode.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the vibrating means is supported by the receiving means via supporting means having spring elasticity.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the positioning of the receiving means can be performed while suppressing the vibration of the vibration means from being transmitted to the receiving means by the supporting means. Thereby, the receiving means and the vibration means can be separated from each other to prevent the transmission of the vibration, and the displacement generated in the vibration means during the vibration can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means expands and contracts based on the vibration of the vibrating portion in the contact state.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F3, the elasticity of the supporting means can be used to increase the load generated when the vibrating section and the receiving means abut. That is, when the vibrating part moves in the direction approaching the receiving means due to the expansion and contraction of the supporting means, it is possible to give momentum.

  In the gaming machine F3, the supporting means may have a deformation resistance along a movement direction of the operation means lower than a deformation resistance in a direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to a difference in the deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely. it can.

  Thus, even if the difference in the amount of movement of the operating means is small, the amount of expansion and contraction of the supporting means can be made different, and the load generated between the vibrating part and the receiving means can be made different. .

  In addition, as a method of making the deformation resistance different, when the support means is formed of a rubber member surrounding the vibrating means, a method of extending a rubber leg along the operation direction of the operating means, or a method in which the support means surrounds the vibratory means In the case of a rubber member, a method of manufacturing the rubber member by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction, and a support means, and a rail for guiding the operating means to operate in the direction along the operation direction. And a coil spring for urging the vibrating means along the operation direction of the operating means.

  In the gaming machine F3, a portion where the vibrating portion contacts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a separate means from the operating means.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F3, the vibration is not transmitted to the player via the operating means, but is transmitted to the player via the receiving means which is separate from the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration unit from being transmitted to the drive unit via the operation unit and the transmission unit, so that it is possible to prevent the load from being applied to the drive unit. Thereby, the durability of the driving means can be improved.

  Further, since the vibration can be suppressed from being transmitted to the hands of the player who operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent a player who is surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation during the operation.

  In addition, as a receiving means, for example, a portion of the frame of the gaming machine, a portion near the upper plate to which the game ball is supplied, or an edge portion of a glass frame, etc. Examples include a part that may be touched by a hand, a housing part that partially surrounds the operation unit, and the like.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) is possible at the mounting part>
In an operating device having operating means operated by a player, the operating device is configured such that the operating means is movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and A driving unit that generates a driving force to be driven; and a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the operation unit, wherein the transmission unit includes a deforming unit that is elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means operable by a player, a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting a driving force from the driving means to the operating means, There is a gaming machine provided (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the driving means generates a driving force for driving the operating means when the operating means is gripped and fixed by the player, the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the operating means, There is a problem that a load is accumulated in a connection portion between the motor and the driving means, and there is a possibility that these connection portions may be damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformed portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed, so that the connecting portion between the operation means and the transmission means, and the driving means and the transmission means The load applied to the connection portion with the connection can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member rotatably supported, and the deformed portion forms a connection portion with a rotation shaft of the cam member. A gaming machine G2 wherein a fixing force is generated.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the deforming portion has a role as a portion for performing elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a portion for generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft. Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the functions. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

  In the gaming machine G2, the cam member includes a projecting portion projecting in parallel with a rotation axis, and the projecting portion and the operating means are connected to each other. The gaming machine G3, wherein the rotating shaft is inclined.

  Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the projecting portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to form the cam member and the protruding portion with one member, and the number of members may increase.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deforming portion is such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the cam member, so that the projecting portion is attached to the cam member. The cam member can be easily formed of a single member as compared with a case where the cam member is slid, and the members can be simplified.

  In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the deformable portion to elastic deformation is compared with the rotational axis of the cam member in a first rotational direction in which the cam member is rotated around a straight line connecting the rotational axis and the protruding portion. A gaming machine characterized in that a deformation resistance is greater in a second rotation direction in which a straight line perpendicular to both a straight line connecting the convex portion and an extending direction of the rotating shaft is used as an axis. G4.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine G3, by changing the deformation resistance of the deformed portion in each direction, the state after the deformed portion is elastically deformed in the rotation axis direction is better. Compared to the state before the elastic deformation, the protruding tip of the protruding portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member. Accordingly, the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member is going to move, so that the load generated between the convex portion and the operating means is reduced by the elastic deformation of the deformable portion. can do.

  In the gaming machine G3 or G4, a friction member is provided at a predetermined distance in a direction parallel to a rotation axis of the cam member, and the cam member changes its posture by elastically deforming the deformable portion. The gaming machine G5, wherein the cam member and the friction member are in contact with each other.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deforming portion is elastically deformed, so that the cam member is changed in posture, and the cam member and the friction member are changed. Abut on each other, the operating resistance of the cam member itself can be increased, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operating means.

  A gaming machine G6 comprising, in any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, detecting means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member is displaced in an inclined manner with respect to an axis.

  Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by driving the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means When it is detected that an overload has occurred on the basis of the deviation from the above, it is necessary to drive the driving means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detecting means for detecting the displacement deviation becomes shorter, but as the arrangement interval of the detecting means becomes smaller, the configuration of the detecting means becomes more complicated and expensive. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to adopt a configuration that is inexpensive and detects the occurrence of overload early.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether at least a part of the cam member is displaced inclining with respect to the axis. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time that the detecting means detects at least a part of the cam member without driving the driving means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of the detecting means. Thus, when an overload occurs, the load applied to the driving unit can be reduced.

<Strand with ball thread prevention. Gaming machine H>
In a gaming machine having a foul ball passage through which a foul ball that flows down toward the launching device among the game balls fired to the game area can pass, the foul ball passage allows the flowing down game ball to pass therethrough. A gaming machine H1 comprising one-way obstruction means for obstructing the progress of an object flowing backward.

  In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, an illegal act is performed by arranging a thread cutting blade inside the guide path that guides the game ball from the upper plate to the launching device and driving the game ball with the thread connected into the game area There is a gaming machine having a function of preventing (cutting a thread) (see, for example, JP-A-2015-024179). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the yarn is pressed against the thread cutting teeth at the time of firing and the yarn is cut by the tension generated at that time, when the firing intensity of the game ball is weak, the game ball can not be cut completely without the yarn being cut. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball. For this reason, for example, an illegal tool with game balls connected to both ends of the yarn is prepared, and one of the game balls connected to one end of the yarn is fired at a low firing intensity to flow into the foul ball passage and returned to the player side While holding one of the game balls, the other game ball connected to the other end of the thread is driven into the game area, so that the thread can be removed from the guide path and the ball can be passed through the foul ball passage. A game ball can be connected to the other game ball by a thread, so that a load is externally applied to the thread connected to the other game ball, and the other game ball disposed in the game area. There is a problem that there is a possibility that an illegal profit can be obtained by manipulating the computer.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means can be used even when a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area through the foul ball passage is performed. However, by hindering the movement of the yarn in the backward flow direction of the game ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate illegal profit.

  In the gaming machine H1, the foul ball passage includes a bent portion that bends a flow path of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H1, the yarn guided along the path of the game ball can be rubbed with the bent portion, so that the yarn can be cut early.

  The gaming machine H3, wherein in the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes a load means for applying a load to the backward flowing object without applying a load to the flowing game ball on the inner corner side of the bending.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine H2, a load can be applied to an object flowing backward (for example, a thread-like member) by the load unit.

  In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion having a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the concave portion, the collision between the load means and the game ball is avoided, and the load means is damaged. Can be prevented.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, a gaming machine H5 is provided with regulating means for regulating movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means to the outside of the foul ball passage is regulated by the regulating means. When a load is generated, the load applied to the member on the yarn can be prevented from being weakened by deforming the load means outward of the foul ball passage.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout ball is a portion for discharging a game ball paid out from a payout device, the receiving plate being a plate in which a foul ball arrives first on the front side of the front door. The gaming machine H6, wherein the ball discharge portion is disposed above a discharge-side outlet of the foul ball passage.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the game ball dispensed from the dispensing device is configured to pass before the discharge-side exit of the foul ball passage so that the game ball can pass through the foul ball passage. When an illegal act of applying a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area is performed, the payout game ball is intentionally applied to apply a load and reduce the durability of the yarn. be able to.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of a payout ball discharging portion, which is a portion for discharging game balls paid out from the payout device, to a receiving plate, which is a plate where a foul ball first reaches on the front side of the front door, is provided. The gaming machine H7, wherein the lower end of the outlet side outlet of the foul ball passage is lower than the lower end.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, a fraudulent act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed. In this case, the thread can be easily damaged by the paid out game balls.

<Structure of board holding. Gaming machine I>
A game device used during a game, and a receiving device that is open on one side that is opposite to the game device and that can receive the game device from the one side, the receiving device includes the game device. The game device is provided with a state changing unit that can be changed from an unusable state, which is an unusable state, to an available state, which is a state in which the gaming unit can be used. A gaming machine I1 comprising: a proximity unit that approaches the gaming unit from the one side.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the state changes between a fixed state in which the game board can be rotated in the rotation direction parallel to the front of the game board and the game board is fixed to the inner frame and a released state in which the game board can be removed from the inner frame. There is a gaming machine provided with a fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the fixing means is configured to be able to change the state only after the gaming board is pushed into the position of use, so if the pushing of the gaming board is halfway, the pushing is performed again. It is necessary to perform such a repetitive operation, and there is a problem that the operation efficiency may be reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state changing means includes the proximity means which is close to the game means from the receiving side (one side) when the game means is put into the use state, the pressing of the game board can be prevented. Even if it is halfway, there is an effect that the game board can be pushed to the position in use by applying the pushing force by the proximity means contacting the game board.

  In the gaming machine I1, the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side according to a state change to an unusable state in which the gaming means is disabled. .

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) in accordance with the state change of the gaming means to the unusable state. There is an effect that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state changing unit is configured to make the gaming unit unusable so that the unusable state occurs, and the proximity unit retreats outside the gaming unit. Gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the work efficiency of the removing operation of the gaming means can be improved, and the game efficiency can be improved. Since the operation is performed when the means is disabled, the work efficiency can be further improved.

  The gaming machine I4 according to any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, wherein the state changing unit includes a contact unit that receives a load from the gaming unit when the state changes to a usable state.

  According to the gaming machine I4, the state changing means changes to the usable state when the contact means receives a load from the gaming means. Therefore, the operation of pressing the game means against the state changing means allows the state changing means to be used as a series of flows. State can be changed.

  In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on one side of the receiving means as a shaft, and is configured to be received by the receiving means by approaching the other side, and the state changing means includes the receiving means. A gaming machine I5, which is disposed on the other side of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I4, a load can be efficiently applied to the contacting means via the gaming means by utilizing the width of the gaming means.

  In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5, a closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means is provided, and the closing means is such that the state changing means disables the gaming means. A gaming machine I6, comprising: a closing restricting portion for preventing the opening on one side of the gaming means from being closed when the state is maintained.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means determines whether or not the gaming means can be used depending on whether or not the closing means can close the opening on one side of the gaming means. It can be determined whether or not to perform. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the closing means closes the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means keeps the unusable state.

<Reverse cup and harness band prevent piano wire goto. Gaming machine J>
A game means used during the game, and a receiving means which is open on one side which is opposite to the game means and which can receive the game means from the one side, the receiving means includes the game means and A gaming machine J1 comprising: arranging means arranged on a path communicated with the outside, wherein the arranging means is configured to be capable of suppressing entry of an object from outside at a plurality of places.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from a rotation axis side of a front frame (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). ). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a problem that the anti-fraud effect is not sufficient because there is only one anti-fraud unit.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arranging means is arranged on the path where the piano wire may be inserted, and the arranging means is configured to be able to suppress the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of places, thereby preventing fraud. Can be improved.

  In the gaming machine J1, the arranging unit is different from a first unit that suppresses entry of a member from the outside at a first location and a second unit that suppresses entry of a member from the exterior at a second location. A gaming machine J2 characterized in that a member is prevented from entering from outside by a method.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J1, the method of arranging means for suppressing the entry of a member from outside differs between the first location and the second location. As compared with the case where the number is increased, the entry of the member from the outside can be further suppressed.

  It should be noted that the method for suppressing the entry from outside is not limited at all. For example, a method of suppressing entry by closing a route, or a method of detecting improper activity by detecting heat and sounding an alarm may be used.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the arranging means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed in a cup shape opened outward of the receiving means.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion restricting portion is formed in a cup shape, so that the intruding member can be prevented from further entering.

  In the gaming machine J3, the arranging means includes a supporting means for supporting an electric wiring, and the supporting means is arranged on the path from the outside to the gaming means on the downstream side of the entry restricting portion. Gaming machine J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine J3, when a fraud that penetrates the entry restricting portion due to high heat occurs, a change (such as disconnection due to heat) caused in the wiring due to the high heat is detected to detect an external influence. The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can be easily generated.

  The gaming machine J5 according to any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, wherein the arranging means includes a dissolving means for guiding a member entering from outside to a dissolving area far from the gaming means.

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines J1 to J4, since the member entering from the outside is guided by the arranging means to the elimination area far from the gaming means, the entry of the member entering from the outside is prevented. Even if the degree is increased, it is possible to prevent a member entering from outside from reaching the game means.

<Five-piece decorative plate structure. Involve also fraud prevention. Gaming machine K>
A first unit and a second unit, which are arranged to face each other along the first direction and have at least one side connected thereto, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along the first direction; A connecting means for connecting the first means and the second means, and a connecting direction of the connecting part is set to a second direction intersecting the first direction. A gaming machine K1 characterized in that:

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a first unit and a second unit that are arranged to face each other and are connected at at least one side, and are disposed between the first unit and the second unit along a first direction. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, each member is connected by an existing method such as bonding or screwing. When the first means and the second means are connected, a load along the first direction is applied to the first means. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by the three means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction crossing the first direction, the third means is provided in the first direction. Therefore, the load applied from the vehicle can be reduced. This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine K1, the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent a load from being applied to the third means from the connecting portion.

  In the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided a connected means connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means is connected to the connected means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the gaming machine K3 is connected by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in an approaching third direction and fitting them together.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there is provided connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means. Are connected and fixed by fitting caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction close to the connected means, so that the first means and the first means oriented in a direction intersecting the third direction Resistance to the disassembly of the second means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K3, the one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed outward.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is disposed so as to be exposed to the outside, so that the state of the fitted portion can be easily confirmed. be able to. Thus, even if a wrongdo occurs in which the fitting portion is destroyed and the first means and the second means are disassembled, the detection of the wrongdoing can be hastened.

  In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the fastening direction is the same as the third direction. .

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set in the same direction as the third direction. The fitting strength can be reinforced by the tightening strength.

  In one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, a light irradiating unit that irradiates light toward the first unit or the second unit and is fixed to the connected unit, and one of the first unit or the second unit. And a light guide means fixed to the member and configured to be able to introduce the light irradiated by the light irradiation means into the inside thereof.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, it is possible to prevent the first means and the second means from being displaced from the light guide means.

  In the gaming machine K6, an abutting means is provided for abutting a surface in a region where the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means face each other.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine K6, the gap between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means is maintained at a distance corresponding to the dimension of the contact means. Can be. This prevents the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means from changing when the first means or the second means is displaced by receiving a load in the facing direction. Can be.

  This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guide means from being changed even when a load is applied in the facing direction when the first means or the second means is illegally disassembled. can do.

<Point L that utilizes curved light guide means. As point, not reached>
A light guiding means formed in a curved wave shape in the irradiation direction of light passing through the inside, and a projected means to which light passing through the light guiding means is disposed opposite to the light guiding means, and The gaming machine L1, wherein the projection target device includes a concave facing portion disposed to face the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed to face the convex portion of the light guiding means.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate that uniformly emits light from an end face to a surface (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-265573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of incident light in order to partially change the intensity of surface-emitted light. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection target means includes the concave facing part and the convex facing part, even if the intensity of the light incident on the light guide means is constant, the concave facing part and the convex facing part. It is possible to change the light emission intensity of the projection target means with the unit.

  In the gaming machine L1, the projection target means is configured such that the concave-facing portion is made of a light-transmitting material, and the convex-facing portion is made of a material that transmits less light than the concave-facing portion. Gaming machine L2.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine L1, the intensity of light transmitted through the convex facing portion is consciously weakened, so that the light emitted from the light guide means is converged at the concave facing portion. The effect of the effect by the light can be improved.

  In the gaming machine L2, there is provided opposite projection means which is disposed on the opposite side of the projection target means with the light guiding means interposed therebetween, and which projects light passing through the light guiding means. A gaming machine L3, wherein a portion of the light guide facing the concave portion and a portion of the light guide facing the convex portion are formed of materials having substantially the same light transmittance.

  According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine L2, the portion of the opposite projection unit that is arranged to face the concave surface of the light guide unit and the portion that is arranged to face the convex surface of the light guide unit are light. Since the transmissivity is formed from substantially the same material, the same light is incident on the light guide means, so that the light is visually recognized through the projected means and the light is visually recognized through the opposite projection means. And can be different.

<Bus reflex speaker arrangement structure. Gaming machine M>
A first means and a second means which are arranged opposite to each other and are fixed to each other, and constitute the internal space in a fixed state; an acoustic means which is arranged in a state where at least a part thereof enters the internal space; A gaming machine M1 comprising: bending means for forming a bending path in an internal space.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are arranged at both left and right ends of a front frame and perform effects using sound output from the speakers (see, for example, JP-A-2006-16088). In such a gaming machine, the vibration wave traveling to the rear side of the speaker body is advanced to the left and right center positions of the gaming machine, and is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, so that the effect of producing a low tone is easily performed. However, there is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined by the left and right width of the gaming machine.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, a bending path is formed in the internal space of the first means and the second means by the bending means. By releasing the right and left widths, the vibration wave can be made to travel at an arbitrary distance.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in opposite directions, and the bending means has a rib shape from at least one of the first means or the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising: a protruding portion protruding from the first means, the protruding tip of the protruding portion being in contact with the other of the first means or the second means.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1, the protruding tip of the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in a direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means. Abuts with each other to prevent the occurrence of a gap between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means due to the fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluid such as the vibration wave from passing through the gap in the bending path.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, an opening is provided to connect the internal space to the outside, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being closed by a game machine.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the acoustic means, so that it is not necessary to prepare an additional closing member, The wall constituting the internal space can be appropriately closed while the passage member is passed from the internal space to the outside.

  The gaming machine M4, wherein in the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the acoustic means than the projecting portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine M3, when the wiring of the sound means is passed from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the sound means is prevented from being caught by the protruding portion and disconnected. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means and the second means is fastened and fixed, and an effect means arranged below the support fastening means and performing an effect accompanying a game A gaming machine M5, characterized in that the production means supports the support fastening means from below.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effect achieved by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the support fastening means is supported by the production means from below, so that the support fastening means can be weighted without pressing the space used for production. Things can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. Petals that stop on the way. Gaming machine N>
A base member, a first displacement unit that is displaceably supported by the base member, a driving unit that applies a driving force to the first displacement unit, and a following state in which the first displacement unit is displaced in a displacement direction. A second displacement means that can be switched between a non-following state displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction of the first displacement means, wherein at least the second displacement means is in a following state, A gaming machine N1 comprising a third displacement unit that is displaced in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of the second displacement unit by a driving force of the driving unit.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the extension / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is extended / contracted, while the first displacement means operates near the extension end. There is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction operation direction of the first displacement means when performing the operation (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229580). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the first displacing means expands and contracts, the direction of displacement of the first displacing means and the second displacing means is the same, so that a slow effect is produced, and the effect of the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means. , Can be visually recognized as the speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of the second displacement means felt by the player as a bodily sensation, as compared with the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven.

  In the gaming machine N1, a resistance means for generating a resistance to the displacement of the second displacement means is provided, and the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing a switching point between the following state and the non-following state. Gaming machine N2.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N1, the action of the resistance means causes the second displacement means to follow the first displacement means in a following state and a non-following state deviating from the following state. Since the switching point can be changed, it is possible to increase the types of the mode of displacement of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the production effect can be improved.

  In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing the state of the second displacement means using a driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

  In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is provided so as to be visible from the front surface.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is configured to be visible, so that the resistance means has a function of changing the state of the first displacement means and the player can visually recognize the resistance means. It can be shared with the function as the effect device.

  In the gaming machine N4, a rod-shaped shaft means fixed to the base member is provided, and the shaft means rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means coaxially and rotatably. Gaming machine N5.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine N4, the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the shaft means functioning as the rotation axis of the resistance means are fixed to the base member. As the posture of any one of the second displacement means and the resistance means changes, the posture of the other members or means also changes, so that the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. Can be.

<Use of shell buttons and holes. As point, not reached>
In a gaming machine including a first means and a housing means configured to house the first means, the housing means is an opening for receiving the first means when housing the first means. A gaming machine O1 comprising: an opening; and a second opening that is opened with a width equal to or greater than a width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that include operating means operable by a player and an upper plate that covers the operating means from below, and the operating means moves up and down with respect to the upper plate (for example, See JP-A-2012-048970). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign object is inserted into a gap between the upper plate and the operation means, the foreign object remains inside and may cause a malfunction. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine O1 has the second opening formed with a width equal to or larger than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means, so that foreign matter is stored through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where foreign matter remains inside.

  In the gaming machine O1, the accommodating unit includes a support unit that supports the first unit, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support unit with the first unit therebetween. Gaming machine O2.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the supporting strength of the support portion.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the accommodating means includes a low water resistant portion having low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistant portion.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, it can be used for both the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object through the second opening and the purpose of discharging liquid such as water.

  In any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of the second openings are configured to have a shape based on a shape of the solid object projected in a different direction. A gaming machine O4 characterized by the following.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, since the plurality of second openings are formed from a shape based on the shape of the solid object in different directions, the second opening is formed. The solid object can be easily removed through the section.

  The gaming machine O5, wherein in any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to a player than the first means.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, the shadow of the solid object is visually recognized by the player in a state where the solid object is partially closed at the second opening. Can be done. This allows the player to be aware that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, so that the possibility of the solid object remaining remaining can be reduced. .

<Concept of the invention with the transfer devices 100 to 500 as an example (opening / closing member for removing a ball)>
A supply passage serving as a passage for supplying game balls, a firing device for firing the game balls supplied from the supply passage, a collection passage serving as a passage for collecting the game balls fired from the firing device, and a collection passage for the game balls And a transfer device for transferring game balls from the supply passage to the supply passage, wherein the transfer device has a plurality of recesses for receiving the game balls formed in the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and the collection passage. A driving body in which the game balls taken in from are supplied to the recesses, and a plurality of recesses having a rotation axis parallel to the driving bodies and receiving the game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction. A plurality of driven members; a driving unit that applies a driving force to the driving member to rotate the driving member; and a guide wall that forms a transport path for a game ball received in the recess of the driving member and the driven member. The recess of the driving body and the Using a game ball received between the recess of the moving body or between the recesses of the driven body as a medium, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body. A game machine provided with an opening / closing means disposed on the guide wall to open and close a transfer passage of the transfer device.

  A supply passage serving as a passage for supplying game balls, a firing device for firing the game balls supplied from the supply passage, a collection passage serving as a passage for collecting the game balls fired from the firing device, and a collection passage for the game balls (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-118869) is known which has a transport device for transporting a game ball from a game machine to a supply passage. In such a gaming machine, a plurality of recesses for receiving the game balls are provided on the outer circumferential surface along the rotation direction, and a plurality of recesses for receiving the game balls are provided to the recesses, and the game balls taken in from the collection passage are supplied to the recesses. One or more driven members having a plurality of recesses having a parallel rotation axis and receiving a game ball formed on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and driving means for applying a driving force to the driving body and rotating the driving body. A guide wall that forms a transfer path for the game ball received in the recesses of the driving body and the driven body, and is received between the recessed part of the driving body and the recessed part of the driven body or between the recessed parts of the driven body. The rotating force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body using the game ball as a medium, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body. Therefore, game balls can be stored in the transfer passage of the transfer device. In this case, since the number of game balls supplied to the driving body matches the number of game balls discharged from the transport path, the number of game balls stored in the transport path of the transport device can be always constant. As a result, the number of game balls can be managed accurately.

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when game balls are taken into the transfer device from the collection passage, the same number of game balls as the taken game balls are transferred to the supply passage. There is a problem that a certain number of game balls are stored and the game balls stored in the transfer passage of the transfer device cannot be removed. Therefore, for example, the game machine has to be shipped from a factory or moved to a store with the game balls remaining in the transfer device.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, since the opening / closing means which is provided on the guide wall and opens and closes the transfer passage of the transfer device is provided, when the opening / closing means is closed, the game ball can be transferred while the opening / closing means is provided. , The game ball can be extracted from the transport path. Therefore, for example, a game machine can be shipped from a factory or moved to a store in a state where the game balls are extracted from the transport device.

  In the gaming machine P1, the opening / closing means is formed at a position on the guide wall opposite to a side on which the game ball taken in from the collection passage is conveyed toward the driving body and opposite to the driving body. A gaming machine P2 characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P1, the position where the game ball taken in from the collection passage in the guide wall is conveyed toward the driving body and opposite to the driving body. Since the opening / closing means is formed in the opening, the game ball received in the recess of the driven body can be extracted from the opening / closing means without passing through the driving body. Therefore, in a state where the game ball is not supplied to the driving body from the collection passage, the driven body can be reversed by the weight of the game ball received in the recess of the driven body, and the game ball can be extracted from the opening / closing means. In other words, there is no need to reverse the driving body (rotate in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game balls are transported) or stop driving the driving means to remove the ball.

  The gaming machine P3, wherein in the gaming machine P2, the opening / closing means is formed at a position that intersects a rotation locus of a concave portion of the driving body when viewed in a rotation axis direction of the driving body.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P2, the opening / closing means is formed at a position that intersects the rotation locus of the concave portion of the driving body when viewed in the rotation axis direction of the driving body. The game ball received in the concave portion of the driving body can be brought into contact with the opening / closing means, and while the game ball can be transported reliably, the driving body rotates forward (game ball) when the opening / closing means is opened. By rotating the game ball in the direction in which it is transported), all game balls can be extracted from the transport path of the transport device.

  In the gaming machine P3, the driving body is provided with a groove that is formed in the outer peripheral surface and is continuous in the circumferential direction while traversing the recess, and when the opening and closing unit is closed, a part of the opening and closing unit is driven by the drive unit. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that it is arranged in a groove of a body.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the driving body is provided with a groove that is provided in the outer peripheral surface and is continuous in the circumferential direction while crossing the concave portion. Since a part of the means is arranged in the groove of the driving body, a structure in which the opening / closing means is arranged at a position intersecting the rotation locus of the concave portion of the driving body can be achieved with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine P3, the opening / closing means includes a groove extending along the transport direction of the game ball, and in a state where the opening / closing means is closed, a part of an outer peripheral side of the driving body is a part of the opening / closing means. A gaming machine P5 which is arranged in a groove.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the opening / closing means has a groove extending along the transport direction of the game ball, and when the opening / closing means is closed, the outer peripheral side of the driving body. Is arranged in the groove of the opening / closing means, so that a structure in which the opening / closing means is arranged at a position intersecting the rotation locus of the concave portion of the driving body can be achieved with a simple configuration.

  In the gaming machine P4 or P5, the opening / closing means is rotatably supported by a rotation axis concentric with the rotation axis of the driving body, and the conveyance passage of the conveyance device is opened / closed by rotation of the opening / closing means. Gaming machine P6.

  According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P4 or P5, the opening / closing means is rotatably supported by a rotating shaft concentric with the rotating shaft of the driving body, and the transport passage of the transport device is rotated by the rotation of the opening / closing means. Are opened and closed, so that the opening / closing means can be disposed so as to overlap the driver. Therefore, the space required for displacement of the opening / closing means can be suppressed, and the size of the transport device can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, when the opening / closing means is opened, the opening is opened from the side farther from the rotation axis of the driving body, so that the removal of the game ball can be started immediately with the operation of opening the opening / closing means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being conveyed along the guide wall (conveyed from the conveyance passage of the conveyance device to the supply passage) by the forward rotation of the driving body (rotation in the direction in which the game ball is conveyed).

  When the game balls are conveyed to the supply passage, it is necessary to wait for the game balls to be collected in the collection passage and taken in again by the transfer device, which requires time for the extraction operation. Further, since the game balls conveyed to the supply passage cannot be collected in the collection passage unless they are fired by the firing device (that is, are not taken into the conveyance device), in addition to the operation of the opening / closing means, the shooting device is used. Work to operate is also required, and the burden on the worker increases.

  In the gaming machine P6, in a state where the opening / closing means is opened, at least a part of a sampling path through which a game ball extracted from the transfer path of the transfer device passes is formed by the opening / closing means. Machine P7.

  According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P6, when the opening and closing means is opened, at least a part of the extraction passage through which the game ball extracted from the transfer passage of the transfer device passes is formed by the opening and closing means. Therefore, product cost can be reduced. That is, since the opening / closing means also serves as the guide wall for forming the extraction passage, the number of components or the material for forming the guide wall can be reduced, and as a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  In addition, for example, at least a part of the extraction passage can be formed by the opening / closing means even if the transport path of the transport device is not opened and closed by the rotation of the opening / closing means. In order to arrange the opening and closing means, it is necessary to adopt a complicated structure. On the other hand, according to the present invention in which the rotation axis of the opening / closing means is concentric with the rotation axis of the driving body, the opening / closing means can be arranged at a position suitable for the extraction passage without complicating the structure. .

<Concept of the invention using the transport devices 100 to 500 as an example (a regulating member for preventing reverse rotation of the driven body)>
A supply passage serving as a passage for supplying game balls, a firing device for firing the game balls supplied from the supply passage, a collection passage serving as a passage for collecting the game balls fired from the firing device, and a collection passage for the game balls And a transfer device for transferring game balls from the supply passage to the supply passage, wherein the transfer device has a plurality of recesses for receiving the game balls formed in the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and the collection passage. A driving body in which the game balls taken in from are supplied to the recesses, and a plurality of recesses having a rotation axis parallel to the driving bodies and receiving the game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction. A plurality of driven members; a driving unit that applies a driving force to the driving member to rotate the driving member; and a guide wall that forms a transport path for a game ball received in the recess of the driving member and the driven member. The recess of the driving body and the Using a game ball received between the recess of the moving body or between the recesses of the driven body as a medium, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body. In the gaming machine, the driven body is allowed to rotate in a first direction that is a direction that is driven by the rotation of the driven body, and the driven body is moved in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction. A gaming machine Q1 comprising a regulation means for regulating the rotation of the game machine Q1.

  A supply passage serving as a passage for supplying game balls, a firing device for firing the game balls supplied from the supply passage, a collection passage serving as a passage for collecting the game balls fired from the firing device, and a collection passage for the game balls (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-118869) is known which has a transport device for transporting a game ball from a game machine to a supply passage. In such a gaming machine, a plurality of recesses for receiving the game balls are provided on the outer circumferential surface along the rotation direction, and a plurality of recesses for receiving the game balls are provided to the recesses, and the game balls taken in from the collection passage are supplied to the recesses. One or more driven members having a plurality of recesses having a parallel rotation axis and receiving a game ball formed on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and driving means for applying a driving force to the driving body and rotating the driving body. A guide wall that forms a transfer path for the game ball received in the recesses of the driving body and the driven body, and is received between the recessed part of the driving body and the recessed part of the driven body or between the recessed parts of the driven body. The rotating force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body using the game ball as a medium, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body. Therefore, game balls can be stored in the transfer passage of the transfer device. In this case, since the number of game balls supplied to the driving body matches the number of game balls discharged from the transport path, the number of game balls stored in the transport path of the transport device can be always constant. As a result, the number of game balls can be managed accurately.

  However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that when the game balls are not taken into the concave portion of the driving body from the recovery passage, the driven body is reversed by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport passage.

  Therefore, when the driving of the driving body is stopped, the driven body and the driving body are rotated in reverse by the weight of the game ball, thereby causing the game balls stored in the transport passage to flow back to the collection passage. On the other hand, when the rotational driving of the driving body is continued, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body by using the last one (the driving body side) of the game balls stored in the transport path as a medium, and When the body is driven to rotate by the driving body (the driven body is rotated forward), the next game ball is not taken into the recess of the driving body from the collection passage, and the driven body is weighted by the weight of the game ball stored in the transport passage. The operation is reversed, and the operation in which the concave portion of the driving body receives the last game ball is repeated, so that an intermittent load acts on the driving body, which causes a decrease in durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, the rotation of the driven body in the first direction, which is the direction driven by the rotation of the driving body, is allowed and the driven body is driven in the second direction opposite to the first direction. Since the game device is provided with a regulating means for regulating the rotation of the body, in a state where the game ball is taken into the recess of the driving body from the recovery passage, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body. (Rotation in the first direction) (i.e., the game balls can be transported). On the other hand, in a state where the game balls are not taken into the concave portion of the driving body from the recovery passage, the weight of the game balls stored in the transport passage is used. The rotation of the follower (rotation in the second direction) can be restricted by the restricting means.

  As a result, even when the driving of the driving body is stopped, it is possible to prevent the game balls stored in the transport passage from flowing back to the collection passage. On the other hand, when the rotational driving of the driving body is continued, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body by using the last one (the driving body side) of the game balls stored in the transport passage as a medium. After the driven member is driven by the rotation of the driving member (the driven member is rotated forward), the driven member is prevented from being reversed by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport path. The sphere does not need to be received by the recess of the driver. Therefore, an intermittent load does not act on the driving body, and the durability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the plurality of driven members are provided, and among the plurality of driven members, the restricting means allows the driven member adjacent to the driving member to rotate in the first direction, and A gaming machine Q2 characterized by regulating rotation in a direction.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine Q1, a plurality of driven bodies are provided, and the regulating means controls rotation of the driven body adjacent to the driving body among the plurality of driven bodies in the first direction. Since the rotation is permitted and the rotation in the second direction is restricted, the required number of the restriction means can be minimized. In other words, if the rotation of the driven body adjacent to the driving body in the second direction can be regulated, the driven body is reversed by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport path without providing a regulating means for other driven bodies. Can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and reduce product cost.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, an opening / closing means disposed on the guide wall for opening and closing a transfer passage of the transfer device is provided, and the regulating means allows the driven body to rotate in the first direction and It is formed so as to be displaceable between a first position that restricts rotation of the driven body in two directions and a second position that allows rotation of the driven body in at least the second direction. Gaming machine Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the opening / closing means disposed on the guide wall for opening and closing the transport passage of the transport device is provided, and the regulating means rotates the driven body in the first direction. Is formed between the first position for allowing rotation of the driven body in the second direction and the second position for allowing rotation of the driven body in at least the second direction. Game balls can be withdrawn from the transport path of the device.

  That is, by disposing the regulating means at the second position and opening the opening / closing means, the reverse rotation (rotation in the second direction) of the driven body due to the weight of the game balls stored in the transport passage is allowed, and the flow down along with the reverse rotation is allowed. By causing the game balls to flow out of the opening, the game balls can be extracted from the transport path.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the rotation of the driven body in the first direction is allowed in a state where the regulating means is displaced to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q3, when the regulating means is displaced to the second position, the rotation of the driven body in the first direction is allowed. In this state, the game balls can be transported.

  For example, after the regulating means is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means is opened, and the game ball is removed from the transport path, only the opening / closing means is closed, and the regulating means is forgotten to return to the first position. Even in this case, since the driven body is allowed to rotate forward (rotation in the first direction), the driven body is driven to rotate by the rotation of the driving body, and the game ball can be transported.

  In the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, when the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body using the gaming ball as a medium, the regulating means moves the second position to the first position with the driven body. A gaming machine Q5 characterized in that it is displaced.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, when the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body using the game ball as a medium, the regulation means is driven by the second driven body by the second movement. Since it is displaced from the position to the first position, the function of the restricting means for restricting the follower from being reversed (rotated in the second direction) by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport path is surely exhibited. be able to.

  That is, even if the regulating means is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means is opened, and the game ball is extracted from the transport path, only the opening / closing means is closed and the regulating means is forgotten to return to the first position, When the driven body is driven by the rotational driving (rotation in the first direction) of the driving body and the conveyance of the game ball is started, the regulation means is moved from the second position to the first position with the driven body. It can be displaced (returned). As a result, the function of the regulating means can be reliably exhibited.

  In the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, there is provided a transmission means for transmitting a displacement of one of the restriction means and the opening / closing means to the other, and the transmission means of the transmission means displaces the restriction means to the first position; The gaming machine Q6, wherein a state in which the opening / closing means is closed and a state in which the regulating means is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means is opened are formed.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effect provided by the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, a transmission means for transmitting one displacement of the restriction means and the opening / closing means to the other is provided. Since a state where the opening / closing means is displaced to the first position and a state where the regulating means is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means are opened are formed, the workability in extracting the game ball from the transport passage is improved. And the reliable functioning of the regulating means can be achieved.

  That is, when the regulating means is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means is opened to remove the game ball from the transport passage, only one of the regulating means and the opening / closing means needs to be operated, and both need to be operated. Therefore, the number of steps can be reduced and the workability can be improved. Further, after the game ball is extracted from the transport path, if the opening / closing means is closed, the regulating means can be displaced (returned) to the first position by the transmission action of the transmission means. That is, it is possible to avoid closing the opening / closing means and forgetting to return the regulating means to the first position. As a result, the function of the regulating means (regulating that the driven body is reversed (rotated in the second direction) by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport passage) can be reliably exhibited.

  In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, a plurality of the driven members are provided, and the transport path is formed in an S shape along the outer peripheral surface of the plurality of the driven members, and the transport path of the driven member is not formed. The gaming machine Q7, wherein the restricting means is provided so as to act on a portion to be performed.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q6, a plurality of driven members are provided, and the transport path is formed in an S shape along the outer peripheral surface of the plurality of driven members. The restricting means is disposed so as to act on the portion where the transfer passage is not formed, so that the degree of freedom in designing the restricting means can be ensured. That is, when the regulating means is disposed so as to act on the portion where the transfer passage is formed, the arrangement space of the restricting means is limited, and it is necessary to avoid obstructing the transfer of the game ball, This complicates the structure of the regulating means. On the other hand, if the transfer passage is not formed, the arrangement space for the control means can be easily secured, and the transfer of the game balls is not hindered, so that the design flexibility of the control means can be ensured.

<Concept of the Invention Taking the Transporting Device 400 as an Example (Prevention of Forgetting to Return the Control Member)>
In a gaming machine having a displacement member formed to be displaceable and sending a game ball in accordance with the displacement, a first position for permitting displacement of the displacement member in a first direction and restricting displacement in a second direction. Regulating means formed so as to be displaceable between at least a second position allowing the displacement member in the second direction, and a restricting means which is displaced in the first direction when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction. A gaming machine R1 wherein means is displaced from said second position to said first position.

  A plurality of recesses for receiving game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and a plurality of recesses having a rotation axis parallel to the drive body and receiving the game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction. And a plurality of driven members (displacement members) recessed in the driving member, wherein a game ball received between the concave portion of the driving member and the concave portion of the driven member or between the concave portions of the driven members is used as a medium, and There has been known a gaming machine in which game balls are sent by transmitting the rotational force of the driven body to a driven body and the driven body being driven by the rotation of a driving body (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-118869).

  In this case, the applicant allows the driven body (displacement member) to rotate in the first direction and allows the driven body to rotate in at least the second direction and the first position for restricting the rotation in the second direction. The present inventors have conceived of a structure for controlling the rotation direction of the driven body by providing a restricting means capable of being displaced between the second position (unknown at the time of the present application). That is, according to this structure, by displacing the restricting means to the first position, it is possible to restrict the driven body from reversing with the weight of the game ball, while displacing the restricting means to the second position allows the driven body to be displaced. Can be reversed, and the game ball can be extracted.

  However, in the above-described structure, there is a problem that there is a risk that the regulating means may be forgotten to be returned from the second position to the first position. When it is necessary to displace the displacement member in the first direction, if the regulating means is not returned to the first position and is in the second position, the displacement member cannot be displaced in the first direction.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, when the displacement member is displaced in the first direction, the regulating means is displaced from the second position to the first position, so that the regulating means is moved from the second position to the first position. Can be prevented from being forgotten. As a result, when it becomes necessary to displace the displacement member in the first direction, the displacement member can be reliably displaced in the first direction, and the position for restricting the displacement of the displacement member in the second direction can be determined. The restricting means can be reliably displaced to the (second position).

  In the gaming machine R1, a plurality of recesses for receiving game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and a plurality of recesses having a rotation axis parallel to the drive body for receiving game balls are provided in the rotation direction. One or more driven members recessed in the outer peripheral surface along the axis, driving means for applying a driving force to the driving member to rotate the driving member, and a game ball received in the concave portions of the driving member and the driven member A guide wall that forms a transfer path of the drive body, and opening and closing means that is disposed on the guide wall and opens and closes the transfer path. The guide wall is provided between the recess of the driving body and the recess of the driven body or between the driven bodies. With the game ball received between the concave portions as a medium, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body, the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body, and the driven body is the displacement member, The regulating means follows the rotation of the driving body. A first position that permits rotation of the follower in a first direction, which is a direction in which the follower is driven, and restricts rotation of the follower in a second direction that is opposite to the first direction; and When the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body using a game ball as a medium, the restricting means is formed to be displaceable between a second position allowing rotation of the driven body in two directions. R2 being displaced from a second position to said first position.

  Here, in the gaming machine R2, when the game ball is not taken into the recess of the driving body, the driven body may be reversed by the weight of the game ball stored in the transport path.

  In other words, when the driving of the driving body is stopped, the driven body and the driving body are reversed by the weight of the game ball, thereby causing the game ball stored in the transport path to flow backward. On the other hand, when the rotational driving of the driving body is continued, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body by using the last one (the driving body side) of the game balls stored in the transport path as a medium, and When the body is driven to rotate by the driving body (the driven body is rotated forward), the next game ball is not taken into the recess of the driving body from the collection passage, and the driven body is weighted by the weight of the game ball stored in the transport passage. The operation is reversed, and the operation in which the concave portion of the driving body receives the last game ball is repeated, so that an intermittent load acts on the driving body, which causes a decrease in durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R1, the rotation of the driven body in the first direction, which is the direction driven by the rotation of the driving body, is allowed, and is opposite to the first direction. Since the regulating means is formed so as to be displaceable at a first position for regulating the rotation of the driven body in the second direction which is the direction, when the game ball is taken into the concave portion of the driven body from the collection passage, the driving body is driven. The rotational force can be transmitted to the driven body, and the driven body can be driven (rotated in the first direction) by the rotation of the driven body (that is, the game ball can be transported), while the game is played from the collection passage to the concave portion of the driven body. In a state where the ball is not taken in, the rotation of the driven body by the weight of the game ball stored in the transport path (rotation in the second direction) can be restricted by the restricting means.

  As a result, even when the rotation of the driving body is stopped, it is possible to prevent the game balls stored in the transport passage from flowing backward. On the other hand, when the rotational driving of the driving body is continued, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body by using the last one (the driving body side) of the game balls stored in the transport passage as a medium. After the driven member is driven by the rotation of the driving member (the driven member is rotated forward), the driven member is prevented from being reversed by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport path. The sphere does not need to be received by the recess of the driver. Therefore, an intermittent load does not act on the driving body, and the durability can be improved.

  Further, there is provided an opening / closing means disposed on the guide wall for opening / closing the transport passage, and the regulating means is formed so as to be displaceable to at least a second position allowing rotation of the driven body in the second direction. Is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means is opened, whereby the game ball can be extracted from the transport path.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine R2, when the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body using the game ball as a medium, the regulating means is displaced from the second position to the first position. From forgetting to return to the first position. As a result, when the driven body is driven (rotated in the first direction) by using the game ball conveyed with the rotation of the driving body as a medium, the driven body is closed. And the restricting means can be reliably displaced to a position (second position) for restricting rotation of the driven body in the second direction.

  That is, even if the regulating means is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means is opened, and the game ball is extracted from the transport path, only the opening / closing means is closed and the regulating means is forgotten to return to the first position, When the driven body is driven by the rotational driving (rotation in the first direction) of the driving body and the conveyance of the game ball is started, the regulation means is moved from the second position to the first position with the driven body. It can be displaced (returned). As a result, the function of the restricting means (the function of restricting the driven body from being reversed (rotated in the second direction) by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport passage) can be reliably exhibited.

  In the gaming machine R2, the rotation of the driven body in the first direction is allowed in a state where the regulating means is displaced to the second position.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2, the rotation of the driven body in the first direction is allowed when the regulating means is displaced to the second position. In this state, the game balls can be transported.

  For example, after the regulating means is displaced to the second position and the opening / closing means is opened, and the game ball is removed from the transport path, only the opening / closing means is closed, and the regulating means is forgotten to return to the first position. Even in this case, since the driven body is allowed to rotate forward (rotation in the first direction), the driven body is driven to rotate by the rotation of the driving body, and the game ball can be transported.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the regulation means is displaced from the second position to the first position by contacting the driven body driven by the rotation of the driving body. Gaming machine R4.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the regulating means is displaced from the second position to the first position by the contact of the driven body driven by the rotation of the driving body. Therefore, the restricting means can be reliably displaced. For example, when the regulation means is displaced by the contact of a game ball held by the driven body (a game ball conveyed along the conveyance path with the following movement of the driven body), the positional tolerance of the game ball is large ( Since the concave portion is larger than the game ball and the position of the game ball varies greatly), it is difficult to stably displace the restricting means.

  In the gaming machine R2 or R3, the regulating means is displaced from the second position to the first position by contacting a game ball held in a recess of the driven body. Machine R5.

  According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the regulating means is displaced from the second position to the first position by the contact of the game ball held in the recess of the driven body. Therefore, wear of the regulating means can be suppressed. For example, when the driven body abuts on the restricting means, the sliding between the two is continued during the displacement of the restricting means from the second position to the first position, so that abrasion is likely to occur. On the other hand, the game ball held by the driven body (the game ball conveyed along the conveyance path as the driven body is driven) has a large permissible amount in its position (the concave portion is larger than the game ball, Since the game ball can move), the sliding between the regulating means and the game ball can be suppressed, and the wear of the regulating means can be suppressed accordingly.

<Concept of invention exemplifying transport devices 100 to 300 and 500 (setting of operation timing of opening / closing member and regulating member)>
In a gaming machine having a displacement member formed so as to be displaceable and sending a game ball in accordance with the displacement, a guide wall forming a transport path of the game ball sent by the displacement member, and a guide wall provided on the guide wall. An opening / closing means for opening and closing the transport passage, and a regulating means for regulating the displacement of the displacement member, wherein the regulation of the displacement of the displacement member by the regulating means is released after the opening / closing means is opened. A gaming machine S1 characterized by the following.

  A plurality of recesses for receiving game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and a plurality of recesses having a rotation axis parallel to the drive body and receiving the game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction. And a plurality of driven members (displacement members) recessed in the driving member, wherein a game ball received between the concave portion of the driving member and the concave portion of the driven member or between the concave portions of the driven members is used as a medium, and There has been known a gaming machine in which game balls are sent by transmitting the rotational force of the driven body to a driven body and the driven body being driven by the rotation of a driving body (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-118869).

  In this case, the applicant has conceived a structure in which a regulating means for regulating the rotation (displacement) of the driven body (displacement member) and an opening / closing means for opening and closing the transport path of the game ball are provided (unknown at the time of the present application). . According to this structure, by restricting the rotation of the driven body by the restricting means, it is possible to suppress the driven body from reversing due to the weight of the game ball, while opening the opening / closing means and restricting the rotation of the driven body by the restriction means. Is released, the driven body can be reversed, and the game ball can be pulled out from the transport path.

  However, in the above-described structure, there is a problem that the ball may be clogged when the game ball is extracted from the transport path.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, since the regulation of the displacement of the displacement member by the regulation means is released after the opening / closing means is opened, a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the area where the opening / closing means is opened is provided. After being formed, throwing of a game ball to such an area can be tolerated. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of the balls when the game balls are extracted from the transport path.

  In the gaming machine S1, a plurality of recesses for receiving a game ball are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and a plurality of recesses having a rotation axis parallel to the drive body and for receiving the game ball are provided in the rotation direction. One or a plurality of followers recessed in the outer peripheral surface along the axis, and driving means for applying a driving force to the drive and rotating and driving the same, the recess of the drive and the recess of the follower. The rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body by using the game ball received between the recesses or between the recesses of the driven bodies as a medium, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body, and the driven The body is the displacement member, the guide wall forms a transfer path for the game balls received in the recesses of the driving body and the driven body, and the regulating unit is configured to be driven by the rotation of the driving body. Rotation of the follower in the first direction And the rotation of the follower in a second direction opposite to the first direction is formed so as to be restricted, and the regulation of the rotation of the follower in the second direction by the regulation means is controlled by the opening and closing. A gaming machine S2 which is released after the means is released.

  Here, in the gaming machine S2, when the game ball is not taken into the recess of the driving body, the driven body may be reversed by the weight of the game ball stored in the transport path.

  In other words, when the driving of the driving body is stopped, the driven body and the driving body are reversed by the weight of the game ball, thereby causing the game ball stored in the transport path to flow backward. On the other hand, when the rotational driving of the driving body is continued, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body by using the last one (the driving body side) of the game balls stored in the transport path as a medium, and When the body is driven to rotate by the driving body (the driven body is rotated forward), the next game ball is not taken into the recess of the driving body from the collection passage, and the driven body is weighted by the weight of the game ball stored in the transport passage. The operation is reversed, and the operation in which the concave portion of the driving body receives the last game ball is repeated, so that an intermittent load acts on the driving body, which causes a decrease in durability.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S1, the rotation of the driven body in the first direction, which is the direction driven by the rotation of the driving body, is allowed and is opposite to the first direction. In the state where the game ball is taken into the recess of the driving body from the recovery passage, the rotational force of the driving body is applied to the driven body because the regulating means is formed so as to be able to regulate the rotation of the driven body in the second direction which is the direction. In this state, the driven body can be driven (rotated in the first direction) following the rotation of the driving body (that is, the game ball can be transported), but the game ball is not taken into the recess of the driving body from the collection passage. In this configuration, the rotation of the driven body by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport path (rotation in the second direction) can be restricted by the restricting means.

  As a result, even when the rotation of the driving body is stopped, it is possible to prevent the game balls stored in the transport passage from flowing backward. On the other hand, when the rotational driving of the driving body is continued, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body by using the last one (the driving body side) of the game balls stored in the transport passage as a medium. After the driven member is driven by the rotation of the driving member (the driven member is rotated forward), the driven member is prevented from being reversed by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport path. The sphere does not need to be received by the recess of the driver. Therefore, an intermittent load does not act on the driving body, and the durability can be improved.

  Further, since there is provided an opening / closing means disposed on the guide wall to open and close the transport passage, the opening and closing of the opening / closing means and the restriction of the restriction means are released, and the driven body is rotated in the second direction. Game balls can be removed.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine S2, since the regulation of the rotation of the driven body in the second direction by the regulation means is released after the opening / closing means is opened, the game ball can be removed from the area where the opening / closing means is opened. After the dischargeable state is formed, it is possible to allow game balls to be thrown into such an area. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging of the balls when the game balls are extracted from the transport path.

  In the gaming machine S2, there is provided a transmission means for transmitting a displacement of one of the restriction means and the opening / closing means to the other, and the transmission means of the transmission means causes the restriction means to move to a position where the rotation of the driven body is restricted. A state is formed in which the opening and closing means are displaced and the opening / closing means is closed, and a state where the restricting means is displaced to a position where the restriction of rotation of the driven body is released and the opening / closing means is opened. Gaming machine S3.

  According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine S2, there is provided a transmitting means for transmitting one displacement of the restricting means and the opening / closing means to the other. Since the state in which the opening / closing means is displaced to the position where the rotation of the driven body is restricted and the opening / closing means is closed and the state in which the restricting means is displaced to the position where the restriction of rotation of the driven body is released and the opening / closing means are opened are formed, It is possible to achieve both improvement in workability when extracting the game ball from the transport path and reliable functioning of the regulating means.

  In other words, when releasing the regulation of the regulation means and opening the opening / closing means and extracting the game ball from the transport passage, only one of the regulation means and the opening / closing means needs to be operated, and it is not necessary to operate both of them. Therefore, the number of steps can be reduced and the workability can be improved. In addition, after the game ball is extracted from the transport path, if the opening / closing means is closed, the regulating means is displaced (returned) to the regulating position (the position regulating the rotation (reverse rotation) of the driven body) by the transmitting action of the transmitting means. Can be done. That is, it is possible to avoid closing the opening / closing means and forgetting to return the regulating means to the regulating position. As a result, the function of the regulating means (regulating that the driven body is reversed (rotated in the second direction) by the weight of the game balls stored in the transport passage) can be reliably exhibited.

  In the gaming machine S3, the transmission means includes an operator operated by an operator and a guide passage for guiding an operation direction of the operator.

  According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine S3, the transmission means includes the operator operated by the worker and the guide path for guiding the operation direction of the operator, so that the operation of the operator is performed. It is possible to make the state unique by guiding the state to the passage. As a result, it is possible to reliably release the restriction by the restricting means for the rotation of the driven body in the second direction after the opening and closing means is opened.

  In the gaming machine S4, the guide passage includes a first passage and a second passage connected to the first passage, and the operation of the operation element guided by the first passage is transmitted to the opening / closing means. And the operation of the operating element guided to the second passage is not transmitted to the regulating means, and is not transmitted to the opening / closing means, and is transmitted to the regulating means. Gaming machine S5.

  According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine S4, the guide passage includes a first passage and a second passage connected to the first passage, and the operating element guided by the first passage. Is transmitted to the opening / closing means and is not transmitted to the regulating means, and the operation of the operating element guided to the second passage is not transmitted to the opening / closing means and transmitted to the regulating means. In addition, while simplifying the structure, it is possible to reliably form the order in which the regulation by the regulation means for the rotation of the driven body in the second direction is released after the opening / closing means is opened.

  The fact that the operation of the operator guided to the second passage is not transmitted to the opening / closing means does not mean that the opening / closing means is not displaced in accordance with the operation of the operator. While the child is guided in the second passage, it means that the arrangement of the opening / closing means is maintained at a position where at least game balls can be discharged from the transport passage (a position where a game ball discharge state can be formed). .

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R5, and S1 to S5, the gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, "a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information is provided, which is used for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. And a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the determined identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins and medals are typical examples of the game medium.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R5, S1 to S5, the gaming machine Z2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, as a basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine, an operation handle is provided, and a ball is fired to a predetermined game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is provided at an operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. A requirement for winning (or passing through the operating port) is that identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined mode to enable the ball to win, and a value corresponding to the winning number is obtained. A value (including not only a prize ball but also data written on a magnetic card) is given.

  A1 to A8, B1 to B3, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E4, F1 to F6, G1 to G6, H1 to H7, I1 to I6, J1 to J5, K1 to K7, L1 to L3 In any one of M1 to M5, N1 to N5, O1 to O5, P1 to P7, Q1 to Q7, R1 to R5, S1 to S5, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by the above-mentioned. Above all, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: "variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string comprising a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) The change of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display of the game, and many balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10,8010,17010 Pachinko machines (game machines)
12 inner frame (accepting means)
13 game board (game means)
14 Front frame (closing means)
14d2 auxiliary convex part (part of concave part)
17 Upper plate (part of receiving plate)
50 Lower plate (part of receiving plate)
68 Return ball prevention member (one-way obstruction means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
145, 9145, 10145 Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
159 Opening / closing control section (blockage control section)
173 Long cover member (part of solution)
178 Inverted cup part (part of arrangement means, first means, intrusion control part, part of solution means)
180 Binding movable member (part of arrangement means, second means, support means)
300, 2300, 3300, 4300, 5300, 6300, 7300
Operating devices 310, 2310, 3310, 4310 Tilt device (tilting means, operating means, first means)
311 gL, 3311 gL Left detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
311gR Right detection piece (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
312a1 Operation surface (part of operation means)
314 Shaft (shaft bar)
315 Torsion spring (biasing means)
324L Left detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
324R Right detection sensor (part of continuous hit determination means, part of end detection means, part of position difference detection means, part of movement direction determination means)
330 Upper frame member (part of storage means)
331 opening (first opening)
332 Upper bearing (part of support)
340, 5340, 6340 Driving device (driving means, first driving means)
341 Body member (part of friction member)
341f LED device (light emitting means)
343 Transmission shaft rod (part of transmission means)
343a cylindrical member (part of transmission means)
343b Transmission gear (part of drive means, part of release means)
343b2 Clutch part (engaging teeth)
343c Movable clutch (part of transmission means, part of release means)
343c2 Clutch part (engaging teeth)
343d coil spring (biasing means)
344, 6344, 7344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of termination means, part of release load means)
344c Engagement rib (part of release load means)
344d connecting pin (projecting part)
345 Arm member (part of transmission means, part of terminal means)
346, 2346, 7346 Release member (part of maintenance means, part of first means, part of friction member)
347, 7347 Rotating claw member (part of maintenance means, part of first means)
352 Voice coil motor (second driving means, repulsion means)
410 Upper frame member (support fastening means)
451 speaker (acoustic means)
453 speaker connection line (passing member)
460 Front side assembly (1st means)
464 Wiring passage recess (part of opening)
467 Passage forming rib (bending means, projecting portion)
480 Rear assembly (second means)
481Ha auxiliary convex part (part of opening)
484 Wiring pressing protrusion (part of opening)
487 Passage forming rib (bending means, protruding part)
500 Right panel unit (production means)
500L left heavy plate unit (1st means)
500R right heavy plate unit (second means)
510 Support plate (connected means)
512a LED (light irradiation means)
531b, 531c Support hole (part of the connection part)
532 Inclined rib (contact means)
540 light guide member (third means, light guide means)
551b Projecting part (part of connecting part)
600 Board support device (state changing means)
620 Claw member before rotation (proximity means)
640 Claw member after rotation (contact means)
801 Supporting base material (base member)
802 petals (part of the second displacement means)
804 Central motor (drive means)
830 Rotating plate (first displacement means)
851 Central shaft member (shaft means)
880 loose fitting device (third displacement means)
2062c Foul ball passage (Foul ball passage)
2347 Rotating plate member (part of maintenance means)
2348 Slide claw member (part of maintenance means)
2888 Regulator (resistance means)
4321d Upper detection sensor (detection sensor)
4321e Lower detection sensor (detection sensor)
5320 Lower frame member (part of support frame)
5344 Disc cam (part of transmission means, part of terminal means, part of release load means, cam member)
5400 Vibration device (vibration means, repulsion means)
5411 Drive motor (low water resistance part)
5412 Weight member (vibration part, part of repulsion means)
5420 Flexible member (part of support means and repulsion means)
5430 Housing member (part of receiving means, repulsion means, part of support frame)
6344L1, 6344R1 Disc member (first rotating member)
6344L2, 6344R2 Ring member (second rotating member)
7344L1, 7344R1 Disc member (part of transmission means, part of termination means)
7344L3, 7344R3 Engaging member (release load means)
8320 Lower frame member (part of accommodation means)
8326a First through hole (part of second opening)
8326b Second through hole (part of second opening)
8326c Third through hole (part of second opening)
9142a Right slope (part of payout ball discharge section)
9150, 10150 Sheet metal members (one-way obstruction means, load means)
9145b, 10145c Notch (part of recessed part)
10145d Rolling plate (regulator)
E1 notification device (detection means)
P1a Deformed part (deformed part)
S52 Termination area (occupied area)
SL2 S-shaped path (bent part)
V13, V14 Gap 16a Supply passage 43a Recovery passage 50 Launching device 100 Transport device 113 Game ball discharge passage (extraction passage)
113a Side wall (guide wall)
121, 221 Driving body 121b1 Concave parts 122, 222 First follower (follower, displacement member)
122b1, 222b1 Recesses 123, 223 Second follower (follower, displacement member)
123b1, 123c1, 223b1, 223c1
Recesses 124, 224 Third follower (follower, displacement member)
124b1, 224b1 Concave portions 125, 225 Fourth follower (follower, displacement member)
125b1, 125c1, 225b1, 225c1
Recess 130 drive motor (drive means)
131, 231 First guide wall (guide wall)
132 2nd guide wall (guide wall)
133 3rd guide wall (guide wall)
134 4th guide wall (guide wall)
140,440,540 regulating member (regulating means)
150, 250, 350 opening / closing member (opening / closing means)
160 transmission means 161 switching operation part (operator)
170 Switching passage (guide passage)
171a, 171b Vertical passage (first passage)
172a, 172b Front and rear passages (second passages)
C0 to C5 Rotation axes R0 to R4 Arrows (first direction)
R6 to R9 arrows (second direction)
S1 to S19 game ball W1, W2 transport passage

Claims (3)

A supply passage serving as a passage for supplying game balls, a firing device for firing the game balls supplied from the supply passage, a collection passage serving as a passage for collecting the game balls fired from the firing device, and a collection passage for the game balls And a transfer device for transferring game balls from the supply passage to the supply passage, wherein the transfer device has a plurality of recesses for receiving the game balls formed in the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction, and the collection passage. A driving body in which the game balls taken in from are supplied to the recesses, and a plurality of recesses having a rotation axis parallel to the driving bodies and receiving the game balls are provided on the outer peripheral surface along the rotation direction. A plurality of driven members; a driving unit that applies a driving force to the driving member to rotate the driving member; and a guide wall that forms a transport path for a game ball received in the recess of the driving member and the driven member. The recess of the driving body and the Using a game ball received between the recess of the moving body or between the recesses of the driven body as a medium, the rotational force of the driving body is transmitted to the driven body, and the driven body is driven by the rotation of the driving body. Gaming machines
A gaming machine, comprising: opening / closing means disposed on the guide wall for opening and closing a transfer passage of the transfer device.   The opening / closing means is formed at a position on the guide wall on which a game ball taken in from the recovery passage is conveyed toward the driving body and on the opposite side across the driving body. The gaming machine according to claim 1. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the opening / closing means is formed at a position intersecting a rotation locus of a concave portion of the driving body when viewed in a rotation axis direction of the driving body.

Images